City of Gastonia Fire Department "Nationally Accredited Fire Service Agency: 2000 - 2021" 260 N. Myrtle School Rd., Gastonia, NC 28052 Office: (704)-866-6806 Fax: (704) 866-6052

The attached Administrative and Operational Guidelines manual reflect the Department’s policies and operating procedures. The previous year’s document provided a new format to improve the ease of use and to assure the validity of the manual.

The primary area of change in the 2020 manual updated the Hydrant Maintenance Program, Fire Inspector Job Description, Exchanges in Tour of Duty and the Light Duty Policy.

I would like to thank the policy committee, Chaired by Deputy Chief Mark Rutherford, Battalion Chief Matt Young, Captain Mike McKay, Captain Mike St Thomas, Captain Craig Huffstetler and Captain Ashton Brown for reviewing our policies and compiling the annual update.

The basic premise of our policies is to be professional, respectful, and ethical. I encourage you to work toward a safe and rewarding career with the Gastonia Fire Department.

Phil Welch Fire Chief

All policies are reviewed annually in November

Gastonia Fire Department

Administrative and Operational Guidelines

0100 Organization & Administration

01.10.01 Procedure for the Establishment of Written Dept. Guidelines 01.10.02 FD Organization Chart 01.10.03 City of Gastonia Travel Policy (City Net) 01.10.04 Travel, Inside City 01.20.01 Responding Outside City Limits 01.50.01 Mission Statement

0200 Strategic Planning

02.10 Strategic Plan on “S” Drive

0300 Fire Department Accreditation

03.10 Accreditation Manual on “S” Drive

0400 Human Resources

04.10.01 Substance Abuse Policy 04.20.01 Firefighter Hiring Procedures 04.20.03 Appointments & Probationary Periods 04.20.05 Resignation of Employment 04.30.01 Promotional Guidelines 04.30.03 Temporary Promotions 04.40.01 Disciplinary Guidelines 04.40.02 Rules of Conduct & Expected Behavior 04.40.03 AWOL – Absence Without Official Leave 04.40.05 Use of Official Position 04.40.06 Time Limits – Employee Disciplinary Actions 04.40.07 Guidelines for Appeal of Disciplinary Action (City Code) . 04.40.08 Employee Grievance Procedure 04.50.01 Confidentiality of Records 04.50.02 Sexual Harassment Policy 04.50.03 Policy on Racial Jokes and/or Slurs 04.50.04 Policy for Accommodation of Pregnant 04.60.01 Tuition Reimbursement Program 04.60.02 Bilingual Policy 04.70.01 Awards Policies & Procedures 04.80.01 Office Assistant III 04.80.02 Administrative Assistant 04.80.03 Public Fire & Life Safety Educator 04.80.04 Firefighter

04.80.05 Fire Engineer 04.80.06 Fire Inspector 04.80.07 Fire Captain 04.80.08 Assistant Fire Marshal 04.80.09 Fire Marshal 04.80.10 Battalion Chief 04.80.11 Battalion Chief of Training 04.80.13 Deputy Fire Chief of Operations 04.80.14 Assistant Chief 04.80.15 Fire Chief 04.90.01 Procurement Cards

0500 Benefits & Pensions

05.10.01 Retirement Benefits 05.30.01 Relief Fund & Supplementary Pension Fund Committees

0600 Employee Wellness & Fitness

06.10.01 Physical Examination Policy 06.10.02 Physical Fitness 06.20.01 Firefighter Line of Duty Deaths/Serious Injuries 06.20.02 Family Notification Procedures 06.20.03 Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Procedure 06.20.03a Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Report Form (city net) 06.20.04 Critical Incident Stress Debriefing 06.20.05 Form 19 Workman’s Comp (city net) 06.20.06 Honor Guard 06.30.01 Respiratory Protection & SCBA Training Program

0700 Attendance & Leave

07.10.01 Employee Use & Earning of Leave 07.10.02 Donation of Leave (city policy) 07.20.01 Payroll/Pay Cycle Hours Worked 07.20.02 Employee Leave for Shift Personnel 07.20.03 Exchanges in Tours of Duty 07.20.04 Shift Change Responsibilities 07.20.05 Overtime Requirements (Operations) 07.30.01 Family & Medical Leave Act of 1993 07.30.02 Light or Modified Duty 07.30.03 Policy for Accommodation of Pregnant Employees 07.40.01 Recall of Off-Duty Personnel 07.40.02 City’s Inclement Weather Policy 07.50.02 AWOL – Absence Without Official Leave

0800 Uniforms & Protective Clothing

08.10.01 Department Uniform Regulations 08.10.02 Personal Grooming &Hygiene 08.10.03 Tattoos and Brands 08.20.01 Use & Care Of Protective Clothing

0900 Life Safety & Code Enforcement

09.10.01 Fire Investigation Task Force 09.10.02 Notification & Response of Fire Investigator(s) 09.10.03 Securing the Emergency Scene for Fire Investigation 09.20.01 Company Officers / Fire Code Violations 09.20.03 Blasting Permit Requirements 09.20.04 Halloween Haunted House Requirements 09.20.06 Underground Storage Tank Permitting Requirements 09.20.07 Above Ground Storage Tank Permitting Requirements 09.20.08 Fireworks Permitting Requirements 09.20.09 Application for Permit 09.20.10 Function Requiring Special Approval Form 09.20.11 Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance Certification Form 09.20.12 Inspection Procedure 09.20.13 UST Fuel Oil Closure or Change In Service 09.20.14 UST Closure or Change In Service 09.20.16 Fire Inspection Schedule 09.20.17 Levels of Certifications for Fire Inspectors 09.20.18 Fire Inspection Quality Assurance Program 09.30.01 Smoke Detectors 09.30.02 Public Fire Education & Tours

1000 Info. Reporting & Management

10.10.01 Fire & Emergency Incident Reporting 10.20.01 Release of Non-Emergency Information to the News Media 10.20.02 Preparation of Emergency Press Releases 10.20.02a Press Release Form 10.20.03 Apparatus Usage at Public Events

1100 Station Duties

11.10.01 Station Duties & Maintenance 11.10.02 Washing Fire Department & Personal Vehicles 11.20.01 Securing Fire Stations 11.20.02 Emergency Fire & Evacuation Plan 11.30.01 Public Use of Fire Station Community & Training Rooms 11.30.02 Station Log Book 11.30.03 United States Code Flag Display 11.30.04 Fire Station Libraries 11.30.06 Vehicles Used to Obtain Meals 11.30.07 Station Down Time 11.30.08 Safe Place

2100 Disaster Planning

21.10.01 GFD Local Emergency Operations Plan

2200 Emergency Communication & Radio Procedures

22.10.04 Radio Communications Procedures 22.10.05 Radio Service & Repair 22.20.01 Laptop Internet Access

2300 EMS 23.10.01 EMS Response 23.10.03 Patient Confidentiality 23.20.01 Emergency Medical & Hazmat Certifications

2400 Emergency Scene Management Operations

24.10.01 Incident Command System Guideline “S” Drive) 24.10.02 Fire Ground Safety Guideline 24.10.03 Passport Accountability System 24.20.01 Structure Fire Guideline 24.20.02 Response to Unattended Structures 24.20.03 Response to High Rise Buildings 24.30.01 Apparatus Placement for Emergencies 24.30.02 Turn Out & Response to Emergency Incidents 24.40.01 Response to Motor Vehicle Accidents 24.40.02 Mail Box Collection Fires 24.40.03 Weather Related Responses 24.40.04 Emergency Operations at Wild land Fires 24.40.05 Response to Fire Alarms 24.50.01 Fire Incident Size Up 24.50.02 Fire ground Search & Rescue 24.50.03 Fire Fighting Strategy & Tactics 24.50.04 Fire Stream Management 24.60.01 Fire Ground Support Activities 24.60.02 Additional Resource Management 24.60.03 Property Conservation / Salvage

2500 Special Operations

25.10.01 Special Operations Division 25.20.01 Search / Missing Person 25.20.02 Rope Rescue 25.20.03 Trench Rescue 25.20.04 Structural Collapse 25.20.05 Confined Space Rescue 25.20.06 Water Rescue 25.20.07 Carbon Monoxide Response 25.30.01 Bomb Threats & Explosive Devices 25.30.02 Hazardous Device Incidents (Multi Agencies) 25.30.03 Weapons of Mass Destruction 25.40.01 Hazardous Material Guideline 25.50.01 RIT Guideline

2600 Pre-Planning

26.10.01 Operational Pre-Planning Program 26.20.01 Post Incident Analysis 26.20.01a Post Incident Analysis Form 26.30.01 Leave Use During Inclement Weather

2700 Apparatus Operations

27.10.01 Department Driving Regulations 27.10.02 Ride Along Program 27.10.03 Drivers License Requirement 27.10.05 Relief Driver Class 27.20.01 Pump Operations 27.20.02 Equipment Accountability at Shift Change 27.20.03 Fire Department Standard Steamer Connections 27.30.01 Inspection & Maintenance of SCBA 27.30.02 Care & Maintenance of FD Engines & Equipment

2800 Evolutions & Training

28.10.01 Standardized Company Practical Evolutions 28.10.02 Training in Acquired Structures

2900 Fire Hydrant Checking Procedures

29.10.03 Fire Hydrant Preventive Maintenance Program 29.10.04 Use of Fire Hydrant for Private Purposes

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 01.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Procedure for the Establishment of Written Department Guidelines

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this Guideline is to create a system for the establishment, maintenance, and revision of written administrative and operational procedures within the Gastonia Fire Department. All written correspondence relating to the administration and operation of this organization will be categorized into one of three broad categories as noted below.

II. PROCEDURE

A. General Administrative Guidelines (GAG’s)

1. All materials and directives necessary for planning, organizing, directing, coordinating, and controlling of the department and its personnel will be classified as Administrative Guidelines. In general, Administrative Guidelines involve the routine management of the department and deal with non-emergency functions. The numbering system for Administrative Guidelines will involve classification into the appropriate administrative area as noted in the index of contents, and then assignment of a specific number accordingly.

a. Example: General Administrative Guideline # 01.10.01 (Title)

B. General Operational Guidelines (GOG’s)

1. All materials and directives associated with emergency management and operations will be classified as Operational Guidelines. These include all functions involving fire, rescue, EMS, and emergency management operations, as well as the preparation for and follow up of emergency incidents. The numbering system for Operational Guidelines will follow the same format as that used for the establishment of Administrative Guidelines; i.e. classification into the appropriate administrative area as noted in the index of contents, and then assignment of a specific number accordingly.

a. Example: General Operational Guideline # 26.10.01 Operational Pre-Planning Program

C. General Informational Guidelines (GIG’s)

1. All materials intended to be of an informative nature will be classified as Informational Guidelines. Informational Guidelines are not intended to become or create department policy, and thus may be discarded after six (6) months. The numbering system for Informational Guidelines will be the current calendar year, followed by the number of the GIG of issue for that particular year.

a. Example: General Informational Guideline # 2003-2 (Title)

III. ACCESS AND REVISION OF WRITTEN MATERIALS

A. All Administrative and Operational Guidelines will be maintained in the Fire Department’s computerized ‘shared’ database in a ‘read-only’ format. Members needing to access information may do so at any time by utilizing in-station computer systems. An index of contents in several formats is also provided so that members may research topics by subject area, category, or guideline number.

B. When additional guidelines are added to the system or when existing guidelines are revised, the additions and/or changes will be made by the department’s data management administrator. All members will then be notified through internal department management systems, as well as through the database e-mail system, that changes have been made to guideline(s) as appropriate.

C. All guidelines and policies will be reviewed annually in November.

Back to Table Of Contents

Organization Chart

Gastonia Fire Department 2015

City Manager

Ass't. City Manager Director of HR and Administrative Services

Fire Chief

Deputy Chief Assistant Chief

Operations Division Training & Education Division Special Operations Dept Finanical Budget Emergency Management Life Safety Division Battalion Chief Division Administrator Fire Marshal

Hazardous Materials Technical Rescue Battalion Chief (2) Career Development Battalion Chief Battalion Chief Management Information Fire Inspections A - Shift Systems Haz-Mat Response Team Technical Rescue Response

Battalion Chief (2) In-Service Training Logistics Code Enforcement B - Shift Haz-Mat Training Technical Rescue Training

Battalion Chief (2) Apparatus Maintenance Station Maintenance Fire & Lifesafety C - Shift Fire Investigation Education Battalion Chief

30 Captains 30 Driver/Engineers 64 Firefighters

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

GAG 01.10.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 29, 2013

Rescinds: February 6, 2007

Subject: Travel Expenses Inside The City

I. PURPOSE

To establish criteria for travel expense re-imbursement inside the City

II. PROCEDURE

A. Personnel shall fill out a re-imbursement form for each month. B. Form shall be initialed by immediate supervisor, validating that the information is correct C. Form shall be turned in at the end of every month. D. Forms turned in over 60 days after the event will not be valid E. Validated forms will be re-imbursed by the Administrative Chief monthly F. Mileage from station to station will be calculated by the following chart:

Sta. 1 Sta. 2 Sta. 3 Sta. 4 Sta. 5 Sta. 6 Sta. 7 Sta. 8 Sta. 1 0.0 4.3 3.7 5.7 2.9 6.2 8.0 3.1 Sta. 2 4.3 0.0 3.1 5.7 4.1 2.8 7.2 6.5 Sta. 3 3.7 3.1 0.0 3.8 3.2 2.7 4.1 6.5 Sta. 4 5.7 5.7 3.8 0.0 5.1 3.8 1.4 8.9 Sta. 5 2.9 4.1 3.2 5.1 0.0 4.2 5.0 4.4 Sta. 6 6.2 2.8 2.7 3.8 4.2 0.0 4.9 8.4 Sta. 7 8.0 7.2 4.1 1.4 5.0 4.9 0.0 9.2 Sta. 8 3.1 6.5 6.5 8.9 4.4 8.4 9.2 0.0

G. Mileage will be paid at .565 per mile (Jan 13)

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 01.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Responding Outside City Limits

I. PURPOSE

A. This Guideline has been established to inform GFD personnel as to the Policy for responding to incidents outside the city limits. These responses may be requests for mutual aid or responses to incidents in which the location is uncertain.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Companies are to promptly respond to any incident to which they are dispatched.

B. Companies are not to turn back after being dispatched unless so requested by a Battalion Chief.

C. When a company arrives to an incident in another department's jurisdiction before other department's apparatus arrives, the company shall follow standard operating procedures to take necessary steps to deal with the emergency. Upon the arrival of the appropriate jurisdictional authority, the company officer will turn over control of the incident and offer continued assistance if necessary.

D. Company officers are responsible for the safety of personnel in their charge. Company officers have the authority to refuse to carryout requests that would seem to unnecessarily jeopardize the safety of company personnel.

E. If more than one company is dispatched to an incident outside of city limits, or a problem arises at the incident, a Battalion Chief should be dispatched to the scene.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 01.50 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: March 7, 2005

Rescinds:

Subject: Mission Statement

The mission of the Gastonia Fire Department is to save lives and property and proudly serve the citizens and visitors of the City of Gastonia

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Firefighter Hiring Procedures

1. Person(s) seeking employment with the Gastonia Fire Department must submit a completed application to the Employment Division along with copies of documents (a-e) and the original of (f) before 5:00 PM on the closing date for applications in order to proceed to Step 2. If you do not have copies of your documents submitted by 5:00 PM on the closing date, you will be given until 5:00 PM on the tenth (10th) working day after the closing date to submit the documents that you are lacking. Keep in mind that you must submit your completed application form to the Employment Division by 5:00 PM on the closing date for acceptance of applications. a. Birth Certificate b. High School Diploma or GED c. Valid Driver's License d. Social Security Card e. DD Form 214 - (Military Discharge) If Applicable f. Completed Medical Approval Form

2. Written Evaluation: Applicants must have completed all three modules of the Career Readiness Certificate program and obtained a silver or better rating, plus a Level 3 or above workplace observation 3. Physical Ability Evaluation 4. Background Check

a. Driving Record b. Criminal Record c. Reference Check

5. Oral Interview 6. Conditional Offer of Employment 7. Polygraph Examination 8. Physical Examination (Includes Vision Acuity/Color Test) 9. Drug Test 10. Review Complete Application 12. Notification of Employment 13. Orientation/Hire Date

THE CITY OF GASTONIA IS AN EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYER AND DOES NOT DISCRIMINATE ON THE BASIS OF RACE, COLOR, RELIGION, SEX, NATIONAL ORIGIN, AGE OR DISABILITY. EMPLOYMENT APPLICATIONS WILL REMAIN VALID FOR APPROXIMATELY ONE YEAR, OR UNTIL THE ELIGIBILITY/HIRING LIST IS REPLACED BY A SUBSEQUENT TESTING PROCESS.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Appointments and Probationary Periods

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a format to serve as basis for appointment and to inform members of specific probationary periods.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Applicants shall meet the standards established by the position classification plan and such other reasonable minimum standards as to character, aptitude, ability to meet the public and physical condition as may be established. Probationary periods shall serve as training and evaluation periods.

1. Recruitment a. The Fire Chief shall be responsible for assisting the Human Resource Director in recruiting such employees as is authorized for the fire department by classification. b. Candidates shall meet standards and undergo prescribed procedures for selection of applicants when applying for initial employment. c. Promotional appointments shall be made in accordance with prescribed procedures established by the Fire Chief and set forth in accordance with regulations governing the Fire Department Promotional System.

2. Probationary Period a. All employees shall serve a probationary period of twelve (12) months following initial employment before appointment to permanent position. All employees appointed to or promoted to permanent positions shall serve a probationary period of six (6) months. b. Employee(s) serving a probationary period following initial employment in a permanent position shall receive all benefits provided in accordance with the City of Gastonia Personnel Ordinance with the following exceptions or as otherwise provided: (1). Probationary employees may accumulate but not take annual leave unless the denial of such leave will create an unusual hardship. Annual leave may be granted to such employees only with the City Manager's approval, upon recommendation of the supervising department head. Probationary employees will be able to take educational leave to obtain required certifications.

(2). Probationary employees shall not be entitled to utilize the procedures for appeal of disciplinary action set forth in Personnel Policies under the General Conditions of Employment Section.

(3). The new probationary employee shall not be able to have anyone stand by for duty in their place, until after probationary period ends. Exceptions may be granted by the department head only for unusual circumstances.

B. Employees serving a probationary period following a promotion shall continue to receive all benefits provided in accordance with the Personnel Ordinance.

C. A new employee may be dismissed at any time during the probationary period if the Chief of the Fire Department determines that the employee is incapable of doing their assigned duties satisfactorily.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.20.05 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 30, 2013

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Resignation of Employment

I. PURPOSE

A. To inform members of departmental policy concerning resignation from the Gastonia Fire Department

II. POLICY

A. Notice of resignation shall be made to the Chief of the Fire Department.

B. It is desirable for a member to submit their notice of resignation at least two weeks prior to the date of separation.

C. Upon submission of his/her resignation, an employee shall be paid vacation leave accumulated to the date of separation provided they have completed six (6) or more months of continuous service. In no case will more than a two (2) year accumulation of vacation be converted into termination pay.

D. Upon resignation, a member's final check will not be released until all departmental property, protective clothing, uniforms, etc. that he or she was issued is returned to the Administrative section.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: April 12, 2018

Rescinds: March 03, 2015

Subject: Promotional Guidelines

I. PURPOSE

To establish a guideline for the selection and promotion of personnel to positions of increased responsibility and rank within the City of Gastonia Fire Department.

II. DISCUSSION

Due to the important nature of supervision and management within the organization structure, the following procedures have been established with the intent of: 1. Developing a systematic approach to the selection and promotion of qualified personnel within the organization. 2. Promoting personnel to supervisory or management level positions to increase the efficiency of the Fire Department.

III. FIRE CHIEF

Selection of the Fire Chief shall be the responsibility of the City Manager in conjunction with the recommendation of Deputy City Manager - Public Services.

IV. DEPUTY CHIEF

All candidates must hold a Bachelor’s Degree in a fire related field or a Bachelor’s Degree in any field with an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field. (i.e. All fire disciplines, public safety, emergency management response, terrorism, emergency medical response) and three continuous years of supervisory experience as a Battalion Chief. Additional education and experience in business and public administration, certification at the Hazardous Materials Technician Level and National Fire Academy Executive Fire Officer (EFO) certification prior to the announced closing date are preferable.

A. All candidates must submit a detailed resume to the Fire Chief prior to the announced closing date.

B. The Deputy Chief position is appointed; however, at the discretion of the Fire Chief, a testing procedure may be given. C. Selection for the position of Deputy Chief shall be the responsibility of the Fire Chief.

V. ASSISTANT CHIEF

A. All candidates must hold a Bachelor’s Degree in a fire related field or a Bachelor’s Degree in any field with an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field. (i.e. All fire disciplines, public safety, emergency management response, terrorism, emergency medical response) and three continuous years of supervisory experience as a Battalion Chief. Additional education and experience in business and public administration, certification at the Hazardous Materials Technician Level and National Fire Academy Executive Fire Officer (EFO) certification prior to the announced closing date are preferable.

B. All candidates must submit a detailed resume to the Fire Chief prior to the announced closing date.

C. The Assistant Chief position is appointed; however, at the discretion of the Fire Chief, a testing procedure may be given.

VI. BATTALION CHIEF and TRAINING CHIEF

A. All candidates seeking promotion to Battalion Chief must meet the following requirements in order to test for the position:

 A minimum of an Associate’s Degree in Fire Related Field Candidates who are promoted that do not have a Bachelor’s Degree will have two years from the promotion date to obtain a degree. Any candidate promoted who fails to meet the education requirements will face disciplinary action up to demotion.  N.C. Fire Officer II Certification  Three (3) consecutive years as a Captain with the City of Gastonia Fire Department  Level II or higher fire service instructor certification

B. The promotional process for the position of Battalion Chief will consist of three parts as noted below:

1. Assessment Center – 100 points 2. Written examination – 100 points 3. Personal record & development – 50 points

C. The personal record & development portion of the selection process will be divided into three parts, as noted below.

1. Training – 12.5 points 2. Education – 12.5 points 3. Seniority – 25 points

D. Points are earned in the above noted categories as follows:

1. Training: Maximum of 12.5 points. Points are earned for current certifications/completion of training programs as noted below. .

a. Completion of 1 or 2 week NFA class (es): 2.5 points per class b. Certification as NC Arson Investigator: 2.5 points c. Certification as Technical Rescuer (TR): 2.5 points d. Certification in Level II Instructor Specialization: 2.5 points per certification e. Certification as Level III or IV Instructor: 2.5 points per level f. Certification as Fire & Life Safety Educator: 2.5 points per level (I, II, or III) g. Certification as Haz Mat Level II Responder: 2.5 points

2. Education: Maximum of 12.5 points, earned as noted below:

a. 2nd Associates Degree 5 Points, both associates’ degrees must be fire related (ie. All fire disciplines, public safety, emergency management response, terrorism, emergency medical response…) or b. Bachelor’s degree: 10 points or, c. Master’s degree or above: 12.5 points

3. Seniority: 1.25 points for every one year of service up to a maximum of 25 points (20 years). Documentation of education, certification, and time in grade requirements must be valid and turned in to the Training Division prior to a cutoff date that will be announced prior to each promotional process.

E. Selection of evaluators for the Assessment Center shall be the responsibility of the Human Resources Department of the City of Gastonia.

F. The written portion of the examination process will be graded and posted as soon as possible by the Human Resources Department. The Human Resources Department shall be responsible for securing all tests and tabulating all scores for posting.

G. After the written portion has been completed, the highest scoring 8 candidates will advance to the assessment center. Once all candidates have completed the assessment center, their personal record and development points will be added to determine their final score.

H. A potential candidate for promotion who has received a disciplinary suspension and/or two or more disciplinary actions may participate in the promotion process, but may not be considered for promotion until twelve months following the most recent disciplinary action.

I. All candidates for promotion must have scored a minimum rating of at least “Meets Expectations” on his/her most recent performance evaluation.

J. Falsification of any required material or document (educational degree, certification, etc.) is grounds for disqualification and/or disciplinary action.

K. The promotion list will remain valid for a period of two (2) years from the posting or until exhausted, whichever comes first.

L. The Fire Chief may promote from the top three candidates on the list.

M. Any member who is eligible for and refuses a promotion will be eliminated from the established promotional list.

VIII. CAPTAIN

All candidates seeking promotions to the position of Fire Captain must meet the following requirements in order to test for the position:

1.  Possess a minimum of an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field  N.C. Fire Officer I Certification  N.C. Firefighter Certification  N.C. EMT certification

 N.C. Driver/Operator Certification (1002)  EVD (Emergency Vehicle Driver)  Pumps  Aerial  Gastonia Fire Department qualified backup driver  Fire Instructor I or higher  Five (5) consecutive years of employment within the Operations Division with the City of Gastonia Fire Department

A. The promotional process for the position of Fire Captain will be structured and weighted as follows:

1. Written examination: - 100 Points 2. Assessment Center: - 100 Points 3. Personal record & development: - 50 Points

B. The personal record & development portion of the selection process will be divided into three parts, as noted below:

1. Training – 12.5 points 2. Education – 12.5 points 3. Seniority – 25 points

C. Points are earned in the above categories as noted below:

1. Training: Maximum of 12.5 points. Points are earned for current certifications/completion of training programs as noted below. Copies of said completion and/or certifications must be on file with the Fire Department Training Division. a. Completion of 1 or 2 week NFA class(es): 2.5 points per class b. Certification as Haz Mat Level II Responder: 2.5 points c. Certification as NC Arson Investigator: 2.5 points d. Certification as Technical Rescuer (TR): 2.5 points e. Certification as NC Level II or above Fire, Rescue, or EMT Instructor: 2.5 points per level (II, III, or IV) f. Certification in Level II Instructor Specialization: 2.5 points per certification g. Certification as Fire & Life Safety Educator: 2.5 points per level (I, II, or III)

2. Seniority: 1.25 points for every one-year of service for a maximum of 25 points (20 years).

3. Education: Maximum of 12.5 points, earned as noted below:

2nd Associates Degree 5 Points, both associates’ degrees must be fire related (ie. All fire disciplines, public safety, emergency management response, terrorism, emergency medical response…) or a. Bachelor’s degree: 10 points or, b. Master’s degree or above: 12.5 points

Documentation of education, certification, and time in grade requirements must be valid and turned in to the Assistant Chief prior to a cutoff date that will be announced prior to each promotional process.

D. Selection of evaluators for the Assessment Center will be the responsibility of the Human Resources Department.

E. Written, standardized examinations will be graded by the Human Resources Department and scores will be posted as soon as possible. The Human Resources Department shall be responsible for securing all tests and tabulating all results for posting.

F. A potential candidate for promotion who has received a disciplinary suspension and/or two or more disciplinary actions may participate in the promotion process, but may not be considered for promotion until twelve months following the most recent disciplinary action.

G. After the written portion has been completed, the highest scoring 15 candidates will advance to the assessment center. Once all candidates have completed the assessment center, their personal record and development points will be added to determine their final score.

H. All candidates for promotion must have scored a minimum rating of “Meets Expectations” on his/her most recent performance evaluation.

I. Falsification of any required material or document (educational degree, certifications, etc.) is grounds for disqualification and/or disciplinary action.

J. The promotion list will remain valid for a period of two (2) years from the date of posting or until exhausted, whichever comes first.

K. The Fire Chief may promote from the top three candidates on the list. .

L. Any member who is eligible for and refuses a promotion will be eliminated from the established list.

IX. DRIVER/ENGINEER

All candidates seeking promotions to the position of Driver/Engineer must meet the following requirements in order to test for the position:

 Four years in grade as a firefighter, with two of those being a relief driver  N.C. Firefighter Certification  N.C. EMT certification  N.C. Driver/Operator Certification (1002)  EVD (Emergency Vehicle Driver)  Pumps  Aerial A. The promotional process for the position of Fire Engineer will be structured and weighted as follows: 1. Written examination: - 100 Points 2. Assessment Center: - 100 Points 3. Seniority: 1.25 points for every-year of service for a maximum of 25 points (20 years) B. The written exam will be developed from a designated list of books that will be available in the station libraries.

C. The Assessment Center will consist of four parts: 1. Pumping practical station-25 points 2. Structured interview-25 points 3. Equipment Familiarization-25 points 4. Basic fire scene scenario-25 points

D. Written, standardized examinations will be graded by the Human Resources Department and scores will be posted as soon as possible. The Human Resources Department shall be responsible for securing all tests and tabulating all results for posting.

E. A potential candidate for promotion who has received a disciplinary suspension and/or two or more disciplinary actions may participate in the promotion process, but may not be considered for promotion until twelve months following the most recent disciplinary action.

F. After the written portion has been completed, the highest scoring 15 candidates will advance to the assessment center. Once all candidates have completed the assessment center, their personal record and development points will be added to determine their final score.

G. All candidates for promotion must have scored a minimum rating of “meet expectations” on his/her most recent performance evaluation.

H. Falsification of any required material or document (educational degree, certifications, etc.) is grounds for disqualification and/or disciplinary action.

I. The promotion list will remain valid for a period of two (2) years from the date of posting or until exhausted, whichever comes first. J. The Fire Chief may promote from the top three candidates on the list. . K. Any member who is eligible for and refuses a promotion will be eliminated from the established list.

X. FIRE MARSHAL

A. All candidates must hold a minimum of a Bachelor’s Degree and must possess an appropriate and valid “Standard Certificate” issued by the North Carolina Code Officials Qualification Board for Level III code enforcement within Gastonia's jurisdiction. Comprehensive knowledge in Fire Department methods, codes, and ordinances, and ten (10) continuous years of experience in fire prevention. Experience in fire suppression desired. Education and experience in arson investigation are preferred.

B. All candidates must submit a detailed resume to the Fire Chief prior to the announced closing date.

C. A testing procedure may be given at the discretion of the Fire Chief.

D. Selection to the position(s) shall be the responsibility of the Fire Chief.

XI. ASSISTANT FIRE MARSHAL

A. Appointment to the position of Assistant Fire Marshal is determined upon successful completion of one of the two sets of criteria listed below:

1.  Fire Inspector with a minimum of an Associate’s Degree  Possess an appropriate and valid “Standard Certificate” issued by the North Carolina Code Officials Qualification Board for Level III code enforcement  Three (3) consecutive years in grade as a Fire Inspector immediately preceding the announced closing for resumes. 2.

 Fire Inspector with a High School Diploma or equivalent  Possess an appropriate and valid “Standard Certificate” issued by the North Carolina Code Officials Qualification Board for Level III code enforcement  Three (3) consecutive years in grade as a Fire Inspector immediately preceding the announced closing for resumes.

B. All candidates for the position of Assistant Fire Marshal must submit a detailed resume to the Fire Chief prior to the announced closing date.

C. The Assistant Fire Marshal position is appointed. However, at the discretion of the Fire Chief, a testing procedure may be given.

D. Selection to the position of Assistant Fire Marshal shall be the responsibility of the Fire Chief with input/recommendation from the Fire Marshal.

XII. PROMOTIONAL CEREMONY

A. The following steps will be followed once the Fire Chief has determined that an employee will be promoted to a higher ranking position within our department.

1. Notify the employee by our department’s Chain of Command that he/she will be promoted to the position.

2. Their current Battalion Chief will plan a promotion ceremony for the employee on the day of their last scheduled shift before their promotion.

3. The ceremony will take place at the Battalion Headquarters Station (Station 1 or Station 4) that the employee is assigned at the current time.

4. The time for the promotion ceremony will be 6:00 pm on that day to give family members the opportunity to attend the event.

5. The Fire Chief or the Deputy Chief will present the employee with his or her new badges and equipment. During this event, the employee could have a family member or designee pin their badge on.

6. It will be the responsibility of the Battalion/Shift that the employee is currently assigned to provide refreshments (cake, drinks, etc.).

7. The department PIO (Public Information Officer) will provide a press release and picture to our local newspaper.

8. The department Administration Chief will be responsible for ensuring that all badges, insignias, nameplates and equipment will be present for the promotional ceremony.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.30.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 1, 2016

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Temporary Promotions

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this procedure is to establish a policy for the staffing of ‘acting’ positions and temporary promotions. The procedure also provides for the payment of compensation to those employees who receive temporary promotions.

II. DISCUSSION

A. An acting position is defined as a member who is filling in for a position of higher responsibility and authority for a time period of 30 days or less. This assignment is normally used to fill in for supervisors off on routine vacation, sick leave, or training/education leave.

1. Acting positions will be filled from those members on the current eligibility list for promotion to said position. For example, a member on the current eligibility list for Captain may fill in an acting capacity when a Captain on that shift/division is on vacation. Acting positions will normally be filled by those persons currently assigned to the respective shift or work unit. When possible, the member on that shift or work unit with the highest standing on the eligibility list should receive first priority when staffing an acting position. Battalion Chiefs shall have the authority to modify this procedure if necessary to meet the overall needs of the Fire Department.

2. Members filling ‘acting’ positions will not normally be moved across shifts to accomplish same.

B. A temporary promotion is defined as a non-permanent promotion made for a time period of greater than 30 days. This assignment is used to fill a vacated position due to illness, retirement, death or special assignment.

1. Using the highest-ranking member off the current eligibility list for promotion to that position will fill a temporary promotion

2. All temporary promotions shall be made by the Deputy Chief and approved by the Fire Chief.

3. When a temporary assignment is completed, the temporarily promoted employee will revert back to their previous rank. It will be the responsibility of the temporarily promoted employee to check their pay check to see that their pay has been reduced to the previous level before the temporary promotion. Any excess payments that the employee receives after the temporary promotion is due to be discontinued will be deducted from a future paycheck.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.40.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 30, 2013

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Disciplinary Guidelines

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a disciplinary procedure thereby insuring fair and equitable treatment of departmental personnel who deviate from established departmental policy.

II. POLICY

A. The Following Fire Department Disciplinary Guidelines will become effective on the effective date above. All City of Gastonia Policies and Ordinances shall supercede any potential conflicting City and Fire Department policies and procedures.

B. Violations of General Rules of Conduct and behavior, General Orders and Procedures or Personnel Policies are subject matter for disciplinary action. The type and severity of disciplinary actions will depend upon the seriousness of the violation and circumstances surrounding the incident. General Rules, Orders, Procedures and Personnel Policies will be placed into three (3) categories that reflect their relative importance and the appropriate disciplinary action. However, these categories are not intended to be all inclusive. These Categories are as follows: 1. Category - A Offenses: (Suspension without pay/or Suspension without pay and Dismissal) a. Major violations of Rules and Regulations that are subject to punitive discipline and repeated offenses of minor violations, shall be considered as a Category - A offense. (1) Category - A1. A first violation {or an accumulative A & C offense) will result in a mandatory suspension of one (1) 10.75 hour day for shift employees and one (1) eight hour day for 8-5 employees. (2) Category - A2. The second (2nd) Category A offense {or an accumulative A & B offense), in a twelve month period, or a more serious violation than a Category A1, shall result in a mandatory suspension of four (4) consecutive 10.75 hour increments for shift employees and four (4) eight hour days for 8-5 employees. (3) Category - A3. A third (3rd) Category A offense in a twelve month period, or a more serious violation than a Category A2, is an intolerable offense and shall result in a mandatory suspension of five (5) twenty-four (24) hour days for shift employees and fifteen (15) consecutive days for 8-5 employees with a recommendation for dismissal by the Fire Chief.

An alleged violation of Category A, in which there is probable cause may result in immediate suspension of the employee without pay until an investigation can be conducted.

2. Category - B Offenses: (Written Reprimand) a. Violations of a serious nature that normally by themselves may not warrant a suspension. (1) Category - B1. A violation of a Category - B offense will result in a minimum disciplinary action of a written reprimand but may be serious enough to result in a suspension and/or dismissal. (2) Category - B2. The second (2nd) Category - B offense {or an accumulative B & C offense) in a twelve (12) month period shall become a Category - A1 offense. (3) Category - B3. Third (3rd) Category - B offense {or accumulative B & C offenses), in a twelve (12) month period, shall become a Category - A2 offense. (4) Category - B4. Fourth (4th) Category - B offense {or accumulative B & C offenses), in a twelve (12) month period shall become a Category -A3 offense.

3. Category - C Offenses: (Counseling) a. Minor Violations that can be corrected at the supervision level by corrective discipline or by requiring additional training. (1) Category - C1. The first (1st) violation offense will result in a minimum disciplinary action of Counseling but may be serious enough to result in a written reprimand or suspension. (2) Category - C2. The second (2nd) Category - C offense in a six (6) month period shall become a Category - B1 offense. (3) Category - C3. Third (3rd) Category - C offense in a twelve (12) month period shall become a Category - A1 offense. (4) Category - C4. Fourth (4th) Category - C offense in a twelve (12) month period shall become a Category - A2 offense. (5) Category - C5. Fifth (5th) Category - C offense in a twelve (12) month period shall become a Category - A3 offense.

Note: All disciplinary actions are for a 12 month period. Any prior disciplinary actions that have not extended beyond this 12 months period of time shall be accumulative with the current disciplinary action. Therefore, these prior disciplinary actions (actions in effect less than 12 months) will be included in the 12 month period of the current disciplinary action.

III. ADMINISTRATION OF DISCIPLINE

A. Supervising officers will be responsible for discipline of subordinates under their supervision. Supervisors will continuously examine areas under their jurisdiction and on their own initiative investigate specific instances when they become aware of discrepancies or when they find erroneous practices involving areas of their personnel. B. Any supervisory officer, on their own initiative and without orders for a superior, will, when they have information that a deviation from policy had occurred:

1. Make a preliminary investigation and document such deviation on the Allegation of Employee Misconduct form and then report the results to his/her supervisor. 2. The alleged violation shall be reported, by the supervisor, through the chain of command to the Fire Chief. 3. Appropriate advice will be given to the supervising officers and the investigation will continue, or necessary charges will be prepared alleging the offense which their

Note: The first Category C offense in a twelve (12) month period (Counseling) shall be documented on the Fire Department Record of Counseling Form and kept with the Allegation of Employee Misconduct form by the employees Supervisors and Deputy Chief of Operations for documentation. This report will not be placed in the employee's personnel file.

4. If a formal investigation continues, the supervisor shall create a series of questions that relate specifically to the alleged charges. The list of questions shall be reviewed through the chain of command and approved by the Fire Chief.

5. The supervising officers shall conduct a confidential administrative investigation in private with the employee. The interview shall be recorded. The Gastonia Fire Department Employee Administrative Rights and Responsibilities Forms shall be read to the employee and the employee shall be asked to sign the form. The prepared questions concerning the alleged violation will be read to the employee and the employee will answer each question verbally. Once all questions are answered verbally, the employee shall answer each question in writing. The employee shall be given an opportunity for comments at the end of the interview. a. All Category A and most Category B violations will require this interview. b. No employee will be permitted to record the interview. If the employee appeals the disciplinary action, his/her attorney may request a copy of the recording. c. The employee may not be represented by counsel during the administrative investigation or when the Fire Chief administers the disciplinary action. However, if the employee appeals the disciplinary action, he/she may be represented by counsel of their choice.}

6. The results of the administrative investigation will be reviewed through the chain of command. The employee may be asked to take a polygraph. If so, the list of questions that were answered and signed by the employee will be used by the administrator of the polygraph. Refusal to take a polygraph may result in a recommendation for dismissal.

7. Appropriate advice will be given to the supervising officers by Fire and City administrators.

8. The immediate supervisor will then make a recommendation as to disciplinary action, basing his recommendations on: a. Fitness and ability of that person investigated to continue their present position and rank. b. Appropriate disciplinary action which should be taken against the employee.

9. A supervisor may recommend alternative disciplinary action if they feel that the disciplinary category called for is inappropriate. Such recommendations shall be made in writing to the Fire Chief.

IV. REPORTS - FORMAL DISCIPLINARY ACTION (Placed in employees Personnel File)

A. All Written Reprimands and Suspensions will require the following actions: 1. The immediate supervisor of the employee being disciplined shall prepare a City of Gastonia Notice of Disciplinary Action report for regular employees or probationary employees. Recorded on the disciplinary report shall be a short explanation of the circumstances, a list of the (City/Fire) Regulations/Polices deviated from, and a description of the type and extent of discipline to be administered. The immediate supervisor shall attach to the "Notice of Disciplinary Action Report", a detailed Formal Summary of the circumstances and a description of the type and extent of disciplinary action recommended on the “City of Gastonia Notice of Disciplinary Action” report.

2. Supervisors in the direct chain of command will review the report. If they concur with the recommended action, they will forward the report to the Chief of the Fire Department. If any Supervisor in the direct chain of command does not concur with the

recommendation of the supervising officers they shall submit their recommendation, along with the immediate supervisor’s recommendation, to the Chief of the Fire Department. The Chief may then affirm the recommended action or they may dispose of the case on their own authority by a written statement.

3. If the Fire Chief affirms the recommended disciplinary action, the disciplinary action will be administered (if agreeable with all parties involved) at the lowest supervisor level possible and later signed by the Chief and placed in the employees personnel file. If not agreeable with all parties involved, the Chief will meet with the employee and the supervising officers to administer the disciplinary action.

4. A copy of the following reports will be given to the employee (with the exception of the Personnel Action Request) and a copy sent to the Human Resources Department: a. "Personnel Action Request" b. If administered, a copy of the Administrative Investigation questions completed and signed by the employee. c. City of Gastonia "Notice of Disciplinary Action Report". (regular employee or probationary employee) d. The "Detailed Formal Summary/Recommendation" completed by the immediate supervisor. The Allegation of Employee Misconduct form is used only with the preliminary investigation and recommendations for Counseling and is not to be submitted with formal disciplinary actions.) e. A copy of all City and Fire Department General Orders, Rules, Procedures and Personnel Policies that the employee deviated from. (Remember to list these on the “City of Gastonia Notice of Disciplinary Action Report”). f. A copy of the City of Gastonia's Personnel Policy Manual Section III Employee Relations, paragraph 4, items i and j Appeal of Disciplinary Action.

5. Any employee or officer of the Fire Department who is the subject of disciplinary proceedings may Appeal the disciplinary action and have their case reviewed in accordance with the City of Gastonia Personnel Appeals Procedure. The employee will have three (3) eight hour business work days to appeal the disciplinary action. If the employee does not appeal the disciplinary action by the end of the third (3rd) day according to the City of Gastonia's Personnel Policy Manual Section III Employee Relations, paragraph 4, items i and j Appeal of Disciplinary Action, the disciplinary action will become effective on the date and time listed on the "Notice of Disciplinary Action" form and the above reports shall become a permanent part of the employees personnel files.

6. All confirmed offenses shall be included permanently in the employee's performance appraisal.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.40.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Rules of Conduct and Expected Behavior

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish rules of conduct and expected behavior for all employees of the Gastonia Fire Department.

II. DISCUSSION

A. In order to ensure that the department operates effectively, efficiently, safely, and in a manner that reflects high standards of integrity, it is necessary to establish rules of conduct for all employees.

III. POLICY

A. All employees of the Gastonia Fire Department are responsible for obeying the General Rules, General Orders, and Personnel Policies set forth in Section I, II and III below. The three (3) sections' listed by their relative importance, will correspond to the levels of disciplinary actions (for Categories A, B, and C) as listed in the Disciplinary Guidelines GAG 04.40.01 A substantiated violation of any rule listed in Section I, II and III shall be grounds for disciplinary action determined by the Disciplinary Guidelines Policy GAG 04.40.01. All General Rules, Orders and Personnel Polices not listed in sections I, II, and III below, will have the category of disciplinary action listed within the written policy.

1. Section I (Category - A Offenses) a. Involvement in illegal or criminal activities while on or off duty is strictly prohibited. b. A member, who uses, possesses, purchases, sells or is under the influence of intoxicants during working hours or while in city uniform or in a city vehicle or on city premises shall be subject to immediate discipline, up to and including dismissal. (This is considered a Category A3 violation) c. A member who uses possesses, purchases, or sells a controlled substance on or off duty shall be subject to immediate dismissal. (This is considered a Category A3 violation) d. All material information provided in the application for employment with the Department shall be true and complete to the best of knowledge and belief of the individual involved. e. Expressions of prejudice or harassment concerning race, religion, national origin, sex, or other personal characteristics are prohibited. f. Involvement in a sexual act while on duty or on property owned or being used by consent of the City of Gastonia is prohibited. (This is considered a Category A3 violation) g. All traffic violations charged against an employee shall be reported to his/her shift or division supervisor.

h. While on duty, no employee assigned to a fire company shall be absent from his/her company without permission of the company officer. i. Providing false information on any City records with malicious intent, for personal gain, or to indicate a level of service that has not in fact been provided is prohibited. j. All reasonable and prudent orders of supervisors or others acting in supervisory capacity shall be promptly obeyed. k. Gross Insubordination is an intolerable offense. This is a Category A3 violation. l. Members are required to work overtime when called by a Fire Department officer requesting them to do so. Members required to work overtime shall receive either compensatory time off in an amount of overtime worked or be paid for overtime work at a rate equal to one and one- half times their regular hourly rate m. A member shall refrain from directly or indirectly soliciting the influence of any person or persons to affect the transfer, promotion, demotion or discipline of any member of the Department. n. A member shall serve the City with discretion and honesty. o. Fighting on city premises or while on the job is a Category A3 violation. p. Stealing from fellow employees or the general public is an intolerable offense and shall be considered a Category A3 violation. q. Employees shall conduct themselves at all times, both on and off duty, in a manner, which is in keeping with the highest standards of the fire service. An employee shall not engage in conduct unbecoming an employee of the Fire Department. Conduct unbecoming an employee of the Fire Department shall include that which brings the Department into disrepute, reflects unfavorably upon an employee or member of the Department, or impairs the operation or efficiency of the Department or any of its personnel. r. Possession of firearms on city property: (City Personnel Policy Manual Section IV paragraph 7) 7. FIREARMS No City employee, with the exception of sworn regular or special police officers may carry or possess any firearm or firearm type device during working hours or in City uniform or in City vehicles or on City premises. The City will not prohibit employees who may possess a firearm lawfully from storing a lawfully possessed firearm in a locked personally owned vehicle within the trunk, glove compartment or other enclosed compartment within the vehicle while the vehicle is on City premises or other parking area owned by, leased by or otherwise controlled by the City. At no time will the employee remove the firearm from the vehicle while on City premises. s. Failure to follow written instructions. t. A member shall leave the station only with the permission of their commanding officer, or person in authority, and only after person in authority has entered time and leave in station log book. Returning to duty shall be entered in station logbook in same manner. u. Excessive absenteeism of more than 7.5% [Ten (10) or more occurrences per year for shift employees and nineteen (19) or more occurrences per year for General employees] is a Category A offense. v. Serious violations of the city's safety policy (including more serious avoidable accidents) is a Category A offense. w. A supervisor who becomes aware of a violation or an alleged violation in this category must immediately notify the immediate supervisor and take reasonable action, possibly including suspension, until an investigation can be conducted. Failure of any supervisor to take appropriate action is a violation of Category A. x. Disciplinary action may be taken against an employee for any reason deemed sufficient by the Fire Department. [City Personnel Policy Manual, Section III paragraph 4 item b] Reason for this disciplinary action is to be included in detailed summary.

2. Section II (Category - B Offenses) a. Gossip, rumors, or falsehoods that have a negative impact on an employee's character or performance shall not be originated or repeated.

b. Prescription or over-the-counter drugs shall not be used when they may affect performance while on duty. c. A telephone shall be maintained and operative at all times. d. Any change of address or telephone number shall be reported directly to the shift or division supervisor and the Administrative Secretary within one week of the change. e. All members of the public and other employees shall be treated with respect, courtesy, and consideration. f. Employees shall maintain confidentiality of all personnel matters, criminal investigation and specific information on hazardous materials permits pursuant to all Local, State, and Federal laws. g. No employee shall purchase goods, materials or supplies or otherwise obligate the Fire Department or the City without proper authority. h. A member shall refrain from gambling while in a department building or while on duty. i. A member shall refrain from politically campaigning for any candidate seeking Office while on duty or while in their duty uniform. j. All rules, regulations, procedures, policies, and written or verbal instructions of the City and the Department (including attendance policies) shall be adhered to. k. Violation of the city's safety policy for minor avoidable accidents is considered a Category B1 violation. l. On-Duty personnel, assigned to an emergency vehicle, are responsible for responding with that vehicle at all times. m. Excessive absenteeism of 5.1% - 7.5% [7-9 occurrences per year for shift employees and 13- 18 occurrences per year for General employees] is a Category B offense. n. Any employee who has knowledge of a violation of the Rules of Conduct shall immediately report the violation to his/her supervisor and shall testify to that knowledge upon request. If the supervisor is involved in the misconduct, then the employee shall report it to the next supervisor in the chain of command, etc. o. Acts including omissions, which injure or negatively impact the operation of the Department, are prohibited. p. A member shall be subject to call at any time and shall be prepared to act immediately upon such notice that their services are required while on duty. They shall also be subject to call for special assignments or duties. q. A member shall refrain from furnishing information relative to the business or affairs of the department to persons not connected therewith except as authorized by City of Gastonia Personnel Policies. r. All reports of violations shall be thoroughly investigated and acted on by the supervisor. Failure by a supervisor to investigate and act on an alleged Category B or C violation is itself a Category B offense. s. Any violation of the Gastonia Fire Departments AWOL policy (GAG 04.40.03) will be considered a Category B violation. t. Disciplinary action may be taken against an employee for any reason deemed sufficient by the Fire Department. [City Personnel Policy Manual, Section III paragraph 4 item b] Reason for this disciplinary action is to be included in detailed summary.

3. Section III (Category - C Offenses) a. All safety policies and procedures shall be followed. b. While on duty, an employee shall not engage in horseplay. c. Supplies and equipment shall not be wasted or abused. d. All reports, records, and files, including Station Log Books, shall be properly maintained. e. Members shall avoid interference with one another in the performance of their respective duties and shall assist one another when necessary. f. A member shall remain awake and alert while on watch or duty, except during those periods designated for sleeping. The designated period for sleeping shall be 1800-0800 hrs. Lunch

shall be for a one (1) hour period, normally, from 1200 to 1300 hours except when Fire Department duties and responsibilities require otherwise. g. Each member is solely responsible for the supplies and equipment which they are issued. They shall properly care for each item. These items should be readily available to present for inspection when asked to do so. h. A member shall remain knowledgeable of streets and geography of city limits. i. A member shall promptly obey the legitimate orders of superior officers and other members acting in a supervisory capacity. j. A member shall report injuries regardless of the nature. k. A member shall attend all scheduled educational classes or functions. l. Members shall not disturb/adjust any fire department radio in a way that will hinder communications with Dispatch or other fire personnel. m. Violation of the city's smoking policy. n. A member shall address their superior officers by their proper titles; officers may make exceptions to this at informal times. o. A member shall report to their superior officer any violation of the General Rules of Conduct and Behavior, General Orders, or Procedures which they have witnessed or of which they have knowledge. They shall testify concerning such violation if summoned before any investigative body. p. A member shall follow proper chain of command procedures when seeking assistance with problems, grievance solutions, time, etc. Only in cases of emergency where the immediate supervisor cannot be reached, may the chain be broken and the next ranking supervisor be contacted. q. A member may engage in other gainful occupations so long as such outside work does not conflict with or impair in any form the employee's performance of city-related duties. r. Station Officers shall be knowledgeable and be able to locate Policy and Procedures found in the computer. s. A member shall use issued equipment, (coat, helmet, boots, gloves, uniforms, etc.) only for Fire Department activities. t. Only Fire department personnel shall use private quarters (bedrooms and television area). u. A member shall be responsible for knowing about procedures, changes, etc., pertaining to the job and department through memorandums, bulletins or additions to the rules and regulations manual that will be provided. v. No persons other than members of the department will be allowed to sleep within any fire station without consent of the Fire Chief. w. No personal work shall be performed, except by permission of the Deputy Chief of Operations and/or Battalion Chief, prior to 1800 hours, excluding weekends and Holidays and then only after station duties have been performed. x. A member shall not leave personal belongings (lawn mowers, bicycles, automobiles, motors, etc.) in fire stations over two shift working days without consent of the Deputy Chief of Operations and/or Battalion Chief. Any material in violation of this will be discarded with the loss to the owner. y. No member shall use departmental telephones or make long distance calls except for the purpose of conducting departmental business. Personal calls should be limited to 10 (ten) minutes. z. When any company is taken out of service or out of the station, the officer or person of responsibility shall first obtain permission from the Battalion Chief and then notify the dispatcher. aa. A member shall use Fire Department equipment and supplies for departmental work only. Such equipment and supplies shall not be used on personal property. bb. When a member is detailed as an officer he shall be given the authority of the higher Office and his orders shall be obeyed with the same promptness and efficiency given a regularly appointed officer. cc. All members who operate fire department vehicles must have their validated driver's license in their possession at all times. An exception will be during designated sleep time when

employees answer emergency calls wearing their bunker pants. Licenses left at home or expired shall constitute a violation of this policy. dd. The member in charge of each fire station shall see that the grounds in and around the fire station are checked each evening to see that apparatus, equipment, etc. are in order. ee. Visitors shall be received courteously and shown proper attention; however, they shall not be permitted to habitually loaf within or about any fire station. Visitors will not be permitted within the bedroom or television area, except by the authority of the member in charge of the stations. A member may briefly sit in personal vehicles around the station with other persons but loitering in these vehicles will not be permitted. Each member shall be responsible for the conduct of each of his guest. ff. A member shall not provoke, harass or intimidate a fellow employee. gg. A member shall arrive at work, or leave after work, in proper uniform. A member with off duty employment may change from uniform to civilian clothes to leave the station only after being relieved from duty or after regular scheduled shift time is concluded. If the employee leaves in uniform, then they must be in proper uniform, which does not mean T-Shirts. hh. During duty hours, a member shall not leave the fire station without being in proper uniform. ii. Members shall complete all daily duty assignments. This includes duty assignments for fire stations, all equipment, and vehicle checks and maintenance. jj. Members shall park personal vehicles in spaces designated for parking. This includes employees picking up pay checks or just stopping by the station. kk. A new employee may not drive fire apparatus (engine) while on probation. After probation, the member may drive engine with a minimum of a class B permit, except on emergency calls, with licensed personnel in the cab with the driver. ll. The new probationary employee shall not be able to have anyone to stand duty in his place, until after probationary period ends. The department head only for unusual circumstances may grant exceptions. mm. Unless proper authority excuses employees, they are required to participate in the daily fire department physical fitness program. Failure to comply with this policy is a Category C offense. nn. All members shall use protective equipment (coats, boots, helmet, gloves, eye protection devices, etc.) to utilize maximum protection. oo. Disciplinary action may be taken against an employee for any reason deemed sufficient by the Fire Department. [City Personnel Policy Manual, Section III paragraph 4 item b] Reason for this disciplinary action is to be included in detailed summary.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.40.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 2, 2017

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: AWOL – Absence Without Official Leave

I. PURPOSE

A. In order to provide adequate fire protection services to the citizens of Gastonia, it is essential that staffing levels be maintained as scheduled and strictly controlled. This policy is designed to take corrective action against an employee who does not report for duty as scheduled.

II. POLICY

A. An employee shall give advance notice for unanticipated absences to their immediate supervisor before beginning of the assigned shift at 0800 and 2000 when on Kelly Day. Failure to do so will result in the employee being considered AWOL unless the employee provides an acceptable reason for the absence to the supervisor.

B. Employees marked AWOL for reporting after the start of the work shift will not be permitted to work on that work shift or use approved leave until approval is given by the Battalion Chief.

C. At the supervisor's discretion, an employee may be required to present a physician's written notice as to the employee's reason for absence. This does not mean that doctor - patient confidentiality is to be violated.

D. If the employee's immediate supervisor determines that the employee's excuse for his/her absence is not valid; the supervisor shall record the incident as an AWOL offense and note the offense in the employee's performance appraisal. An Allegation of Employee Misconduct form citing this offense and disciplinary action recommended shall be processed to the Deputy Chief through the chain of command.

E. An employee who leaves work without the expressed consent of the supervisor will be considered AWOL.

F. Disciplinary action 1. The first AWOL offense will be a written reprimand and the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments (Category B1). Example: An employee does not report for duty at 0800 they will be considered AWOL. Once the employee contacts their immediate supervisor and receives permission to report for duty they will be charged LWOP until they arrive at their assigned location. If the employee arrives at 0825 they will be charged LWOP for 30 minutes.

2. The second AWOL offense within twelve months of the original offense will result in a suspension of 10.75 hours and the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments (Category A1).

3. The third AWOL offense within twelve months of the original offense will result in a suspension of 2 10.75 hour shifts and the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments (Category A2).

4. The fourth AWOL offense within 12 months of the original offense will result in a suspension of 5 10.75 hour shifts, the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments and a recommendation for dismissal by the Fire Chief (Category A3).

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.40.05 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Use of Official Position

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning the use of official position badge, uniform or credentials.

II. POLICY

A. A member shall use their official position, badge, uniform or credentials to gain admission to public events, assemblies or other activities only in cases of official business.

B. A member shall not use or attempt to use their official position, badge, uniform or credentials for personal or financial gain.

C. A member shall make purchases or incur liability for the department only when authorized to do so.

D. Where special privileges are extended to firefighters by private management, the use of Fire Department identification is not considered a violation of this order.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.40.06 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Time Limits – Employee Disciplinary Actions

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish Department policy as pertaining to allowable time limits for taking disciplinary action.

II. DISCUSSION

A. In the past, some confusion has resulted concerning the length of time a disciplinary action remains "in effect" and/or in an employee's personnel file. None of us wants to penalize an employee indefinitely for a mistake. However, we do have record keeping requirements to obey as well as a need for consistency in procedures.

III. PROCEDURE

A. The City has adopted the Municipal Records Retention and Disposition Schedule which requires that these records not be destroyed. For this reason, it is important that you notify all supervisory personnel that copies of disciplinary action forms will be retained indefinitely in the affected employee's personnel file. The employee should also be made aware of this. However, if an employee has a completely clear disciplinary record (no written record in the personnel file) for a period of one (1) year, then prior disciplinary actions should not be considered when current discipline is required. In other words, after a year's clear record, the slate is wiped clean for the employee as far as past actions (unless previously cleared by a year's non-activity) are considered to be active when considering progressive disciplinary action.

Also please remember to attach a narrative (or put it on the disciplinary action form if there's enough space) describing the details, dates, etc. leading to the proposed disciplinary action. City rules and regulations should be referenced but an explanation is also necessary.

We all want to ensure consistent and fair application of the City's policy of progressive discipline. We also want to reward good discipline free work records. This procedure should help us meet these objectives and comply with records retention requirements simultaneously.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.40.08 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Employee Grievance Procedure

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish an order for handling grievances within the Gastonia Fire Department.

II. DISCUSSION

A. A grievance is a cause of distress felt to afford reason for complaint resistance. For our purpose a grievance shall be defined as a complaint or dispute concerning the interpretation and/or application of the provisions of the rules or of established Departmental Procedures.

III. PROCEDURES

A. The employee with a grievance shall present the matter orally or in writing (Grievance Form) to their immediate supervisor within thirty days of the time the employee learns of its occurrence, with the objective of resolving the matter informally. The supervisor should and is encouraged to consult with any employee or officer deemed necessary to reach a correct, impartial, and equitable determination and shall give the employee an answer as soon as possible but within three calendar days. The grievance and answer shall be reported to the supervisor's immediate supervisor.

B. If the grievance is not resolved during step (A), the employee or group of employees may file the grievance in writing within ten calendar days with the Fire Chief, who shall hear the grievance within three calendar working days and render a decision in writing within a maximum of three calendar working days after the hearing.

C. If the grievance is not resolved to the satisfaction of the employee or group of employees, they may request within ten calendar working days that the written grievance presented in (B) be referred to the City Manager. The manager shall arrange a time to hear the grievance and shall respond in writing within fifteen days. The manager may delegate all or part of his responsibilities under this subdivision to the human resource director and may adopt the human resource director's recommendations. In any case, the manager's decision shall be final.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.50.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Confidentiality of Records

I. REVIEW AND MAINTENANCE OF PERSONNEL FILES

A. The City’s Human Resources Department has the responsibility for maintaining personnel files for all City employees. The HR Department is required to comply with the State Privacy Act by: (1) safeguarding confidential information and (2) providing that which is public information when requested.

1. Public information consists of your name, age, date of employment, current position, current salary, date of and most recent salary change, date of most recent personnel change in your department. All other information in your file is confidential. You, your representative, those with supervisory authority or anyone designated by court order may review your entire file.

2. These same provisions apply to former employees. If an employee objects to material in their personnel file they may file a statement to be attached to such materials. The employee may seek the removal of such material in accordance with established grievance procedures.

Back to Table Of Contents

DATE: May 10, 1993 Up Dated January 8, 2003

TO: ALL CITY EMPLOYEES

FROM: Edward C. Munn – City Manager

SUBJECT: SEXUAL HARASSMENT – RESTATEMENT OF CITY POLICY

Sexual harassment on the job is a violation of federal law and will not be tolerated. Any employee responsible for this type activity shall be subject to appropriate disciplinary action. Any employee who feels he/she is the subject of such activity should report it immediately to management.

The City’s grievance procedure may be utilized or you may report it directly to the City Manager, Director of Human Resources or City Attorney. If you have any questions concerning this policy or procedure, please contact your supervisor or the Human Resources Department.

Edward C. Munn City Manager

SOME POINTS TO REMEMBER ON SEXUAL HARASSMENT

 Sexual harassment is unwelcome verbal or physical sexual conduct that is a term or condition of employment. There are two types of sexual harassment, namely, “quid pro quo” and “environmental”.

 The quid pro quo type of harassment occurs when submission to verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature, unwelcome sexual advances, or requests for sexual favors is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or condition of an individual’s employment. Example: A supervisor states that an applicant will be hired for a position if the applicant will go out with the supervisor on a date.

 The environmental type of harassment occurs when the unwelcome conduct unreasonably interferes with an individual’s job performance or creates an intimidating, hostile or offensive working environment, even if it does not lead to any tangible or economic job consequences.

 A man as well as a woman may be the victim of harassment and a woman as well as a man may be the harasser. The victim does not have to be of the opposite sex from the harasser.

EVERY EMPLOYEE HAS THE RIGHT TO WORK IN AN ENVIRONMENT FREE FROM DISCRIMINATORY INTIMIDATION, RIDICULE AND INSULT.

Back to Table Of Contents

DATE: May 10, 1993 Up Dated January 8, 2003

TO: All City Employees

THRU: Assistant City Managers and Department Heads

FROM: Edward C. Munn - City Manager

SUBJECT: POLICY STATEMENT - RACIAL SLURS/ETHNIC JOKES/ DEROGATORY RACIAL COMMENTS

The use of racial slurs, ethnic jokes, or derogatory racial comments directed towards any race or ethnic group is inconsistent with the City’s goal of racial harmony. The use of such terms can create racial tension and is not conducive to a good work environment.

We would like to make sure that every employee understands that the City of Gastonia will not tolerate any such comments and will handle all documented cases in accordance with the City’s disciplinary policy up to and including termination.

Any incident of the above nature should be reported to either your Supervisor, Department Head, Assistant City Manager, City Manager or any member of the Human Resources Department.

If you have any questions regarding this policy, please direct them to Dave Henderson (Ext. 6621) or Mickey Sadler (Ext. 6861).

Edward C. Munn City Manager

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.50.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Policy for Accommodation of Pregnant Employees

I. PREGNANCY POLICY

A. It will be the policy of this department to make reasonable accommodation to expectant firefighters by helping to ensure the health and safety of the mother and her child.

II. DISCUSSION

A. "Certain chemical and physical agents have been recognized as having detrimental effects on human reproduction'. The list includes, but is-not limited to these agents: heat, heavy metal (e.g. lead and cadmium), glycol ethers, pesticides, organic solvents, styrene and vinyl chloride. Maternal exposure after conception may result in the death of the fetus or structural and functional abnormalities in the newborn. PCB's are still found in some areas. These also have been shown to cause birth defects. Many of the above mentioned agents may be structurally part of a building or may be housed in a building which is on fire and the pregnant firefighter therefore would be exposed which could have an adverse outcome on the pregnancy. Sporadic demands for excessive physical work such as pulling, lifting, and shoving of the heavy equipment that is required in firefighting can also be detrimental to the outcome of the pregnancy" (Martin P. Wasserman, MD, J.D., Director of Human Services, Arlington County Virginia).

III. Procedure:

A. Upon learning of pregnancy, a firefighter shall:

1. Inform her personal physician of her occupation.

2. Relate to the physician the work and the work environments involved in firefighting. (Strenuous work, temperature extremes, periodic exposure to hazardous chemicals and smoke, etc.)

3. Ask for a written recommendation from her physician as to whether or not the firefighter should plan to return to duty or how long the firefighter may safely remain on duty without risk to the mother or child.

4. Inform her immediate supervisor regarding her condition and her personal physician's recommendations.

B. Response of the Department:

1. Upon notification by the employee of her pregnancy, the Assistant Chief of Operations will assign the firefighter to a light-duty task, which will allow her to continue to serve the community in a beneficial manner, while at the same time helping to ensure the health and safety of the mother and child during pregnancy.

2. The firefighter so assigned will be allowed to deviate from her standard uniform. She will be able to wear clothing that is comfortable to her while maintaining a professional appearance.

3. The firefighter may use sick leave; vacation or leave without pay, if she is unable to perform light duty.

4. After the child has been born and the firefighter has been deemed fit for duty by her personal physician, she has an option of returning for duty or requesting a personal leave of absence (under the Family and Medical Leave Act) (See Attendance Policy, IB-108.1).

5. A written recommendation from the firefighter's personal physician will be required before the firefighter is allowed to return to duty.

Back to Table Of Contents

Policy: Educational Assistance Reimbursement Effective Date: 07/01/05 Page: 1 of 2 Approved By: City Manager

Purpose:

The City recognizes there is an increasing need for a competitive and knowledge oriented workforce. Therefore the City encourages the education and development of its employees and will provide assistance based on funds available in the form of reimbursement for tuition and other related expenses based on the following guidelines. These guidelines will assure that the maximum number of interested employees receive educational assistance during a given fiscal year.

Application:

Full-time employees who achieve a “Regular” status on or before August 1 of each year will be eligible to participate in the City’s Educational Assistance Program.

Provisions:

1. Employees who are required to take mandated courses related to their work will have the cost of the courses paid at 100% through the Department's Travel and Training Policy. This program will be separate and distinct from the City's Educational Assistance Reimbursement Program.

2. Educational assistance may also be provided to eligible employees who voluntarily pursue courses of study through accredited institutions recognized by the U.S. Department of Education, which the City determines to be related to the employee's present job or which will enhance the employee's potential for advancement to a position within the City. As funds are available, this assistance will be provided as reimbursement for tuition and related expenses. 3. An employee who seeks educational assistance must submit his or her request to his or her Department Head on or before August 1st for evaluation. This information must have the prior approval of the Department Head, the appropriate Assistant City Manager, and the Human Resources Director before being eligible for reimbursement. (Refer to Attachment I)

4. Department Heads will consider the following factors in evaluating requests for educational assistance: a) The nature and purpose of the course of study; b) The benefits to be derived by the employee and the City; c) The employee's level of responsibility and length of service; and d) Any potential lost time or productivity while the employee attends the program.

Effective Date: 07/01/05 Page: 2 of 2 Approved By: City Manager Provisions continued:

5. As funds are available, tuition and related costs will be reimbursable up to a maximum of $1000 per eligible employee during a fiscal year.

6. Employee reimbursement for eligible educational assistance will be provided based on a grade “C” or better or on a satisfactory completion of a “pass-fail” course.

7. Employees receiving reimbursement from any outside sources, such as the Veterans Administration or scholarships must apply these sources first, and then coordinate with the City's assistance plan.

8. Educational reimbursement will apply to approved diplomas, undergraduate degrees, and graduate degrees progressively. It will not be authorized to obtain additional degrees at the same level.

9. Employees seeking reimbursement for educational reimbursement expenses must submit certified transcripts of their grades and receipts for the expenses incurred. The City will then reimburse employees for the cost of tuition, textbooks, registration, and for laboratory and library fees up to a total inclusive maximum of $1000 per eligible employee per fiscal year. (Refer to Attachment II)

10. Employees who are terminated during enrollment because of a reduction in force or elimination of their job, or who are unable to complete an approved course because of transfer within the City, will be reimbursed for approved costs incurred up to the date of termination or transfer. Employees who, prior to completing the approved course, voluntarily leave the City or are terminated for reasons other than those listed above will not be reimbursed for the expenses associated with the course(s).

11. Employees seeking reimbursement for educational expenses must agree in writing to repay the City if they leave the City voluntarily or are dismissed within one year from the date of reimbursement. 12. Employees are expected under normal circumstances to schedule class attendance and the completion of study assignments outside of their regular working hours. The City Manager or his designee must approve any exception to this policy in advance. It is expected that educational activities will not interfere with the employee's work, and marginal or unsatisfactory job performance during enrollment may result in forfeiture of educational assistance and disciplinary action up to and including termination. 13. Records of all educational reimbursement courses completed by employees will be maintained by the Human Resources Department.

Attachment I CITY OF GASTONIA REQUEST FOR PRE-APPROVAL OF EDUCATIONAL ASSISTANCE

Employee Name: Employee Number:

Budget Code: Estimated Cost:$

Request Date: Course Start Date:

Accredited Educational Institution:

YOU MUST CHECK ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: Diploma: (2)-Year Degree:

(4)-Year Degree: Graduate Degree:

YOU MUST CHECK ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

FALL: SPRING: SUMMER:

COURSE TITLES & DESCRIPTION:

______I further understand that if I resign or am discharged from the City within one year of receiving the educational reimbursement, I will be required to pay the City the amount of the reimbursement. This payment may be deducted from my last check.

Signature of Employee Date:

In order to be eligible for payment, the employee must submit this form, the Request for Reimbursement Form (Attachment II), a copy of all receipts; and a copy of the grades for each class. ALL GRADES MUST BE A "C" OR BETTER OR “PASSED”.

I certify that the course(s) requested above are related to the duties of the employee's current position, or are course(s) which will enhance the Employee's potential for advancement to a position within the City and to which the individual has reasonable expectations of advancing.

Signature of Department Head: Date:

Signature of Director of H R: Date:

Signature of City Manager / Designee: Date:

Attachment II

CITY OF GASTONIA REQUEST FOR REIMBURSEMENT OF EDUCATIONAL EXPENSES

Employee Name: Employee Number:

Budget Code: Amount: $

Request Date: Course Start Date:

Accredited Educational Institution:

YOU MUST CHECK ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

Diploma: (2)-Year Degree:

(4)-Year Degree: Graduate Degree:

YOU MUST CHECK ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:

FALL: SPRING: SUMMER:

COURSE TITLES & DESCRIPTION:

______I further understand that if I resign or am discharged from the City within one year of receiving the educational reimbursement, I will be required to pay the City the amount of the reimbursement. This payment may be deducted from my last check.

Signature of Employee: Date:

Signature of Department Head: Date:

Signature of Director H R: Date:

Signature of City Manager Designee: Date:

Note: In order to be eligible for payment, the employee must attach a copy of the original pre-approval form, a copy of all receipts applying to covered expenses, and a copy of the grades for courses completed.

Back to Table Of Contents

CITY OF GASTONIA PERSONNEL POLICIES

Effective Date: ______Page: ______1______Approved by: ______Subject: Bilingual Pay Policy

I. Purpose: In continuing our commitment to effectively providing excellent Customer Service, the City of Gastonia must have the ability to communicate with our increasing international community. In order to meet this challenge it is essential that the City offer incentives in the recruitment and retention of bilingual employees.

II. Policy: To offer compensation to employees who meet the predetermined criteria for bilingual skills.

III. Application: All Employees.

IV. Procedures: 1. Employees are eligible to test under the Bilingual Policy beginning the 1st pay period after completing 6 months of continuous service with the City. 2. Department Heads or their designee must authorize an employee to take the test. The Department Head or designee shall submit a signed memo to the Human Resources Director, Assistant Director of Human Resources, or the Employment Administrator for this purpose. 3. After authorization is received from the appropriate department, Human Resources will schedule the employee for the exam as soon as practical. 4. The City will incur the cost of the first test. The employee will bear the cost of any subsequent tests taken. 5. If the employee does not meet the City’s criteria for testing, he or she may retest 6 months after prior attempt. 6. Upon successfully passing the test, the employee is entitled to the annual $1,000 bilingual pay amount to be paid in bi-weekly increments as follows: $38.50 each pay period until $1,000 is reached. The payments shall begin at the beginning of the first full pay period after successful completion of the test and continue for as long as the employee is employed by the City of Gastonia pursuant to Section VI below. 7. All employees must have some time worked or show approved paid leave during each pay period in order to receive the bi-weekly payments. Human Resources will determine what other types of leave qualifies the employee to continue receiving payments. 8. If the employee leaves the City’s employ, they shall not be entitled to any further payments under this policy (prorated). 9. The employee must agree, upon request(s) from any department head or designee, to utilize their bilingual skills, unless such assistance will disrupt the operation of their department (as determined by the department head or designee). Refusal to render services under this policy to their own or other departments within the City may be cause for disciplinary action against the employee. 10.

Back to Table Of Contents

CITY OF GASTONIA PERSONNEL POLICIES Effective Date: ______Page: ______2______Approved by: ______Subject: Bilingual Pay Policy

V. Languages Covered Employees who demonstrate proficiency in the following languages (as determined by testing criteria) will be eligible for the annual $1,000 premium pay (paid in bi-weekly increments) under the Bi- Lingual policy: Spanish, Vietnamese, Cambodian, Korean and Laotian.

VI. Funding of Bilingual Program The Bilingual Policy will continue to be funded at its present level unless the City Council deems it necessary to change or delete such funding.

VII. Modifications to Policy The Bilingual Policy shall be amended when deemed appropriate.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.70.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Awards Policies and Procedures

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to provide information to all members regarding the establishment of an awards program for the recognition of employees who have distinguished themselves by acts of extraordinary bravery, special accomplishments, or other acts of service above and beyond those normally expected. The program will be administered and coordinated by the Awards and Commendations Committee, with duties and responsibilities as contained in this guideline.

B. One of the major goals of the Gastonia Fire Department is to maintain a high level of morale among its members. Realizing that job satisfaction has a direct relationship to high morale, the Gastonia Fire Department hereby establishes a series of awards and decorations to publicly honor those employees whose performance of assigned duties display excellence or bravery, whether these duties be tactical or administrative in nature.

II. COMMITTEE COMPOSITION

A. Fire Department Administration shall establish a formal Awards and Commendations Committee for the purpose of administering this Guideline. Committee membership shall consist of two members from each shift appointed by the respective Battalion/Division Chiefs, plus one member from Fire Administration appointed by the Fire Chief. The Committee shall have the authority to elect its own chairperson and establish specific meeting dates and times. The committee shall meet during the months of November or December each year (or more frequently if deemed necessary) in order to review nominations and make determinations as to the types of awards that should be authorized for each specific incident/individual action.

B. The Awards Committee will meet as a team to review award nominations and make decisions as to the appropriate class of award for each nominated individual. A total of five (5) members present will constitute a quorum. To the extent possible, decisions on awards should be made by consensus of all Committee members.

III. METHOD OF REPORTING COMMENDABLE ACTION

A. Incidents of outstanding or conspicuous service shall be reported to the Awards Committee in writing by means of the Commendable Actions Nomination Form (note attachment). Any member of this

department may make recommendations for commendations as appropriate. Recommendations for commendations should note all pertinent facts surrounding the incident including: name(s), time and date, location, incident description, and deed(s) performed. The Awards Committee Chairperson will acknowledge receipt of all Commendable Actions forms received, and forward same to the Awards Committee for appropriate action.

IV. CLASSES OF AWARDS

A. The classes of awards that may be accorded by the Awards and Commendations Committee include the following:

1. Star of Valor Award: The Star of Valor is given for an act or acts occurring during emergency operations to individuals displaying extraordinary courage, judgment, and/or zeal, per the following classifications: a. Gold Star of Valor: for incidents involving extreme personal risk and the highest degree of judgment, zeal, or ingenuity. b. Silver Star of Valor: for incidents involving great (but not extreme) personal risk, and/or great judgment, zeal, or ingenuity. c. Bronze Star of Valor: for incidents involving unusual personal risk and/or judgment, zeal or ingenuity.

2. Star of Merit Award: The Star of Merit is given for nonemergency and/or administrative situations involving the highest degree of personal judgment, ingenuity, or zeal.

3. Legion of Merit: When appropriate, the Awards Committee may award the Legion of Merit when an entire crew, station, or shift (two or more members) operating as a team at an incident or on a given project performs their duties in an exemplary manner that is clearly ‘above and beyond’ the duties normally expected by the department.

4. Certificate of Commendation: Certificates of Commendation may be awarded for actions involving the personal risks or administrative/nonemergency actions normally associated with the duties of members of this department, but requiring a ‘greater than normal’ degree of personal judgment, ingenuity, or zeal.

5. Citizen's Award: The Citizens Award may be awarded to civilian personnel whose actions and/or efforts benefit the citizens of the City of Gastonia, our fire and life safety programs, and/or the Gastonia Fire Department.

6. Letter of Recognition: Letters of Recognition may be awarded for situations not meeting the above noted criteria, but still worthy of recognition. At his discretion, the Fire Chief may award Letter(s) of Recognition to worthy members at any time.

7. Firefighter of the Year: The ‘Firefighter of the Year’ award will be presented to a member of the department who, by his/her actions, performance, professionalism and achievements (both on and off duty) best exemplifies the highest traditions and standards of both the fire service and the Gastonia Fire Department. The Awards Committee will select the annual recipient of this award from those nominated at the November/December meeting each year.

8. Department Leadership Award: The ‘Department Leadership Award’ will be presented to the Gastonia fire officer who, by his or her actions, performance, professionalism, and achievements as a supervisor (both on and off duty) best exemplifies the highest traditions and standards of the officers of both the fire service and the Gastonia Fire Department. The Battalion Chief’s will select the annual recipient of this award from those nominated at the November/December meeting each year.

9. Type and Placement of Awards: a. Recipients of Stars of Valor, Stars of Merit, and Legions of Merit will receive an appropriate award bar that may be worn on the Full Dress and/or Class ‘A’ uniforms. Said bar shall be worn over the name plate of the uniform as noted above. All members receiving awards will also receive certificates for their personnel files.

b. All members receiving awards will be presented same at an appropriate ceremony designed for this purpose. To the extent possible, the second City Council meeting in the month of January of each year will be the date designated for formal presentation of annual awards.

c. In addition to the above, the following classes of awards will also receive commemorative plaques:

(1) Legion of Merit (for the station/shift/crew so awarded) (2) Citizens’ Award (3) Firefighter of the Year (4) Leadership Award

GASTONIA FIRE DEPARTMENT Awards Program

Nomination Form

DIRECTIONS: Members desiring to nominate person(s) for commendation shall complete this form, attach any supporting data, and may be asked to be present at the review committee meeting if needed. This information should be forwarded to the Awards Committee Chairperson for review by the Awards & Commendations Committee.

1. Person(s) being nominated:

2. Position and assignment:

3. Actions worthy of commendation:

4. Recommended "Class of Award" as set forth by the awards guidelines:

5. Nominated by ______Date:______

Back to Table Of Contents

OFFICE ASSISTANT III 028 (Fire Department)

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs responsible clerical work requiring a qualified typist; does related work as required.

Work is performed under regular supervision. Supervision may be exercised over subordinate clerical personnel.

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Completes forms, records and reports; 2. Makes routine follow-up to secure required additional information; 3. Types letters and other material from rough drafts, marginal notes, or verbal instructions; 4. Maintains files; 5. Composes routine correspondence; 6. Assembles information from various sources for records and reports; 7. Computes and extends figures; 8. Answers inquiries about routine procedures and policies; 9. Assists the public with inquiries related to departmental services; 10. Collects fees and prepares invoices; 11. Operates standard office equipment; 12. Acts as receptionist, answers telephone, relays and dispatches messages; 13. Performs related tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

General knowledge of standard office practice, procedures, equipment and clerical techniques; general knowledge of business English, spelling and arithmetic; ability to type accurately at a reasonable rate of speed; ability to make arithmetical calculations and file alphabetically; ability to establish and maintain effective working relationships with other employees and the general public; ability to understand and follow oral and written instructions.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE:

Any combination of education and experience equivalent to graduation from high school, supplemented by a course in typing, and some clerical and typing experience.

Back to Table Of Contents

ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT – 029 (Fire Department)

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs difficult clerical and routine administrative work requiring a qualified typist and stenographer; does related work as required.

Work is performed under regular supervision. Supervision may be exercised over subordinate clerical personnel.

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Takes and transcribes dictation and types a variety of documents, technical and statistical reports, data for publication and other material where knowledge of format and presentation is necessary; 2. Answers routine correspondence for supervisor independently; 3. Reviews and checks records, forms and other documents for accuracy, completeness and conformance to rules and regulations; 4. Posts a wide assortment of information to records; 5 Collects information from a variety of sources and compiles data for special and periodic reports; 6. Makes appointments; 7. Prepares agendas; 8. Takes and transcribes meeting minutes; 9. Interviews visitors; 10. Interprets departmental and City policies and procedures for employees and the public; 11. Sets up and supervises the maintenance of filing system; 12. Assists in development of office procedures; 13. Prepares payroll for fire department personnel; 14. Operates a variety of office machines; 15. Performs a variety of financial and special fund record keeping; 16. Performs related tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

Thorough knowledge of standard office practices and procedures, equipment and secretarial techniques; thorough knowledge of business English, spelling and arithmetic; ability to interpret and apply policies and procedures; ability to make difficult arithmetic calculations and to set up complex forms and statistical tables; ability to type, take and transcribe accurately at a reasonable rate of speed; ability to plan and supervise the work of others; ability to establish and maintain effective working relationships with others; ability to work independently in the absence of specific instruction; ability to meet the public effectively.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE:

Any combination of education and experience equivalent to graduation from high school and considerable progressively responsible experience in clerical and stenographic work.

Back to Table Of Contents

PUBLIC FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY EDUCATOR - 670

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK

Performs responsible work related to directing comprehensive community fire and injury programs deigned to eliminate situations that endanger lives, health, property and/or the environment; does related work as required. Work is performed under general supervision of the Fire Marshal.

TYPICAL TASK

1. Documents public fire and life safety educational programs on appropriate forms or formats so that each element of the program is recorded and addressed. 2. Maintains a work schedule consisting of events and program requests, so that all activities are scheduled and completed without conflict. 3. Selects instructional materials in accord to subject, program objectives, intended audience and related resources, so that the materials are appropriate to the audience and program objectives. 4. Organizes strategies for the public fire and life safety education that addresses a variety of identified programs and activities. 5. Develops community fire and injury prevention programs designed to eliminate or mitigate situations that may endanger lives, health, property or the environment. 6. Develop and coordinate existing educational programs and information as specified in the NFPA Standard #1035 for the Public Fire and Life Safety Educator. 7. Create, administer and evaluate educational programs and information as specified by the NFPA Standard #1035 for the Public Fire and Life Safety Educator. 8. Complies and computes fire incident data and other statistical reports in reference to fire programs. 9. Researches general statutes, codes, manuals and other related technical publications. 10. Conducts fire safety classes for educational institutions, health care facilities, churches, business, industries and any other group or agency requesting such programs.

KNOWLEDGE, SKILLS AND ABILITIES

Considerable knowledge of communication types and methods; ability to speak to diversified groups on a variety of topics; knowledgeable of current public fire education programs and methods; ability to develop programs, train and instruct; ability to work independently without close supervision.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE

Graduation from a community college with an Associate Degree; BA/BS preferred; experience working within a fire service environment preferred; experience working with the media preferred.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS  NFPA #1035 (Public Fire and Life Safety Educator) Level II certification;  Within one year of appointment, must obtain NC Code Officials Fire Inspector Level I.  Possession of a valid appropriate driver’s license.

Back to Table Of Contents

FIREFIGHTER – 672

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs responsible protective service work in fire suppression; does related work as required. Work often is performed under emergency conditions and frequently involves considerable personal hazard. Work may require strenuous exertion under such handicaps as smoke, fire, heat, cold, heights, and cramped surroundings. Elements of danger are presented through climbing to considerable heights, smoke inhalation, and other related hazardous situations. Performs emergency medical care per level of training/certification. Work is performed under immediate supervision.

TYPICAL TASKS: 1. Responds to fire alarms with an engine company; lays lines and connects hoses; holds nozzles and directs water streams; climbs ladders; forces entry; ventilates buildings; uses chemical fire extinguishers, bars, hooks, lines and other equipment; performs rescue operations. 2. Provides emergency medical care and assistance to sick and injured persons; removes entrapped victims from auto accidents and other hazardous situations; assists with loading and transporting of sick and injured persons to appropriate medical facilities. 3. Performs salvage operations such as applying salvage covers, sweeping water, and removing debris. 4. Wears protective gear, such as self contained breathing apparatus and fire resistant clothing, while entering burning and smoke filled structures to perform firefighting operations; 5. Assists in maintaining fire apparatus and equipment, and cleaning fire station and grounds; 6. Serves as Relief Driver and drives fire apparatus to and from fires and emergency scenes; maneuvers and lays hose from engine; operates pumps, ladders, and other mechanical equipment as required; ensures that assigned hand tools and equipment are on apparatus and in working order; 7. Performs inspections and preventative maintenance on hydrants; 8 Participates in continuing training and instruction program by individual study of technical material and attendance at scheduled drills and classes; 9. Preplans buildings and premises for familiarization and fire hazards; 10. Work may require additional training and associated duties for assignment to the Hazardous Materials Response Team; 11. Performs other tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

Some knowledge of firefighting techniques, procedures and mechanics as applied to fire suppression; ability to learn technical fire fighting principles and techniques, and principles of hydraulics applied to fire suppression; some knowledge of the street system and physical layout of the City; knowledge and ability to apply emergency medical care techniques for sick and injured persons; ability to understand and follow oral and written instructions; ability to establish and maintain cooperative relationships with fellow employees and the public; ability to keep simple records and prepare reports; physical endurance and agility.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE:

Any combination of education and experience equivalent to graduation from high school.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.  Satisfactory completion of State of North Carolina Firefighter Certification within the first 18 months.  Satisfactory completion of Emergency Medical Technician (EMT) certification within the first 18 months.

Back to Table Of Contents

FIRE ENGINEER - 676

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK: Performs responsible protective service work in driving of fire apparatus, operation of fire pumps and fire suppression; does related work as required. Work is performed under emergency conditions and frequently involves considerable personal hazard. Work is performed under immediate supervision.

TYPICAL TASKS: 1. Responds to alarms; drives assigned apparatus to required location and maneuvers vehicle and lays hose for most effective use; Operates pumps, aerial ladders, and other mechanical equipment at fire scene and regulates water pressure to insure required pressure at the nozzle; 2. Performs assigned firefighter duties and assists in fire suppression including rescue, entry, ventilating and salvage work; 3. Assumes primary responsibility for the servicing and maintenance of fire equipment and apparatus; 4. Assists in cleaning fire apparatus, equipment, fire station, grounds, and fire hose; 5. Instructs other fire personnel in operation and care of fire equipment; 6. Participates in continuing training and instruction program by individual study of technical material and attendance at scheduled drills and classes; 7. Acts as Captain in latter's absence; and supervises assigned personnel; 8. Captain's responsibilities include, wearing protective gear, such as self contained breathing apparatus and fire resistant clothing, while entering burning and smoked filled structures during firefighting operations; 9. Preplans buildings and premises for familiarization and fire hazards; 10. Work may require additional training and associated duties for assignment to the Hazardous Materials Team; 11. Performs related tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES: General knowledge of firefighting techniques, procedures and mechanics as applied to fire suppression; thorough knowledge of the principles of hydraulics applied to fire suppression; thorough knowledge of the street system, major buildings and physical layout of the City; thorough knowledge of the operation and maintenance of firefighting equipment and apparatus and ability to operate such equipment and apparatus safely and effectively; ability to understand and follow oral and written instructions; ability to establish and maintain cooperative relationships with fellow employees and the public; ability to keep basic records and prepare reports; possession of mechanical aptitude; physical endurance and agility.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: Four years in grade as a firefighter, two of those years as a relief engineer, State certification as Firefighter, Driver/Operator (EVD, Pumps, Aerial) and EMT

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 Satisfactory completion of the fire departments Relief-Driver program.  State certification as Firefighter, EMT and Driver/Operator  Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.

Back to Table Of Contents

FIRE INSPECTOR - 679

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs intermediate protective service work in the enforcement of Fire Prevention Code with North Carolina Amendments of the International Building Code; local laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to this code; as well as performing responsible work related to conducting comprehensive community fire and injury training programs; does related work as required. Work is performed under the moderate supervision of the Fire Marshal

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Inspects new and existing buildings or structure within Gastonia’s jurisdiction for enforcement of the International Building code with North Carolina Amendments as authorized by North Carolina Code Officials Qualification Board Certificate. (Probationary, Limited, Standard) 2. Prepares clear and concise written reports on inspections undertaken; 3. Conducts fire drills when needed; 4. Conducts community fire and injury prevention programs as assigned for educational institutions, health care facilities, churches, businesses, industries, etc. 5. Performs other tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES: Some knowledge of the modern principles and techniques of fire prevention. Ability to clearly express themselves orally and in writing with the public under conditions of code enforcement, or fire prevention education duties with tact, discretion, and without loss of authority. Has ability to develop programs, and instruct; ability to work independently without close supervision.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: High school diploma or equivalent and moderate experience in fire operations and fire prevention.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license. NC Level I Fire Inspector probationary or standard certificate upon hire. NIMS Requirements; IS-700, IS-100, IS-200. Obtain NC Level III Fire Inspector certification within three years of hire.

Back to Table Of Contents

FIRE CAPTAIN - 681 (SHIFT)

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs responsible protective service work in fire suppression and prevention; does related work as required. Work often is performed under emergency conditions and frequently involves considerable personal hazard. Work involves responsibility for the supervision, discipline, and training of a fire company, the total operation of a fire station on an assigned shift; work is performed under regular supervision. Supervision is exercised over fire personnel on the assigned shift.

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Responds to fire alarms and other emergency calls assigned to the company; makes decisions as to methods and requirements for combating fires; directs firefighting activities until relieved by a superior officer; 2. Instructs subordinate fire personnel in work assignments and procedures; 3. Supervises and participates in interior firefighting under strenuous and adverse working conditions; 4. May be assigned to serve as acting Battalion Chief in latter's absence; 5. Supervises and assists in the work of extinguishing fires and performing related life and property protection; 6. Supervises the upkeep of apparatus and equipment; 7. Supervises and conducts fire preplanning within fire districts; 8. As station commander, plans and supervises the maintenance of the station and grounds; 9. Supervises and participates in fire company training in all phases of firefighting and rescue; 10. Keeps records and makes reports; 11. Instructs in training programs and drills; 12. Evaluates work of subordinates; 13. Work may require additional training and associated duties for assignment to the Hazardous Materials Response Team. 14. Performs other tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGE, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

General knowledge of the principles and practices of fire prevention and suppression; general knowledge of departmental rules and regulations; general knowledge of local geography, fire hazards and fire fighting; general knowledge of equipment and apparatus; working knowledge of supervisory principles and practices; ability to effectively supervise others at fires and other emergencies; possession of physical endurance and agility.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: Possess a minimum of an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field, N.C. Firefighter Certification, N.C. EMT certification, N.C. Driver/Operator Certification (1002), EVD (Emergency Vehicle Driver), Pumps, Aerial, Gastonia Fire Department qualified backup driver, Training equivalent to Fire Instructor I, Five (5) consecutive years in grade as either a Driver/Engineer and/or Firefighter with the City of Gastonia Fire Department

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 State certifications as FF/EMT/Driver Operator/FO I.  Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.

Back to Table Of Contents

ASSISTANT FIRE MARSHAL - 684

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs responsible supervisory and inspection work in enforcement of the North Carolina State Building Code, Volume V, Fire Prevention, local laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to this code. Work is performed under regular supervision of the Fire Marshal. Supervision is exercised over subordinate fire prevention personnel.

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Inspects every new and existing building or structure within Gastonia's jurisdiction for enforcement of the North Carolina State Building Code, Volume V, Fire Prevention as authorized by North Carolina Code Officials Qualification Board Certificate. (Probationary, Limited, Standard) 2. Answers and investigates complaints and reports of hazardous conditions and orders corrections; 3. Prepares and keeps reports on inspections undertaken and other records; 4. Supervises and/or conducts fire drills, fire safety classes and demonstrations; 5. Participates in the investigation of fires to determine cause, origin and heat sources; 6. Works closely with Police Investigators collecting evidence, questioning witnesses, compiling detailed reports and testifying in court; 7. Performs other tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

Thorough knowledge of Volume V of the North Carolina State Building Code, local ordinances and regulations regarding fire prevention; Ability to recognize existing and potential fire hazards in a wide variety of structures and installations; Ability to prepare clear and concise written reports; Ability to understand and carry out oral and written directions; Ability to enforce rules and regulations firmly, tactfully and impartially.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE:

Graduation from high school with five (5) years experience as a Fire Inspector or graduation from a community college with an associates degree and three (3) years experience as a Fire Inspector; Considerable experience in fire prevention methods and techniques, arson investigation or any equivalent combination of experience and training.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.  Possess an appropriate valid certificate issued by the North Carolina Code Officials Qualification Board for code enforcement within Gastonia's jurisdiction.  Must have obtained Fire Inspector Level 3 Standard Certificate.

Back to Table Of Contents

FIRE MARSHAL - 687

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs difficult code enforcement and inspection work in directing and coordinating the enforcement of the North Carolina State Building Code, Volume V, Fire Prevention, local laws, ordinances and regulations pertaining to this code. Work is performed under general supervision of the Fire Chief. Supervision is exercised over subordinate fire prevention personnel.

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Prepares and monitors the division budget; 2. Supervision is exercised over all fire prevention activities; 3. Analyzes, interprets Volume V of the North Carolina State Building Code along with local laws, ordinances, and regulations for subordinate personnel and the public; 4. Supervises and participates in the examination of building plans for conformity with the fire prevention code; 5. Work may require assuming responsibility, for directing the overall operation of the Fire Department, during the absence of the Fire Chief. 6. Communicates with building inspectors and other code enforcement officials on matters requiring reciprocal assistance or coordination; 7. Plans, supervises and directs a fire inspection program and community educational programs; 8. Supervises and/or participates in the investigation of the cause, origin, and circumstances of every fire occurring within the city limits 9. Performs related work as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

Comprehensive knowledge of Volume V of the North Carolina State Building Code, local ordinances and regulations regarding the modern principles and techniques of fire prevention, including inspection methods, fire hazards and methods of eliminating hazardous conditions; Comprehensive knowledge of the modern principles and practices of fire investigation; Administrative ability; ability to plan, assign and direct the work of a number of subordinate employees

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: Graduation from an accredited college, with a Bachelor’s Degree; Ten (10) years experience in Fire Prevention, with extensive experience in Fire Administration and Supervision.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 Possession of a valid appropriate driver's License.  Possess an appropriate valid certificate issued by the North Carolina Code Officials Qualification Board, for Level III code enforcement within Gastonia's jurisdiction.

Back to Table Of Contents

BATTALION FIRE CHIEF - 690 (Shift)

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs difficult protective services work and routine administrative work in fire suppression; does related work as required. Work is performed under emergency conditions and may involve considerable personal hazard. Work is performed under general supervision of the Chief of Operations. Supervision is exercised over subordinate protective services personnel.

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Commands fire suppression division, supervises and counsels subordinates on an assigned shift; 2. Responds to fire alarms and supervises personnel; 3. Supervises in the work of extinguishing fires and the performance of the related life and property protection; 4. Responsible for assisting the Chief of Operations in developing the objective, plans and programs of the City Fire Department; 5. Assists the Chief of Operations in planning, programming and implementing fire training and related activities; 6. Assists the Chief of Operations in formulating and implementing fire policy, procedures, rules and regulations; 7. Periodically visits each company to inspect personnel, equipment, apparatus, housekeeping and records; 8. Commands Hazardous Materials Response Team on assigned shift; 9. Makes fire reports and other departmental reports as required; 10. Evaluates work of subordinates; 11. Performs related tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

Comprehensive knowledge of the principles and practices of fire suppression methods and city ordinances and state laws relating to fire suppression; thorough knowledge of departmental rules and regulations; thorough knowledge of hazardous materials and City ordinances and State laws relating to hazardous materials; thorough knowledge of administrative principles and practices; ability to satisfactorily complete the promotional examination for this class; ability to program activities and implement same; ability to establish and maintain effective working relationships; ability to effectively supervise others at fires and other emergencies; ability to effectively deal with the public.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: Graduation from an accredited college with a Bachelor’s Degree in a fire related field or a Bachelor’s Degree in any field with an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field; Extensive experience in fire suppression with three (3) years experience as a Captain.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 Must have held the position of Captain for three (3) years.  Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.  Level II Fire Service Instructor  NC Certified Fire Officer II

Back to Table Of Contents

Battalion Chief of Training - 692 Training Chief/Hazmat Coordinator

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs responsible protective services and administrative work in the fire department. Serves as Hazardous Materials Team Coordinator and. Does related work as required. Work is performed under general supervision of Chief of Operations. Supervision is exercised over subordinate protective service personnel.

TYPICAL TASKS:

1. Responsible for preparation of Training Division/Hazmat Teams annual budget; 2. Develops annual equipment budget for the Operations Division; 3. Conducts departmental training classes, which includes operation of fire equipment, fire engines and aerial apparatus; 4. Develops written specifications for equipment used in Fire Operations, including engines, aerial trucks, hose, hose appliances as well as a variety of other equipment; 5. Responsible for establishing the new procedures to be employed in the proper use of new fire suppression equipment. Initiates new standard operating procedures; 6. Coordinate through Gaston College all outside training classes taught by other instructors; 7. Responsible for all training, SCBA and hydro test records; 8. Responsible for maintaining all training aids, and equipment; 9. Supervises the setting up of the agility tests for new applicants, and conducts the tests; 10. Supervises setting up the three phases of the practical tests for Driver/Engineer and administers the tests personally; 11. Responsible for supervising the maintenance of all Fire Department equipment used in fire suppression and hazmat operations; 12. Supervises subordinate who serves as Fire Department Safety Officer; 13. Coordinator for Hazardous Materials Response Team, (operations and training). 14. Performs related tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

Comprehensive knowledge of operations and maintenance of apparatus and equipment; thorough knowledge of departmental rules and regulations; thorough knowledge of hazardous materials methods and city ordinances and State and Federal laws relating to hazardous materials operations; thorough knowledge of and understanding of Safety Officers duties and responsibilities; thorough knowledge of the principles and practices of education methods of teaching; ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the training program and recommend changes to improve the activities program; ability to establish and maintain effective working relationships with fire and other City officials.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: Graduation from an accredited college with a Bachelor’s Degree in a fire related field or a Bachelor’s Degree in any field with an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field; Extensive experience in fire suppression with three (3) years of experience as a Captain.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:  Must have held the position of Captain for three (3) years.  Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.  Level II Fire Service Instructor  NC Certified Fire Officer II

Back to Table Of Contents

DEPUTY FIRE CHIEF (Operations) GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs difficult emergency and administrative work under the general supervision of the Fire Chief. Position serves as the second in command of the Fire Department, and reports directly to the Fire Chief. Generally exercises overall supervision and coordination for Operations personnel.

TYPICAL TASKS: 1. Commands fire suppression and hazardous materials divisions; 2. Responds to major fire alarms and/or hazardous materials incidents and supervises personnel in the performance of related life and property protection; may assume command of incident; 3. Responsible for aiding the Fire Chief in developing the strategic plans, goals, and objectives of the Fire Department; 4. Work requires assuming responsibility for directing the overall operation of the Fire Department, during the absence of the Fire Chief; 5. Monitors and assists with preparation and administration of the departmental budget 6. Assists Fire Chief in formulating and implementing department policy, procedures, rules and regulations; 7. Responsible for coordination of training activities and the operation of all fire stations; 8. Periodically visits each fire station to inspect personnel, equipment, apparatus, housekeeping, records, etc. 9. Makes fire and related reports as required; 10. Responsible for overall coordination of the Special Operations Division; 11. Evaluates work of subordinates; 12. Reviews all disciplinary actions and makes recommendations to Fire Chief; 14. Performs related tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES:

Comprehensive knowledge of modern fire fighting principles, practices, and procedures; comprehensive knowledge of Hazardous Materials and the city ordinances and state laws relating to Hazardous Materials; thorough knowledge of fire related training methods; general knowledge of computer technology; ability to lead effectively, maintain discipline, and accept lines of authority, ability to promote departmental harmony and demonstrate cooperation with other officers and City officials.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: All candidates must hold a Bachelor’s Degree in a fire related field or a Bachelor’s Degree in any field with an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field and three continuous years of supervisory experience as a Battalion Chief. Additional education and experience in business and public administration, certification at the Hazardous Materials Technician Level and National Fire Academy Executive Fire Officer (EFO) certification prior to the announced closing date are preferable. This position is generally administrative in nature, and requires substantial and progressively responsible supervisory experience.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 Hazardous Materials Technician Level Certification as required by CFR 1910.120  Must have held a position of Division/Battalion Chief or equivalent for at least three (3) years.  Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.  Must hold credentials as a NC or nationally certified Emergency Medical Technician

Back to Table Of Contents

ASSISTANT CHIEF – 698

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK: Serves as the City’s Emergency Management Coordinator and performs difficult emergency and administrative work under the general supervision of the Fire Chief. Position serves as third in command of the Fire Department, and reports directly to the Fire Chief. Generally exercises overall supervision and coordination for Life Safety personnel, department’s annual budget, department’s building maintenance, department’s annual hiring process and other specific tasks delegated by the fire chief.

TYPICAL TASKS: 1. Act as the liaison between Gaston County Emergency Management/ North Carolina Emergency Management and the City. 2. Work as the primary contact to keep the City’s Emergency Response Plan updated as needed. 3. Assist all City Departments with their department Emergency Response Plan as needed. 4. Work with all other City Departments with making sure their employees are aware of what National Incident Management System (NIMS) training each of their employees need and coordinate the delivery of that training. 5. Perform any other City Emergency Management related tasks as necessary. 6. Supervises the Life Safety Division through the Fire Marshal. 7. Assist Fire Chief with developing and administering the objectives, plans, programs, policies, procedures, rules and regulations related to all divisions of the department. 8. Provide input on matters involving department accreditation and ISO rating. 9. Represent the Fire Department at department head meetings, City Council meetings, and other meetings as requested by the Fire Chief. 10. Oversee and administer the department’s annual hiring process. 11. Oversee and administer the department’s biennial promotional processes. 12. Coordinate with the Human Resources Department on any matters involving department personnel 13. Performs related tasks as required

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS AND ABILITIES: Thorough knowledge of fire administration, including organization, staffing, financing, equipment management and maintenance, records and reports; comprehensive knowledge of modern firefighting techniques and equipment; comprehensive knowledge of the laws and regulations relating to the control and prevention of fire; comprehensive knowledge in Emergency Management, NIMS, and the City’s Emergency Response Plan.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: All candidates must hold a Bachelor’s Degree in a fire related field or a Bachelor’s Degree in any field with an Associate’s Degree in a fire related field and three continuous years of supervisory experience as a Battalion Chief. Additional education and experience in business and public administration, certification at the Hazardous Materials Technician Level and National Fire Academy Executive Fire Officer (EFO) certification prior to the announced closing date are preferable. This position is generally administrative in nature, and requires substantial and progressively responsible supervisory experience.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:  Hazardous Materials Technician Level. Certification as required by CFR 1910.120  Must have held a position of Battalion Chief or equivalent for at least three (3) years.  Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.  Must hold credentials as a NC or nationally certified Emergency Medical Technician

Back to Table Of Contents

FIRE CHIEF

GENERAL DEFINITION OF WORK:

Performs complex administrative and protective services work in directing the full activities of the Fire Department; does related work as required. Work is performed under the general direction of the Executive Director of Human Resources & Public Safety. Supervision is exercised over all departmental personnel.

TYPICAL TASK:

1. Plans, programs, directs and evaluates the operation of the Fire Department; 2. Develops annual budget proposal and controls budgeted expenses; 3. Formulates and implements fire policy, procedures, rules, regulations, and programs; 4. Prepares and reviews operational and administrative reports; 5. Promotes, assigns and disciplines all personnel; 6. Supervises maintenance of all records and materials associated with fire prevention or suppression activities or administration; 7. Makes periodic public addresses; 8. Responds to major fire alarms and/or hazardous materials incidents and supervises personnel in the performance of related life and property protection; may assume command of incident; 9. Attends meetings and serves on committees, boards and agencies related to promoting fire prevention and improving fire suppression; 10. Evaluates work of subordinates; 11. Performs related tasks as required.

KNOWLEDGES, SKILLS, AND ABILITIES:

Comprehensive knowledge of fire administration, including organization, staffing, financing, equipment management and maintenance, records and reports; comprehensive knowledge of modern firefighting techniques and equipment; Thorough knowledge of the laws and regulations relating to the control and prevention of fire; ability to plan, layout and review the activities of a fire department and to maintain discipline; ability to analyze the effectiveness of a firefighting organization and to institute improvements; ability to prepare and review reports; ability to establish and maintain satisfactory working relationships with subordinates, other officials and the public.

EDUCATION AND EXPERIENCE: Graduation with a Bachelors Degree from a university or college in a fire related field (ie. All fire disciplines, public safety, emergency management response, terrorism, emergency medical response…), Master’s Degree preferred, National Fire Academy Executive Fire Officer (EFO) graduate and Chief Fire Officer (CFO) designation desirable, NC Chief 101 required within six months and extensive administrative experience of a wide and progressively responsible nature.

SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

 Possession of a valid appropriate driver's license.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 04.90.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: November 1, 2005

Rescinds:

Subject: Procurement Card Procedures

I. PURPOSE

A. This procedure establishes responsibilities of Fire Department personnel regarding procurement cards, from purchase to final paperwork

II. DISCUSSION

A. Procurement cards were initially initiated as a replacement for petty cash.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Procurement cards are to be used for Fire Department purchasing only.

B. Permission from the Administrative Chief should be obtained prior to using the card.

C. If the Administrative Chief is not available, the on duty shift commander may grant approval for card usage.

D. In unusual situations, a maximum of $50.00 can be put on the cards by Captains; any amount above this has to be approved by the Administrative Chief or the on duty shift commander.

E. If a card is used for any amount, the cardholder should immediately notify the Administrative Chief, by e-mail, of the place the card was used, the purchase made, and the amount charged.

F. At the first of each week, the finance department will send an e-mail containing a cardholder statement to everyone that used their card the preceding week. Each cardholder shall verify their purchases and allocate them to the proper budget code. If a cardholder is unsure of a budget code, he/she shall contact the Administrative Chief or the Administrative Assistant for help. The cardholder shall then e-mail the statement back to the finance department, make a copy of the statement, attach all receipts to the copy, and send the copy to the Administrative Chief. These copies shall be sent to the Administrative Chief as soon as possible after they were e-mailed from finance.

G. If receipts for purchases are lost, the Administrative Chief shall be contacted for assistance.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 05.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: February 13, 2013

Rescinds: June 8, 2005

Subject: Retirement Benefits

I. PURPOSE

A. To inform members of the departmental policy concerning the nature of the retirement plans available and the qualifications that must be met before retirement, and to establish correct procedures of application for benefits.

II. DISCUSSION

A. The Gastonia Fire Department has at present time four (4) separate retirement plans. The plans are: (See summary of each plan on page #2) 1. One which is mandatory - The N.C. Local Governmental Retirement System 2. One automatic - The Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund 3. One voluntary - The North Carolina Firemen's & Rescue Squad Pension Fund 4. One City Plan - Separation Allowance (see explanation below) (0.85%) .0085 x most recent base (annual) salary x years of service = Separation Allowance (per year) to the age of 62/68.

Subject: Retirement At the Council meeting on Tuesday September 21, 1993, Council approved additional retirement benefits for fire department personnel which became effective January 1, 1994. A contribution of 1% of fire department budgeted salaries will go into the "Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund" each year. Also, approved was a "Separation Allowance" for fire department retirees based on the State mandated "Separation Allowance for Law Enforcement Officers". Attached are several memorandums (IB-105.1a, IB-105.1b, and IB-105.1c), that provide information in regard to Law Enforcement’s "Separation Allowance.” When applicable these same guidelines will apply to our "Separation Allowance” with the exception of:

Contributions to a 401 - K plan that was State mandated for Police Officers. The 401 - K will not apply to firefighters.

Firefighters must retire with a full Service Retirement (Unreduced Benefits) from the "North Carolina Local Governmental Employees' Retirement System"

III. SUMMARY OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS

A. Local Governmental Retirement System - Employees contribute 6% of salary. City currently contributes 4.8% for Firefighters and General City Employees. Benefit formula at normal 30 year retirement is 1.85% X 4 year’s average salary X years of service. Each employee is given a "Local Governmental Employees' Retirement System" Booklet. Information is provided in the booklet that guides the employee through the retirement process.

B. The Gastonia Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund (ratified Senate Bill 725 –chapter 1016) is administered by the Gastonia Fire Department and funded through a portion of fire insurance premiums collected in North Carolina. No employee contributions. (On September 21, 1993, Council approved a contribution, to become effective, beginning January 1, 1994. A contribution of 1% of fire department budgeted salaries will go into the "Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund" each year.) Current benefit formula is $4.00 per month times years of service with a maximum benefit of $120 per month. To be eligible for these benefits, an employee must retire under the N.C. Local Governmental Employees Retirement System. No longer available for current employees.

C. The N. C. Firemen's and Rescue Squad Worker's Pension Fund is administered by North Carolina state Auditor's office. This is an optional plan and an employee participates solely on a voluntary basis. In this plan each employee contributes $30.00 per quarter until a total of $2,400 is accumulated. A member must have twenty (20) years of creditable service with his fire department or rescue squad and with the Pension Fund to be eligible to retire. He/She must also be at least 55 years old. The present monthly benefit is $161 per month. In the event a member wishes to withdraw from the plan, he/she may do so and receive a refund of his/her contributions (A $25.00 early withdrawal fee will be charged)

D. Special Separation Allowance - (State mandated plan for Police Dept.) City Council approved this retirement benefit for fire employees on September 21, 1993. The City will pay a monthly benefit to qualified retired fire department employees up to age 62, funded entirely by the City. Formula is .85% X last salary X years of service. To be eligible for the Separation Allowance, an employee must retire with full benefits under the N.C. Local Governmental Employees Retirement System. (Employees retiring under disability are not eligible for this benefit). Benefits will be calculated by the City of Gastonia's payroll department. The employee must notify the payroll department that an application for retirement is being processed.

E. Extended Special Separation Allowance - The City will pay a monthly benefit to qualified retired fire department employees from the age of 62 to age 68, funded entirely by the City. Benefits will be calculated by the City of Gastonia's payroll department. To be eligible for the Extended Separation Allowance, an employee must retire with full benefits under the N.C. Local Governmental Employees Retirement System and must have been hired before April 1, 1986. (Employees retiring under disability are not eligible for this benefit). The employee must notify the payroll department that an application for retirement is being processed.

F. Health and Life Insurance for Retired Employees

IV. APPLICATION FOR BENEFITS

Local Governmental Retirement System - The Gastonia Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund

A. Application must be submitted by the employer to the retirement system not less than thirty (30) or more than ninety (90) days before an employee's retirement date. Therefore, an employee who plans to retire must do the following: 1. Contact the City of Gastonia's Human Resources department and request an application for retirement.

2. He/She must return the application (return 30-90 days before expected retirement date) to the Human Resources department in time to meet the thirty (30) day deadline.

The N. C. Firemen's and Rescue Squad worker's Pension Fund

3. He/She must contact the Gastonia Fire Department's Administrative Secretary (thirty days before he/she plans to retire) to fill out an application for retirement. Employees are eligible for retirement benefits under the N.C. Firemen's and Rescue Squad worker's Pension Fund when they reach the age of fifty-five (55). Employee's that have retired from the Local Governmental Retirement System before they reached fifty-five (55), should contact the Administrative Assistant thirty days before he/she reaches age fifty-five (55).

Special Separation Allowance

4. He/She must contact the City of Gastonia's Payroll department (thirty days before he/she plans to retire) so that benefits for the Separation Allowance can be calculated. (at present time Nancy Traywick 6929).

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 05.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Relief Fund and Supplementary Pension Fund Committees

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish procedures concerning the election of committee members to the Gastonia Firemen's Relief Fund Committee and the Gastonia Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund Committee.

II. DISCUSSION

A. A tax levied on the receipts for premiums collected within the City of Gastonia from fire insurance companies, corporation or associations in the amount of fifty cents ($.50) for every one hundred dollars ($100.00) in premiums received is paid to the State and transferred to the Gastonia Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund. Five hundred dollars ($500.00) must be maintained in the Gastonia Firemen's Relief Fund. The Relief Fund is set up to financially aid firemen in active service for sickness contracted or injury received while in the performance of their duties as a firefighter. The Gastonia Firemen's Supplementary Pension Fund is a fund to supplement the income of retiring firefighters of the Gastonia Fire Department. Reference: Retirement Policy of the manual.

III. FIREMEN’S RELIEF FUND

A. Composed of five members, two elected by fire department members, two appointed by the mayor, the remaining member to be appointed by the Commissioner of Insurance. If the Fire Chief is not named on the board of trustees as above provided he/she shall be ex officio member.

B. Firemen's Relief Fund Election 1. An election each January to select fire department representatives, one member to serve for two years and one member to serve for one year, then each January thereafter they shall elect only one member and his/her term of office shall be for two years. The mayor shall appoint each January two representatives, one to hold office for two years and one to hold office for one year, and each January thereafter shall appoint only one representative and his/her term of office shall be for two years. The Commissioner of Insurance shall appoint one representative to serve as trustee and he/she shall serve at the pleasure of the Commissioner. 2. Nomination Period - A form shall be placed on the bulletin board at each station for nomination. The nominations form will remain posted for approximately one week. 3. After the prescribed period, the nomination forms shall be removed and ballots drawn-up with the names of nominees to the appropriate committee. 4. The election period of each committee shall be announced informing departmental personnel of the election date and hours that the designated voting area will be open, after which time the election shall be closed and the ballots counted.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 06.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Physical Examination Policy

I. POLICY

A. (Revised 10/98) Physical Examinations - Public Safety Employees, Department Heads and City Manager.

II. PURPOSE

A. This policy is intended to provide procedures for periodic physical condition assessments of public safety employees and other designated employees in order to help ensure the necessary level of physical fitness to meet the requirements of the job responsibilities.

III. PROCEDURES

A. This policy applies to all public safety employees (fire and police) with the exception of secretarial or maintenance personnel. City Department Heads and the City Manager are also included. Interpretation, when necessary, of included job positions shall be the responsibility of the Department Head and the Director of Personnel.

B. Each employee 30 years of age or older shall submit to a comprehensive physical examination within 1 year of the adoption of this policy (November 3, 1987). Employees between 30 and 40 years of age shall be required to submit to a physical examination on a biannual basis, Thereafter, employees 40 and over, and anyone assigned to the Haz-Mat Team shall have such examinations on an annual basis. A blood work analysis and a health questionnaire will be required annually for each included employee regardless of age. (Fitness testing is a part of the physical examination process.

C. The complete physical examination process will be required for applicants for the earlier defined positions as the final step prior to an employment offer. The examining physician will be asked to recommend acceptance or rejection based upon medical opinion.

D. The general physical examination process will be conducted by a physician selected by the City and shall include but not be limited to analysis of blood, urine and cardiopulmonary condition.

E. Additional examination procedures, more frequent or earlier examinations may be required based upon the employee's medical situation and/or the physician's recommendations. These exceptions must be approved by the Department Head and the Director of Personnel.

F. The employee shall be given the results of the examination and, if necessary, counseling sessions with the immediate supervisor and Department Head will be scheduled to discuss any health-related problems and recommendations for improvement.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 06.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 25, 2016

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Fire Department Physical Fitness Program

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this Guideline is to establish Fire Department policy concerning required physical fitness activity for all members.

II. GENERAL PROGRAM POLICY

A. All Operations personnel will be required to spend a minimum of one (1) hour per shift engaging in some type of physical fitness activity.

B. The officers in charge of individual stations will be responsible for the scheduling and accomplishing of this requirement.

C. The actual type of physical exercise undertaken at each station/shift will also be left to the discretion of the officer in charge. Suggested activities include weightlifting, walking, jogging, etc. Officers are encouraged to give emphasis to activities that require cardiovascular exertion in order to build members’ stamina and endurance.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 06.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Firefighter Line of Duty Deaths/Serious Injuries

Line of Duty Death/Serious Injury Investigation Checklist

I. PURPOSE

A. Firefighting is one of the most dangerous occupations in the United States today. In spite of careful procedures, safety training and preventive maintenance programs, accidents occur which may result in firefighter injuries and death. In order to prepare for the worst of circumstances, the following procedure has been established.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Immediately after a determination that a firefighter has been killed or has sustained a fatal injury, the officer-in-charge shall have a Battalion Chief notify Fire Center, using a telephone (car/home).

B. Fire Center shall notify the following: 1. Chief of the Department 2. Chief of Operations and Administration 3. Fire Marshal 4. Police Identification Bureau

C. All firefighters on the scene will be instructed by the officer-in-charge to write down a detailed account about the incident.

D. The officer-in-charge will secure the scene and impound the firefighter's clothing and any equipment involved.

E. Notification of next of kin in the event of :

1. Firefighter injury a. Whenever possible, the injured firefighter will personally notify their family. b. If the firefighter is unable to notify his/her family, or upon their request, a Chief Officer will make the notification. NOTE: Chief Officers not responding to the home should meet the family at the Hospital at the first opportunity.

c. If the next of kin desires, a Chief Officer will provide transportation for the member's spouse and immediate family to the hospital. Another member may be designated to remain at the family's home to watch after the children until a sitter is available.

2. Firefighter Death a. The Chief of the Department and the Chief of Operations will go to the scene to gather information and will then proceed to the location of the next-of-kin. b. If desired, a Chief Officer will provide for transportation of the member's spouse or other immediate family members to the hospital which is receiving the deceased member. Another member may be designated to remain at the family's home to watch after the children until a sitter is available. c. Information concerning the death or serious injury of a firefighter shall not be released to the press until next-of-kin notification has been completed.

F. In the event of a line of duty death, the Administrative Chief or designee will be responsible for the following: 1. Make certain that all clothing and equipment involved has been impounded. 2. Make certain that all required blood tests (as pertaining to the Public Safety Officer's Benefit Act) are obtained from the Medical Authorities. 3. All documentation and filing of claims will be completed within the time constraints established by the Public Safety Officer's Benefit Act. 4. Contact N.C. OSFM 1-800-634-7854 (24 hour contact line).

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 06.20.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Family Notification Procedures

I. BASIC INFORMATION A. Name of member B. Home address C. Spouse's name D. Number of children E. Location of structure where injury occurred F. Extent of injury.

II. FAMILY NOTIFICATION A. Notified by B. Accompanied by C. Provisions made for transportation of family D. Provisions made for sitters at home E. Additional help offered to family F. Name of family's clergy G. Phone number of clergy H. Family notification confirmed to alarm

NOTE: The Battalion Chief must notify the Fire Chief when personal notification is complete. Press notices disclosing the member's name may be released only by the Fire Chief, Deputy Fire Chief or his Designee, and may only be made after personal notification has been made.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 06.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 28, 2013

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Procedure

I. PURPOSE A. No part of these reports should be given to any member of the public, unless approved by the Fire Chief. B. To establish a standard procedure for filling out Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Reports and Workmen’s Compensation Forms.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Reports and Workmen’s Compensation Forms comprise the Fire Department’s record of an employee’s injuries while working or any accident that occurs while working. These reports also become records for the North Carolina Industrial Commission and/or the City of Gastonia. Therefore, it is imperative that the Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Reports and Workmen’s Compensation forms be accurate and submitted to the Administrative Assistant as soon as possible after occurrence of accidents. B. These reports must be completed and submitted to the City’s Safety Administrator no later than the close of business of the next workday after knowledge of such accidents or incidents. (See copy of memorandum on page 5.) C. The injured employee’s supervisor is responsible for completing the Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Report and the Worker’s Compensation Forms.

III. DIRECTIVES FROM CITY’S SAFETY ADMINISTRATOR FOR SEEKING MEDICAL HELP

A. Work related injuries – Non life threatening (Monday – Friday 0800-1700 hrs. If an employee is injured while working, the supervisor should contact the Occupational Health Nurse, at City Hall, immediately at (704)866-6999. The Occupational Health Nurse will evaluate the employee and administer first aid if required or refer the employee to Caromont Occupational Medicine if necessary. If the employee requires treatment beyond first aid, the Occupational Health Nurse will administer the post-accident drug and alcohol tests. See the Occupational Health Nurse for the following injuries:

1. Fractures 2. Puncture wounds 3. Burns (1st and 2nd Degree)

B. Work related injuries – life threatening. Take the injured employee to the nearest Emergency Room. Once the employee has been taken to the ER, the supervisor should notify the Occupational Health Nurse immediately. The Occupational Health Nurse will make the necessary arrangements for the post-accident drug and alcohol tests. The Occupational Health Nurse’s office number is (704)866-6999. The Occupational Health Nurse’s cell phone number is (980)722-8151. If you can’t reach the Occupational Health Nurse, contact the Assistant Director of Human Resources at (704)214-7847. The employee should go directly to the Emergency Room for the following:

1. Heat exhaustion 2. Severe burns (3rd degree) 3. Compound fractures 4. Severed artery

C. Work related injuries – (After Hours) If an employee is injured while working after hours and the employee needs immediate medical attention, the supervisor should take the employee to the nearest Emergency Room. Once the employee has been taken to the ER, the supervisor should notify the Occupational Health Nurse immediately. The Occupational Health Nurse will make the necessary arrangements for the post- accident drug and alcohol tests. The Occupational Health Nurse’s office number is (704)866- 6999. The Occupational Health Nurse’s cell phone number is (980)722-8151. If you can’t reach the Occupational Health Nurse, contact the Assistant Director of Human Resources at (704)214- 7847.

If an employee does not require immediate medical attention, the supervisor should notify the Occupational Health Nurse at the beginning of the next business day. The Occupation Health Nurse will evaluate the employee and administer first aid if required or refer the employee to Caromont Occupational Medicine if necessary.

FORMS TO BE COMPLETED

1. When there is an accident, regardless of fault or injury, a Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Report must be completed.

2. If there is a minor on-the-job injury that requires First Aid only but may lead to medical treatment in the future, a Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Report should be completed.

3. If there is an on-the-job injury that requires the employee to see the Employee Health Nurse, a Supervisor’s Accident Investigation Report must be completed. If the injured employee is referred by the Employee Health Nurse to a doctor or the injured employee is taken to the Emergency Room, a NC Form 19 must be completed.

Accident Investigation Checklist

In case of a serious accident on the job, the following must be done:

1. SEE THAT THE INJURED ARE CARED FOR  The first concern at an accident scene, regardless of its seriousness, is care of the injured. Nothing should interfere with this concern except the safety of the rescuers themselves.

2. PROTECT OTHER PEOPLE AND PROPERTY  Only after the accident site is safe to approach should the actual investigation begin.

3. HAVE SOMEONE CONTACT THE FOLLOWING PEOPLE:  Department Head  Safety/Loss Control Administrator  City Manager’s Office

4. PRESERVE THE SCENE AS IT WAS AFTER THE ACCIDENT  Cordon off or barricade the area to keep curious bystanders from destroying evidence.

5. MAKE A VISUAL WALKTHROUGH OF THE ACCIDENT SITE  Conditions at an accident scene will change rapidly. Take notice of the location of all items of evidence. Record this information as the walkthrough is made. Mark the location of items likely to be moved-injured people, lightweight or high value items, etc.

6. OBTAIN THE IDENTITY OF ALL PEOPLE WHO MIGHT HAVE INFORMATION ABOUT THE ACCIDENT  Record their names and company worked for. If members of the public, obtain their addresses and telephone numbers.

7. EXAMINE THE EVIDENCE  The items that will provide information about what happened, how it happened and why it happened must be identified and examined.

8. PHOTOGRAPH ALL EVIDENCE  Photographs of the general area, major elements of the accident site and articles of evidence should be taken as soon as possible after the accident.

9. MAKE A DIAGRAM OF THE ACCIDENT SITE  A sketch should be made of the accident scene, showing the location of all evidence essential to understanding the accident situation. Distances involved should be measured and recorded on the sketch. At a later time, information from the sketch can be used to prepare a scaled diagram for inclusion in the accident report.

10. INTERVIEW AND OBTAIN STATEMENTS FROM ALL WITNESSES  All persons who may be able to contribute information about the accident should be interviewed as soon as possible after the accident. Recorded statements should be obtained from them.

11. PREPARE AN ACCIDENT REPORT  A written report must be prepared for all accidents. The report should contain details of what happened, when it happened and who was involved. It should develop conclusions regarding the physical cause of the accident, but should not deal with the placement of legal liability upon any party.

When To Investigate A Serious Accident A serious accident should be investigated immediately after its occurrence. The less time intervening between an accident and investigation, the more accurate the information that can be obtained. Facts are more accurate because people have not had time to be biased by the opinions of others; memories are clearer and more details are remembered.

Reenactment of the Accident One of the first questions asked upon arriving at an accident scene is “What happened?” Many times this simple question has resulted in the accident being repeated. While an accident reenactment can provide valuable insight and information, the process must be tightly controlled. It must be well planned and supervised to prevent repetition of a loss or the creation of an accident from a near miss. Reenactment should only be used: 1. When information about the actions or sequence of events cannot be obtained in any other way; 2. When precise step by step observations are needed to develop preventive action or provide legal defense information; 3. When key facts from witnesses are in conflict and need to be verified for analysis.

If reenactment is used, a positive control sequence should be followed. The person to act out the accident should be told and repeat back that he/she is not to repeat the actual act that made the last step in the sequence leading to the accident. He should first describe the steps and sequence without touching or doing anything. All actions and possible pitfalls should be explored before any actual steps are taken. The physical steps should then be gone through, one by one in slow motion. The worker performing the reenactment should be emotionally fit to re-associate with the accident and have no objection to doing so. If still in shock or if they had an emotional reaction to the initial accident, they may not be sufficiently controllable to conduct the reenactment.

Accident Report A written report should be completed for all accidents. Pictures should be submitted for accidents involving property damage. A Supervisors Accident/Incident Investigation Report and NCIC Form 19 should be completed by the person(s) who investigated the accident and should be completed the next business day. For serious accidents, a supplemental Accident Report is required in addition to the documents required for a non- serious accident. The supplemental report should contain the following:

1. Detailed description of the accident including answers to the following: a. What happened? b. Who (individuals and companies) was involved? c. When did the accident occur? d. What injuries/property damage resulted? 2. List of who was notified; 3. List of who investigated the accident; 4. Photographs taken; 5. Diagrams made; 6. Witnesses’ statements; 7. Conclusions should be developed regarding the physical cause of the accident, but should not deal with the placement of legal liability upon any party.

A copy of all completed reports will be sent to the following:  Department Head  Employee Safety and Health Office  Department Safety and Health Committee Chairperson.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

Phil Welch NO. 06.20.04 Approved By:

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Critical Incident Stress Debriefing

I. PURPOSE

A. To provide support and professional intervention after significantly traumatic incidents in order to minimize stress-related problems to Fire Department Operations personnel.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Stress is not a new, recently discovered experience. People have been reacting to each other, their own thoughts, and the physical environment since the beginning of human life. Now, however, more emphasis is being placed on the importance of understanding the connections between the body, mind and environment. Stress, for the purposes of this discussion, will be viewed from its negative side. In order to experience negative stress, the person must have some type of negative stimulation (stressor). Whether the stimulation comes from internal processes, such as negative thinking, or external forces, such as the physical environment, is immaterial -- the results or symptoms are consistently the same. The stress symptoms can show up physically as in migraine headaches or ulcers; they can occur emotionally through depression or anxiety; and mental symptoms of stress can be experienced as confusion and memory impairment. Interestingly, how people feel about others and themselves can be as stressful as fighting fire. Even though the stressors are vastly different, the symptoms can be the same.

Within the past five to ten years, attention has increasingly focused on the impact of stress on the Emergency Worker. With the upsurge in media coverage as well as academic research, it is now becoming more apparent that, at times, rescue workers need assistance in dealing with trauma and disaster. Education programs on National and State levels concerning the understanding and use of stress management techniques are being provided by Fire/EMS related organizations. Efforts are being made to encourage emergency workers to seek help when needed, thus dispelling the myth that a person must be "crazy" or "weak" to need psychological assistance. Particularly in the Fire Service, which is considered one of the most high stress occupations, it is important to recognize signs and symptoms of stress in order to prevent stress related sickness and disease.

In response to a growing concern for the maintenance of good emotional as well as physical health, the Gastonia Fire Department has developed a program to help Firefighters cope with stress experienced during or after a traumatic emergency situation. The term coined by Dr. Jeffrey Mitchell, Disaster Psychologist, is "Critical Incident Stress" (CIS). In order to address this particular type of stress reported by emergency workers, this program has included several components.

III. COMPONENTS OF CRITICAL INCIDENT STRESS DEBRIEFING

A. Education

The design of this component includes two parts. First, a basic education on the concept of stress and stress reactions as related to emergency work is offered. Secondly, a discussion support services available to Operations personnel is provided. As current Operations staff have received this education, this component of the program will be offered on an "as needed" basis to personnel already in the field. The formats for future presentations include: 1. Presenting educational information to all recruit classes. 2. Presentation of material by a member of the Debriefing Team, someone involved in providing support services to Operations personnel after a critical incident.

B. Group Debriefing

1. Definition: A debriefing is a confidential, educational process designed to accelerate the normal recovery process in individuals who have been exposed to highly abnormal events. The debriefing process provides an opportunity for personnel to discuss their feelings and reactions in order to reduce the stress resulting from exposure to critical incidents. A debriefing is not a critique of department operations at the incident. Debriefings are usually conducted in small groups and will be strictly confidential.

2. The Debriefer(s): The qualifications of a Debriefer are: Mental health professional with emergency services/crisis intervention background including: a. Working knowledge of theory and techniques b. Working knowledge and techniques of psychological evaluation c. Thorough background in group interaction and dynamics d. An understanding of operational procedures of the Gastonia Fire Department.

3. Types of Debriefings: Three main types of debriefings will be utilized. The type of debriefing will be utilized. The type of debriefing conducted depends upon the circumstances of the particular incident. a. On-the -scene-Debriefing. The Debriefer(s) will respond to the scene and will function as observer(s)/advisor(s) to watch for the development of acute stress reactions. The Debriefer(s) will be available to offer emotional support, assisting with expression of appropriate reactions and feeling. NOTE: this type of debriefing would only be utilized in case of a major disaster involving a large number of people. Examples include a commercial airplane crash, a natural disaster such as tornado or flood.

b. Formal-Debriefing. - Critical Incident Stress Debriefing. This type of group session would occur within 24-48 hours after the conclusion of the incident, and may occur in two ways; automatically or voluntarily. These will be discussed under the heading, Policy. The general format for the debriefing may include: (1) Introductory Phase. The facilitator (Debriefer) will introduce her/himself, describe the rules for the debriefing, and emphasize the need for confidentiality. Participants will be assured that open discussion of their feelings will not be utilized against them in any way. (2) Fact Phase. The facilitator will ask the participants to describe facts about themselves, about the incident, and their activities during the incident. (3) Feeling Phase. When enough information has been provided to make the incident vividly clear, the facilitator will encourage a sharing of feelings by all participants, emphasizing that all feelings, positive or negative, important or trivial, are important and should be expressed and listened to. (4) Symptom Phase. Each participant is encouraged to describe his/her own experience with the stress reactions.

(5) Teaching Phase. The facilitator again covers material from the education component, highlighting symptoms of stress reactions, with emphasis on the fact that such responses are normal and natural for emergency workers. (6) Re-entry Phase. This is the closing phase of the debriefing session; outstanding questions can be answered, final reassurances provided, and a further plan of action made if necessary. Summary comments are made by the facilitator and personnel are advised on the procedure to seek further assistance if needed.

c. Follow-up Debriefing. This type is performed several weeks or months following the critical incident, if necessary. If this type debriefing is held, its main purpose is to resolve issues or problems not initially resolved. The follow-up debriefing may be performed with the entire group or any portion of the group.

C. Individual Counseling

IV. POLICY

A. Automatic Debriefing

1. The following incidents would result in an automatic debriefing. a. Death or severe injury of a child. b. Mass casualties, involved in plane crash, multiple car wreck, high rise building fire. c. Death or serious injury of Firefighter while on duty. d. Life-threatening situation for Firefighter involving fire, toxic chemicals, communicable diseases, threat with deadly weapon, hostage situation. e. Gross mutilation of patient(s), i.e., decapitation, severed limbs, violent suicide. f. Severe fire injury or fire death, g. Prolonged, unusual rescue attempt during which patient dies.

2. Time Frames a. The Captain or Officer-in-Charge initiates notification of occurrence of critical incident within half hour after returning to station. b. Debriefing will occur within 24-48 hours after the critical incident or at the next scheduled shift if possible. c. NOTE: Company may request debriefing sooner than the 24-48 hour time frame if he/she deems necessary.

3. Each company involved will have a separate debriefing unless it is otherwise agreed to have all or several companies in one session. 4. The debriefing will occur in the station or at another location if requested by the Debriefer. 5. The company will be taken out of service for the session, which will generally be from one to two hours in length. 6. Only those personnel involved in the critical incident will attend the debriefing unless otherwise agreed by all involved. 7. Confidentiality is expected to be maintained.

B. Voluntary Debriefing

1. In situations not covered by an automatic debriefing, the Company Officer may feel unusual circumstances call for debriefing. Some examples could be: a. Company involved in series of incidents over period of hours or days which involve multiple deaths or injuries.

b. Company involved in one or more incidents which Officer deems demoralizing or frustrating for the group. 2. Time Frame a. Request for debriefing shall occur as soon as possible after Company Officer sees need. b. Debriefing will occur within 24-48 hours after the critical incident or at the beginning of the next scheduled shift if possible. c. The Company may request debriefing sooner than the 24-48 hour time frame if he/she deems necessary. 3. Each company involved will have a separate debriefing unless it is otherwise agreed to have all or several companies in one session. 4. The debriefing will occur in the station or at another location if requested by the Debriefer. 5. The company will be taken out of service for the session, which usually lasts one to two hours. 6. Only those personnel involved in critical incidents will attend the session unless otherwise agreed by all involved. 7. Confidentiality is expected to be maintained.

C. How to request Critical Incident Stress Debriefing

1. All emergency personnel bear the responsibility of recognizing significant incidents that may qualify for Critical Incident Stress Debriefing. When an Officer is informed of, or identifies, a need for a debriefing he/she shall notify the Battalion Chief in charge. The Battalion Chief will contact the following; a. For a small number of employees that may need counseling, the local American Red Cross can be contacted at 704-864-2623. They will contact local Mental Health volunteers to provide counseling for our employees. / or contact b. Centralina Council of Governments “Region F Critical Incident Stress Debriefing Team” at 1-800-574-3311 (Day office # 704-372-2416) c. The Chief of Operations and the Fire Chief to inform them that the Critical Incident Stress Debriefing Team has been requested. d. Call the 800 number and leave a message on the recorder. Shortly after a call is made to Centralina Council of Governments “Region F Critical Incident Stress Debriefing Team,” a Team Coordinator will call you back. They will need the following information; (1) Your name and title (2) Incident information (3) A suggested time and place to hold the debriefing

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO 06.20.06 Approved By: Phil_____ Welch _____

Effective Date: __October 23, 2007 _____

Rescinds: ______

Subject: Honor Guard

I. PURPOSE

A. To Honor Members of the Gastonia Fire Department both active and retired for serving the organization by providing a recognized Honor Guard capable of displaying the highest professional standards during a major event or loss to any member being past or present. To establish a policy due to the ever-increasing demand placed on the Department’s Honor Guard. To provide a clear understanding of responsibilities the members of the Honor Guard have undertaken to provide an invaluable service to the department and City. To establish a standard guideline for eligibility, membership and training, the services the Gastonia Fire Department Honor Guard provides and to insure consistency within the unit.

II. POLICY

A. The Honor Guard will consist of an Honor Guard Co-coordinator. The Co-coordinator will address the training, selection and preparation of the day-to day requirements to ensure the Honor Guard is prepared in events such as funerals, dedications and other special events to support the community and represent the department with the highest degree of professionalism. The Honor Guard will adhere to the established guidelines concerning requests relevant to the recognition of firefighters and their families. Council requests that are of a function pertinent to the City, State or Federal Government will be considered an Honor Guard Event.

A Chief Officer will provide oversight and function as the liaison between Staff and the Honor Guard. The Chief Officer will provide guidance to department members as to the availability and structure of the Honor Guard. The Chief Officer will be the immediate contact when a request is made concerning the Honor Guard, who will then provide the necessary information to the Deputy Chief and Fire Chief if approval is required.

B. Eligibility All candidates must have completed their one-year probationary period and have no disciplinary actions against them. Retired members having served 30 yrs active service are also eligible. Interested members should submit a resume to the Honor Guard Coordinator. The Honor Guard Coordinator, along with the shift coordinators will hold elections on an as needed basis.

C. Membership All members of the unit shall be uniformed or retired members of the Gastonia Fire Department. Membership in the Honor Guard is on a voluntary basis and on duty participation is required. However, there will be times when off duty participation will be required as needed. The unit will consist of no more than thirty-six members. Each member is expected to serve at a minimum of two years.

D. Attendance All members of the unit are expected to participate on and off duty, as well as attending quarterly training or other training deemed necessary by the HG coordinator or shift coordinators. Any member not attending 50 percent of quarterly training, meetings, and funerals/special events without prior approval from the HG coordinator or shift coordinator’s shall be subject to suspension and or dismissal from the unit.

E. Policy violations Any honor guard member who violates any portion of the rules and regulations of the Gastonia Fire Department will be subject to dismissal from the honor guard, as determined by the fire department administration, the honor guard coordinator and the shift coordinators. All members are expected to adhere to city and department policy when applicable when on special honor guard assignments. Retiree’s are required to adhere to all current policies, which relate to the function of the Honor Guard.

III. UNIFORM

A. Honor Guard Uniform: Provided by the Gastonia Fire Department.

1-Navy blue dress jacket with an honor guard badge, fire department patches on both sleeves with a white citation cord worn on the left shoulder. The large braid should be worn underneath the arm and the two single cords should be worn outside the sleeve. 1- Pair of navy blue trousers with a red stripe along the outside seam. 1- Pair of patent leather shoes. 1- Navy blue hat with gold band and honor guard badge. 1- White webbing belt with a brass buckle and four brass keepers. 1- White ascot 1- White pair gloves 1- Red garment bag Each member provides black or navy blue socks

B. Uniforms should be kept clean and neat in appearance. Shoes are to be shined and in good condition. Badges and buckle must have a high luster and in good condition. The pockets of the trousers and coats must lie flat with nothing bulging or protruding from them. Each member is responsible for his/her uniform and for the cost of having it cleaned. If a member loses any part of the issued uniform, the member may be held financially responsible for the lost item. Black mourning bands will be issued and displayed at appropriate times. Upon a member’s resignation or dismissal from the honor guard, the member has 30 days from that date to return the issued uniform to the honor guard coordinator or his/her shift coordinator

IV. REQUEST FOR SERVICES

A. Request for services should be made through the Chief Officer or designee. The Chief Officer will then notify the Deputy Chief and Fire Chief. The request will then be forwarded to the Honor Guard Coordinator who will then contact the appropriate shift contact. Requests for services should be made as soon as possible but at least 24 hours ahead of time. In the event of a line of duty death, an extra day will be needed for planning. In the event of the death of a present or past elected City Official, the

Fire and Police Honor Guards will plan, coordinate, and provide funeral services, if so requested by the deceased family.

B. The following guidelines address the majority of the responsibilities the Honor guard will address, however, a request outside the guidelines will be forwarded to the Fire Chief for approval.

C. All Personnel (Active Duty or Retired) are expected to be available if requested for training and review of any changes the Honor Guard Co-coordinator deems necessary and has approved by the Fire Chief. All Honor Guard Members are expected to conduct themselves in accordance with existing policies and guidelines, which are in effect for Active Duty Personnel.

D. The Honor Guard will maintain at a minimum, 12 per shift to accommodate the various requests for service.

The matrix below addresses the primary commitment of the Honor Guard in order for requests to be met.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Employee * * * * * * * * Spouse * * * Mother * * Father * * Children of * * * employee Retirees * * * * * * * * Dignitaries * * * Gaston County * * * * * * Firefighters 1. Stand by Casket or Urn (Visitation) 2. Flag Folding 3. Ringing of the Bell 4. Pall Bearers 5. Honorary Pall Bearers 6. Block Intersections 7. Ushers 8. Carrying of Casket (Honor Guard prepared Truck)

Note: The Honor Guard (if requested) will provide the “flag folding” for a member of the immediate family if the member is ex-military and the family requests the service.

V. FUNERAL SERVICES

A. The Honor Guard will provide services at visitations and funerals of active duty and retired members of the Gastonia Fire Department. These services are also available to immediate family members of active duty personnel (parents, spouses, brothers, sisters and children) if so requested according to the Matrix.

B. The Honor Guard will assist with funeral services for any line of duty death, death of an active or retired Fire Chief, or as requested by any fire department within Gaston County. The Honor Guard will be primarily used as a support group to any fire department within the county needing services. If the Honor Guard is requested for services outside Gaston County, the Fire Chief or Deputy Chief will make the decision to participate or not.

C. CASKET DUTY

1. Performing casket duty will require a minimum of six personnel. Two members will stand at the casket at one time, one at the head and one at the foot of the casket. Changing of the guard will take place every fifteen minutes. The other members will be staged in a room of designation. During the changing of the guard, the two members relieving will march in single file line and stop in front of the guards at the casket and perform a left face in unison. At this time, all four members will salute and the members that were relieved will take a step forward, perform a left or right face in unison and exit marching in a single file line.

D. FUNERALS: RETIREE DEATH

1. PLANNING a. The on duty shift will work the service for that day and will be supplemented with off duty personnel as needed. b. All members will meet at the church or wherever the service is being held 1 ½ hours before the service begins to become familiar with the layout of the building.

2. VISITATION

a. The casket guards will be in place at the start of the visitation service, with one member at the head and one member at the foot of the casket. The guards will stand at attention for the duration of their tour. Guards will be rotated every fifteen minutes until the end of the visitation service. b. Flags should be placed at the head and foot of the casket before the service begins, with the United States flag at the head and the department flag at the foot.

3. CHURCH SERVICES

a. If requested, the Honor Guard will serve as ushers to escort the family to and from their seats. b. Flags should be placed at the head and foot of the casket prior to the start of the service, but will be unattended. c. If the retiree is a veteran, an American Flag will be provided by the funeral home and will be placed on the casket. The Honor Guard will be in charge of folding the Flag. Four members of the Honor Guard will fold the flag. One member at each end and one member on each side. The Last Call Ceremony and/or Taps will be performed, if requested, after the minister finishes with the graveside service. The ranking Chief will present the flag to the family.

E. ACTIVE MEMBER NON-LINE OF DUTY DEATH

1. PLANNING a. The shift working shall be notified. b. Notify the department chaplain of the death. c. If any Honor Guard member is assigned to the deceased members company, that member shall be excused from participating.

2. CHURCH SERVICES a. Flags will be posted at the church, but not attended. b. Uniformed firefighters will form an aisle for the family to pass through and shall be at attention when the family passes through. The Honor Guard Coordinator/Shift Coordinator will arrange this line up. c. Pallbearers if requested.

d. If requested, the Honor Guard will serve as ushers to escort the family to and from their seats.

3. GRAVE SITE

a. Members will take the flags and proceed ahead of procession to the gravesite to prepare for the arrival of the procession. b. Upon arrival of the procession, the Honor Guard will come to attention as the casket and family arrive and shall remain in this position until the end of the service, unless instructed to do otherwise. c. At the end of graveside service i. The Last Call Ceremony will then be read and performed. ii. Honor Guard will call “Attention”. iii. Flag detail (four members) will move into position and prepare to fold the Flag. iv. Honor Guard will call “Present Arms”. v. Flag detail will then fold the Flag. vi. One member of the flag detail will then present the Flag to the ranking Chief. vii. The ranking Chief will then present the flag to the family. viii. Call “Order Arms” and dismiss detail.

ANY ADDITIONS OR DELETIONS NEED TO BE WORKED OUT PRIOR TO THE SERVICE.

F. LINE OF DUTY DEATH

1. PLANNING a. Honor Guard Coordinator and Chief Officer and/or designee will act as a liaison between the family and the Honor Guard. b. An extra day will be needed for planning. c. ALL HONOR GUARD members will be called in to participate. d. Report to the service two hours ahead of time. e. The on duty shift will work the service; all other members will fill in and perform other assignments. f. Black mourning bands shall be worn.

2. VISITATION a. Casket Guard (fifteen minute intervals). b. Flags will be placed in proper places before service starts.

3. CHURCH SERVICES a. Pallbearers, if requested. b. Uniformed firefighters will form an aisle for the family to pass through and shall be at attention when the family passes through. The Honor Guard Coordinator/Shift Coordinator will arrange this line up. c. With the family’s permission, the left side of the church should be left open for the Gastonia Fire Department members and other officials. d. Seating as follows. i. Dignitaries ii. The Fire Chief, Deputy Chief, and Battalion Chiefs. iii. Members of the deceased company. iv. Gastonia Fire Department members.

e. Honor Guard will be posted with flags by the casket and remain there until the family is seated. After the family is seated, the Honor Guard will march out in single file line.

f. At the conclusion of the service, the Honor Guard will lead the casket out carrying the “colors”.

4. GRAVE SITE

a. Members will take the flags and proceed ahead of procession to the gravesite to prepare for the arrival of the procession. b. Upon arrival of the procession, the Honor Guard will come to attention as the casket and family arrive and shall remain in this position until the end of the service, unless instructed to do otherwise. c. At the end of graveside service i. The Last Call Ceremony will then be read and performed. ii. Honor Guard will call “Attention”. iii. Flag detail (four members) will move into position and prepare to fold the Flag. iv. Honor Guard will call “Present Arms”. v. Flag detail will then fold the Flag. vi. One member of the flag detail will then present the Flag to the ranking Chief. vii. The ranking Chief will then present the flag to the family. viii. Call “Order Arms” and dismiss detail.

ANY ADDITIONS OR DELETIONS NEED TO BE WORKED OUT PRIOR TO THE SERVICE.

G. INTERSECTIONS

1. Apparatus will be used to block intersections along the funeral route. 2. ALL firefighters will be in CLASS A UNIFORM in front of the truck. 3. As the funeral procession approaches, then everyone will come to attention. Salute if your head is covered, if not, put your right hand over your heart. This will be held until after the family passes.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 06.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Respiratory Protection and SCBA Training Program

I. PURPOSE

This Guideline shall establish a policy ensuring that all GFD employees engaged in emergency operations are provided personal protection equipment to eliminate respiratory hazards. These hazards include, but are not limited to, by-products of combustion such as smoke heat, toxic gasses, and oxygen deficiency, which create a working environment that is Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH).

A. Respiratory Protection Plan (RPP) Defined 1. This document identifies when respiratory protection shall be used. 2. This policy was also created to meet the intent of the Occupational Safety and Health Standard 29 CFR 1910.134. 3. The Respiratory Protection Plan contains:  Roles and Responsibilities of Respiratory Plan Participants (Section II)  Procedures for Care and Maintenance of SCBA (Section III)  Procedures for Use of SCBA (Section IV)  Medical Evaluation and Equipment Testing (Section V)  SCBA Training Requirements (Section VI)

II. ROLES & RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Definition of “SCBA Users”/Respiratory Plan Participants This program shall apply to all GFD employees who are required to wear respiratory protection n(SCBA/SABA) during firefighting or other emergency operations where an IDLH atmosphere or respiratory hazard exists.

1. Most of the procedures in this policy refer to two different groups of employees. For the purpose of this document, the term “SCBA Users” shall refer to both of the following:

a. GFD members, who are required by job function to wear an SCBA if operating in IDLH atmospheres.

b. Specific GFD employees from other divisions, whose duties may require them to wear SCBA, if operating in an IDLH atmosphere. (i.e. Fire Prevention, Fire Investigations)

B. The Fire Chief shall: 1. Have the overall responsibility for development, implementation And administration of the “Respiratory Protection Plan (RPP)”. 2. Oversee the development of polices, rules and regulations. 3. Develop and implement a budget to administer the RPP. 4. Appoint a Respiratory Protection Plan Administrator (RPPA). 5. Identify those employees required to participate. C. the Respiratory Protection Plan Administrator (RPPA) shall: 1. Develop, implement and administer the “Respiratory Protection Plan.” 2. Evaluate and update the plan as needed. 3. Identify work areas or operations that require employees to wear respirators. 4. Provide a copy of the written RPP to the Employee Health Clinic. 5. Ensure that all SCBA Users are given a medical evaluation before use (upon Employment). 6. Provide a copy of the medical evaluation to the City Nurse for medical Fitness evaluation. 7. Provide supplemental information to the City Nurse, including: a. The type and weight of the respirator to be used by the SCBA user. b. The duration and frequency of respirator use. c. The expected physical work effort. d. Additional protective clothing to be worn. e. Tempter and humidity extremes that may be encountered. 8. Annually, and as needed, evaluate the plan to: a. Ensure the current written plans are being effectively and properly implemented. b. Ensure that records are up to date and accurate for. c. Collaborate with Training Division to ensure employees are properly using SCBA. d. Ensure that the RPP continues to be effective.

D. The Training Chief shall: 1. Implement an annual “fit testing” for all SCBA Users. 2. Supervise the SCBA Technician and ensure proper maintenance of SCBAs. 3. Develop and maintain all SCBA maintenance records. 4. Ensure an independent, certified agency tests GFD air compressors quarterly and that the air produced meets Grade E Quality (per NFPA 1500) as defined by ANSI/CGA G7.1. 5. Ensure that all air cylinders are hydrostatically tested in accordance with US DOT regulations. 6. Be accountable for all fit-testing and maintenance records pertaining to all SCBA.

E. Company Officers shall: 1. Study the RPP requirements and ensure that the SCBA Users under their supervision understands and follows the program. 2. Ensure that any SCBA Users under their supervision have received appropriate training, fit testing, and medical evaluations according to the established schedule. 3. Ensure an SCBA is available for all SCBA Users working in an IDLH Atmosphere. 4. Enforce the proper use of SCBA when necessary. 5. Be accountable for the completion of the daily checks of all unassigned SCBA on his/her company.

6. Ensure that SCBAs are properly cleaned, maintained, and stored-according to respiratory protection plan. 7. Continually monitor work areas and operations to identify respiratory hazards. 8. Report to his/her B/C any employee having difficulty wearing or operating while using SCBA. F. SCBA Users (GFD Members/Employees) shall:

1. Don SCBAs when and where required and in the manner in which they were trained. 2. Follow SCBA check-off procedures included in section III/A below. 3. Care for, maintain, and store their SCBA as instructed. 4. Inform the company officer if the issued SCBA Mask (face-piece) no longer fits and request to be refitted with a properly fitting mask. 5. Inform the Company Officer if they have difficulty wearing or using an SCBA. 6. Inform the Company Officer or RPPA of any respiratory hazards that they feel are not adequately addressed in the workplace and any other concerns regarding the program.

G. City of Gastonia Health Clinic

1. Review all medical evaluation forms. 2. Make recommendations for follow-up medical examinations he/she deems necessary to make a final determination, including any medical tests, consolations, or diagnostic procedures. 3. Keep and maintain all personnel medical evaluation forms.

H. Fire Department Training Division shall:

1. Institute SCBA training and retraining programs. 2. Develop and maintain all SCBA training records.

III. PROCEDURES FOR CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF SCBA

A. Accountability / SCBA Daily Check-off Procedure

1. Each GFD member shall be accountable for an SCBA on his/her company, assigned by the company officer. Each member will be accountable for that SCBA’s readiness throughout his/her assigned shift. 2. At the beginning of each shift, GFD members shall perform a readiness check of his/her assigned SCBA. 3. Members assigned to a different company on a time out shall be assigned a riding position and SCBA by the Officer of that company. 4. GFD members shall be assigned a personal SCBA mask and regulator. Members shall be accountable for their mask and regulator and shall take it on temporary assignments such as time outs. 5. The Company Officer shall be accountable for the completion of the daily readiness checks of all unassigned SCBA on his/her company. 6. The following procedures should be followed if an SCBA is found to be functioning improperly: a. In case of a catastrophic failure, immediately take the SCBA out of service and contact the Training Chief. b. In the case of minor problem (i.e. HUD lights not working) , tag the SCBA and notify the Training Division. Arrangements will be made for repairs and a replacement SCBA will be issued.

B. Cleaning & Storage of SCBA

1. SCBA should be cleaned with a mild soap and water and wiped dry with a clean rag after every use and when otherwise necessary. 2. SCBA masks should be submerged in a bucket of soapy warm water, then in a bucket of clean water. Excess water should be shaken off and then dried with a clean rag. 3. SCBA’s shall be stored in their designated brackets on the apparatus. 4. SCBA masks and regulators shall be stored in bags to prevent exposure to any contaminants.

IV. PROCEDURES FOR USE OF SCBA/RESPIRATORS

A. Selection of SCBA/Respirators

1. The following respirators will be used in IDLH atmosphere: a. A full face piece, pressure demand SCBA certified by NIOSH for a minimum service life of thirty minutes or sixty minutes. b. A combination full-face piece, pressure demand, supplied air respirator with auxiliary self-contained air supply (SABA) c. Respirators and bottles provided for escape from IDLH atmosphere shall be NIOSH certified for escape from the atmosphere in which they will be used. 2. The GFD currently uses the Scott Brand SCBA. Scott is certified by NIOSH and shall be used in accordance with the certification. Personnel shall be fit tested annually. Should the individual require a different mask then the standard issue, the GFD shall issue to the individual member the proper-fitting mask 3. For the purpose of the RPP, the term ‘SCBA” will refer to either SCBAs or SABA as described above.

B. Procedures for Use of SCBA in IDLH Environments

SCBA Users will encounter many hazardous atmosphere, not only during firefighting operations, but also during Haz-Mat incidents, below grade/confined space rescues, and levels of low oxygen levels. GFD requires that SCBA be worn in all IDLH atmospheres. The following procedures identify when an SCBA must be donned and when it can be removed. 1. SCBA users shall have the air pack on, mask in place, and breathing air from the tank during the following “IDLH emergencies”. a. Entering any IDLH atmosphere at a fire scene or other emergency. b. Any Haz-mat Hot Zone as defined in the Hazardous Materials Policy. C. Any confined space rescue or operation (i.e. storage tanks, vaults). d. Any contaminated atmospheres indicated by unsafe levels of CO, Oxygen, LEL or H2S per Haz-mat guidelines. e. When an unknown product release is encountered or when any harmful known product release is encountered. 2. SCBA Users shall have the air pack on and the mask readily available as soon as the company arrives on scene during the following “potential IDLH atmosphere. a. Fire Alarms. b. Fire Scenes � Preparing to enter the IDLH atmosphere. c. Possible Haz-Mat Incidents � Preparing to enter the Hot-Zone. d. As dictated by the Incident Commander or Company Officer.

3. Removal of SCBA a. SCBA Users shall not remove the SCBA until the atmosphere in which they are working is below safe levels as determined by the Incident Commander. b. The IC shall use the level of Carbon Monoxide as the factor for approving SCBA removal in fire situations. All other situations will be at the IC’s discretion. c. Metering must be specific, and the IC must be certain that no respiratory hazard exists before the SCBA can be removed. d. Engineering controls, such as ventilation, may be used when the Incident Commander (IC) is able to determine, by metering, that no respiratory hazard exists. Ventilation during structural firefighting shall NOT be considered a substitute for the use of respiratory protection. C. Process for Investigation of SCBA Malfunction at Emergency Scenes 1. When a SCBA malfunctions at an emergency, resulting in injury or death to the user, the following shall take place: a. The SCBA shall be immediately secured by the Incident Commander. All components shall remain as they were when the injury/death occurred, unless altered due to an urgent rescue or medical effort. i. The face piece shall remain attached. ii. The air tank shall not be refilled or removed. iii. All valves shall remain in the position found. b. The IC shall document any changes made to the SCBA due to extraordinary circumstances. (ex. RIT team found victim w/out regulator and attached RIT regulator) c. The GFD Training Chief shall be notified so that he/she may secure the SCBA and other necessary PPE to aid in the investigation. d. The Training Chief will contact a SCBA Technician. e. The SCBA Technician shall conduct an inspection on the SCBA and all components to determine the cause of the malfunction. i. This inspection will document fact(s), not opinion. ii. This shall include testing the air in the tank for contamination. iii. If unable to determine a cause of the malfunction, the SCBA shall be returned to the manufacturer for investigation. 2. If the SCBA is found to be in proper working order and the user is found to have been negligent in its use, disciplinary action shall be taken at the discretion of the Fire Chief. V. MEDICAL EVALUATIONS AND EQUIPMENT TESTING

A. Medical Evaluations 1. All SCBA Users shall pass a medical evaluation before being permitted to wear SCBA in training or on the job. a. SCBA Users are not permitted to wear SCBA until a City Nurse has determined that they are medically able to do so. b. All new hires shall be required to complete a Medical Evaluation Form. New hires must receive clearance from the City Health Clinic that they are able to wear an SCBA. Any new hire refusing a medical evaluation will be subject to termination. 2. The City Health Clinic Medical Evaluation process shall be: a. Conducted by PLHCP Plan Director using a questionnaire in Appendix C of the Respiratory Protection Standard CFR 1910.134. i. New hires will be given a copy of the medical questionnaire to fill out during the hiring process.

ii. Existing SCBA Users will fill out the questionnaire during the Annual Physical Exam conducted by the City Health Clinic. b. Administered during the employee’s normal working hours and in a manner that ensures the employee understands the content. c. All examinations, evaluations and are to remain confidential between the SCBA User and the City health Clinic Nurse. d. All SCBA Users will be granted the opportunity to speak with the City Nurse about their medical evaluation.

3. Follow-up medical evaluations may also be provided under the following conditions: a. SCBA User or new hire reports medical signs or symptoms that may impair his/her ability to use an SCBA. b. The City Nurse, Company Officer, or GFD supervisor informs the RPPA that SCBA User or new hire needs to be reevaluated. c. Information from the RPP, including observations made during fit testing and program evaluation, indicates a need for SCBA User re- evaluation. d. A change occurs in workplace conditions (i.e. physical work effort, protective clothing and temperature) that may result in a substantial increase in the physiological burden placed on an SCBA User. 4. The GFD will be responsible for any expense resulting from the employee’s Participation in the Respiratory Protection Plan.

B. Fit Testing (SCBA Mask Effectiveness) All employees using a positive pressure tight-fitting mask (face piece) respirator must pass an appropriate Quantitative Fit Test (QNFT). The Training Chief will ensure that the test is administered using an OSHA accepted protocol, as per Appendix A of the Respiratory Protection Standard (1910.134). 1. Fit testing is required prior to initial use, whenever a different mask is issued and at least annually thereafter. 2. Passing Level: If the fit factor determined through QNFT is > 500 the QNFT has been passed with that respirator.

3. An additional fit test is required whenever there are changes in the SCBA User’s physical condition that could affect mask fit (i.e. facial scarring, dental changes, cosmetic surgery, or an obvious change in body weight). This can be initiated by the SCBA User, or by a GFD Officer/Supervisor or City Nurse that makes visual observations. 4. Check for Proper Mask (Respirator) Use a. Tight fitting respirators shall not be worn by SCBA Users who have facial hair or any condition that interferes with the face-to face piece seal or valve function. b. PPE shall be worn in such a manner that does not interfere with the seal of the face piece to the face of the user. c. SCBA Users shall perform a user seal check each time they put on a tight-fitting respirator using the effective manufacture’s procedures.

C. Testing Air Quality / Filling SCBA Bottles SCBA cylinders shall be filled with CCGA Grade E NFPA 1500 compressed air only. The Training Chief shall ensure that the compressed air maintains Grade E quality and that all GFD air compressors are tested quarterly. Upon testing, samples are sent to an independent testing agency. (Present contractor is Lawrence Factor Labs in Miami Lakes, Florida.)

1. Procedure for Air Testing

a. Obtain test kit from testing agency each quarter. b. Each kit has a containment canister and proper adapters for retrieving the air sample. c. Start the compressor and run the pressure down to 2500 psi. d. Hook the canister up to the fill station and run for 3 minutes. e. Disconnect the canister. Document the pressure run, the time and date, the compressor hours, and which fill station the sample is from. f. Ship the samples to Lawrence Factor Labs in Miami Lakes, Florida. g. Results should be received within 1 month, in the form of a certificate and a data result sheet for every fill station. File for future reference/inspection. 2. Procedures for Filling Bottles a. Slide bottle into cage. b. Hook up high pressure hose and open bottle. c. Shut door to cage which activates the safety switch, if equipped. d. Turn bank on cascade cylinder. e. Turn fill valve slowly until bottle reaches capacity. f. When bottle reaches capacity, turn fill valve off. g. Open door, turn bottle off and bleed the remaining pressure. h. Unhook high pressure hose.

VI. SCBA TRAINING

SCBA Users encounter many hazardous atmospheres requiring the use of an SCBA, including firefighting operations, hazardous materials incidents, below grade/confined space rescues, and incidents containing areas of low oxygen levels. To ensure the SCBA User is protected at all times, each shall be trained and certified in the proper use and care of an SCBA.

A. Training Needs by Job Function 1. All GFD members up to and including Battalion Chiefs, shall participate in at least one hour of smoke and/or maze training annually. Active participation in live burns shall satisfy this requirement. 2. All GFD members shall be equipped with and trained in proper SCBA use and maintenance. 3. GFD employees (other than members) whose duties require them to wear an SCBA, shall be qualified through the Training Division. (i.e. Fire Prevention, Fire Investigation, etc)

B. Overview of Training 1. Effective training for SCBA Users is essential. The training must be comprehensive, yet understandable. 2. Training shall be conducted by instructors who have adequate knowledge of OSHA training requirements. 3. SCBA training should occur a minimum of once per year, and: a. When changes in the workplace or the SCBA-type render previous training obsolete. b. When inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge or use of the respirator indicate that the employee has not retained the requisite understanding or skill. c. If other situations arise in which retraining appears necessary to ensure safe SCBA use. 4. Training shall be provided prior to requiring the SCBA User to use an SCBA in the workplace.

5. The training shall combine classroom instruction with hands-on practical use of the SCBA and related equipment. 6. The training shall ensure that each SCBA User can demonstrate knowledge of the following: a. Overview of the GFD Respiratory Protection Plan and OSHA standard. b. Respiratory Protection safety procedures & requirements. c. SCBA Operation and use. d. SCBA capabilities and limitations. e. How improper fit, usage, or maintenance can compromise the protective effect. f. How to use the SCBA effectively in emergency situations, including malfunctions. g. How to inspect, put on and remove, use, and check the seals of the respirator. h. SCBA maintenance and storage procedures. i. How to recognize medical signs and symptoms that may limit or prevent the effective use of an SCBA.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: August 1, 2007

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Employee Use and Earning of Leave

I. PURPOSE

A. To inform members of the vacation, sick, civil and educational leave benefits provided by the City for each member.

II. POLICY

A. Vacation Leave 1. Each full time employee shall earn vacation leave equivalent to their regular hours worked per week. Each employee earns vacation bi-weekly and entry shall be made on each paycheck with regards to the accrued balance at the date ending that particular pay period.

2. Employees shall be granted the use of earned vacation leave upon request or at those times designated by the Chief which will least obstruct normal operation of the department. However, an employee shall not be granted vacation while serving probationary period unless denial of leave would create an unusual hardship.

3. Each employee may accumulate vacation leave equivalent to that earned in a two year period. All unused vacation leave in excess of the maximum two year accumulation will be converted to sick leave (per Council vote November 21, 2006). Each employee shall be responsible for their accumulated vacation since a current balance shall be given with each pay check. The following table will show the amount of vacation time earned by permanent full-time employees. a. Table

(Shift) hours Consecutive (8-5) Personnel (8-5) hours per Shift Personnel per pay Years of Service Hours Per Year pay period Hours Per Year period (hrs. (hrs. per year per year /26) /26) 0 - 4 80 3.08 106 4.08 5 - 9 96 3.69 127.2 4.89 10 - 14 120 4.62 159 6.12 15 - 19 144 5.54 190.8 7.34 20 and thereafter 168 6.46 222.6 8.56

4. Vacation accrued but not yet posted will not be allowed. Only vacation recorded on current payroll printout shall be taken.

B. Sick Leave 1. Sick leave is intended for use by eligible employees when the employee is unable to work due to their own illness.

2. Sick leave is allowed due to the illness of a member of the employee's immediate family who lives in the employee's household, if such illness requires the care or presence of the employee until other arrangements can be made and if authorized by the Department Head. This authorization has been granted on an individual basis and will continue.

3. Sick leave is allowed upon the death of a member of the employee's immediate family and for this purpose may not exceed three (3) consecutive work days except with the approval of the Department Head. a. Item three (3) above does not state the three (3) consecutive days are mandatory or automatic, but that it may not exceed three consecutive workdays without Department Head approval, therefore, sick leave for this purpose will be treated as any other sick leave. If any employee is incapable, emotionally or otherwise, of doing their job because of a death in the immediate family, they should call their immediate supervisor and request sick leave on a day to day basis.

4. Sick leave shall be requested prior to the beginning of a member's assigned shift and will be approved or disapproved on an individual basis.

5. Sick leave is to be used when a medical situation involves the employee or a member of their immediate family. This includes the deaths of members of their immediate family.

6. When someone is called at work and it is considered an emergency or requires them to leave work, then there is always a considerable amount of stress and high emotions. If sick leave were given for this high level of emotions, then all emergency leave would be listed as sick leave. Thus a division must be made between sick leave and vacation when used during emergency leaves. a. Sick Leave - All emergency leave used because of a medical situation involving an employee or their family, and death in the immediate family. b. Vacation - All emergency leave used for other reasons. c. It shall be the responsibility of the employee to report the need to leave to their immediate supervisor. d. It shall be the responsibility of the immediate supervisor to record the absence in the station log and to report to their appropriate supervisor. Any additional or pertinent information should be reported as soon as possible to insure correct posting of leave records and limit adjustments.

Note: Sick leave is earned at the rate of: 3.69 hours per pay period for 8-5 employees and 4.89 hours per pay period for shift employees

C. Civil Leave 1. When an employee is subpoena as a witness (car wreck etc.) and they are not part of the suit, then the employee will be charged with Civil Leave. Vacation will not be charged against the employee.

D. Paid Educational Leave 1. Employees will be given paid educational leave when they are attending a school, conference or other function where attendance is required of that employee.

2. Paid educational leave will be given if the employee is attending approved schools, conferences or other functions voluntarily on behalf or at the request of the city or fire department.

3. An employee who is a member of a volunteer fire department will give paid educational leave upon acceptance into the National Fire Academy and the volunteer fire department is paying all expenses. The employee will be given paid educational leave for the time needed to attend the academy.

4. When possible, Hazardous Materials Certification / EMT Certification/ and Recertification classes will be scheduled at the fire department during work hours. If this scheduling is impractical and employees are on-duty during the time that Certification/Recertification classes are taught at another location, the employee may be given paid educational leave to attend these classes.

5. Paid educational leave may be given to probationary employees, who are on-duty and have not completed their first year of employment, to attend classes for: a. All levels of Hazardous Materials Certification (class time while off-duty will not be reimbursed) b. EMT - Certification (class time while off-duty will be reimbursed on a time for time basis. The shift Battalion Chief will allow the employee off-duty time during the twenty-eight (28) day pay cycle. This time will be taken at the discretion of the Battalion Chief and in conjunction with the Kelly Day when possible. This time will be recorded in the Daily Log Book as EMT-Swap Time and will not be recorded in the payroll sheet sent to the Finance Dept.

E. Paid Educational Leave will not be given for formal education such as an Associates or Bachelors Degree. However, as stated in the attached memorandum dated November 30, 1995 that has been sent to all fire stations, an employee may use their Kelly days for educational leave if he/she is enrolled in a Bachelors Degree program. (Read memo below)

Memo

Date: November 30, 1995

To: All Fire Personnel

From: Ken Lay Fire Chief

Subject: Rescheduling of Kelly Days for Educational Leave

With the adoption of our new pay plan, each employee now has a financial or potential promotional incentive to pursue a Bachelors Degree. Some concern has been expressed because four-year degree program classes are not given twice during the week, as are the Associate Degree classes. Under the Bachelors Degree program employees will be working on some nights/days that classes are scheduled. To assist employees who desire to continue their education by entering into a Bachelors Degree program, Battalion Chiefs, who are currently scheduling Kelly Days to provide for maximum shift coverage by all ranks of the department will also adjust Kelly Days to assist employees entering into a Bachelor Degree program. An exception to the above that will apply to an Associate Degree program is: 1. When classes, such as electives that are not taught twice weekly to allow an employee to attend on off- duty days, are part of the curriculum, an employee will be allowed to use Kelly time to attend these classes if leave time is available. 2. After an employee registers in a Bachelor Degree program, they are to provide the Battalion Chief with a class schedule for each semester. The Battalion Chief will assign the Kelly Days as usual on the Kelly Day roster. Each day in the 28 day cycle that the employee is scheduled to work, they will be allowed to use any part of their 12 hour Kelly Day to go to class. If all 12 of the Kelly Day hours are not used, the employee will be given the remainder of their time off on their regular Kelly Day or before the end of the 28-day cycle.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: November 2, 2004

Rescinds:

Subject: Donation of Leave Policy

The City of Gastonia’s Donation of Leave Policy applies to all Fire Department employees. This policy has been placed after this page. City of Gastonia Donation of Leave Policy

Purpose:

When an employee is in need of sick leave due to a Verifiable Medical Emergency, other employees may donate sick leave or annual leave to the employee to financially assist the individual.

Application:

All full time and part-time employees, who have worked at least 1250 hours immediately preceding the medical leave may qualify for leave donations during a Verifiable Medical Emergency.

Provisions:

The receipt and donation of shared leave to cover a Verifiable Medical Emergency will be subject to the following provisions:

1) A Verifiable Medical Emergency is defined as follows:

a) It must be an unplanned, serious medical condition or medical trauma requiring the care of a physician that occurs to an employee or to a member of the employee’s immediate family who lives in the employee’s place of residence, or children, stepchildren, parents, spouse, or siblings, regardless of place of residence; and

b) it must require the employee to be absent from work for more than 4 weeks; and

c) it creates a loss of income and economic hardship to the employee due to an exhaustion of paid leave.

2) Short term, incidental, non-critical medical situations, including normal pregnancies not requiring bed rest, and absences for well-baby care are not considered Verifiable Medical Emergencies.

3) Absences covered by worker’s compensation shall not be considered under this policy.

4) Employees, who have given notice that they are resigning or retiring from the City shall not be eligible to donate leave under this policy.

5) To receive a benefit under this policy, the full-time recipient must have less than 32 hours of combined sick and annual leave benefits available at the time of the sick leave donation. (Part-time recipients must have less than 16 hours of sick time benefits available at the time of the sick leave donation.)

6) Regular full-time employees donating sick or annual leave must have a minimum combined total of 240 sick and/or annual leave hours remaining after the donation. (Part-time employees must have a minimum of 120 sick leave hours remaining after the donation.)

7) Employees eligible to donate leave may not contribute more hours than are needed by a recipient.

8) Donations of leave must be made in one-hour increments with a minimum donation of (4) hours.

9) Employees eligible to donate leave may not provide more than 20 hours per pay period per recipient.

10) Donated sick and/or annual leave will be deducted from the contributing employees’ leave balances and added to the receiving employee’s sick leave balance.

11) An employee may begin using donated leave only after all available, accrued sick and annual leave has been exhausted. While using donated leave, an employee will continue to earn sick and annual leave. When accounting for leave, this newly accrued leave shall be used prior to the remaining donated leave.

12) No employee will be allowed to intimidate, threaten, or coerce any other employee for the purpose of interfering with any right which the employee may have with respect to donating, receiving, or using leave under this program. Any such action may be grounds for disciplinary action.

13) Federal and State privacy laws require that medical information remain confidential. Therefore, when disclosing information on an approved recipient (employee or family member), only a statement that the recipient has a prolonged medical condition can be made. If the recipient wishes to make either his or her identity or his or her medical status public, then he or she must sign a release to allow the information to be known.

14) Any unused leave at the expiration of the medical condition shall be treated as follows:

a) The recipient’s sick leave account balance shall not exceed a total of 40 hours (prorated for part-time employees).

b) Any additional unused donated leave shall be returned to the donor(s) on a pro-rata basis and credited to the leave account from which it was donated. Fractions of one hour shall not be returned to an individual donor.

15) If a recipient leaves the City’s employ due to resignation, death, or retirement, participation in the program ends. Unused leave shall be returned to the donor(s) on a pro-rata basis and credited to the same account from which it originally came.

16) Sick leave or annual leave may be donated to any eligible employee in the City’s service.

Procedures:

1) Eligible employees, who have less than 32 hours of combined sick and annual leave available, may submit a written request on a copy of Attachment #1 of this policy through the Human Resources Department for donations of leave to financially assist them during their Verifiable Medical Emergency. This written request may also be initiated by a fellow employee, who nominates the eligible recipient, based on the criteria in Provision # 13 of this policy.

In the case of nominations initiated by persons other than the recipient, the City will only proceed with the requesting of donations of leave if the nominated employee consents.

2) Upon receipt of the written request for leave donations, the Human Resources Department will verify the individual’s eligibility.

3) Once the individual’s eligibility is verified, the Human Resources Department will email a request for donations citywide describing the situation, while maintaining the individual’s anonymity (unless the employee has requested that his or her identity be made known).

4) Interested employees will submit in writing a completed copy of Attachment # 1 to the Human Resources Department indicating their proposed donations to be applied in the Verifiable Medical Emergency.

5) Once the eligibility of the proposed donations are verified, the Human Resources Department will forward the information to the Payroll Division, where the appropriate accounts will be adjusted.

6) After accounts are adjusted, the Payroll Division will notify the following individuals of the changes:

1. the employee with the Verifiable Medical Emergency, 2. his or her department head, and 3. all donating employees.

7) Upon notification, the employee with the Verifiable Medical Emergency will be able to use the additional paid leave.

8) Whenever the eligible employee’s sick leave ends, the Payroll Division shall re-distribute any unused donated sick and annual leave time according to Provisions #14 and #15 of this policy.

City of Gastonia Donated Leave Request

Complete this Section if You are seeking Donated Leave For Yourself

/ RECIPIENT’S FULL NAME RECIPIENT’S DEPARTMENT/POSITION

REASON FOR REQUEST

RECIPIENT’S (SS) NUMBER PROJECTED # OF HOURS NEEDED

( ) ( ) Your Signature (date ) Department Head Signature (date)

Complete this Section if You are seeking Donated Leave For Someone Else

/

RECIPIENT’S FULL NAME RECIPIENT’S DEPARTMENT/POSITION

REASON FOR REQUEST

PROJECTED # OF HOURS NEEDED

( ) ( ) Your Signature (date ) Department Head Signature (date)

Complete this Section if You are Donating Leave

/ RECIPIENT’S NAME RECIPIENT’S DEPARTMENT/POSITION

YOUR FULL NAME YOUR SOCIAL SECURITY NUMBER

/ / YOUR DEPARTMENT/POSITION PROPOSED # OF HOURS DONATED

( ) ( ) Your Signature (date ) Department Head Signature (date)

For Human Resources Use Only

Recipient Eligibility YES NO Donor Eligibility

Employed 1250 Hours Donor is Fulltime Serious Medical Situation Donor is Part Time Less Than 32 Hours Combined Leave Leave Remaining Recipient Eligible After Donation: # hrs

Donor is Eligible Date Received Donor is not Eligible Date Processed Effective Date Recipient Notified SIGNATURE OF PROCESSOR DATE Donors Notified

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Pay Cycle Hours Worked

I. SHIFT PERSONNEL – HOURS WORKED A. Table

PAY PERIOD A - SHIFT B - SHIFT C - SHIFT HOURS WORKED HOURS WORKED HOURS WORKED First - Pay Period of 28 day Cycle 120 96 120 Second - Pay Period of 28 day Cycle 96 120 120 216 216 240 LESS KELLY-DAY -12 LESS KELLY-DAY -12 LESS KELLY-DAY -12 TOTAL HOURS SHIFT SCHEDULED TO 204 204 LONG CYCLE 228 WORK 1 st pay period -102 2 nd pay period 126 AVERAGE OF 53 HRS. PER. WK. 204  2 =102 HRS. 204  2 =102 HRS.

6(102) + 8 reg. +16 ovt. rate = 63612 wks. = 53 hours per. 1ST PAY PERIOD 102 1ST PAY PERIOD 102 1ST PAY PERIOD 102 wk. average or HRS. HRS. 2ND PAY PERIOD 102 6366 pay periods = 106 hrs. average bi-weekly 2ND PAY PERIOD 102 2ND PAY PERIOD 102 REG. HRS. = 8 OVERTIME MUST BE PAID FOR HOURS WORKED HRS. HRS. OVER TIME rate = 16 OVER 212 HOURS in a 28 day cycle. 228 -212 = 16 hours Total hrs. 126 that must be paid at the overtime rate every sixth (6th) pay period during the Long cycle!

II. Payroll A. Posting of Payroll a. Starting on Wednesday of the final week of the pay cycle; each chief will verify their shifts payroll by having captains verify time used by their firefighters. Once they verify payroll, they are to send an email confirmation to the battalion chief at station one. That chief is to then send the Deputy Chief an email confirming that their shifts payroll has been verified. Barring no extraordinary events, this process should be completed prior to 12pm on Wednesday Thursday and Friday. b. After 12pm Wednesday, Thursday, and Friday the Administrative Assistants will log the time in the Eden payroll system. If there are any changes to your respective shift after 12pm, send an email update to the Deputy Chief and Administrative Assistants. The necessary changes will then be made to the payroll sheet and to Eden. c. The Saturday following the end of the pay cycle a Battalion Chief is to review the payroll one final time to ensure accuracy. Any further corrections should also be emailed to the Deputy Chief and Administrative Assistants. If there are no further corrections the Administrative Assistants will post payroll by 10am Monday morning.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.20.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: October 1, 2007

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Employee Leave for Shift Personnel

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a Department Policy for allowance of personnel leave within the Operations Division.

II. POLICY

A. A maximum of seven (7) personnel will be allowed to be off shift at any given time. This allowance includes any combination of Kelly Days, Vacations, Sick Leave, and other leave. The distribution of members allowed off may include a maximum of four (4) officers. Also a maximum of two (2) Haz- Mat officers will be allowed off at one time. B. A member who desires to cancel all or any part of his/her vacation must cancel by 10:00 AM on his/her shift prior to the scheduled vacation. All vacation scheduled after this time must be taken as scheduled.

III. TAKING OF LEAVE TIME

A. Only vacation time recorded on your paycheck stub each pay period will be allowed. No vacation accumulated, but unrecorded on pay stub will be permitted. B. Any time taken over the amount shown on the pay stub will be counted as Leave Without Pay. C. Note: Leave for extended periods of time: 1. All leave time (with prior approval) can be taken at the discretion of the employee (and in any order) with the exception of sick leave. Ex. The employee must be out under a doctor’s care before sick leave can be taken with other approved leaves. 2. An employee on extended leave that is not due to sickness can use any combination of trade time, vacation, LWOP, etc. 3. An employee on extended leave that is sick and under a doctor’s care, can use any combination of sick leave, trade time, vacation leave, LWOP, etc. (An exception will be for employees on extended leave approved under the Family Medical Leave Act). City policy requires employees to exhaust all sick leave prior to other leaves being used.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

GAG 07.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 1, 2020

Rescinds: June 2, 2017

Subject: Exchanges in Tours of Duty

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy governing voluntary exchanges in tours of duty between members of this department.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Any member wishing to exchange tours of duty with another member shall obtain permission from his or her immediate supervisor prior to the tour of duty that is to be exchanged. The member relieving said member must be able to satisfactorily perform the duties of the member being relieved as determined by the Company Officer. Exchanges in tours of duty are a privilege, not a right. The appropriate Battalion Chief or designee has the authority to approve or deny exchanges in tours of duty based on the needs of the department or shift.

III. POLICY

A. No new employee during their first year of employment will be allowed to work for another employee. B. Requests for exchanges in tours of duty must be approved by the member's immediate supervisor. C. The proper entries in the appropriate station logbook shall be accomplished by the respective supervisor(s). In addition, a “Trade Time Request Form” will be signed by both affected employees, the immediate supervisor, and the appropriate Battalion Chief. This form will be maintained by the Battalion Chief for proper follow up as needed. Exception: If either person is unable to sign forms, the Captain granting the trade time can sign for the requester or requested if verbally communicated to the Captain by both parties. D. No member will be permitted to have another member work for him or her in exchange for money, barter, or any other form of compensation; time exchanged must be repaid with time actually worked. Violation of this policy will be considered as a Category ‘A’ offense and treated accordingly. E. Traded time will not be considered hours of work for overtime purposes under the following limitations: 1. The trading is done voluntarily by the employees participating and not at the request of the employer. 2. The reason for trading time is due not to the employer's business operations, but to the employee's desire or need to attend to personal matters. 3. A record is maintained by the employer of all time traded by employees.

4. The period during which time is traded and/or paid back does not extend beyond six (6) months. Exceptions to this policy will only be made on a case-by-case basis, and must be approved by the Operations Chief or the Fire Chief.

F. If the requested employee does not report for duty, the requesting employee will be charged with the appropriate leave.

G. Failure to report 1. First Offense a. Fire Department employee agrees to stand duty for another member; the requested employee fails to report for duty; the requesting employee will be charged with the appropriate leave. The requested employee will receive an oral reprimand and will not be permitted to ex-change time for a minimum of six months except for employees that the requested employee owes time to.

2. Second Offense a. The requesting employee will be charged with the appropriate leave and the requested employee will receive a written reprimand and will not be permitted to exchange time for a minimum of twelve months except for employees that the requested employee owes time to and the requested employee will be suspended without pay for 10.75 hours.

H. Any employee who is under disciplinary action for the abuse of sick leave whom has used all his/her accrued sick leave will not have requests for exchange in tours of duty approved, when same is requested for an extended illness. This employee will be able to use accrued vacation if requested or LWOP.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.20.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: July 7, 2008

Rescinds:

Subject: Shift Change Responsibilities

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy governing the continued manning of stations and apparatus during shift change.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Members of the Gastonia Fire Department are required to be in uniform and prepared for response with their assigned apparatus when their tour of duty begins and if necessary, until relieved past ending tour of duty to maintain adequate staffing.

III. POLICY

A. Tours of duty shall begin at 0800 hrs. This shall be applicable for regularly scheduled members and not those on approved leave, i.e., vacation, sick educational, KD, etc. When approved leave time creates vacancies, continuous coverage shall be ensured by planning for shift staffing for the next work day utilizing overtime rotation. B. An employee who realizes that he/she may be tardy shall contact their immediate supervisor who, given an acceptable reason, may allow an employee from the off going shift to temporarily standby for the employee. The standby employee shall be qualified to function in the position of the tardy employee. (i.e. relief driver, company officer) C. Captains and Engineers (including acting positions) from both the arriving and departing shifts shall communicate with their respective counterparts on issues regarding incidents, equipment, station maintenance/upkeep and any other issues and or concerns pertinent to the station, respective companies, and shifts. D. Station Captains, or those filling in, shall communicate at the beginning of the shift to company members, an action plan for the work day. This action plan shall include, but is not limited to, training, in-service tours, truck and station maintenance, and special events. Any part of the daily plan necessitating out of service time or multiple companies shall be communicated to the shift commander. E. In the event, unanticipated leave occurrences create a staffing deficiency at shift change, off going company members may not leave until the shift commander grants permission to do so. F. It shall be the responsibility of the present shift commander to ensure continuous district coverage through shift change. When unanticipated leave occurs and a company is rendered out of service, the shift commander shall be notified by the company officer or designee from the oncoming shift at

which time he/she shall request to (1) put the company on Status 2 or (2) request departing shift members to remain on duty pursuant to Subsection (E) above. G. A member may be declared relieved, once he/she has communicated with both, his/her designated relief person and proper commanding officer.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO.07.20.05 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: July 7, 2008

Rescinds:

Subject: Overtime Requirements for Operational Personnel

PURPOSE

The Fire Department has multiple reasons for overtime, which include the following: Emergency incidents, Training, Staffing, Community Events and Special Projects. Each of these is necessary to ensure the department meets determined commitments. The purpose of overtime is to ensure proper staffing in the Operations Division.

DISCUSSION

Overtime is defined in the City of Gastonia Municipal Code. An effective way to manage overtime within the Fire Department is needed. Overtime shall be approved through the Fire Chief or designee. Overtime for employees shall be issued either through Compensatory time or be paid in the amount of 1.5 times the hours worked with a minimum of two hours per occurrence when called in while off-duty.

PROCEDURE

1. The Gastonia Fire Department will maintain an overtime list to ensure all personnel will have equal access to receiving overtime. 2. The overtime list will be maintained at Station 1, to establish the list all personnel will be ask if they wish to be placed on the list. All members being placed on the list should give appropriate phone numbers, no more than two. Each shift will have a overtime list. Once list is established, if a employee refuses to work when asked 3 times within a year, they will be removed from the list for a period of one year. 3. Overtime should be filled from the Station needing overtime to maintain staffing first, if no personnel are available then the overtime list would be used. 4. Staffing needs are to be determined by a Rank-for-Rank basis to ensure a company is staffed with a Company Officer, Driver and Firefighters, which constitutes a functional crew. 5. At the discretion of the Battalion Chief or Acting Battalion Chief a employee may be required to work overtime if needed to maintain minimum level staffing requirements. 6. The Fire Chief or Battalion Chief will approve all overtime in order to maintain staffing.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: March 03, 2015

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993

The information below represents the process to request Family and Medical Leave. The Family and Medical Leave Act Policy can be viewed by following the hyperlink.

I. THE FMLA PROCESS

. Contact the City Nurse to start the FMLA process. Please call x6999 for an appointment. If the employee tells you or you have knowledge that the employee may qualify for FMLA, please have the employee contact me.

. You will be given the Eligibility Notice, the Rights and Responsibilities form and the FMLA form for you or your family member.

. Take the correct form (Employee Serious Health Condition or Family Member Serious Health Condition) to your health care provider.

. The forms must be taken to the doctor that is treating you or your family member with the serious health condition that you are requesting FMLA for.

. Return the form to Leslie for review.

. You have 15 days to return the completed form. Failure to return the form on a timely basis may result in denial of FMLA leave. Please note that unexcused absences may result in disciplinary action including termination of employment under the City’s attendance policy.

. If an incomplete certification is returned to me, you will be informed of what additional information is needed on a Designation Notice form.

. You then have 7 days to obtain a corrected certification.

. If the certification still is not completed according to guidelines, you must sign and give permission to contact the health care provider filling out the form to obtain additional information. If you deny permission and the certification is still not filled out correctly, FMLA may be denied.

. After a correctly completed form is returned to me and, if necessary, I have obtained additional information from your doctor, you will be given a Designation Notice within 5 business days that states if your FMLA was approved or not approved. The department will also receive a copy of the

Designation Letter and Eligibility Letter with the start date of the employees FMLA date into Eden. You will also be given this form when you have exhausted all of your FMLA for the 12 month period or if we are requesting you to have a 2nd or 3rd opinion.

. We have the right to request a 2nd and/or 3rd opinion for medical certification at the employer’s expense, which will be noted on the Designation Notice form.

. The City may require recertification by your physician of your condition but there are limitations on how often recertification can be requested.

. Before returning to work, you may be required to have a Fitness-for-duty Certification (FFD) at your own expense. If you are taking FMLA leave on an intermittent basis, you may be required FFD certification every 30 days if there is reasonable safety concerns related to the reason for leave.

. You are responsible for indicating all the time taken as FMLA on your timesheet and also notifying time entry personnel of FMLA if you call in for the day.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.30.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: December 1, 2019

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Light or Modified Duty

I. PURPOSE To establish written and administrative procedures for temporary light duty.

II. POLICY Temporary light-duty assignments, when available, are designed for employees who, because of injury, illness or temporary disability, are unable to perform their regular assignments, but who are capable of performing light duty assignments.

III. DEFINITION Temporary Light Duty: Temporary assignments, because of injury or other temporary medical restriction, provided for eligible employees who are temporarily unable to perform all of their job requirements.

IV. PROCEDURES AND ELIGIBILITY A. Workers Compensation 1. Employees who are approved for worker's compensation benefits and are temporarily unable to perform all of their job requirements will be assigned to temporary light duty. 2. The Human Resources Department will coordinate with the designated healthcare provider to identify the work restrictions. 3. There is no set time limit on the duration of temporary light duty for an approved workers compensation claim. B. Non-Workers Compensation Light Duty 1. Employees may request light duty for injuries or temporary disabilities, which are not subject to worker's compensation. Any employee requesting to be considered for temporary light duty under this section must make a written request to the Fire Chief. 2. Employees requesting a light duty assignment, must provide a note from a physician identifying the employee’s restrictions and the expected duration. 3. Pregnant employees are eligible for temporary light duty under this section.

4. Human Resources Department will coordinate with the designated healthcare provider to identify the work restrictions. 5. Light duty is strictly temporary and should not exceed 60 days in duration, except with regard to light duty based upon pregnancy. In no event shall temporary light duty attributable to a non-work related injury, extend past 12 months. 6. If an employee is unable to return to his or her full duty assignment within 60 days, he or she will submit a written request for an extension of light duty in conjunction with a note from a physician or designated healthcare provider providing the restrictions and expected duration. This documentation must be submitted to the Fire Chief prior to the expiration of the approved light duty. Requests for extension of light duty will be considered for 30 day increments maximum.

C. Activities Prohibited While on Temporary Light Duty Employees who are on light duty due to any type of injury or illness will not: 1. Engage in secondary employment in their capacity as a firefighter; 2. Participate in any off-site training or conferences, unless prior approval has been received from the Fire Chief or designee.

D. Return to Regular Assignment When an employee who has been assigned to light duty and has received clearance from his or her physician to return to his/her regular duty assignment, the employee will:

1. Provide a note from the physician stating the employee may return to his or her regular position with no restrictions. If your physician requires a copy of your job description, it can be obtained by contacting the Deputy Fire Chief. 2. Receive clearance from the City’s Occupational Health Nurse, to return to full duty. 3. The Fire Chief, or his designee, will forward all such documents along with any recommendations to the Department of Human Resources.

ADDENDUM “A” REQUEST FOR TEMPORARY LIGHT DUTY

Name: ______Employee #: ______

Address: ______

Department: ______Title: ______

Date of Hire: ______Years of Service: ______

To: Fire Chief Please accept this notice as my formal request for consideration of a temporary light duty assignment. I am requesting temporary light duty for the following reason(s):

(Explain what essential functions of your current job you may not be able to perform and any tasked functions you believe you could perform.)

Attached is a signed medical statement from my licensed physician justifying my request for temporary light duty, including the expected duration of my condition, and specific nature of work restrictions. ______Signature of Employee Date of Request

Approved/Denied by Fire Chief Approved Denied

______Fire Chief Signature Date Approved

Date: November 3, 1996

To: Nancy Traywick - Account Clerk/Accounting Division

From: Foy Watson - Chief of Operations/Fire Department

Thru: Dave Henderson - Director of Human Resources

Ref: Modified Duty for Shift/Fire Personnel

Fire personnel that work on a 24 hour shift are now provided an opportunity to work 8-5 (8 hour day) if work is available.

When this opportunity arises, a Personnel Action will be sent to you requesting that the employee’s Bi-weekly/hourly rate be converted from a 106 hr. Bi-weekly rate to an 80 hr. Bi-weekly rate.

Example:  Employee’s current 106 hr. Bi-weekly rate is $1,260 Bi-weekly $1,260 106= 11.8868 (hourly rate)

 Employee’s new 80 hr. Bi-weekly rate is $1,260 Bi-weekly $1,260 80= 15.7500 (hourly rate)

The employee’s accrued vacation and sick leave will also have to be adjusted. From your prior discussions with Joy, I was informed that these entries had to be made manually and that you would prefer to make these changes when the employee returns to the 106 hr. work week. I discussed this with Dave Henderson and he has no objections with these changes being made at your discretion.

Once the employee is able to resume his/her regular duties and return to his/her shift, another Personnel action will be sent to you requesting that their hourly rate be converted back to the 106 Bi- weekly/hourly rate.

If you have any questions please contact us at 6806. Thanks!

City of Gastonia Fire Department

Foy S. Watson Assistant Fire Chief

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.30.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Policy for Accommodation of Pregnant Employees

I. POLICY

A. It will be the policy of this department to make reasonable accommodation to expectant firefighters by helping to ensure the health and safety of the mother and her child.

II. DISCUSSION

A. "Certain chemical and physical agents have been recognized as having detrimental effects on human reproduction'. . The list includes, but is-not limited to these agents: heat, heavy metal (e.g. lead and cadmium), glycol ethers, pesticides, organic solvents, styrene and vinyl chloride. Maternal exposure after conception may result in the death of the fetus or structural and functional abnormalities in the newborn. PCB's are still found in some areas. These also have been shown to cause birth defects. Many of the above mentioned agents may be structurally part of a building or may be housed in a building which is on fire and the pregnant firefighter therefore would be exposed which could have an adverse outcome on the pregnancy. Sporadic demands for excessive physical work such as pulling, lifting, and shoving of the heavy equipment that is required in firefighting can also be detrimental to the outcome of the pregnancy" (Martin P. Wasserman, MD, J.D., Director of Human Services, Arlington County Virginia).

III. PROCEDURE

A. Upon learning of pregnancy, a firefighter shall: 1. Inform her personal physician of her occupation. 2. Relate to the physician the work and the work environments involved in firefighting. (Strenuous work, temperature extremes, periodic exposure to hazardous chemicals and smoke, etc.) 3. Ask for a written recommendation from her physician as to whether or not the firefighter should plan to return to duty or how long the firefighter may safely remain on duty without risk to the mother or child. 4. Inform her immediate supervisor regarding her condition and her personal physician's recommendations.

B. Response of the Department:

1. Upon notification by the employee of her pregnancy, the Deputy Chief of Operations will assign the firefighter to a light-duty task which will allow her to continue to serve the community in a beneficial manner, while at the same time helping to ensure the health and safety of the mother and child during pregnancy. 2. The firefighter so assigned will be allowed to deviate from her standard uniform. She will be able to wear clothing that is comfortable to her while maintaining a professional appearance. 3. The firefighter may use sick leave; vacation or leave without pay, if she is unable to perform light duty. 4. After the child has been born and the firefighter has been deemed fit for duty by her personal physician, she has an option of returning for duty or requesting a personal leave of absence (under the Family and Medical Leave Act) (See Attendance Policy, IB-108.1). 5. A written recommendation from the firefighter's personal physician will be required before the firefighter is allowed to return to duty.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.40.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Recall of Off-Duty Personnel

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy governing the recall of off-duty personnel.

II. DISCUSSION

A. During an emergency, the Fire Chief or designee may order the recall of off duty department personnel on a limited or total basis as the circumstance may indicate. On a limited basis, the recall may be invoked by individual shifts. For a recall of all or any off duty personnel, the Fire Chief or designee shall specify the person or persons responsible to make the recall.

III. POLICY

A. Each Battalion Chief will maintain a current roster of personnel assigned to their respective shift indicating the primary and secondary (if applicable) phone number of each person. B. This list is to be placed in an accessible location so designated by the Battalion Chiefs. C. This department Emergency Recall Roster listed by shifts will be provided to the following: 1. A copy to City Fire Communications Center 2. A copy to Chief of Operations 3. A copy to be placed in Battalion Chiefs/Captains office D. When an emergency recall of off duty personnel has been declared, any personnel contacted and informed of the emergency shall report to their respective station or offices, unless otherwise directed. E. It will be at the discretion of the Fire Chief, or designee, to assign the function of recalling the required personnel. If an emergency occurs during normal business hours, 8-5 personnel can make this particular assignment. Such as Training or Life Safety employees. Should a major emergency occur after normal business hours and station #1 is empty, an alternate Engine Company shall be relocated to station #1 and assigned the task of recalling personnel. F. The person(s) responsible for recall shall record the name of members contacted and those where contact was attempted. This information will be subsequently forwarded to the Fire Chief. G. In the event of an ineffective recall of personnel by the method described, the Fire Chief or his/her designee may order the contact of radio and television stations requesting special bulletins advising off duty Fire Department personnel to report for duty at their official duty station.

H. Responsibilities of declaring an Emergency Recall:

1. The Chief of Operations (and then the Battalion Chiefs) may assume the responsibility to declare an emergency recall of off duty personnel any time the Fire Chief is not readily available. 2. The responsibility of the assignment of recall should be specific, specifying the number of off duty personnel to be called, (Total Recall vs. Limited Recall) the rank or special classification of personnel to be called, and to specify where the off duty personnel are to report. (This may depend on the staffing of reserve apparatus).

If limited recall is to be used, the OFF-GOING Shift personnel should be the first to be recalled up to 12 O’clock midnight. After 12 O’clock midnight, the ON-COMING shift personnel should be the first to be recalled.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.40.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: City’s Inclement Weather Policy

SUBJECT: CITY'S INCLEMENT WEATHER POLICY (Restatement)

A. In order to minimize confusion, the following is the City's policy concerning inclement weather.

B. When an employee is not able to report to work due to inclement weather (except those employees who are required to work due to employment condition) they may elect to use accrued vacation or leave without pay (LWOP). Sick leave may only be used in accordance with the City's Personnel Ordinance, i.e. sickness, family death or medical appointments.

C. This policy has been adjusted to ensure equal treatment for all employees. Please see that your respective departments adhere to these provisions.

D. Example: If City Hall closes at 12:00 noon, anyone leaving at that time will be charged with one-half (1/2) day of vacation or LWOP.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 07.50.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 2, 2017

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: AWOL – Absence Without Official Leave

I. PURPOSE

A. In order to provide adequate fire protection services to the citizens of Gastonia, it is essential that staffing levels be maintained as scheduled and strictly controlled. This policy is designed to take corrective action against an employee who does not report for duty as scheduled.

II. POLICY

A. An employee shall give advance notice for unanticipated absences to their immediate supervisor before beginning of the assigned shift at 0800 and 2000 when on Kelly Day. Failure to do so will result in the employee being considered AWOL unless the employee provides an acceptable reason for the absence to the supervisor.

B. Employees marked AWOL for reporting after the start of the work shift will not be permitted to work on that work shift or use approved leave until approval is given by the Battalion Chief.

C. At the supervisor's discretion, an employee may be required to present a physician's written notice as to the employee's reason for absence. This does not mean that doctor - patient confidentiality is to be violated.

D. If the employee's immediate supervisor determines that the employee's excuse for his/her absence is not valid; the supervisor shall record the incident as an AWOL offense and note the offense in the employee's performance appraisal. An Allegation of Employee Misconduct form citing this offense and disciplinary action recommended shall be processed to the Deputy Chief through the chain of command.

E. An employee who leaves work without the expressed consent of the supervisor will be considered AWOL.

F. Disciplinary action 1. The first AWOL offense will be a written reprimand and the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments (Category B1). Example: An employee does not report for duty at 0800 they will be considered AWOL. Once the employee contacts their immediate supervisor and receives permission to report for duty they will be charged LWOP until they arrive at their assigned location. If the employee arrives at 0825 they will be charged LWOP for 30 minutes.

2. The second AWOL offense within twelve months of the original offense will result in a suspension of 10.75 hours and the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments (Category A1).

3. The third AWOL offense within twelve months of the original offense will result in a suspension of 2 10.75 hour shifts and the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments (Category A2).

4. The fourth AWOL offense within 12 months of the original offense will result in a suspension of 5 10.75 hour shifts, the employee will be charged LWOP until the employee is allowed to report for duty. LWOP will be charged in 15 minute increments and a recommendation for dismissal by the Fire Chief (Category A3).

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 08.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2009

Rescinds: Sept. 26, 2007

Subject: Department Uniform Regulations

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy for setting a standard of dress for uniformed members that always projects a positive, neat, and professional image. All personnel are expected to continually monitor their appearance and that of their crew.

II. DISCUSSION

A. The city provides uniforms for Operations and Fire Prevention Divisions. Each member shall have the responsibility of maintaining his uniform in such condition that will reflect a professional image upon the department.

III. CLASSES OF UNIFORMS

A. Uniforms will be divided into four (4) classes

1. Class A a. Full Dress Uniform (Officers) Full service Dress Uniform will include white long sleeve shirt, tie, trousers, black belt, coat, hat, patented leather shoes, all appropriate badges, and rank insignia.

b. Full Dress Uniform (Engineers and Firefighters) Long sleeve uniform shirt with all badges, insignias, and awards (optional) properly displayed, trousers, black leather belt, black shoes or boots properly shined, and tie. Fire Department issued coat will be worn when so directed by the officer in charge.

c. Class A uniforms will be worn to funeral services and as directed.

2. Class B a. Winter Uniform Long sleeve uniform shirt with all badges and insignias properly displayed, trousers, black leather belt or approved nylon rescue belt, black shoes or boots properly shined. Fire Department issued coat may be worn when necessary for personal comfort or per instructions of the officer in charge.

All Chief Officers and Fire Marshal shall wear ties with Winter Uniform.

b. Summer Uniform Short sleeve uniform shirt with all badges and insignias properly displayed, trousers, black leather or nylon approved rescue belt, and black shoes or boots properly shined.

c. Class B uniform shall be worn to City Hall, blocking intersections, Public Education events, sit down meal in restaurant, official meeting with outside attendees, and as directed.

NOTE: BALL CAPS WILL NOT BE WORN WITH CLASS B UNIFORMS

3. Class C (Uniform of the day unless otherwise directed) a. Winter Uniform Department issued job shirts, or approved long sleeve T-shirts, trousers, black leather belt or approved nylon rescue belt, and black shoes or boots properly shined.

b. Summer Uniform 1. Department issued T-shirts or approved station T-shirts, trousers, black leather belt or approved nylon rescue belt, and black shoes or boots properly shined.

2. Department trousers, gray knit shirt, black leather belt or approved nylon rescue belt, and black shoes or boots properly shined (personnel who choose to wear t-shirts under gray knit shirts shall wear department approved t-shirt).

3. Uniform shorts, Department issued T-shirts or approved station T-shirts, approved black tennis shoes, black leather belt or approved nylon rescue belt.

4. Uniform shorts, gray knit shirt, approved black tennis shoes, black leather belt or approved nylon rescue belt (personnel who choose to wear t-shirts under gray knit shirts shall wear department approved t-shirt).

5. The combination of trousers or shorts with the gray knit short may be worn in place of the Class B Summer Uniform with approval of the Battalion Chief or Company Officer.

c. Class C uniforms shall be worn to the grocery store, EMS stand by, classroom training, department meetings and as directed.

4. Class D PT clothing, department issued jogging pants, shorts, and T-shirts, may be worn to exercise, when deemed appropriate for training sessions, and after 2000 hrs Monday–Sunday. Any member who is wearing PT clothing and is dispatched to an incident must wear their bunker pants over PT shorts or jogging pants.

a. Personnel shall not loiter in front of stations in Class D uniforms.

5. T-shirts a. Personnel wearing white shirts shall wear departmental white T-shirts b. Station T-shirts (specific logo) have to be approved by the Fire Chief

6. Ball Caps a. Only Departmental Issued ball caps shall be worn b. Station ball caps (approved by the Chief) may be substituted for the Departmental cap. c. Ball caps will only be worn with Class C or D uniforms.

IV. WEARING THE UNIFORM

A. General Uniform Regulations

1. All members must be in the uniform of the day and prepared to start their tour of duty by 08:00 each shift. Members coming on duty from ‘Kelly’ days or covering shifts for other members shall be in proper uniform at the start of their respective shifts.

2. All members shall maintain an extra clean and complete uniform of the day, plus a uniform tie, in their assigned lockers at all times.

3. No member shall wear his or her uniform while off duty. No member shall wear his or her uniform in such a manner or to any facility that could tend to bring discredit to the department. The uniform shall not be worn to any off-duty fundraisers, solicitations, etc. without special permission from the Fire Chief or his designee. At no time shall the uniform be worn into any bar, tavern, nightclub or other similar establishment except in the performance of fire department business.

4. Fire Department issued baseball caps may be worn only with the Class C or D uniform. The cap will not be worn with a Class B uniform (Badges) any time.

5. Black shoes and boots are to be kept polished at all times with all classes of uniforms.

V. BADGES, PATCHES AND INSIGNIAS

A. All uniformed members shall wear badges, patches and insignias in the prescribed fashion on the following: 1. Uniform Shirt a. Badge on member's left-hand side directly above left shirt pocket where badge pinholes are provided. Nameplate on member's right hand side with pointed pin clutch holders centered, parallel and adjacent to the top edge of shirt pocket.

b. Caution: When placing pin points through collar stays use a sturdy pointed object such as badge pin to make entrance holes, because pin points on the rank and position insignias are weak and easily broken.

c. The fire department patch shall be worn on the left and right sleeve. An EMT patch may replace the patch on the right sleeve. Haz-mat team members with North Carolina State Haz- mat Certification and 8-5 personnel members with Hazmat Certification may replace the department patch with the hazmat patch on the right sleeve.

2. Dress Uniform Coat a. Badge on member's left hand side and placed in badge holder that comes already attached to the coat. b. Rank or position insignia approximately 1 1/2" from point of each top lapel. The name plate will not be worn with the dress coat.

3. Winter Uniform Coat a. Badge on member's left-hand side, directly above left coat pocket where badge pinholes are provided.

b. Dress coats and winter jackets are delivered with the Fire Department Patches attached. No other patches, badges, insignias, etc. are to be worn on these or other uniform clothing items without permission from the Fire Chief.

VI. WEARING OF AWARDS AND COMMENDATIONS

A. Awards and commendations as presented by the City of Gastonia Fire Department shall be worn with the Class ‘A uniform. Awards and commendations presented by the department and/or authorized to be worn are noted below.

Gold Star of Valor red white blue whit red e

Silver Star of Valor red white red

Bronze Star of Valor Lt. white red whit Lt. blue e blue

Legion of Merit (Unit Citation) red

Firefighter of the Year Blue Blue blue

Star of Merit red white blue

OCS green white green

AA / Fire Science white green red gree white n

BS / Fire Science red green

Executive Fire Officer/EFO Red White blue

1. The letter “V” for Valor shall be added to the ribbon for all three-valor awards. 2. Bronze stars symbolizing additional awards for the same level citation shall be added as necessary to all awards 3. Leadership Award 4. Chief Fire Officer Designation (CFOD) will be displayed in the order of academic awards.

B. Award ribbons shall be worn with the uniform shirt directly above the nametag and centered, with the top of the nametag touching the bottom of the ribbon(s). No more than three separate awards shall be worn on each row of ribbons; if more have been earned, a second row will be started. The most senior award will be worn on the innermost side (towards the heart), with the next most senior award(s) following. Seniority in awards is governed by the following prioritized list: 1. Gold Star of Valor 2. Silver Star of Valor 3. Bronze Star of Valor 4. Star of Merit 5. Legion of Merit

6. Leadership Award 7. Firefighter of the Year Award 8. Academic Awards (highest degree is most senior)

VII. SEASONAL CHANGE OF UNIFORM

A. Employees shall change into summer uniforms April 1 of each year, and shall change into winter uniform November 1. If necessary for personal warmth and comfort, the issued jacket may be worn at any time as a part of the uniform.

B. Officers will be expected to remind employees of the need for seasonal changes in uniforms during normal staff meetings and/or monthly reviews of the Policy & Procedures Handbook.

VIII. JEWELRY

A. The wearing of jewelry is permitted as long as it does not draw undue attention to the individual wearing the jewelry or open the possibility or increasing personal risk to the wearer. Earrings are not permitted in any form. This includes male and female employees except as indicated below. A Necklace may be worn as long as it is not worn exposed on the outside of the uniform. Nothing shall be worn on the uniform but approved Badges and Insignias.

B. Female employees assigned to non-suppression positions may wear earrings.

IX. NIGHT WEAR

A. Personnel shall wear gym shorts and T-Shirts during sleep time.

Examples of Class A Dress: Officers Drivers/Firefighters

Class B Dress:

Class B Winter Dress for Chief Officers: Class B for Captains, Drivers, Firefighters: Tie not included

Class C Dress Examples:

FD shorts and Sweat pants are acceptable for PT and after 8:00PM, if responding to a incident Turn-out pants will not be removed.

Examples of insignia placement:

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 08.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Personal Grooming and Hygiene

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning the health and hygiene of the fire department members.

II. DISCUSSION

A. The fire department combat unit is a closely-knit, well trained team that works, dines, sleeps and socializes together in close contact with one another throughout a tour of duty. Due to these circumstances, it is imperative that each member of the fire department practice and maintain conditions of cleanliness conducive to good health.

III. POLICY

A. A member shall, at the beginning of their tour of duty, report to their assigned station clean, fresh and dressed in a clean uniform designated as the uniform of the day. B. Facilities are provided at each station for bathing and refreshing oneself; therefore, each member shall be expected to practice personal hygiene while on duty as required. C. Should complaints arise against an individual in regard to personal hygienic practices, he will be directed to correct the situation while on duty. D. Should numerous complaints be made, it shall be considered a minor violation of this policy and appropriate action will be taken.

IV. HEAD AND FACIAL HAIR

A. Purpose 1. To establish a standard hair length for the department for the safety and appearance of its members while on duty. B. Discussion

1. It is important that every firefighter be protected from injury or harm. Firefighting is a team effort, and every member is depending on their fellow firefighters to perform at their maximum capability. For this reason, specific guidelines will be established and enforced so that fire personnel will be free from any facial hair growth that might cause them to be more susceptible to injury on the fire grounds, or in any way interfere with maximum design performance and effectiveness of breathing apparatus or other head-gear, or detract from the appearance of

personnel. Public opinion, generally, is that beards or goatees are not conducive to the appearance of public safety organizations.

C. Regulations 1. Hair Styles: Males

a. Any hair style is permissible so long as the care and grooming of the hair is within limitations prescribed below. The style should not interfere with wearing the uniform cap, the helmet, or breathing apparatus. (1) The length of the hair on the side of the head may extend no farther than the bottom of the ear. (2) Regulation length will be to the diminishing point of the hair line at the bottom of the ear, in a manner and fashion that is conducive to the particular hair style worn. (3) The length of the hair on the back of the head and nape of the neck may extend no farther than one inch from the top of the shirt collar means the regulation shirt collar with the top button buttoned, or any other shirt with the same collar design and size. (a) The Afro Style cut may not extend over 2" perpendicular to the scalp at any point.

2. Hair Styles: Females a. All female personnel of the Department shall conform to the following standards of appearance. (1) Female fire personnel shall wear their hair in modest styles that do not extend below the bottom of the shirt collar. (2) Long hair can be worn up in an attractive manner as long as it is neat and permits the proper wearing of the hat. If it is worn up and begins to dishevel, it must either be put up again or worn down, meeting the collar regulations.

3. Sideburns a. Sideburns may extend down the side of the face no farther than a horizontal plane with the bottom of the ear lobe. b. The density of sideburns shall not stand off or extend from the side of the face more than a quarter of an inch at any measurable point of the sideburn. c. The bottom cut off line of the sideburn shall be an even and clean cut, across the width of the sideburn.

4. Mustache a. Any style or type of mustache is permissible so long as the care and grooming of the mustache is within the limitation prescribed and properly neat appearance is maintained as determined by the supervising officer. The mustache shall not extend over one-half inch below the corners of the mouth when the mouth is closed in its natural manner, nor extended below a line making the top of the upper lip, nor extend above a horizontal line at the bottom of the nose.

5. Beards a. No beard or goatee of any type shall be permitted at any time on any fire department personnel where usual and ordinary responsibilities may subject him to having to wear self- contained breathing apparatus while on duty. (1) Personnel with a medical condition which precludes shaving shall be required to present a written statement, signed by a medical doctor, verifying the condition. This waiver will not be permitted for more than seven (7) consecutive days, depending on the growth of the facial hair. (2) Whenever the facial hair is considered to be a safety hazard, the hair must be removed, or the person involved must be removed from duty status regardless of the medical certificate.

(3) Nothing herein shall be permitted to interfere with the wearing of any safety equipment. Good grooming and neatness shall prevail for all hair styles, mustaches and sideburns.

6. FACE PIECE-TO-FACE SEALING PROBLEMS a. Facial hair that interferes with the face piece-to-face seal or the operation of the exhalation valve on the full face piece of the SCBA shall not be permitted. Such facial hair may include beards, sideburns, mustaches, long hair or bangs that pass between the sealing surface of the SCBA and the face of the wearer. Head coverings, spectacle temple bars, or any other protuberance that passes between the sealing surface of the face piece and the face shall not be permitted. (American National Standard Z88.5-1981) (9.7).

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 08.10.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 8, 2018

Rescinds: February 11, 2013

Subject: TATTOO, BODY MARKING, BODY PIERCING, AND MUTILATION POLICY

I. PURPOSE

This Policy states the Gastonia Fire Department’s procedure and standards on Tattoos and Body Markings, which applies to all current/potential members. This Policy ensures our workforce presents a sharp, professional appearance to the public while also allowing individual expression through authorized body art that is consistent with the values of the Gastonia Fire Department.

II. PROCEDURE

A. No tattoo or brand, of any type, is authorized on the head, face (including inside the mouth), neck, or hands, except as described below.

1. Neck/Chest. The collar of the Dark Blue/White Uniform T-shirt serves as the reference point for the back and sides of the neck. No tattoo or brand may be visible above the collar on the neck.

2. Hands. Tattoos or brands must not be below the wrist. A single tattoo in the form of a ring is authorized on the wearer’s finger (not thumb); one tattoo per hand. The tattoo(s) will not extend past the knuckle or first joint of the finger and should be in good taste.

3. Head/Face. Permanent eyeliner makeup in the form of cosmetic tattooing is authorized for female members. If worn, permanent eyeliner will be conservative, in good taste, and complementary to the wearer’s complexion and the uniform. The tattoo(s) must not be brightly colored, must not be more than 1/8 inch width, and must not extend past the outer corner of the eye. No other permanent makeup is authorized.

B. CONTENT. Tattoos or brands anywhere on the body that promote racism/discrimination, indecency, extremist or supremacist philosophies, lawlessness, violence, or contain sexually explicit material are prohibited

1. Racist or discriminatory tattoos or brands are those that advocate the degradation of people based on race, ethnicity, national origin, or gender.

2. Indecent or sexually explicit tattoos or brands are those that contain a visual image, the dominant theme of which depicts or promotes graphic nudity, including sexual activities or organs, in a lustful way. Tattoos featuring fully exposed nudity are prohibited.

3. Extremist tattoos or brands are those that depict or promote extremist activities or organizations that advocate hatred, intolerance, or lawlessness (e.g., terrorist groups, neo- Nazis, skinheads, outlaw gangs, extreme political organizations with violent histories). Because some extremist/criminal groups and organizations exploit popular symbols (e.g., cartoon characters), care must be taken in evaluating such tattoos or brands so as not to implicate members who may have selected the tattoo or brand based on its artistic value rather than a hidden meaning. In these cases, a determination will be made based on the totality of thematic elements expressed by tattoos or brands elsewhere on the body.

4. Tattoos or brands labeled violent or promoting lawlessness are those that depict extreme graphic violence, profanity, glorifications of drug culture, or markings that can reasonably be interpreted as anti-government in nature.

C. COVERAGE OF AREA

1. In the case of tattoos, members are authorized tattoos with no limitation on size or percentage of coverage subject to location and content restrictions listed above in paragraphs A and B.

2. In the case of branding, no more than one brand, not to exceed 4” x 4”, is authorized subject to location and content restrictions listed above in paragraphs A and B.

D. TATTOO INK. Ultraviolet (UV) or black light tattoos are made with a special ink that is typically only visible under ultraviolet light. UV tattoos must be treated the same as those applied with typical ink and colors.

E. BODY PIERCING.

1. All Operations/Life Safety (Uniformed) members are prohibited from wearing earrings or any other body piercings while on duty.

F. BODY MUTILATION OR MODIFICATION. Other forms of intentional body mutilation or modification are not authorized; examples include, scarring, excessive ear piercing/stretching, tongue splitting, beneath the skin decorative implants, decorative tooth plating/engraving, etc. This prohibition does not include traditional elective medical procedures, such as, teeth straightening, breast augmentation, cosmetic plastic surgery, etc.

G. DISQUALIFYING TATTOOS, BRANDS, PIERCINGS, OR MUTILATIONS.

1. Applicants seeking employment that have prohibited tattoos, brands, or mutilations as outlined above will not be considered for employment. Affected applicants who choose to either alter or remove a disqualifying tattoo, brand, or mutilation may be reconsidered at a later date.

2. Violation of this policy is considered a Class A offense. Any member that intentionally violates this Policy will face disciplinary action up to termination.

3. Any member who desires a new tattoo or brand and has any question as to the compliance with this policy should seek guidance through the chain of command.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 08.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 2, 2017

Rescinds: November 1, 2007

Subject: Protective Clothing (PPE) Use and Care Of

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a standard protective uniform for all members engaged in fire fighting operations.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Due to the numerous hazards involved in fire fighting and for the protection of the individual engaged is such operation, the following items shall be worn as set forth below:

1. Protective Clothing a. The following items shall be worn at all times while engaged in actual fire fighting operations, to utilize maximum protection: BOOTS-GLOVES-HELMET-COAT-HOOD-EYE PROTECTION DEVICES. 2. Engineer a. The operation Engineer may refrain from wearing protective clothing while responding to and from alarms and also while operating the apparatus pump. However, such clothing should be available and ready for use should he be instructed to leave the apparatus and enter the fire area. 3. Wearing of Helmets a. The importance of making full use of the helmet cannot be over stressed. b. Personal Helmets (in order for fire personnel to wear a helmet purchased by themselves to be used while on duty the following standards must be adhered to): 1. Helmets must conform to NFPA standards 2. Helmets must have safety shield or eye goggles 3. Helmet colors must conform to Fire Department rank requirements: Example, Black for firefighters, and engineers; White for officers; Yellow for probationary firefighters 4. The City of Gastonia will not be held liable for damages, theft or replacement of the helmet 5. New personal helmets must be approved for use by the Battalion Chief 6. All Personal Protective Clothing shall be checked by Captains and checked off the monthly check list 7. Any Personal equipment must be approved by the Battalion Chief, and must meet NFPA standards current at that time

III. REMOVING OF PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

A. When it is evident the fire is secure, the Company Officer may grant permission for removal of certain items of protective clothing he deems appropriate.

IV. RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Company Officer shall make certain that each member of their respective company has in their possession at the station all required protective clothing as outlined in Item I above, and that such items are ready for use in the event of an alarm. B. All members issued equipment and protective clothing shall be responsible for the care and storage while on or off duty. C. All equipment issued to members shall be used only for fire department activities. D. All members shall wear old issued clothing and shoes for hydrant details to dress uniformly. E. PPE will be laundered after use in IDLH environments or when soiled or contaminated. F. All protective hoods exposed to an IDLH atmosphere will be exchanged with clean hoods that are carried in the Battalion Chief vehicle. G. SCBA masks exposed to an IDLH atmosphere will be cleaned as soon as possible

V. USE OF ANOTHER MEMBER'S PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

A. Various items of protective clothing and equipment are issued to all members of the fire department, who are involved in fire suppression. These items include helmet, gloves, boots, turnout coat, nomex hood, etc. It is the responsibility of each member to maintain this equipment in a clean and ready state. The degree of protection provided by this equipment may depend upon the maintenance it is given by the member to whom it was issued. Therefore, the use of another member's protective equipment will not be permitted unless unusual circumstances dictate otherwise.

VI. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT AT MOTOR VEHICLE ACCIDENTS

A. Turn out gear and traffic vests will always be worn at motor vehicle collisions. Traffic vests will be worn where moving vehicles are encountered in close proximity to the incident. Engineers are not required to wear turn out gear while driving.

VII. PROTECTIVE CLOTHING USE WHILE PERFORMING NON-EMERGENCY ACTIVITIES

A. Traffic vests will be worn while performing hydrant maintenance and all other activities where moving traffic will be encountered.

VIII. CARE AND CLEANING OF PPE

A. Where possible the decontamination process of PPE should be initiated on the emergency scene. Dry debris should be brushed off. Other debris should be rinsed with water. Heavy scrubbing or spraying with high velocity water jets such as power washers shall not be used. A soft bristle brush may be used to remove debris. B. Any piece of the garment that can be separated such as the liners and/or the DRD should be done prior to laundering and laundered separately. It is also recommended that you turn the liner inside out prior to laundering to facilitate the drying of the liner. Nitrile or protective gloves should be used anytime soiled PPE is being handled.

C. All closures should be fastened. Hook and loop hook tape covering hook and loop pile (Velcro), hooks and dees fastened, zippers zipped, and snaps fastened. It is imperative that you cover the hook portion

of all hooks and loops to prevent snagging during laundering and to help guard against premature wear.

D. Machine washing: After separating all liners and DRDs from the outer shell and fastening all closures use warm water and a normal wash cycle. Water temperature should never exceed 105°F. Following each wash cycle, thoroughly rinse the garments. DRDs should be laundered in a mesh bag; every separable component should be washed separately. Only a mild detergent preferably a liquid shall be used. A laundry soap is not recommended. Garments should never be dry cleaned. Varsol is the ONLY solvent that should be used to remove oil or tar (Globe manufacturing recommendation) however; it should never be used on leather or reflective trim. In the event of extreme contamination such as fire debris or bodily fluids removal of the contaminants by flushing with water as soon as possible is necessary. In the case of blood-borne pathogens it is recommended decontamination procedures include using 0.5% to 1% concentration of Lysol, or a 3%-6% concentration of stabilized hydrogen peroxide.

E. Protective clothing should always be washed by itself. Hand washing is not recommended. Do not use softeners, overload the washer and NEVER use bleach.

F. It is recommended that all garments be air dried or if in a machine dryer the “No Heat” option should be chosen. If a “No Heat” option is not available then the dryer temperature should not exceed 105°F.

G. Cleaning of helmets and gloves: Helmets should be cleaned with warm soap and water. Solvents shall never be used. Remove the ear flaps and machine wash separately. Gloves should be machine washed in a mild detergent. Gloves should never be machine dried.

H. If at all possible, soiled PPE should be placed in a plastic bag to prevent cross contamination. At no time should soiled PPE be placed in a personal vehicle or taken home to be laundered. I. Hoods and Boots: Hoods may be washed and dried with garment liners. Boots should be washed with soap, water and a soft bristled brush.

J. Each firefighter should wipe down with the “Fire Wipes” provided on each apparatus. Each firefighter should wipe their face, neck, arm pits, arms and groin area as soon as possible after engaging in firefighting activities. Once returning to the station each firefighter should shower as soon as possible and launder soiled uniforms. Uniforms should only be laundered at the station and never be taken home, an exception to this if the uniform is laundered at a laundry mat. If this is the case then the uniform should be transported in a plastic bag to prevent cross contamination of the members vehicle.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: November 20, 2019

Rescinds: July 26, 2018

Subject: Fire Investigation Task Force

I. PURPOSE

A. To identify the functions of the Gastonia Fire Investigation Task Force and to outline the procedures to be followed by Fire Department and Police Department personnel in investigating fires.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Criminally set fires are a major problem facing cities throughout the United States. Gastonia has experienced a continuing problem with arson cases which have resulted in personal injuries and/or substantial property loss. To combat this problem, the Gastonia Fire Department and the Gastonia Police Department have joined forces in forming the Gastonia Fire Investigation Task Force. This unit is designed to better facilitate the investigation of fire by designating responsibilities to units which utilize their specific expertise.

III. DEFINITIONS

A. Incident Commander 1. The member of the Gastonia Fire Department who is in command at a given emergency incident.

B. Fire Investigator 1. A member of the Gastonia Fire Department with the special skills, training, and equipment necessary to conduct fire investigations and assigned by the Fire Chief to the Gastonia Fire Investigation Task Force as needed.

C. Fire Marshal and or Assistant Fire Marshal 1. The ranking individual of the Gastonia Fire Department Fire Investigators present and operating on the scene of a given fire emergency.

D. Police Fire Investigator 1. A member of the Gastonia Police Department with the special skills, training, and equipment necessary to conduct fire investigations and assigned by the Chief of Police to the Gastonia Fire Investigation Task Force as needed.

E. Identification Officer

1. A member of the Gastonia Police Department Identification Bureau with the special skills, training, and equipment necessary to perform crime scene investigations and assigned by the Chief of Police to the Gastonia Fire Investigation Task Force as needed.

IV. PROCEDURES

A. Notification 1. If a structure fire falls under the following categories, the Incident Commander will notify the Fire Marshal and or Assistant Fire Marshal when fire suppression efforts are completed: A. Fatality/Fire Death B. Critical injury by fire of a civilian or firefighter C. History of fires 2. If the structure fire does not fall under the above categories the following procedures should be followed: A. If the Incident Commander and or Company Officer can determine the cause of the fire, then nothing further should take place. B. If the Incident Commander and or Company Officer cannot determine the cause of the fire, the Incident Commander will first notify the on-shift fire investigation task force member to come to the scene and look at the fire. C. If the on-shift investigator cannot determine the cause of the fire, they will then notify off- shift fire investigation taskforce members to come to the scene, or call the Fire Marshal and or Assistant Fire Marshal. Arrangements will then be made to conduct an extensive fire investigation, or wait until the next morning to conduct the investigation.

B. Responsibilities 1. Fire Department Incident Commander a. Ensure proper procedure for the notification and response of fire investigator(s) to the appropriate fire scene. b. Secure fire scene for investigative purposes. c. Supply manpower and/or equipment as requested by the Fire Investigation Task Force Team members.

2. Fire Investigator a. Ensure fire scene security until investigation is completed. b. Ensure legal entry for processing the scene by obtaining proper consent and/or warrants working closely with the Police Fire Investigator. c. Investigate when needed, fire scenes: (1) elimination of accidental / natural causes (2) any indication of incendiary or otherwise criminal activity (3) critical injury by fire of a civilian and/or firefighter (4) any fire incident caused by negligence which could result in civil litigation

d. Ensure an incident report has been initiated through a Patrol Officer if so required. e. Work as a team with other Fire and Police Investigators to locate and interview the victim(s), witness(es), and any suspect(s). f. Work closely with the Police Fire Investigator and the identification Officer using established investigative techniques, prepare any appropriate criminal case for prosecution. g. Release the scene to the owner or authorized personnel after ensuring the investigation of the scene is complete.

3. Fire Marshal and or Assistant Fire Marshal a. Assume command of the Fire Investigation Task Force at incidents where two or more Fire Investigators and/or Police Fire Investigators are working.

b. Ensure fire scene security until investigation is completed. c. Ensure an incident report has been initiated through a Patrol Officer. d. Investigate when needed, fire scenes: (1) elimination of accidental / natural causes (2) any indication of incendiary or otherwise criminal activity (3) critical injury by fire of a civilian and/or firefighter (4) any fire incident caused by negligence which could result in civil litigation e. Work as a team with other Fire and Police Investigators to locate and interview the victim(s), witness (es), and any suspect(s). f. Work closely with the Police Fire Investigator and the Identification Officer using established investigative techniques, prepare any appropriate criminal case for prosecution. g. Release the scene to the owner or authorized personnel after ensuring the investigation of the scene is complete. h. Ensure the safe, efficient, and harmonious operation of the Fire Investigation Task Force at all times. i. Work closely with the Senior Police Fire Investigator on the scene to insure effective and efficient operations. j. Maintain close liaison with the Fire Department Incident Commander. k. Request additional resources, personnel, etc. as needed for proper resolution of the investigation.

4. Police Fire Investigator a. Ensure legal entry for processing the crime scene by obtaining proper consent and/or warrants working closely with the Fire Investigator. b. When needed, working as a team with the Fire Investigator; investigate fire scenes for any indication of incendiary or other criminal activity. c. Working as a team, locate and interview the victim(s), witnesses, and any suspect(s) with the Fire Investigator. d. Work closely with the Fire Investigator and the Identification Officer using established investigative techniques, prepare any appropriate criminal case for prosecution.

5. Patrol Officer a. Provide security, crowd control, and/or traffic control as needed at the fire scene. b. Initiate an incident report when criminal activity is suspected. c. Note any suspicious subjects or activity and report same to the Fire Investigator or Police Fire Investigator. d. Make initial interview with the victim and witnesses and request subjects with relevant information to remain at the location until the Fire Investigator and/or Police Fire Investigator can interview them. e. If requested photograph fire scene and spectators if available.

6. Identification Officer a. Photograph the fire scene 1. Ensure a progression of overall, medium and close up views of the fire scene is established. 2. Photograph the fire in progress and the spectators as needed. 3. Photograph evidence in place prior to collection. 4. Use a scale device for size determination when applicable. 5. Photograph any other item(s) of interest to the fire or police fire investigator(s) upon request. b. Prepare diagram / sketch scene 1. The diagram establishes a permanent record of items, conditions, and distance / size relationships. 2. Diagrams supplement photographs. 3. General progression of sketches:

(a) Lay out basic perimeter (b) Set forth objects (c) Insert evidence as it is recovered (d) Record appropriate measurements (e) Establish key / legend and compass orientation

c. Fingerprinting of Fire Scene 1. Attempt to locate, develop and collect latent prints at the scene.

d. Collection of evidence 1. Take custody of all evidence collected at the scene by the fire / police fire investigator(s). 2. Each piece of evidence should be packaged, sealed and identified at the scene. 3. Ensure chain of custody by following standard departmental procedures for handling evidence. 4. Submit evidence to crime laboratory as needed.

e. Remain at the fire scene with the Fire / Police Investigator(s) until the processing is completed.

f. Work closely with the Fire and Police Investigator(s) in preparing any appropriate criminal case for prosecution.

V. EXPANDING INVESTIGATION

A. In some instances it could best serve the interest of the investigation to get the assistance of other organizations such as but not limited to: 1. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms (ATF) 2. North Carolina State Bureau of Investigation (SBI) 3. Insurance Company Investigators

VI. DISCRETION

A. Not every fire that is investigated requires each security measure listed above to be employed. If the Incident Commander suspects the fire is a criminal act, proper scene security will often make the difference in being able to determine the cause and the intent, if any, of the act.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Notification and Response of Fire Investigator(s)

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a standard procedure for the notification and response of fire investigator(s) to the appropriate fire scene.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Responsibilities 1. When a unit from the Gastonia Fire Department is dispatched to the scene of a fire incident, the Incident Commander shall determine the need for a fire investigator. a. If a Shift Investigator is unavailable, the IC may to contact the designated off-duty Fire Investigator b. The Incident Commander and/or the Fire Investigator shall make sure Police CR report is filled out where applicable.

2. Prior to requesting the response of a fire investigator, the Incident Commander should conduct their own brief examination to establish an accidental fire cause or to identify one of the factors outlined in the next paragraph. Fire Investigators should not be requested to respond simply because of a working structural fire or because a vehicle fire involved two or more compartments.

3. The Incident Commander shall request the notification and response of the fire investigator(s) after any of the following factors are present: a. fire death b. critical injury by fire of a civilian or firefighter c. any indication of incendiary or otherwise criminal activity d. the absence of an accidental fire cause, where a fire investigator is needed

4. In lieu of requesting the response of a fire investigator, the Incident Commander shall complete a information form (FM-1) when any of the following factors are present: a. Any grass, brush, or dumpster fires of a repetitious nature with no witnesses or suspects present. b. Any juvenile activity in which full identification is not available. c. Any other fire incident that the officer-in-charge sees the need for follow-up by a fire investigator.

B. Discretion 1. These guidelines are to assist the Incident Commander in determining which fires are appropriate for a fire investigator to response and which fires necessitate only the completion of the FM-1 form. These guidelines are not intended to be totally applicable to every fire incident. However, with these guidelines in mind, the Incident Commander should be in a better position to effectively use the services of a fire investigator. Furthermore, the Incident Commander can request an investigator to respond to any type of fire incident where assistance by the investigator is needed.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.10.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Securing the Emergency Scene for Fire Investigation

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a procedure for securing fire scenes for investigative purposes.

II. PROCEDURE

A. At each fire where an investigator is requested, the Incident Commander shall take the following steps to ensure the scene is properly secured: 1. At the point at which the investigator is requested, overhaul and salvage operations shall cease.

2. A firefighter shall be posted at each entrance to the structure or at the scene to keep out everyone except responding personnel. (This includes owners/occupants or anyone else).

3. Information concerning the cause or other pertinent details of the fire shall not be given to owners, occupants, or media personnel on the scene prior to the investigator's arrival.

4. The Incident Commander shall instruct firefighters not to move any contents or structural members unless absolutely necessary.

5. A firefighter who removes or rearranges any item shall inform the investigator of these actions as soon as possible after the investigator arrives.

6. The first-in unit shall not leave the scene until the fire investigator arrives unless specifically ordered to do so by the Incident Commander.

7. The number of personnel in or around the suspected area of origin shall be kept to the necessary minimum.

B. At fires involving fatalities, the following steps will be taken in addition to the ones in II. A above: 1. The Incident Commander will coordinate with Gastonia Police Department officers on the scene for scene preservation and security. This will include posting police/fire personnel at each entrance.

2. After control of the fire, only essential personnel should be in the area of origin(s) or at the location of victims.

C. At multi-alarm fires, the Incident Commander should use the following measures: 1. Rope off the fire ground area and allow no one except for police and fire personnel inside the roped off area.

2. Coordinate with GPD officers on the scene for their assistance for crowd control.

III. DISCUSSION

A. Not every fire which is investigated requires each security measure listed above to be employed. If the Incident Commander suspects the fire is a criminal act, good scene security will often make the difference in being able to determine the cause and intent.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Company Officers / Fire Code Violations

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish responsibilities for Company Officers to follow when dealing with fire code violations

II. PROCEDURE

A. Detection of a fire code violation that presents no immediate threat to life or property: 1. Written notification should be completed and forwarded to the Fire Marshal's Office

B. Detection of fire code violation that involves open burning: 1. The fire hazard should be removed (i.e. extinguish open burning unless proper permit has been issued) explaining that if second respond is required, citation will be issued by the Fire Marshal's Office. C. Detection of a life safety violation or other imminent threat to life or property: 1. The Officer-in-Charge should, to the best of their ability, see to it that the threat to life or property is removed 2. Contact Battalion Chief to respond 3. Battalion Chief may request at their discretion the assistance and response of an inspector. If Battalion Chief chooses this option, procedure is step d and e. 4. Indicate to City Dispatch what type of incident has been found in order for the Fire Inspector to be properly informed, and 5. Standby for the Fire Inspector to arrive on the scene and provide assistance and information to the Inspector.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Blasting Permit Requirements

INFORMATION REQUIRED FOR BLASTING PERMIT REVIEW

A: Blasting operations will be conducted at: ______,

a. property of ______.

B: Request permit to conduct blasting for ______day(s).

C: Person in charge of the handling and use of explosive material:

1. Name:______S.S. # ______Age: _____

2. Copy of training received or copy of any state license

4. Experience: ( who they worked for, how long, etc.) ______

D. Name of reference person:______

1. Phone Number:______

E: Applicant shall file with the jurisdiction copy of commercial general liability insurance covering bodily injury and property damage with limits of not less than $ 1,000,000.00 per occurrence, at least $ 1,000,000.00 aggregate; or the equivalents utilizing excess or umbrella coverage.

Storage

F: Name and age of person in charge of magazine: ______

G: Drawing required showing location in feet to nearest inhabited buildings, public highways, barricades, etc.

H: Quantity and type of explosive stored: ______

I: Construction / type of magazine: ______

*Current safety rules covering the operations of magazines shall be posted on the interior of the magazine in a visible location.

*The ground around outdoor magazines shall be graded so that water drains away from the magazines.

**section C required to determine that the blaster is competent to conduct blasting operations and to perform the duties of a blaster.

I certify the information provided is true and correct to the best of my knowledge and NC Fire Prevention Code and NFPA 495 (most current editions) will be followed.

Signature: ______Date: ____/____/____

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Halloween Haunted House Requirements

I. EXITS

A. Emergency Exits shall be provided throughout the structure to insure the safe and prompt egress of occupants in the event of an emergency.

1. Shall not be covered or concealed in any way 2. Shall be available for immediate use without any type of hindrance 3. Shall be marked "EXIT" 4. Signs shall be of a florescent type 5. Minimum size - six inch letters 6. All staff personnel shall know the location of all exits 7. No obstacles shall be placed in the floor area that may slow or impede the occupants escape in the event of an emergency.

B. For areas where the means of egress may be confusing or difficult to find:

1. Arrows pointing to the exits shall be placed or painted on the floor, florescent color which can be easily identified. 2. Eliminate loops that create dead end areas where fire could seal off means of egress at both ends of a loop.

II. LIGHTS

A. Lights shall be installed in all areas of the structure which will be occupied.

1. They shall be turned on in the event of an emergency to provide sufficient light for safe means of exiting the building. 2. All steps, ramps or outside porches shall be lighted at all times. 3. Flashlights shall be provided to all staff persons conducting the tours or going into the structure at any time.

III. EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire extinguishing equipment approved by the Fire Official shall be properly placed throughout the structure.

1. Maximum travel distance to an extinguisher - 25 feet 2. Minimum rating for an extinguisher is 2A and/or 10B:C

3. All staff personnel shall know the location and use of all fire extinguishers in the structure

IV. SMOKING

A. "NO SMOKING" signs shall be posted at all entrances and at or near any ticket booth or ticket collection area.

1. Responsibility of the permit holder to enforce this rule

V. ELECTRICAL

A. Approval from Electrical Inspector may be required

1. Spliced electrical cords, homemade switching devices and/or open junction boxes and connections shall not be permitted. 2. Extension cords of the lamp cord type number 16 gauge or smaller shall not be used as a wiring method. 3. If extension cords are required: only type S, SJ, or SJO cords number 14 gauge or larger shall be permitted, 4. Approved power bars with built in thermal protection may be used 5. All cords shall contain a grounding means and shall be properly connected. 6. All temporary wiring shall be in accordance to Section 305 of the National Electric Code. 7. All wiring shall be properly secured to the wall or ceiling to prevent damage or shock injury. 8. All splices shall be made in closed junction boxes.

VI. OCCUPANT LOAD

A. Specific 1. The number of persons allowed inside the structure per group shall not be more than ten (10). 2. Each group shall be lead through by a competent staff person and a competent staff person shall be at the end of the group 3. There will be no more than two (2) groups allowed inside the structure at any time 4. All staff person leading groups shall be familiar with all the guidelines required for Haunted Houses

VII. EVACUATION

A. Warning Signal 1. In the event of an emergency, a warning signal, approved by the Fire Official, shall be sounded to notify all occupants to evacuate the structure. 2. This signal shall indicate: that all the lights are to be turned on. 3. The alarm shall be tested each night prior to the opening of the structure to the public, with all staff personnel present.

VIII. DECORATIVE MATERIALS

A. All decorative materials shall be non combustible, inherently flame resistant, or treated and maintained flame resistant when tested in accordance with NFPA 701. B. Electric light bulbs shall not be decorated with paper or other combustible materials unless such materials have been first rendered flameproof. C. OPEN FLAME, STRAW, PLYWOOD, ETC.

1. No open flame, candle, pyrotechnics, or any device deemed dangerous by the Fire Official shall be used within or near proximity of the structure.

2. The use of straw, hay or sawdust near the exits or in the structure shall be used only if approved by the Fire Official. 3. Use of cellular plastic foam and pyroxylin coated fabric shall be prohibited. Plywood shall not be used without an approved thermal barrier such as gypsum wallboard.

IX. CODE ENFORCEMENT

1. A permit is required before opening of haunted house to the public. 2. Other considerations for the safety of the public that may be necessary shall be enforced by the Fire Official. 3. At any time the "Haunted House" is open to the public, a fire inspection may be conducted by a Fire Official to assure compliance with all guidelines and the Fire Code; and if violations exist that create a fire safety hazard, the haunted house will be closed and/or citations written until corrections are made.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.06 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Underground Storage Tank Permitting Requirements

INSTALLATION (UST)

BEFORE WORK IS STARTED: PERMIT IS REQUIRED

I. CONTACT DEM REGIONAL OFFICE

A. Mooresville Regional Office N. Main Street Mooresville, N.C. 28115 (704) 663-1699 1. Form GW/UST-6 has to be completed and returned sixty (60) days prior to installing tank(s). 2. Give copy of GW/UST-6 to the Fire Official.

II. FILL OUT PERMIT APPLICATION FORM OBTAINED AT THE FIRE MARSHAL’S OFFICE

A. Provide the following information: 1. Installation description (written statement of installation procedure) 2. Drawing illustration with North direction indicated of the on-site facility for review. Drawing shall include among others, the following information: a. type of tank b. distance in feet from nearest wall of any basement, pit, cellar or property line c. distance in feet shell to shell d. discharge point of vent pipes and terminate point in feet above the fill opening and adjacent ground level containment: secondary containment shall be provided for all underground tanks containing hazardous chemicals (EPA) 3. Proper approval for tank(s), i.e. UL, ASTM, API

III. PERMIT IS ISSUED AFTER REVIEW OF APPLICATION INFORMATION, IF INSTALLATION IS ACCORDING TO APPLICABLE CODES

IV. TESTING

A. All tanks and that piping which is in a suction system, before being covered or placed in use, shall be tested hydrostatically or with air pressure, at not less than 3 psi nor more than 5 psi. B. Pressure piping shall be tested to one and one-half times the working pressure, or 75 psi, whichever is greater. C. Tests shall be maintained for at least 30 minutes and shall be witnessed by the Fire Official. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to have the necessary personnel present to conduct any tests. D. The Fire Official must be notified at least 24 hours in advance to schedule any inspections.

V. LETTER

A. The contractor will be responsible for issuing to the Fire Marshal’s Office, a materials test and certification letter.

1. This letter shall state that the system has been installed in accordance to the appropriate NFPA standards, has been tested, all materials used are approved for their use and the system is in full operation.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.07 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Above Ground Storage Tank Permitting Requirements

INSTALLATION (AST)

BEFORE WORK IS STARTED: PERMIT IS REQUIRED

I. Fill out permit application form obtained at the fire marshal's office

The storage of flammable and combustible liquids in above ground tanks outside of buildings is prohibited within the limits of the Fire District.

A. Provide the following information:

1. Drawing illustration with North direction indicated of the on-site facility for review. Drawing shall include among others, the following information:  Topographical conditions  Occupancy, construction of building(s) on the same property  Distance in feet from nearest building on the same property  Distance in feet from the nearest side of any public way  Property line locations in regard to tank locations  Capacity of tank(s)  Fire protection (if required) by applicable codes  Design and construction of tank(s)  Operating pressure of tank(s) psig  Spacing between any two adjacent aboveground tanks  Control of spillage  Location and arrangement of all vents; normal / emergency  Name of liquid / gas stored in tank(s)  MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) shall be supplied

II. Permit is issued after review of application information, if all information has been supplied and installation is according to applicable codes

III. Letter

A. The contractor will be responsible for issuing to the Fire Marshal's Office, a materials test and certification letter. 1. This letter shall state that the system has been installed in accordance to the appropriate NFPA standards, has been tested, all materials used are approved for their use and the system is in full operation.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.08 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fireworks Permitting Requirements

The following information shall be supplied to the Fire Official a minimum of 10 days in advance of the scheduled event:

I. Date/Time of Display

II. Kind, Size and Number of Fireworks

III. A diagram of the grounds on which the outdoor fireworks display is to be held showing the point at which the fireworks are to be discharged, the location of all buildings, highways and other lines of communication, the lines behind which the audience will be restrained, and the location of other possible overhead obstructions (show distance in feet).

IV. The permit holder shall furnish copy of commercial general liability insurance covering bodily injury and property damage with limits of not less than $ 1,000,000.00 per occurrence, at least $ 1,000,000.00 aggregate; or the equivalents utilizing excess or umbrella coverage.

V. Pyrotechnician information shall be furnished: A. confirmation of license B. the names of persons actually in charge of the firing of the display C. age D. experience E. phone number F. number of assistants and ages of assistants

VI. Applicant shall notify property owners (who own structures within the display radius) of the proposed schedule of display, and shall furnish each owner a copy of evidence of financial responsibility. In addition, applicant shall provide the City of Gastonia with a letter of permission from each property owner and tenant (with structures within the display radius) stating that said owner is in agreement with the subject fireworks display.

Fireworks Display

1. Obtain permit application forms from the Fire Marshal’s office a. supply proper information for review

2. Event permit required (closing of streets if so required to close) a. copy of approval given to Fire Marshal’s Office

3. Approval from County Commissioners thru County Manager required (must obtain city permit before county will review for approval) a. copy of approval given to Fire Marshal’s Office

4. Approval from Norfolk Southern Railway (Downtown area only)

Safety Measures / NFPA 1123

All fireworks materials and devices in transit to the fireworks discharge site shall be transported in accordance with Title 49, code of Federal Regulations, “Federal Regulation for Transport,” NFPA 1124, Code for the Manufacture, Transportation, and Storage of Fireworks, and Title 27, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 18, Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Part 181, Commerce in Explosives.

As soon as the fireworks have been delivered to the display site, they shall not be left unattended, and they shall be kept dry.

The area selected for the discharge of aerial shells shall be located so that the trajectory of the shells shall not come within 25 ft of any overhead object.

The site for the outdoor land or water display shall have at least a 70-ft/in. radius of internal mortar diameter of the largest aerial shell to be fired except for shells 3 in. or less.

The fallout area shall be a large open area. Spectators, vehicles, or readily combustible materials shall not be located within the fallout area during the display.

During the firing of the display, all personnel in the discharge site shall wear head protection, eye protection, hearing protection, and foot protection, and shall wear cotton, wool, or similarly flame-resistant, long-sleeved, long-legged clothing. Personal protective equipment, as necessary, shall be worn by the operator and assistants during the setup and cleanup of the display.

No smoking shall be allowed within 50 ft of any area where fireworks or other pyrotechnic materials are present.

Immediately following the display but no sooner than 15 minutes after the attempted firing, if the shell still has not fired, the mortar shall be flooded with water cautiously and allowed to stand for a minimum of 5 minutes before it is emptied cautiously of the shell.

Following the display, the firing crew shall conduct an inspection of the fallout area for the purpose of locating any unexploded aerial shells or live components. This inspection shall be conducted before any public access to the site shall be permitted.

Any shells found during the search shall not be handled until at least 15 minutes have elapsed from the time the shells were fired. The fireworks then shall be doused with water and allowed to remain for at least 5 additional minutes before being placed cautiously in a plastic bucket or fiberboard box.

Dry grass or combustible materials located beneath ground display pieces shall be wet down before the display if they are in sufficient quantity to be a fire hazard.

Back to Table Of Contents

GASTONIA FIRE DEPARTMENT FIRE MARSHAL’S OFFICE

APPLICATION FOR PERMIT

Date of Application: / /

Name:

Address: :

Phone:

The above listed applicant hereby makes application for:

Details regarding the above request must be filed when application is made and whenever requested by the Fire Marshal. It is the applicant’s responsibility to ensure that conditions are in accordance with applicable State and Local Fire Regulations. / / Applicant Signature

Account: 10-531-320.00

Date Issued: / /

Permit #:

Fee: $

Fire Official::

Payment: Make in person (Monday – Friday, 8 am to 5 pm) or make payment by mail to the Attn: City of Gastonia Revenue Collections Office at P.O. Box 1748, Gastonia, NC 28053. DO NOT MAIL CASH. Use check or money order. Payment required for permit to be valid. Return this form with payment.

Back to Table Of Contents

City of Gastonia Fire Department Dedicated to Saving 260 North Myrtle School Road Lives & Property Gastonia, North Carolina 28052 Through Code Enforcement Phone: (704) 866-6807 Fax (704) 866-6052

Function Requiring Special Approval

(Change of Building Use or Occupancy, any special function requiring approval)

Scheduled Inspection Date: / /

Name:

Address:

Phone:

Describe Function that requires special approval:

Details regarding the above request must be filed when request is made and whenever requested by the Fire Marshal. It is the applicant’s responsibility to ensure that conditions are in accordance with applicable State and Local Fire Regulations.

/ / A D a t e

Account: 10-531-320.00

Fee: $ 50.00

Fire Official:

Payment: Make in person (Monday – Friday, 8 am to 5 pm) or make payment by mail to the Attn: City of Gastonia Revenue Collections Office at P.O. Box 1748, Gastonia, NC 28053. DO NOT MAIL CASH. Use check or money order. Payment required prior to scheduled inspection date. Return this form with payment.

Back to Table Of Contents

GASTONIA FIRE DEPARTMENT FIRE MARSHAL’S OFFICE

INSPECTION, TESTING, AND MAINTENANCE CERTIFICATION FORM

For all YES answers you the tester are certifying that system(s) and/or device(s) are capable of proper operation.

For all NO answers the following apply:

1. The owner shall be responsible for maintaining and keeping all fire protection system(s) and appliance(s) in proper operating condition. 2. The owner shall have corrected or repaired deficiencies, damaged parts, or impairments found while performing the inspection, test, and maintenance requirements. *Failure to adhere to these fire code requirements in the time frame given by the Fire Official shall result in a Fire Code Citation being issued and/or legal action being taken as required by law.

(circle all that applies)

a) Automatic Sprinkler System Yes No N/A g) Hood System Yes No N/A b) Fire Department Connection Yes No N/A h) Emergency Lights Yes No N/A c) Standpipe System Yes No N/A i) Fire Doors Yes No N/A d) Manual Pull Boxes Yes No N/A j) Extinguisher(s) Yes No N/A e) Smoke Detector(s) Yes No N/A k) Exit Light(s0 Yes No N/A f) Heat Detector(s) Yes No N/A l) List Other Yes No N/A

THIS TEST WAS PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE NFPA STANDARDS

Service Company Performing Test

1. Service Company Name ______2. Address ______3. Print Name of Person Conducting Test ______4. Signature ______5. Phone Number ______6. Date ______

Property Being Tested

1. Name of Property ______2. Address ______3. Print Name of Contact Person ______4. Job Responsibility______5. Phone Number ______6. Date ______

Return this form to: Gastonia Fire Department Life Safety Division 260 North Myrtle School Road Gastonia, NC 28052

or FAX to: 704-866-6052

Back to Table Of Contents

GASTONIA FIRE DEPARTMENT FIRE MARSHAL’S OFFICE

DATE: _____/_____/_____

TO: ______

FROM: Life Safety Division – Gastonia Fire Department

SUBJECT: Inspection Procedure

Thank you for your time in helping our department conduct state required fire inspections.

Any conditions which the Fire Official deems to pose an immediate threat to public life, health, or safety shall be corrected immediately in the presence of the Fire Official with possible $100.00 citation being issued.

All other violations will be handled as follows:

 Violation Notice with request for compliance within a period of 10 business days.  A reinspection at the end of the 10 day period at no charge if the violation(s) is corrected.

If, upon reinspection, the Fire Official determines that the site is still in non-compliance:

 A third inspection will be scheduled and a optional service charge of $50.00 will be issued.  Any violation(s) still evident will carry a citation fee of no less than $50.00 per violation.  Each day’s continuing violation after the compliance period has expired shall constitute a separate and distinct offense.

If you have any questions call the Life Safety Division at 704-866-6807.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.13 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: UST Fuel Oil Closure or Change in Service

PERMANENT CLOSURE, CHANGE-IN-SERVICE (UST) Fuel Oil Tank – Commercial & Home Use

BEFORE WORK IS STATED:

I. Fill out Permit Application Form obtained at the Fire Marshal's Office

Not Regulated UST – 3 Form is not required If smell or spill is noticed, Mooresville DEM is required to be contacted and soil sample required with copy of soil testing and analysis submitted to the Fire Marshal’s Office. If tank is 2,000 gallons or larger, it is considered commercial. Mooresville shall be informed about tank removal or closure.

II. Contact DEM Regional Office At:

Mooresville Regional Office N. Main Street Mooresville, N.C. 28115 (704) 663-1699

III. Permit issued after review of provided information and payment of all applicable fees.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.14 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: UST Closure or Change in Service

PERMANENT CLOSURE, CHANGE-IN-SERVICE (UST)

BEFORE WORK IS STATED:

I. Contact DEM Regional Office

A. Mooresville Regional Office N. Main Street Mooresville, N.C. 28115 (704) 663-1699

a. Form GW/UST-3 has to be completed and returned five (5) days prior to closure or change-in- service.

b. give copy of GW/UST-3 to Fire Official

II. Fill out Permit Application Form obtained at the Fire Marshal's Office

III. Permit issued after review of provided information

IV. Give copy of form GW/UST-2 "Site Investigation Report for Permanent Closure" to Fire Marshal's Office

V. A copy of soil testing and analysis shall be submitted to the Fire Marshal's Office

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.16 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Inspection Schedule

Reference: North Carolina Fire Prevention Code Section 106-Inspection Requirements and Certifications

I. PURPOSE A. In order to preserve and protect public health and safety in buildings and other structures, the State of North Carolina Administrative Code requires that said structures be inspected periodically by state certified inspectors. Specifically, listed structures in the City of Gastonia must have periodic inspections scheduled for the purpose of identifying activities and conditions that pose dangers of fire, explosion, or related hazards. The following guidelines should be used to determine when fire safety inspections are required.

II. OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATIONS OF BUILDINGS FOR FIRE INSPECTORS A. Fire Inspectors holding Level I, Level II, or Level III certifications are qualified to inspect and approve only those types and sizes of buildings specified under NC State Building Code, Section 404-412, Volume I. The limitation on occupancy classifications of buildings for Fire Inspectors is noted below;

1. Level I:

Occupancy Business Small Assembly Mercantile Residential Storage Excluding High Rise No Plan Review

2. Level II:

Occupancy Everything in Level I Large Assembly Educational Industrial Plan Review of all occupancies in Level II Excluding High Rise

3. Level III:

Occupancy Everything in Levels I and II Hazardous Locations Institutional High Rise Plan Review of all occupancies (Unlimited occupancies)

III. FREQUENCY OF INSPECTIONS

A. Annual Inspections (facilities that are required to be inspected each year)

1. Assembly 2. Any Occupancy storing hazardous material 3. Daycare 4. High Rise (higher than 75 feet) 5. Adoptive Home 6. Public Schools (twice a year) 7. Institutional 8. Foster Home 9. Interior common areas of Residential structures (with more than two dwelling units)

B. Biennial Inspections (facilities that are required to be inspected every other year)

1. Educational (other than public schools) 2. Factory/Industrial

C. Triennial Inspections (facilities that are required to be inspected every third year)

1. Mercantile 2. Business without hazardous material 3. Storage without hazardous material

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.20.17 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Levels of Certification for Fire Inspectors

Reference: North Carolina Fire Prevention Code Section 106-Inspection Requirements and Certifications

I. STANDARD CERTIFICATE

A. A standard certificate, fire inspector, Level I, shall be issued to any applicant who complies with Paragraph (b) of this Rule and who provides documentation that the applicant possesses one of the following education and experience qualifications: 1. Completion of at least one year of technical or trade school training or an apprenticeship program in fire science; or an approved four-year non-technical degree; 2. At least six months of work under the direct supervision of a standard certified fire inspector I, II, or III, licensed engineer, or architect, with a supporting letter from such supervisor; 3. At least three years of construction, maintenance, or inspection experience in fire protection systems while working under a limited licensed contractor; 4. Certification by the Board as a building inspector I, electrical inspector I, mechanical inspector I, or plumbing inspector I; at least one year of experience as such certified inspector; and completion of at least one year of fire protection technology courses approved by the Board; 5. At least two continuous years of experience conducting fire inspections in Level I Occupancy buildings for a city, county, or other governmental fire inspection department; 6. At least four continuous years of experience in fire suppression activities for a city, county, volunteer, or other governmental fire department; or 7. Firefighter Level III certification under the North Carolina State Fire and Rescue Commission with at least one year of fire inspection experience in Level I Occupancy buildings.

B. A standard certificate, fire inspector, Level II, shall be issued to any applicant who complies with Paragraph (b) of this Rule and who provides documentation that the applicant possesses one of the following education and experience qualifications: 1. A license as an engineer or architect with experience outside of design or inspection of fire protection systems; 2. Completion of at least two years of technical or university training in the field of civil or architectural engineering, building construction technology, or fire science; or an approved four- year non-technical degree and at least two years of design, installation, or inspection experience in fire protection systems on Level II Occupancy buildings while working under a certified fire inspector II or III, licensed engineer, or architect; 3. Certification by the Board as a building inspector II, electrical inspector II, mechanical inspector II, or plumbing inspector II; at least three years of experience as such certified inspector; and completion of at least one year of fire protection technology courses approved by the Board;

4. At least three years of design, installation, or inspection experience in fire protection systems on Level II Occupancy buildings while working under the direct supervision of a certified fire inspector II or III, licensed engineer, or architect, with a supporting letter from such supervisor; 5. Certification by the Board as a fire inspector I; at least three years of experience approving plans and making inspections as such certified inspector; and completion of at least one year of fire protection technology courses approved by the Board; 6. At least four continuous years of experience conducting fire inspections in Level II Occupancy buildings for a city, county, or other governmental fire inspection department; or 7. Completion of the basic, intermediate, and advanced classes of the North Carolina Fire Prevention School, with at least three years of fire inspection experience in Level II Occupancy buildings.

C. A standard certificate, fire inspector, Level III, shall be issued to any applicant who complies with Paragraph (b) of this Rule and who provides documentation that the applicant possesses one of the following education and experience qualifications: 1. A license as an engineer or architect with pre-professional qualifications, experience, and professional practice in architectural, structural, or fire protection design or inspection of buildings and current specialization in architectural, civil, or fire protection engineering; 2. Completion of at least four years of technical or university training in the field of civil, architectural, or fire protection engineering; and at least one year of fire inspection experience while working under a certified fire inspector III, licensed engineer, or architect and in responsible charge of a wide variety of types of Level III Occupancy buildings; 3. Completion of at least two years of technical or university training in the field of civil, architectural, or fire protection engineering; and at least three years of fire protection design, installation, or inspection experience while working under a certified fire inspector III, licensed engineer, architect, or unlimited contractor, with at least one year in responsible charge of a wide variety of types of Level III Occupancy buildings; 4. Certification by the Board as a building inspector III, electrical inspector III, mechanical inspector III, or plumbing inspector III; at least four years of experience as such certified inspector; and completion of at least one year of fire protection technology courses approved by the Board; 5. At least four years of design, installation, or inspection experience in fire protection systems while working under the direct supervision of a certified fire inspector III, licensed engineer, or architect, two years of which have been performed in responsible charge of a wide variety of types of Level III Occupancy buildings, with a supporting letter from such supervisor; 6. Certification by the Board as a fire inspector II; at least four years of experience approving plans and making inspections as such certified inspector; and completion of at least one year of fire protection technology courses approved by the Board; or 7. At least five continuous years of experience conducting fire inspections in a wide variety of types of Level III Occupancy buildings for a city, county, or other governmental fire inspection department.

II. PROBATIONARY CERTIFICATE

A. A probationary certificate may be issued, without examination, to any newly employed or newly promoted code enforcement official who lacks a standard certificate that covers his new position. A probationary certificate shall be issued for two years only and may not be renewed. The official shall take whatever measures are necessary during such period to qualify for an appropriate standard certificate. A probationary certificate authorizes the official, during the effective period of the certificate, to hold the position of the type, level, and location specified. The certificate shall be conditioned on the applicant's: 1. Working under supervision sufficient to protect the public health and safety; or 2. Possessing a minimum of two years of design, construction, or inspection experience working under a certified inspector or under a licensed engineer, architect, or contractor; or 3. Possessing one of the experience qualifications listed in 11 NCAC 8.0706 in each area of code enforcement for which the probationary certificate is issued; or

4. Successfully completing a probationary pre-qualification exam administered by the Board in each area of code enforcement for which the probationary certificate is issued.

III. LIMITED CERTIFICATE

A. A limited certificate shall be issued to each code enforcement official who held such a position on June 13, 1977. This certificate will entitle the official to continue in the position held on that date; it will not entitle him to shift to another employer or to another position for the same employer. The limited certificate will be issued and renewed from year to year without examination, on application of the official and verification of his status. However, it will not be renewed beyond the applicable date specified in Rule .0508 unless the official has prior to that date completed in-service training prescribed by the Board. On or after the appropriate "applicable date" specified in Rule .0510, a limited certificate will be issued to each code enforcement official who makes application in accordance with these regulations. Such certificate will authorize the official to continue in the position held on the "applicable date" in the same manner as a limited certificate issued to an official who held a position on June 13, 1977.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO.09.20.18 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 1, 2017

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Inspection Quality Assurance Program

I. PURPOSE

A. In order to preserve and protect public health and safety in buildings and other structures, the State of North Carolina Administrative Code requires that said structures be inspected periodically by state certified inspectors. Specifically, listed structure in the City of Gastonia must have periodic inspections scheduled for the purpose of identifying activities and conditions that pose dangers of fire, explosion, or related hazards.

II. PROCEDURE

A. In order to maintain accuracy and proficiency fire inspections within the City of Gastonia, the Fire Marshal or Administrative Assistant, will perform a quality assurance program for all inspections. When every fire inspection is completed and entered in to the department’s data system, the Fire Marshal or Administrative Assistant will log in to the system and check the inspection for code compliance, and accuracy. The Fire Marshal at his discretion will also conduct quality assurance follow up inspections in the field, to ensure proper professionalism and code compliance by the inspectors.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Smoke Detectors

I. PURPOSE

A. Due to the number of fire fatalities not only in Gaston County but across the country, Project SAFE (Smoke Alarms and Fire Safety Education) to provide and install, free of charge, a smoke detector to those individuals who are in need of one has been started. The following procedure indicates the proper route of referring citizens and the installation of the detectors.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Smoke Detector Installations 1. GFD personnel will install smoke detectors for anyone requesting assistance provided the proper procedure is followed: a. Citizens are to call 704-866-3355 to request smoke detector installation b. Before a smoke detector may be installed, a smoke detector request form must be filled out for the address of the house or unit that the smoke detector is to be installed in.

2. Smoke detectors are to be installed within 15 days of the date that the request is turned over to personnel assigned to install the smoke detector.

B. Smoke Detector Placement-(Minimum Number) 1. Install a smoke detector outside of each separate sleeping area in the immediate vicinity of the bedrooms and on each additional story of the family living unit including basements and excluding crawl spaces and unfinished attics. 2. When installing a smoke detector on the ceiling, if possible place the smoke detector near the center of the hall or room. 3. When placing a smoke detector on the wall, locate the top of the detector 4 to 6 inches from the ceiling with the bottom of the detector no lower than 12 inches from the ceiling. Avoid the dead air space at the top edge of the room--where the ceiling and wall meet--because air flow patterns can prevent smoke particles from reaching the corners in the early stages of the fire.

C. Exterior Walls and Ceilings 1. Do not install a smoke detector on a poorly insulated exterior wall or ceiling, such as are often found in certain mobile homes or light wood frame construction. Extreme exterior temperatures can cause a thermal barrier on the inside which prevents smoke from reaching detectors mounted on the poorly insulated surface. Install the detector on an interior wall.

D. Air Supply Registers

1. Avoid placing detectors within three (3) feet of an air supply register or return.

E. False Alarms 1. To avoid nuisance alarms, do not place detectors: a. near furnaces, hot water heaters, and space heaters b. near where combustion particles are present ( 20 ft away from kitchens) c. near damp or very humid areas (10 ft away from bathrooms with showers) d. in very dusty or dirty areas e. in insect-infested areas f. near fluorescent lights (5 ft from such lights)

F. Completed Form 1. Personnel installing the smoke detector should check for proper operation and instruct the occupant in the detector's operation and maintenance (i.e.) a. testing b. replacement of battery c. proper kind of battery d. cleaning e. noise detector makes indicating battery replacement

2. The occupant may then sign the completed form. A copy of the completed form is to be given to: a. recipient of smoke detector(s) b. City Fire Marshal

Note:* The present North Carolina State Building Code requires the installation of electrically operated (non-plug-in) smoke detectors in residential occupancies built after January 1, 1975.

Note** For help in proper installation of smoke detectors, see Annex at the end of this section.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 09.30.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Public Fire Education & Tours

I. PURPOSE

A. Groups visiting fire stations for tours provide the Department with an excellent opportunity to present fire safety and prevention programs. This procedure is designed to help develop educational programs for the various groups visiting the station and will provide information about the different resources that are available from the Department.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Station Tours 1. The primary concern with tour groups is safety. Make certain that all visitors are aware of what to do in the event of an alarm and that potential safety hazards in and around the station are marked and/or removed. 2. If possible, all tours should be scheduled through the Administrative Assistant. Be sure to prepare all involved personnel ahead of time for the tour so that a program best suited for the age and needs of the individual or group can be developed. 3. Discuss with the leader of the tour group what the tour should consist of in terms of both time and content. 4. When the tour arrives, be sure to greet the visitors and introduce yourselves to them. Give them a quick overview of how the Department operates. 5. If one is available through the Life Safety Division, consider showing the group a film about fire safety or other related topics. Discuss fire hazards and show how fires can be prevented by correcting hazards. Try to make learning about fire safety a pleasurable experience. Always attempt to be positive in your presentation. 6. Explain what a person should do in the event of a fire, or what a person should do if their clothes catch on fire. 7. Don't attempt to show too much information in one visit. 8. If time is available, allow a question and answer period. 9. Show the tour group around the station and present pre-arranged demonstrations of certain activities (Example: Donning of protective gear and breathing apparatus). 10. If available through the Life Safety Division, distribute suitable literature to the group and arrange for the leader to discuss it with the group at their next meeting or class. Provide seasonal material when it is available. 11. Try to evaluate the effectiveness of your program by asking the group what they learned. Be certain to invite the group back.

12. The Administrative Assistant shall keep records about the tour, regarding the number in the group, their ages, time and date of tour, subjects discussed, literature used and phone numbers of potential future contacts.

NOTE: For help in preparing presentations, see the following Annex.

FIRE EDUCATION Annex Pre-School and Kindergarten Programs

Sample Behavioral Objectives:

By the end of the class I want you to (three maximum),

 Show me how to stop, drop and roll if your clothes catch on fire.

 Show me how to stay away from things that get hot, like the stove.

 Show what to do if you find a cigarette lighter.

 Show how to crawl outside to get away from smoke.

 Explain why it is good to have a smoke detector in your home.

Children, ages five and under, represent 7% of the U.S. population, but they suffer 17% of the fire injuries and deaths. They are a HIGH-RISK group.

A. keep the program short, 20-30 minutes maximum, including a film if you use one

B. use no more than three behavior objectives

C. children learn by seeing and doing; what you SHOW them is what they will learn

D. your message must be positive. (Never say "never")

E. instead of "Don't play with cigarette lighters", say "If you find a cigarette lighter, take it to a grown-up"

F. your message must be simple and straight forward

G. be sure your message is consistent

H. get down on the children's level, both in what you present(say) and physically

I. pre-school children need frequent reinforcing of the message

J. either you must return at short time intervals to repeat the message, or you must encourage teachers and parents to repeat the message

K. appropriate hand-out material is a good way to help reinforce the message, or to at least get the message into the home

First-Third Grade Programs

Sample Behavioral Objectives:

 show how to stop, drop and roll if your clothes catch on fire

 explain why you should keep small children away from things that get hot, like the stove

 explain what you should do if you find a cigarette lighter or if you see a small child with a cigarette lighter

 show how to crawl outside to get away from smoke

 explain why it is good to have a smoke detector in your home

Fourth-Sixth Grade Programs

Sample Behavioral Objectives:

 explain how to properly test and maintain a smoke detector and why it is good to have one in your home

 explain how to put out a grease fire by covering the pan with a lid or larger pan, then turning off the heat

 explain how portable heaters can cause fires

 show how to report a fire or other emergency by using the 911 system

 explain why smoke from a fire is do deadly and show how to escape from smoke

 explain what "arson" is and how firefighters feel about it

Junior High and Up

Sample Behavioral Objectives:

 explain what should be considered when storing containers of gasoline and other flammable liquids

 explain the importance of smoke detectors and how to test and maintain them

 explain the importance of having an escape plan in the event of a fire, a plan that every family member knows and understands

 explain the importance of turning down the thermostat of your water heater when there are small children and elderly adults in the home .  explain the proper way of positioning the handles of pots and pans so that they can't be pulled off and on to small children

 explain the proper way to extinguish a grease fire by covering the pan with a lid or larger pan, then turning off the heat

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 10.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire & Emergency Incident Reporting

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a procedure for the flow of fire, company operations, and casualty reports from companies to the General Office for processing.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Fire incident reports and casualty reports comprise the Fire Department's record of its emergency activities. They are classified as public documents which must be kept on file for five years. In addition, the reports contain information which is essential to the good management of the Department. Consequently, it is imperative that the fire incident reports and casualty reports be accurate.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Officers are responsible for completing and entering into the computer the necessary fire incident reports and casualty reports as soon as possible after returning from an alarm (especially if the news media will be requesting information on incident).

B. All Incident Report Narratives shall be completed in a thorough manner.

C. Fire Marshal’s Inspection form shall be filled out and forwarded to the City Inspections Department and to the Fire Marshal, where there is any damage to a structure where inspections need to check for code compliance.

D. Battalion Chiefs are responsible for ensuring that reports are accurate and complete.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 10.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Release of Non-Emergency Information to the News Media

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy for the release of Fire Department related information to the news media for non- emergency situations.

II. POLICY

A. When dealing with the news media, all members shall be polite, professional, and mannerly. The individual member's good judgment must prevail, remembering that his or her primary responsibility is to carry out assigned duties.

1. Release of information at the scene of an emergency will be the responsibility of the officer in charge, and will be governed by the procedure as outlined in GAG 10.20.02. 2. Administrative announcements relating to Department Policy, procedure, Administration, and/or personnel transactions will be coordinated through the Fire Chief or his designated representative. 3. Information regarding an incident under investigation will only be released at the discretion of the Investigator in charge of the incident. Sensitive information that relates to the investigation may be withheld from public disclosure, where public disclosure would interfere with the investigation, the apprehension of suspects, or the rights of suspects. Any questions regarding required and/or requested disclosure of information will be referred to the Fire Chief or his designee, who may coordinate a response with City Attorney.

Back to Table Of Contents

GGeneral Administrative Guideline

NO. 10.20.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Preparation of Emergency Press Releases

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to establish written policy for the preparation and distribution of press releases following completion of operations at emergency incidents.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Written press releases will be prepared by the Incident Commander or his designee and distributed to the media following completion of operations at all significant emergency incidents. 1. For the purpose of this guideline, a ‘significant incident’ is defined as any incident that meets any of the criteria described below: a. Two (2) or more attack lines are placed in service on a structure fire b. Multiple casualty medical incidents (MCI’s) c. Rescue incidents involving prolonged operations, unusual circumstances, or the extrication of two (2) or more victims d. Confined space rescue incidents e. Hazardous materials incidents involving response and on-scene operations of the Haz Mat Team f. Any fire incident involving serious injury or death to a civilian, or any incident involving serious injury or death to a Firefighter g. Any other unusual situation, or at any time that the on-duty Incident Commander, Deputy Chief of Operations, or the Fire Chief deems necessary

III. POLICY

A. Whenever conditions exist that warrant the preparation of a Fire Department Press Release per the above guidelines, the Incident Commander shall insure that the form contained in GOG 10.20.02a is properly prepared and distributed to the media. Current listings of appropriate fax and/or e-mail numbers and addresses will be maintained in the Battalion Chief’s Office for this purpose. 1. All press releases prepared for distribution to the media will be completely and properly prepared as befitting formal correspondence from this department. The preparer shall insure that all spelling and grammar is correct, and that all information contained therein is accurate. 2. The Incident Commander has the authority to appoint a Public Information Officer (PIO) when the needs of the situation dictate. When a PIO is available, they will work closely with the Incident Commander and handle contacts with the media. For major incidents, the Administrative Chief will function as the department’s PIO when available.

3. The Incident Commander is encouraged to work with on-the-scene media representatives and provide them with as much information as possible during the actual emergency. When conditions permit, the Incident Commander may provide on-scene and/or live press releases to the media, or may appoint an appropriate PIO for this purpose. 4. In addition to formal copies of press releases distributed to the media, copies should also be routed to the following persons: a. Fire Chief b. Deputy Chief c. Department PIO

Back to Table Of Contents

NO. 10.20.02a

GASTONIA FIRE DEPARTMENT PRESS RELEASE

1. Type of Incident (fire, Haz Mat, rescue, EMS etc.)

2. Date of Incident

3. Address of Incident

4. Time Alarm was Recieved

5. Time First Unit Arrived on the Scene

6. Conditions Found Upon Arrival

7. Number of Personnel & Apparatus on the Scene

8. Injuries or Death to Civilians

9. Injuries or Deaths to Firefighters

10. Estimated Property Value and Loss

11. Cause of Fire or Emergency

12. Smoke Detectors in Place? yes no

Working Properly? yes no

NARRATIVE:

Prepared by:

For Further Information, Contact the Gastonia Fire Department at (704) 866-6740

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

GAG 10.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: Nov. 30, 2005

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Apparatus event use

I. PURPOSE

To establish criteria for taking apparatus outside the department

Use of Fire Apparatus For Non-Profit/Profit Events

Criteria for Use 1. The event must be inside the City limits of Gastonia. 2. The event must be non-profit 3. The company, if for profit, must sell or promote fire safety items (i.e. smoke detector, fire extinguishers). 4. The Life Safety Division of the Gastonia Fire Department must sponsor the event. 5. The event has been pre-approved by the Fire Chief. 6. Either the company or Life Safety must properly supervise the event.

If the event does not meet one of these six criterions, then the Fire Apparatus will not participate in the event.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: April 13, 2010

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Station Duties & Maintenance

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning station and equipment maintenance.

II. POLICY

A. A member shall perform all duties assigned by his or her Company or superior officer to clean, maintain or beautify the quarters, grounds, furnishing and equipment that are the property of the City. B. A member shall maintain, at all times, the station, grounds and furnishing in an acceptable condition. A member shall refrain from leaving an area untidy. C. Daily general cleaning duties shall be performed each morning at the beginning of each tour of duty. D. Weekly and periodic duties shall be performed on the day prescribed in the routine schedule.

1. General Cleaning a. Bathrooms: (1) Clean wash basins, urinals, clean mirrors, sweep and mop, etc. b. Bedroom: (1) Dust furniture and window ledge, vacuum or sweep and mop, etc. c. Lounge: (1) Straighten furniture, dust, vacuum or sweep and mop, etc. d. Other: (1) Clean Office and apparatus areas, kitchen, hallways, stairs, hose room, empty trash containers, clean floors as appropriate (vacuum or sweep and mop) and wash off front, side and rear parking areas, etc.

2. Monthly a. Check furnace filters / Fire extinguishers in each fire station and on all apparatus (includes cars) on the first day of every month. (Initial and date each extinguisher).

(1) Monday (a) General cleaning, clean motors on fire apparatus, thorough cleaning and operational check of all small equipment (saws, ejectors, breathing equipment, etc.) perform motor vehicle safety inspection check list, charge battery on suction units, and wipe off, rinse or wash all vehicles,

(2) Tuesday (a) General cleaning thoroughly clean kitchen and bathrooms, wipe off, rinse, or wash as appropriate all vehicles, etc.

(3) Wednesday (a) General cleaning, thoroughly vacuum or sweep and mop Office, lounge and bedroom areas, plus periodic waxing of same areas. Polish brass, dust wall paneling and lockers on the same schedule as waxing, wipe off, rinse or wash as appropriate all vehicles, etc.

(4) Thursday (a) General cleaning, wash windows (inside and out) remove spider webs, wipe off, rinse, or wash as appropriate all vehicles, etc.

(5) Friday (a) General cleaning, cut grass, fuel vehicles, get supplies, wipe off, rinse, or wash as appropriate all vehicles, etc.

(6) Saturday (a) General cleaning, thoroughly clean trucks, cars, (vacuum inside), ladders on Aerial apparatus, etc.

(7) Sunday (a) Necessary cleaning such a sweeping and emptying trash containers, etc.

III. AT THE BEGINNING OF EACH TOUR OF DUTY THE ENGINEER SHALL MAKE:

A. A thorough inspection of the apparatus and perform preventive maintenance as required. The engineer shall inspect the pump for correct operation and shall report all malfunctions and have all malfunctions corrected. B. A thorough inspection of all equipment making sure that each item is present and that each item is functioning properly. The engineer shall report all malfunctions and correct them or have them corrected. C. Report any missing equipment and all problems or malfunctions that have not been corrected to the oncoming company engineer and/or the oncoming officer.

IV. VEHICLE EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST

A. If misplaced or malfunctioning equipment is not recorded (vehicle equipment check list) and reported as stated above the person or persons (Engineers, Captain, Battalion Chief) responsible shall be subject to disciplinary action. This shall include negligence or misuse of the same with the responsible party subject to the same action.

**THIS FORM IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY**

City of Gastonia Fire Department

Fire Officer's Weekly and Monthly Duties

Monthly Duties

Duty Day to be Completed Station and Apparatus Fire Extinguishers Checked First Day of the Month HVAC Filters checked or replaced First Day of the Month Verify Apparatus Check Sheets Last Day of the Month Wash Mattress Covers First Monday of the Month Supply Order submitted to Administrative Assistant Last Day of the Month

Periodic Duties

Duty A-Shift B-Shift C-Shift Vehicle Waxing April August December Spring – Clean Aug – Oct Clean, Grease Hydrant Static Maintenance Hose Testing Pump Testing Ladder Testing

Daily Duties Day of Week Duty Monday General Cleaning Small Equipment SCBA Records Vehicle Safety Sheets Charging of Suction Units Tuesday General Cleaning Thorough Cleaning of Kitchen Wednesday General Cleaning Vacuum Carpeted Areas Dusting of Furniture

Thursday General Cleaning Wash Windows Friday General Cleaning Fueling of Vehicles Grounds Maintenance Saturday General Cleaning Ladder Maintenance Sunday General Cleaning

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 2, 2017

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Washing Fire Department and Personal Vehicles

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning cleaning and care of Fire Department and personal vehicles.

II. POLICY

A. Fire apparatus will not be parked in front of fire stations for extended periods of time, except when duties, responsibilities or activities would require it to be left outdoors. The vehicle(s) shall be returned inside station after such activities are completed. B. Maintenance on personal vehicles or other private property shall be permitted only after 1800 hours during weekdays and on weekends and holidays when duty assignments are completed. Such activities will be permitted only on members personal vehicles. C. Any work performed on private automobiles will be done with member’s own supplies and tools.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Securing Fire Stations

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning the securing of each fire station.

II. DISCUSSION

A. The Fire Department Quarters are public buildings and are open for visitation from the public. A tour guide shall escort visitors and answer questions pertinent to the tour and make the visitor feel welcome. A member shall treat the public with respect, courtesy and consideration at all times.

III. POLICY

A. The Fire Department Quarters shall remain open for visitors between the hours of 0800 hours until 2200 hours, circumstances permitting, while the station is manned and on stand-by ready alert status.

B. After 2200 hours of each evening, at the discretion of the station officer, the station shall be considered closed to all visitors and the entrances shall be secured for the night. After 2200 hours members shall extend an invitation for the public to return at a more convenient time during the day when they can be given a more complete tour of the facilities. This invitation shall be extended in a polite and respectful manner.

C. Fire Department Quarters shall be secured at each response when the station is to be left unattended, to protect city and employee properties.

D. Loitering shall be prohibited at all times. Children must be accompanied by an adult when touring the Fire Department facilities and at no time shall children be permitted to play in the stations or on station grounds.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.20.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Emergency Fire and Evacuation Plan

I. PURPOSE

A. To set forth required action in the event of a fire or other emergency at Gastonia Fire Department fire stations. The required actions include fire emergency and accountability of personnel.

II. PROCEDURE

A. REPORTING OF FIRES

1. If a fire or sign(s) of fire are discovered by departmental employees, use the PA (Public Address) system on the telephone to notify occupants in the building. a. The Officer-in-Charge of the station shall ascertain the location of the fire origin and shall relay this information to City Fire Communications via radio and/or 911. b. The Officer-in-Charge of the station shall ensure that all Administrative personnel and/or visitor(s) have evacuated the building.

2. Upon notification through the PA (Public Address) system, a general evacuation of the station shall commence. Persons evacuating shall proceed to the nearest exit discharge point that is not obstructed by fire, smoke, or toxic fumes. a. During the evacuation process, employees should take note of any other employee(s) or visitor(s) who are along their path of egress that may require assistance in evacuating the building. b. After exiting the building, go to the designated Emergency Area(s).

3. All drivers shall drive their vehicles out of the station if the building is on fire and if it can be accomplished safely.

4. No one shall go back inside the building until the Officer-in-Charge has indicated that everything is clear and it is safe to do so.

5. All employees are to be trained when the plan is initiated; responsibilities change, and/or new employee(s) are hired.

6. Fire extinguisher training shall be conducted annually for non-firefighting employee(s) who are designated, by certified personnel. Proper records shall be maintained.

7. Fire drills shall be held periodically and proper records maintained.

8. The Emergency Fire and Evacuation Plan will be reviewed periodically, and immediately amended, if necessary.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Public Use of Fire Station Community and Training Rooms

I. PURPOSE

A. To provide a written guideline governing the use of “Community/Training Rooms” in all City fire stations.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Because we are an active and viable part of each community within our City, the “Meeting Room” in our Fire Department Stations will be made accessible to the citizens in each respective community in an effort to contribute to the safety, well being, and communicative needs of that community. It is our hope that frequent and regular association between groups and individuals within each neighborhood and fire department personnel will engender a spirit of commonality, camaraderie, and trust.

III. GENERAL POLICY

A. No outside food or beverages will be allowed in or about fire station property. B. No sales events or fund raisers are allowed on department property without the approval of the Fire Chief. C. No groups in excess of recommended room capacity. D. No smoking is allowed inside the building. E. No events or usage which interferes with the normal duties and responsibilities of the fire station’s operation will be permitted. F. All federal, state, and local laws must be upheld. G. Building and grounds may not be altered in any way to accommodate any groups. H. No pets except for seeing-eye dogs are allowed in the meeting area. I. Community rooms can only be reserved one day per month per entity. J. Community room usage is limited to four hours maximum. K. No parties of any type will be allowed in the Community/Training room.

IV. USAGE GUIDELINES

A. Rooms must be reserved by an adult (at least 21 years old) who has official capacity with the group requesting the room. B. Groups using facility will be responsible for any theft or damage caused by anyone entering the room as a result of their meeting.

C. Groups must enter and vacate facility at the pre-arranged times. D. Fire Department items may not be moved or used without prior consent from Fire Chief or his designee. E. Room must be returned to its original condition before group leaves, all garbage and other detritus removed. F. Groups may use ONLY areas designated for public usage; all staff and crew areas are off limits. G. Nails, tape, staples, etc. may not be applied to Community Room walls for any reason. H. All exits must be maintained free and clear of obstructions. I. The use of any electrical device must be approved by station personnel before activation inside the Community Room. J. Disruptive behavior will not be tolerated. K. The Captain at each station will have authority to oversee any guideline discrepancies and will act accordingly. L. The station’s kitchen is not intended to support Community Room activities.

V. RESERVATION GUIDELINES

A. Responsible party must contact the Captain on duty at the station to be reserved. B. Captain will check the Fire Calendar to make sure the date and time requested are available. C. If there are no scheduling conflicts, Captain will make verbal notification of such to the interested party. D. Group representative will come to the station to obtain a copy of these policies and guidelines. E. After reading these guidelines and agreeing to the terms of this document, the group representative will sign the reservation form. F. The Station Captain will make a copy of the signed agreement and place it in station files. G. The Station Captain will confirm reservation(s) on the Department’s Master Calendar. H. Any group using the facilities that fails to follow these guidelines may be barred from future use of the Community Meeting Room.

I verify that I am an official representative of ______and agree to abide by all policies and guidelines as pertains to our meeting, scheduled on : ______Date and time

______Signature/date Station Captain

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.30.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Station Log Book

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish responsibility and authority for maintaining station log books.

II. POLICY

A. The station log book should be a chronological record of events as they take place during the course of a shift.

B. The day, month and year shall be posted to identify the date. The date begins at 0000 hours and continues until 2400 hours.

C. Shift personnel reporting for duty shall be logged at appropriate times. Personnel leave shall be reported at appropriate times. Times of incidents (In route and in service) shall be entered in red ink, and incident number entered in left hand margin. Times shall be maintained in 24 hour or military time. All accidents and injuries shall be entered at appropriate time in appropriate station log book.

D. Log books will be kept orderly, neat and as accurately as possible.

E. The station Captain or person acting that capacity shall insure that all entries be accurate as possible and neat and legible.

F. Every line should be utilized with no open or skipped lines. Any information not logged will be reported to officer in charge of shift, and any delayed entries will be initialed.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.30.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: April 18, 2006

Rescinds:

Subject: United States Code – Flag Display

I. POSITION AND MANNER OF DISPLAY

A. The flag, when carried in a procession with another flag or flags, should be either on the marching right; that is, the flag's own right, or, if there is a line of other flags, in front of the center of that line, 1. The flag should not be displayed on a float in a parade except from a staff, or as provided in subsection (i) of this section. 2. The flag should not be draped over the hood, top, sides, or back of a vehicle or of a railroad train or a boat. When the flag is displayed on a motorcar, the staff shall be fixed firmly to the chassis or clamped to the right fender. 3. No other flag or pennant should be placed above or if on the same level, to the right of the flag of the United States of America, except during church services conducted by naval chaplains at sea, when the church pennant may be flown above the flag during church services for the personnel of the Navy. No person shall display the flag of the United Nations or any other national or international flag equal, above, or in a position of superior prominence or honor to, or in place of, the flag of the United States at any place within the United States or any Territory or possession thereof: Provided, That nothing in this section shall make unlawful the continuance of the practice heretofore followed of displaying the flag of the United Nations in a position of superior prominence or honor, and other national flags in positions of equal prominence or honor, with that of the flag of the United States at the headquarters of the United Nations. 4. The flag of the United States of America, when it is displayed with another flag against a wall from crossed staffs, should be on the right, the flag's own right, and its staff should be in front of the staff of the other flag. 5. The flag of the United States should be at the center and at the highest point; of the group when a number of flags of States or localities or pennants of societies are grouped and displayed from staffs. 6. When flags of States, cities, or localities, or pennants of societies are flown on the same halyard with flag of the United States, the latter should always be at the peak. When the flags are flown from adjacent staffs, the flag of the United States should be hoisted first and lowered last. No such flag or pennant may be placed above the flag of the United States or to the United States flag's right. 7. When flags of two or more nations are displayed, they are to be flown from separate staffs of the same height. The flags should be approximately equal size. International usage forbids the display of the flag of one nation above that of another nation in time of peace. 8. When the flag of the United States is displayed from a staff projecting horizontally or at an angle from the window sill, balcony, or front of a building, the union of the flag should be placed at the peak of the staff unless the flag is at half staff. When the flag is suspended over a sidewalk from a

rope extending from a house to a pole at the edge of the sidewalk, the flag should be hoisted out, union first, from the building. 9. When displayed either horizontally or vertically against a wall, the union should be uppermost and to the flag's own right, that is to the observer's left. When displayed in a window, the flag should be displayed in the same way, with the union or blue field to the left of the observer in the street. 10. When the flag is displayed over the middle of the street, it should be suspended vertically with the union to the north in a east and west street or to the east in a north and south street. 11. When used on a speaker's platform, the flag, if displayed flat, should be displayed above and behind the speaker. When displayed from a staff in a church or public auditorium, the flag of the United States of America should hold the position of superior prominence, in advance of audience, and in the position of honor at the clergyman's or speaker's right as he faces the audience. Any other flags so displayed should be placed on the left of the clergyman or speaker or to the right of the audience. 12. The flag should form a distinctive feature of the ceremony of unveiling a statue or monument, but it should never be used as the covering for the statue or monument. 13. The flag, when flown at half-staff, should be first hoisted to the peak for an instant and then lowered to the half-staff position. The flag should be again raised to the peak before it is lowered for the day. On Memorial Day the flag should be displayed at half-staff until noon only, then raised to the top of the staff. By order of the President, the flag shall be flown at half-staff upon the death of principal figures of the United States Government and the Governor of a State, territory, or possession, as a mark of respect to their memory. In the event of the death of other officials or foreign dignitaries, the flag is to be displayed at half-staff according to Presidential instructions or orders, or in accordance with recognized customs or practices not inconsistent with law. In the event of the death of a present of former official of the government of any State, territory, or possession of the United State, the Governor of the State, territory, or possession may proclaim that the National flag shall be flown at half-staff. The flag shall be flown at half-staff thirty days from the death of the President or a former President; ten days from the day of death of the Vice President, the Chief Justice or a retired Chief Justice of the United States, or the Speaker of the House of Representatives; from the day of death until interment of an Associate Justice of the Supreme Court, a Secretary of an executive or military department, a former Vice President, or the Governor of a State, territory, or possession; and on the day of death and the following day for a Member of Congress. As used in this subsection-- a. the term "half-staff" means the position of the flag when it is one-half the distance between the top and bottom of the staff; b. the term "executive or military department" means any agency listed under sections 101 and 102 of title 5; and c. the term "Member of Congress" means a Senator, a Representative, a Delegate, or the Resident Commissioner from Puerto Rico. 14. When the flag is used to cover a casket, it should be so placed that the union is at the head and over the left shoulder. The flag should not be lowered into the grave or allowed to touch the ground. 15. When the flag is suspended across a corridor or lobby in a building with only one main entrance, it should be suspended vertically with the union of the flag to the observer's left upon entering. If the building has more than one main entrance, the flag should be suspended vertically near the center of the corridor or lobby with the union to the north, when entrances are to the east and west or to the east when entrances are to the north and south. If there are entrances in more than two directions, the union should be to the east.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.30.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Station Libraries

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to establish formal procedure governing the establishment and use of Fire Station libraries.

II. POLICY

A. All fire and Operations Branch work stations will be equipped with a complete station library. The library is intended to allow members to further their self-development, conduct research, develop training programs, and prepare for upcoming promotional examinations. All library books are to remain in the Station.

III. DISCUSSION

A. The Administrative Chief will maintain administrative control of all station libraries. Station libraries will be under the control of station Captain(s) at all times. Operations Battalion Chiefs will insure that station libraries are inventoried at least quarterly and kept up-to-date.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.30.06 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 2, 2017

Rescinds: May 1, 2013

Subject: Vehicles Used to Obtain Meals

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning use of fire department and personal vehicles to obtain meals.

II. POLICY

A. Trips to obtain food will be limited to maximum of two (2) per shift duty and will be recorded in the station log by the officer or person-in-authority.

B. A city vehicle may be used for transportation to obtain meals. However, if the destination is outside of the primary response area, permission must be obtained from the on duty Battalion Chief.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.30.07 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Station Down Time

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy for watching television, designated rest and meal times during normal duty hours

II. POLICY

Televisions may be turned on during work hours.

Rest periods may be permitted at the discretion of the station officer. These periods may be permitted except when Fire Department duties and responsibilities require otherwise.

Meal Time: Lunch shall be for a one (1) hour period, normally, from 1200 to 1300 hours (excluding weekends and Holidays) except when Fire Department duties and responsibilities require otherwise.

Violation of this policy is a Category C offense.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 11.30.08 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: April 4, 2006

Rescinds:

Subject: Safe Place

I. PURPOSE

B. To establish a policy for “Safe Place”

II. POLICY

A. All procedures are outlined in the procedures following this policy (page2). B. Steps for each Station to follow 1. Take action to lock down your station and notify your Battalion Chief what is taking place. 2. The Battalion Chief will notify Dispatch and take the company out of service. 3. The Captain should contact the With Friend Help Line number provided in the folder found in station libraries. 4. It is up to the discretion of the Captain or acting officer as to whether or not the situation warrants calling the police. (I.E. if the person has been followed). 5. If there is any sign of physical abuse, don’t hesitate to call EMS to have the person or persons transported to the hospital. (The hospital will notify With Friends Inc.) 6. Provide an area of comfort and be hospitable to those in your care. NEVER LEAVE THEM ALONE!!! 7. Ask common, non-probing questions to determine the nature of the visit. a. What is your name? b. Were you followed? c. Have you been physically hurt? d. Does anyone know you are here?

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 21.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 1, 2011

Rescinds:

Subject: Gastonia Fire Department Emergency Operations Plan for Multi- Hazards

I. PURPOSE

A. SUB-CENTER ACTIVATION PROCEDURES

1. Fire Department Sub-Center Activated - City EOC “not activated”: On single scene incidents the Battalion Chief will establish command and operate at the emergency scene. The Sub-center will most likely not be open on single scene incidents. However, if the need arises for sub-center support, the Battalion Chief will request that an engine company move-up to fire station # 1 to initiate activation of the departments Emergency Operations Sub-Center. Sub- center operations will be directed from the Captain’s office and the community room at fire station #1.

a. For limited operations, the Battalion Chief may direct the Captain located at the sub-center to supervise sub-center activities. (such as a limited recall of emergency personnel to assist at the emergency scene or to man reserve apparatus) b. On multi-scene incidents, such as multiple fires or lighting strikes during thunderstorms, the Battalion Chief may choose to direct sub-center operations at fire station #1 or fire station #4 depending on the location of the incidents or availability. c. If additional support is needed to manage the sub-center, the Battalion Chief will contact the Deputy Chief.

Note: Activating the fire departments sub-center does not obligate a request to be made, to open the City’s EOC.

2. City EOC Activated: Once the City EOC is activated, City departments will open their sub-centers as the need arises or when directed by the City EOC.

a. The Fire Chief or designee (see line of succession for EOC and sub-center on page 8 paragraph G of this chapter), will report to the City EOC and provide executive direction and control of incident operations and the departments sub-center if activated. b. If the fire departments sub-center is not in operation the Fire Chief or City EOC Command may direct that the sub-center be activated. c. Upon this order, the Battalion Chief will Move-up the engine company as explained in the previous paragraphs and instruct the sub-center supervisor to contact the Deputy Chief and remaining 8-5 personnel to notify them that the sub-center has been officially activated.

d. The Deputy Chief will provide intermediate executive direction and control of sub-center and incident operations and will serve as the point of contact to the Fire Chief located in the City EOC. If the shift Battalion Chief is located in the sub-center he/she will provide direction and control of the sub-center and incident operations unless he/she is relieved by the Deputy Chief. Appropriate duty assignments will be made for 8-5 personnel once the Deputy Chief or alternate has accessed the situation. e. Once the County EOC is activated, the Fire Chief or designee will report to the County EOC and the Deputy Chief will report to the City EOC. f. If the Deputy Chief is directed or chooses to respond to the emergency scene, the line of succession for EOC and sub-center alternates will be followed as outlined in this sop. g. Office supplies, maps and equipment needed for sub-center operations are available at fire station #1 and will be used as needed. h. A current events log showing all important calls, events and dispositions will be maintained at the sub-center. (A copy of the Events Log (form) is located in Chapter 1 page 7). i. A sign-in roster will be provided and all employees reporting for duty in the sub-center or for emergency response will sign this roster upon arrival and after completing the tour of duty. (A copy of the sign-in roster (form) is located in Chapter 1 page 9)

B. Recall of Off-Duty Personnel

1. Each Battalion Chief will maintain a current roster of personnel assigned to their respective shift indicating the primary and secondary (if applicable) phone number of each person.

2. This list is to be placed at the end of this chapter.

3. This department Emergency Recall Roster listed by shifts will be provided to the following:

a. A copy to City Communications. b. A copy to be placed at the end of this chapter.

4. It will be at the discretion of the Fire Chief, or his/her designee, to assign the function of recalling the required personnel. If an emergency occurs during normal business hours, this particular assignment can be made by 8-5 personnel. Should a major emergency occur after normal business hours and station #1 is empty, an outlying Engine Company shall be relocated to station #1 and assigned the task of recalling personnel. Immediate notification of the Fire Chief and Deputy Chief is required for major emergencies.

5. When an emergency recall of off duty personnel has been declared, any personnel contacted and informed of the emergency shall report to their respective station or offices, unless otherwise directed. Once they arrive, call-in to the FD Sub-Center for assignment.

6. Once the initial recall is made, the person assigned to the function of recalling personnel will continue to call the remaining personnel on the recall roster and notify them to be on standby alert should they be needed.

7. The person(s) responsible for recall shall record the name of members contacted and those where contact was attempted. This information will be subsequently forwarded to the Fire Chief.

8. In the event of an ineffective recall of personnel by the method described, the Fire Chief or his/her designee may order the contact of radio and television stations requesting special bulletins advising off duty Fire Department personnel to report for duty at their official duty station. To accomplish this, contact the Police/Fire Department’s Public Information Officer and ask for assistance.

9. Responsibilities of declaring an Emergency Recall:

a. The Deputy Chief (and then the Battalion Chiefs) may assume the responsibility to declare an emergency recall of off duty personnel any time the Fire Chief is not readily available. (Is out of town or cannot be reached by telephone or pager!) b. The responsibility of the assignment of recall should be specific, specifying the number of off duty personnel to be called, (Total Recall vs. Limited Recall) the rank or special classification of personnel to be called, and to specify where the off duty personnel are to report. (This may depend on the manning of reserve apparatus).

If limited recall is to be used, the OFF-GOING Shift personnel should be the “first” to be recalled up to 12 O’clock midnight. After 12 O’clock midnight, the ON-COMING shift personnel should be the “first” to be recalled.

10. Levels of limited Recall:

Level 1: (3-4 FF’s) 1 company or 2 brush units, Notification of Deputy Chief Level 2: (7-8 FF’s) 2 companies, Activation of Sub-Center, Notification of Deputy Chief and 2 off-duty Battalion Chiefs

Level 3: (9-12 FF’s) 3 companies, Activation of Sub-Center, Notification of Full Staff, Move-up of VFD’s if needed

Level 4: (12-16 FF’s) 4 companies, Activation of Sub-Center, Move-up VFD’s, Notification of Full Staff

C. DISASTER RESPONSE REQUIREMENTS (TASK)

1. In the event of a disaster, the fire department will be responsible for the following tasks:

a. Fire Suppression b. Search & Rescue Operations c. Hazardous Materials Mitigation d. Staging Area Management e. Securing Landing Zones For Helicopters f. Evacuation Assistance g. Fire Investigations

D. CONCEPT OF OPERATION

1. During emergencies, the fire department must be prepared to operate independently or utilize support from neighboring fire departments. Mutual aid agreements relating to all available expertise, equipment, and personnel should be used.

2. In an emergency which requires a number of emergency services (e.g. fire, rescue, law enforcement, etc.) to respond, all units, regardless of service, will be coordinated by an Incident Commander. NIMS protocols will be followed referencing Unified Command.

3. If fire or threat of fire is involved, the Fire Chief or designee is the Incident Commander.

4. If no fire or threat of fire exists, the Incident Commander will be determined by prior assignment as listed in the City of Gastonia Emergency Operations Plan, Chapter 6 (tab #6), page 5. (Who’s in Charge?)

5. In non-emergency periods, the role of the fire department is confined to performing inspections; enforcement of regulations concerning storage, handling, shipment and reporting of hazardous materials; pre-incident planning; and training and maintenance of specialized equipment.

E. ORGANIZATION AND ASSIGNMENT OF RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Organization / The Gastonia Fire Department is divided into the following divisions: a. Administration b. Operations c. Life Safety d. Training e. Risk Management

2. Assignment of Responsibilities / Sub-Center:

a. Fire Department Personnel are responsible for the following:

1. Preparedness

(a) Prepare information and SOP’s for coordination of firefighting, hazmat response, and search & rescue during emergencies. (b) Develop mutual aid and automatic aid agreements. (c) Prepare inventories of all fire equipment and personnel resources. (d) Upon notification of a pending emergency situation, the Battalion Chief should initiate the following preparatory actions; (1) Contact 1 Battalion Chief, 6-Captains, 3-Drivers and 7-Firefighters and have them on standby notice to report if needed to man the two reserve fire engines and reserve ladder. The three (3) extra Captains will standby at stations 1, 5 and 6 to provide direction to any volunteer fire departments that respond into the City to assist during the emergency. (Notify off-duty Battalion Chief’s to let them know that their assistance may be needed later on in the emergency.) (2) Have all portable/mounted generators, utility saws, chain saws, and any equipment operated by a 2-cycle or 4-cycle engine checked for fuel and oil. Start and operate the equipment to assure readiness for service. (3) Have all 2-cycle or 4-cycle fuel cans, at each station and on fire apparatus, filled. (4) Ensure that all fire department vehicles have full fuel tanks. (5) Have all radio equipment checked for proper operation. This includes base stations, mobile units on apparatus and portables. Each station should call by numeric order to fire station #1, and check all radios assigned to that station and apparatus. (6) Double-check all equipment that may be needed during the emergency. (Flashlights, shovels, SCBA’s, extra air tanks, etc.)

2. Response

(a) Fire Chief, report to City EOC upon activation and provide executive direction and control of firefighting operations. (b) Deploy fire personnel and equipment during emergencies. (c) Ensure that a Command Post is established and the NIMS Incident Command System is initiated. (d) If multiple calls are dispatched, the Battalion Chief should assign fire ground channels. (See list of channels on page 12 of this chapter). (e) Direct and dispatch firefighting aid from other municipalities (if applicable) and other resources as needed to the disaster site.

(f) Designate staging areas for mutual aid and volunteer forces responding from other areas. (g) Secure mutual aid fire equipment and personnel to supplement empty City fire stations. Assign a fire department employee to assist the mutual aid company. (h) Remain in contact with fire department representative in the City EOC. Advise/brief city officials/agencies (provide updates as needed). (i) If a power failure shuts down City Communications computer system, a fire department representative needs to be assigned to Communications to help direct engine companies to the correct fire districts. (j) Alert all emergency support services to the dangers associated with technological hazards and fire during emergency operations. (k) Ensure that appropriate agencies are notified of a hazardous material release, i.e. Local Emergency Planning Committee, Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), Division of Environmental Management, National Response Center, etc. (Contact Gaston County Emergency Management when a reportable release is encountered and they will notify all of these agencies.) (l) When responding to a chemical release, determine if the release is deliberate.

(1) In the event of an intentional release of an extremely hazardous substance such as the recent incidents in Tokyo, Japan, it is important that the National Response Center is contacted. 1-800-424-8802. Contact Emergency Management to assist with this notification. (2) Provide for protective equipment, instruments, antidotes, and clothing to perform assigned tasks in a hazardous chemical or radiological environment. (3) Provide for maintaining exposure records and ensure that dosimeters are read and reported at appropriate frequencies. (4) Provide radiological and hazardous materials decontamination and monitoring support and ensure that proper personnel and equipment contamination reduction procedures are carried out. (5) File all necessary reports.

(m) Support rescue and EMS operations. (n) Assist in warning and notifying the affected population of an existing or impending emergency. (o) Ensure that a current log showing all-important calls, events and dispositions are being maintained at the sub-center. (p) Provide a sign-in roster for all employees reporting for duty. (q) Telephone numbers 869-1022 and 869-1919 in the Captain’s office will be designated as emergency numbers to be used by the fire departments sub-center. No employees are to call these numbers during an emergency except to conduct business relating to the ongoing emergency. Telephone #869-1918 will be used for personnel calls! If the station emergency telephones (red telephones) are not needed for dispatching, the Battalion Chief may use this telephone during the emergency. These are listed in Chapter 10 [tab 19] of the City plan) (r) Refer to Checklist’s in Chapter 7 (tab #10) (City of Gastonia Emergency Operations plan) and complete tasks listed which apply to the fire department but have not been initiated at this time.

3. Recovery

a. Report to City EOC any damage to fire department facilities, properties or equipment. b. If needed, provide support personnel to assist in traffic control and damage assessment operations. c. Conduct fire inspections during recovery. d. Ensure that the chain of evidence is preserved and investigate suspicious incidents.

e. Critique actions taken during the emergency. f. Review SOP’s and revise accordingly. g. After significantly traumatic incidents, such as a death or multiple deaths, consider requesting “Critical Incident Stress Debriefing.” Formal Debriefing should occur within 24-48 hours after the conclusion of the incident. Consider whether attendance at the session(s) is/are to be mandatory or voluntary. For a small number of employees, the local American Red Cross can be contacted at 864-2623. They will contact local Mental Health volunteers and request the debriefing. For small or large groups, the Centralina Council of Governments “Region F Critical Incident Stress Debriefing Team” can be reached at 1-800-574-3311.

F. DIRECTION AND CONTROL

1. Direction and control of the fire department is exercised by the executive branch of government under the supervision of the Fire Chief. 2. Neighboring volunteer fire departments are chartered as private non-profit organizations and provide service to the City of Gastonia by mutual aid agreements. 3. Coordination of the fire department in an emergency is accomplished by the Gastonia Fire Chief, utilizing mutual aid agreements developed with local units and statewide, through the State Fire Commission. 4. When the City EOC is activated, the Fire Chief will be located in the City EOC. Upon activation of the County EOC, the Fire Chief may report to the County EOC and his/her designated alternate will report to the City EOC. 5. The Field Incident Commander will direct and control all on-scene activities during emergencies and coordinate with the EOC and other response agencies. 6. The Communications Center will maintain direct communication with on-site personnel.

G. CONTINUITY OF GOVERNMENT

1. The line of succession for Fire Department personnel to report to the EOC is:

a. The Fire Chief b. The Deputy Chief c. The Administrative Chief d. The Battalion Chief/Field Incident Commander/ or may direct Sub-center on multiple incidents!

H. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS

1. A listing of the personnel, equipment, and supplies for the fire department is included in this SOP. 2. Reports and records of the fire departments' activities during an emergency/disaster will be collected and maintained by the Division Fire Chief or their designee. 3. Agreements between fire departments and other related organizations will be kept on file in the Gastonia Fire Chief's administrative office. 4. The fire department will maintain current maps and charts and current notification/recall rosters. (Notification/recall rosters will be kept at the end of this SOP.)

I. PLAN DEVELOPMENT AND MAINTENANCE

1. The Fire Department will develop and maintain procedures that reflect operational capabilities.

2. All plans will be reviewed at least annually and tested in exercises. Resources will be inventoried at least annually to include personnel, equipment, supplies, and other items.

J. AUTHORITIES AND REFERENCES

1. The Hazardous Chemical Right-to-Know Act, Article 8, Chapter 95 of the North Carolina General Statutes.

2. North Carolina General Statute, 166-A.

3. North Carolina General Statute, Chapter 58, Article 79 (Investigation of Fires and Inspection of Premises)

4. Title III of Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986 (SARA).

5. County Emergency Management Ordinance.

6. Gastonia Fire Department Policies and Procedures.

7. City of Gastonia Emergency Operations Plan.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 22.10.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: December 10, 2013

Rescinds:

Subject: Radio Communications Equipment Policies and Procedures

The Gastonia Fire Department operates communications equipment for the purpose of fire dispatch, tactical fire ground use, and for day to day operations. This equipment consists of an 800 MHz trunked radio system, MDT or Mobile Data Terminals (Laptop) in the apparatus. All GFD apparatus are equipped with at least one 800 MHz mobile radio and four portable 800 MHz radios. All firefighters on duty are issued a portable radio as part of an effort to provide for firefighter safety and accountability. Some specialty apparatus also are equipped with a mobile VHF radio for mutual aid purposes.

I. 800 MHZ Radio system. The 800 radio system consists of base, mobile, and portable radios for field use as well consoles for dispatching located at the consolidated 911 center located at 615 N. Highland Street. The 800 MHz radio system allows for multiple talk groups spread across multiple zones in the radio for local and regional interoperability. There are also 800 MHz conventional frequencies that are nationwide that allow for interoperability on a much larger scale. For the purpose of this document, only the local GFD (Zone 1) talk groups will be discussed here. The regional and nationwide talk groups and conventional 800 channels will be discussed in a separate document. GFD and GPD are the primary users of this system.

A. GFD Fire Zone. (Zone 1) The GFD Fire Zone (Zone 1) consists of 16 talk groups (Channels). This is the primary zone that all GFD units shall operate in. GFD is the only agency operating on these talk groups. All talk groups allow full access to the 800 MHz repeater system and all are repeated. The talk groups (Channels) are as follows;

Channel Name Purpose On the Fire Center Console

1. GFD DISPATCH Fire Dispatch Yes 2. GFD OPS 2 Fire Ground Yes 3. GFD OPS 3 Fire Ground Yes 4. GFD OPS 4 Fire Ground Yes 5. GFD OPS 5 Fire Ground Yes 6. GFD OPS 6 Fire Ground 7. GFD OPS 7 Fire Ground 8. GFD OPS 8 Fire Ground 9. TRAINING Training Events 10. HAZMAT HazMat Incidents 11. GFD CONF Conference/Chiefs/Etc. 12. GFD ADMIN Fire Prevention/Chiefs/Etc 13. GFD Direct Radio to Radio 14. CMC-LZ1 Landing zone set up and air to ground coordination. 15. CMC-LZ2 Landing zone set up and air to ground coordination.

16. EMERGENCY MayDay Situations Yes

B. GFD Dispatch talk group. The GFD DISPATCH talk group in zone 1 shall be used for dispatching of calls. Apparatus or units outside the firehouse on the air shall monitor GFD DISPATCH for calls. All non-emergency or non-incident related traffic for Fire Center should take place on GFD DISPATCH. i.e. status changes, etc

C. Assignment of Channels for Incidents. Fire Center shall assign a channel upon the dispatch of an alarm.

1. Single Company/Street Alarm Fire Center shall assign GFD DISPATCH channel upon the dispatch of a single company/street alarm. The company shall remain on that channel while responding and for the duration of the incident. Any single company/street alarm/ that escalates beyond a single company/street alarm/medical call where an OPS channel is needed, simply request an OPS channel from Fire Center. Return to GFD DISPATCH after becoming available.

2. Box Alarm/Structure Fire/Commercial Fire/ High Risk Fire Alarm Fire Center shall assign a channel upon the dispatch of a Box Alarm/Structure Fire/Commercial Fire/ High Risk Fire Alarm, etc. The responding companies shall switch to that channel prior to responding (when apparatus is started) and remain for the duration of the incident. Any traffic to and from Fire Center shall be on the assigned channel. First arriving company will announce their on scene status as well as size up and unit assignments to the balance of the response on this channel. Once the call is complete switch back to GFD DISPATCH.

3. Mutual Aid with County Fire. When responding outside the city to mutual aid requests GFD units ,while enroute, will need to request a patch from Fire Center. Units should request the patch to be set up on our assigned OPS Channel to the assigned VHF channel that county units are using. This is limited to the following VHF channels in the console at Fire Center:

COUNTY FIRE CITY FIRE EMS COMMAND 1 COMMAND 2 STATE FIRE STATE RESCUE HOSPITAL STATE PARK

VHF ops channels will have to be patched locally at the scene provided one of the battalion cars are on scene. These channels are as follows:

HAZMAT OPS 11 OPS 12 OPS 13 OPS 14 OPS 15 OPS 16

4. Communications with GEMS.

When responding to medical calls, GFD units needing communications with GEMS ,while enroute, or on scene can switch to the GAST-EMS talk group located in zone 18V.

All GFD radios are equipped with VIPER and can talk directly with any GEMS unit equipped with an 800 MHZ radio.

5. Special Incidents. For special events such as training, hazmat incidents, fire prevention activities use the appropriate channel for such. Fire Center will not assign these channels. These channels will be assigned locally by the IC and as such do not make requests to Fire Center for use of same. Refer to the above list for these channels.

6. Emergency Talk group or Channel/Man down button. The Emergency talk group is located on channel 16 in zone 1 of the mobile and portable radio. The orange man down button located on the lapel mic and on top of the portable radio will place the radio in the emergency mode. Regardless of what channel you are on, the radio will default to the emergency talk group and will remain there until radio is turned off and powered back on or the man down button is pressed and held approximately 3 seconds. The man down button will only be used as a last resort after standard may-day procedures have been applied such as LUNAR. For more information regarding LUNAR and MAY-DAY procedures, see the appropriate SOG.

D. Fire Station Base Radios. Each Gastonia Firehouse is equipped with 2 base radios.

1. 800 MHZ Base Radio. The 800 MHZ base radio remotes shall be the primary radio for the firehouse to receive alarms. The 800 MHZ base radio is programmed with all zones and talk groups the same as the mobile and portables. The 800 MHZ base radio shall monitor GFD DISPATCH. The fire station base radio shall remain on this talk group unless otherwise directed to change by Fire Center or GFD Chief Officer. Each fire station has a number on remotes spread strategically throughout the station to ensure access to the main radio quickly. The remotes are capable of changing the talk groups/zones on the radio if needed. The remotes also allow the radio to scan a specific channel/talk group list that is programmed by the radio shop. GFD- Dispatch is the priority channel while scanning. The can be turned off/on by pressing the button on any remote labeled “scan on/off”. The radio should be scanning at all times.

2. VHF Base Radio. The VHF base radio must remain on and channel 1 selected in order for the firehouse alarm and lights to be activated by Fire Center.

E. Mobile Apparatus Radios. The mobile apparatus radio is programmed with all zones and talk groups the same as the portables. The mobile apparatus radio shall be used to monitor GFD Dispatch while company is out of the station. The mobile apparatus radio shall remain on this talk group unless assigned an ops channel for an incident or using GFD CONFERENCE, TRAINING, ADMIN, etc for special incidents. A scan list has been set up in all apparatus mobile radios. When “SCAN” is on, the radio scans the following channels: GFD-DISPATCH, GFD-OPS 2, GFD-OPS 3, GFD-OPS 4, GFD-OPS 5, GFD CONFERENCE, AND GFD-EMERGENCY. Your priority channel is the channel selected on the screen. GFD-DISPATCH is always the secondary priority when you are on an ops channel or some other channel. The “SCAN” feature should be left on as a general rule. This will allow you to “monitor” other incidents being dispatched while responding if you are assigned on another channel. If the additional traffic on other channels being scanned becomes a distraction, then “SCAN” should be turned off until needed again. Your primary communications focus is the original ops channel and incident you were sent on. The

apparatus radio should be on the assigned ops channel upon responding. Firefighter portable radios should be on the ops channel and turned on when you arrive on scene.

F. Firefighter Portable Radio. The firefighter portable radio is programmed with all zones and talk groups the same as the mobiles and base radios. The firefighter portable radio shall be used to monitor GFD Dispatch while company is out of the station. The firefighter portable radio shall remain on this talk group unless assigned an ops channel for an incident or using GFD CONFERENCE, TRAINING, ADMIN, etc for special incidents.

1. Firefighter Portable Radio Daily check. The firefighter portable radio is an integral part of the firefighters PPE. Each firefighter at the beginning of each tour of duty shall check their radio for proper operation. The firefighter shall complete the following daily checks. A smart battery charger is provided in the station for each major piece of apparatus for fresh batteries.

a. Turn radio on to ensure power up. b. Check signal strength to ensure connectivity to the system. c. Complete a radio check against the other radios on the unit on GFD CONFERENCE. d. Check battery level by pressing the appropriate key on the front of the radio under where it says BATT on the radio screen. Change battery if less than 75%. e. Check overall condition of the radio and ensure audio is coming out of the lapel mic. f. Check lapel mic cord for damage. g. Check antennae for damage. h. Check leather strap and case for damage.

2. Proper wearing of the Firefighter Portable Radio. The firefighter portable radio comes equipped with a leather case and shoulder strap to secure the radio to the firefighter. The firefighter portable radio should be carried in this configuration at all times while engaged in interior firefighting operations. The radio strap assembly should be worn in one of two ways. Over the coat under the scba (fig. a), or completely under the coat with the lapel mike pulled out for access (fig.b,c,& d). The latter is the dept. preferred method so as to protect the radio from damage from water, or hostile fire event. To prevent snagging the radio strap assembly should never be worn over the scba (fig.e). See the examples below.

Fig. a Fig. b Fig. c

Fig. d Fig. e

3. Incident use of the Firefighter Portable Radio. As stated before, the firefighter portable radio is programmed with all zones and talk groups the same as the mobile and base radios. Upon arrival at an incident the firefighter shall turn on their portable radio and select the proper ops channel as assigned by Fire Center. The radio will announce the channel name as the firefighter turns the channel selector knob. Company Officers shall ensure that all members assigned to them are on the proper channel prior to engaging in IDLH environments. Firefighters should adjust volume enough to hear over ambient fire ground noises but not so loud as to cause feedback from other radios transmitting close by. Firefighters operating in IDLH atmospheres should monitor the assigned channel for radio traffic either for them or other units that are also operating that could contain urgent information or maydays.

G. Cache Radios at Battalion Headquarters A Cache of portable radios are kept at each battalion headquarters (1 and 4)for a variety of uses. There are 5 radios at each location. These as follows but not limited to;

1. Radios to be used to GFD members on USAR deployment outside the City of Gastonia. 2. Radios to be issued to VFD move-up companies that don’t have 800 MHZ radios. 3. Radios to be issued to GFD members on special assignment in the City. 4. Spare radios in the event of a radio sent to shop. Companies checking out a spare radio should do so in their respective battalions.

These radios should be powered up and allowed to run down each Monday after morning radio check. H. Radio repair

To provide the fastest response to emergency radio repair requests from the City and County after normal working hours, please call the Fire Center at 866-3300. Please give the dispatcher your name, department, and a call-back number. The dispatchers will notify radio shop personnel. Radio shop normal office hours are from 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM, Monday through Friday, and emergency calls can be handled by calling our office at 866-6718.

A. When portable radios become wet, the batteries should be removed. B. Do Not put wet radios back into chargers. C. Send radios that have gotten wet to the radio shop to be dried and checked.

II. General Radio Use

A. Voice and Speech Control The purpose of a communication system is first and foremost to be heard and understood. We must communicate in order to perform a service to the citizens. To insure that all traffic is received and understood, several basic procedures must be used.

a. Pronounce words distinctly and rather slowly. Refrain from use of chewing gum, tobacco, etc..The normal dispatch rate should be between 40 and 60 words per minute. b. Do not show emotion on the air regardless of the situation. Emotion tends to distort the voice and render it incapable of being copied. Attempt to make your voice a regular monotone. Our messages require no expression, merely a high degree of intelligibility. Remember the tone and emotion of your voice sets the stage for the incident. If you are highly upset everyone else will usually follow suit. c. Maintain an even tone of voice, keep the same distance from the microphone and speak at a normal conversational level. d. Since radio equipment picks up and amplifies every sound within a normal distance from the microphone, it is very important to eliminate unnecessary noise when possible. Such things as loud conversation, laughing, and other disturbances create an unfavorable impression to listeners. e. Attempt to relay radio traffic with as brief a message as possible. f. Never try to be humorous on the air. It does not sound as cute and witty as you think it does. It decreases effectiveness and radio professionalism. g. Request for fuel, supplies, inspections or any other duty outside of an incident should be transmitted via the telephone at the Station or apparatus.

B. Use of Radios near Explosives. Electric blasting caps can be set off up to 300 feet by 2-way radio transmitters, television transmitters, radar, micro-wave relays, and high powered amateur transmitters. Caps are safe while in an all metal box made of 24-gauge iron lined with wood and as long as the box is closed tightly. a. Avoid using radio transmitters within 30 feet of any electric blasting caps or connected control wires. b. Avoid using radio transmitters in or near a quarry, a construction job, or any project of the type where electric blasting caps are used. c. Never use a radio transmitter while refueling a vehicle. d. Avoid if possible using Radio’s at any Bomb scare incident.

C. Plain Language 10 Codes are not used by the Gastonia Fire Department. Firefighters shall use plain English to communicate over the fire department’s radio system. The following is a list of recommended terminology when using our radio system. Officers may choose to use other similar terminology such as; Engine #1 is “Responding” instead of Engine #1 is “En Route”. The list provided is not all inclusive and does not require firefighters to memorize the exact wording as listed.

a. EN ROUTE or RESPONDING: Apparatus is responding b. ARRIVING ON THE SCENE, or ON THE SCENE: Apparatus has arrived on scene. c. ASSIGNMENT COMPLETE: Call is complete and the company is returned to service. d. OUT OF SERVICE: Self Explanatory.

e. AVAILABLE or IN SERVICE: Unit has returned to service and is available for calls. f. STANDBY: Self Explanatory. When the message, "standby" is issued from FIRE CENTER, it means for the calling unit to hold radio traffic until FIRE CENTER is able to receive the message. g. UNABLE TO COPY: Message is not being received. h. SIGNALS GOOD: Message received and acknowledged i. AFFIRMATIVE or COPY: Yes, correct (Acknowledgment) j. NEGATIVE; No k. REPEAT: Self Explanatory. l. URGENT: Self Explanatory. If the calling unit has an emergency situation and receives a stand-by-order from FIRE CENTER, he/she should call again immediately and advise, "EMERGENCY TRAFFIC”. This will let FIRE CENTER know that the message has priority status. All units shall stand by and permit emergency traffic at any time. m. DISREGARD: Self Explanatory. n. NON-EMERGENCY RESPONSE: Respond without emergency lights and sirens! o. EMERGENCY RESPONSE: Respond with emergency lights and sirens! p. MVA or TRAFFIC ACCIDENT: An incident involving a motor vehicle accident with or without personal injury.

III. MAYDAY OPERATING GUIDELINE.

A. MAYDAY Defined. Use of the word MAYDAY will indicate that a firefighter/fire officer has become lost, trapped, seriously injured, or exhausted his breathing air at the scene of an emergency incident. Specifically, a firefighter is in need of immediate help. B. MAYDAY Parameters. 1. A firefighter/fire officer will transmit a MAYDAY if any of the following conditions exist:

a. You become lost or trapped or have sustained a serious or life-threatening injury.

b. A serious or life-threatening injury has occurred to another member.

c. You discover a lost, trapped, seriously injured, or unconscious firefighter.

d. You become entangled, pinned, and unable to free yourself after the first attempt.

e. Your low-air alarm is activated, and you are unable to find an exit.

f. There is zero visibility, and you have no contact with a hose line or a search rope and you do not know where the exit is.

g. Your primary exit is blocked by fire or collapse and you cannot locate an immediate secondary exit.

h. You fall through a floor, roof, or staircase or down a shaft.

i. You are caught in a rollover condition and cannot find an exit.

j. You are caught in a flashover.

k. Other situation(s) that fit the definition of a MAYDAY.

C. MAYDAY Radio Procedure. The following is the procedure for calling a MAYDAY. Use and follow the MAYDAY procedure as outlined in this document. In an attempt to send out as much useful information as possible in the shortest time, remember the acronym “L-U-N-A-R” as a retention guide.

1. Transmitting the MAYDAY.

a. Transmit : MAYDAY – MAYDAY- MAYDAY!!!

b. L- Location

c. U- Unit call sign Example Engine 8

d. N- Firefighter John Doe

e. A-Assignment

f. R-Resources need for the rescue

2. Example transmission “ Mayday, Mayday, Mayday, Second Floor ,This is Engine 8 firefighter John Doe, attack line nozzle man, I’m trapped under the roof, need the RIT team!!”

3. Member Role. The member transmitting the MAYDAY must pause after each message and then repeat the message until the incident commander (IC) acknowledges it.

4. Fire Center Role. The Fire Center must relay any MAYDAY messages not immediately acknowledged by the IC.

5. Pass Devices. Members are also required to activate their PASS device in between each message and after it is acknowledged. IMPORTANT: If the PASS device remains activated during the transmission of the MAYDAY message, it will cause significant background noise, making the message unreadable.

7. Man Down Button. The orange man down button should only be used as a last resort to calling a MAYDAY on the assigned ops channel. This should be used when the member calling the MAYDAY has not received an acknowledgement from Command or someone on the fire ground on the assigned channel.

D. MAYDAY Radio Acknowledgment.

1. MAYDAY transmission has priority. It is critical that all members at the scene of an emergency understand that MAYDAY transmissions take priority over all other transmissions, including URGENT messages. NO exceptions!

2. Clear the air. When a MAYDAY transmission has occurred, the IC must clear the air of all other radio traffic and establish contact with the lost, trapped, or injured member(s). Once contact is established,

the IC should attempt to obtain more specific information that may assist in the rescue attempt, if it proves necessary.

Example: Command to all units, clear the radio for a MAYDAY message. Command to Engine 8, go with your MAYDAY. Engine 8, could you provide us with any other information?

3. Get more information. The requesting of other or more specific information will be determined by the amount of information originally transmitted in the MAYDAY, the square footage and layout of the building, and the needs of the IC and rapid intervention crew. Information requests could include but would not be limited to the following:

a. Can you tell us the best/closest access route to you?

b. Can you hear a hose stream or saw operating nearby?

c. Are you near a stairway, shaft way, wall, or other building feature?

d. What is the condition of the injured member(s)?

e. What tools and equipment are needed?

f. Can you give us any other useful information?

E. Managing a MAYDAY. Mayday events that involve a lost, trapped, or injured firefighter or fire officer will tax the resources and management of any incident. Incident management could be further taxed when multiple Maydays are transmitted and the incident is still evolving. ICs must maintain control and continuity of the incident by any means available to them. Options available to all commanders include but are not limited to the following:

1. Use of multiple rapid intervention crews for deployment and replacement.

2. Transmitting an additional alarm. This is an option for the IC at anytime during the incident but is an advisable option when the fire is still NOT under control and no additional units are in reserve or staging.

3. Designate a separate radio frequency for the rescue “or” fire operation.

4. Conduct a Personnel Accountability Roll Call (PAR) to determine who and how many are missing.

5. Collect accountability tags and riding lists to determine who and how many are missing.

6. Review tactical worksheets and command boards to identify the company/members’ last assigned locations.

7. Establish and support a Rescue Group/Operation within your incident management.

8. Verify that fire suppression operations are continuing.

9. Remove all nonessential personnel.

10. Eliminate freelancing and establish control.

11. Request any additional resources and equipment that may be needed.

12. Other.

IV. URGENT OPERATING GUIDELINE

A. URGENT Defined. To further clarify the use of the URGENT reference, the enclosed guideline identified its use when a situation at an emergency scene produces a life-threatening situation. Although situations will vary with each incident, some of the more common occurrences that may fit this category include a potential collapse involving a wall or a roof or the total building failure, a loss of water on the fire floor with firefighters working above, or the release of a pressure relief valve on a pressurized tank involved or exposed to fire. In either case, the objective of this guideline is to prevent an injury or a death. The use of the word URGENT applies to a life-threatening situation that has developed that could affect firefighter safety.

B. URGENT Parameters. 1. A firefighter/fire officer will transmit an URGENT message if any of the following conditions exist:

a. A serious/deteriorating change in fire conditions.

b. An interior attack is going to be discontinued and an exterior attack is being prepared.

c. Discovery of a structural problem indicating a potential or imminent collapse.

d. A fire has entered an exposure building to a degree that any delay may considerably enlarge the fire problem.

e. A loss of water, which would endanger members.

f. An excessive wind condition on the fire floor that could rapidly extend the fire, endangering members.

g. A downed electrical wire on the fire ground or on a fire apparatus.

h. An unconscious, trapped, or disoriented civilian is located.

i. A message that warrants priority because of potential injury or death.

j. A life-threatening situation or event that has occurred or is developing.

C. URGENT Radio procedure. Members are to use and follow the URGENT radio guideline as outlined below. In an attempt to send out as much useful information as possible in the shortest time, remember the acronym “L-U-N-A-R” as a retention guide.

1. Transmitting the URGENT.

a. Transmit : URGENT-URGENT-URGENT!!!

b. L- Location

c. U- Unit call sign Example Engine 8

d. N- Firefighter John Doe

e. A-Assignment.

f. R-Resources need for the problem.

2. Example transmission. Example transmission “ Urgent, Urgent, Urgent, Second Floor ,This is Engine 8 firefighter John Doe, attack line nozzle man, I’ve lost water on the hose line. Need additional hose line, etc.”

3. Member Role. The member transmitting the URGENT message must pause after each message and then repeat the message until the IC acknowledges it.

D. URGENT Acknowledgment.

1. URGENT transmission has priority. It is critical that all members at the scene of an emergency understand that URGENT radio transmissions take priority over all other transmissions, with the exception of a MAYDAY message(s).

2. Clear the air.

When an URGENT transmission has occurred, the IC must clear the air of all other radio traffic and establish contact with the member transmitting the URGENT message. Once contact is established, the IC should attempt to obtain more specific information about the situation, if it proves necessary. Example: Command to all units, clear the radio for an URGENT message. Command to Engine 8, go with your URGENT message. Engine 8, could you provide us with any additional information? OR Engine 8, Do you need any assistance? 3. Get additional information.

The requesting of other or more specific information will be determined by the amount of information originally transmitted in the URGENT message. Information requests could include but are not limited to the following:

a. If there is a serious/deteriorating change in fire conditions, obtain information about the location and affected areas.

b. If a structural problem indicating an imminent collapse is discovered, immediately evacuate the building and follow your department’s evacuation procedure.

c. If a structural problem indicating an eventual collapse concern is discovered, obtain information about the location and the potentially affected areas.

d. If fire is discovered entering an exposure building to a degree that any delay may considerably enlarge the fire problem, obtain information about the location and affected areas.

e. If there is a loss of water, which would endanger members, ask for the location/floor, the members affected, and which company lost water, if this information is not provided.

f. If an excessive wind condition on the fire floor could rapidly extend the fire and endanger members, obtain information relative to the floor, side, and options to correct or avoid injury

g. If an unconscious, trapped, or disoriented civilian is found, obtain information about removal, assistance, and other pertinent issues.

E. Emergency evacuation signal.

Emergency Evacuation: If the incident commander finds it necessary to evacuate a structure due to an immediate hazardous condition all firefighters operating within the structure are required to exit as quickly as possible. The alert for such action will be for the pumping apparatus to sound the air-horn with one long blast lasting for a minimum of 10 seconds. The incident commander will also acknowledge the evacuation on the radio by saying evacuate, evacuate, evacuate.

F. Charge the hydrant/supply line signal.

The signal between the pump operator and the hydrant firefighter to charge the hydrant will be three (3) short blasts of the air-horn and/or a verbal acknowledgment on the radio.

V. Apparatus Mobile Data System and Terminal (MDT) or Laptop. The apparatus mobile data system consists of several components. The main component is the laptop itself also referred to as the MDT. The laptop displays dispatch data sent from the CAD to the MDT. The software program used by the laptop for this shall be referred to as MOBILE. The other components are the air card and GPS locator mounted on top of the apparatus. When the apparatus is in quarters the MDT automatically connects to the firehouse wifi while the air card runs in the background. The air card takes over from the wifi and receives and sends data from the sever while out of quarters. The GPS feature indicates the current location of the unit on the CAD map on the telecommunicators console as well as the map screen on the laptop.

A. General computer procedures.

1. Rebooting and logging in to the desktop. The computer should be rebooted each day at the beginning of each shift. This ensures all systems are up and running as normal.

a. To reboot and log in, close out all programs that running, usually only MOBILE. b. To close MOBILE, simply click the red X in the upper left hand corner of your screen. You will get a prompt that’s asks “Are you sure you want to exit” Click Yes. c. Once MOBILE closes, Click the start button in the lower left-hand corner of the toolbar. Choose shut down. d. Then choose restart computer from the pop-up menu. e. Once computer restarts, then log in to the desk top. f. In the login bar type the following: truck## (use the vehicle number that you are in) Make sure caps lock is not on as it is case sensitive. g. The password for all laptop desktop login is: fire911x h. Once the desktop loads, then you can log into mobile.

2. Logging into MOBILE. Once the desktop loads, then you can log into MOBILE.

b. To log into MOBILE, click on the MOBILE icon. c. When the MOBILE log in screen appears, enter your unit login four times in the first four spaces. Ex. en8 or ld1. Make sure caps lock is not on as it is case sensitive.

d. After MOBILE loads, close the chat pop up screen. e. Click the yellow button “Resp Msg Mgnt” in lower left hand MOBILE toolbar to delete any unwanted responses. This keeps the ALL RESPONSES screen clear. f. Keep MOBILE on the ALL RESPONSES screen. g. Ensure the all four green lights are on in the lower left hand of the screen. This ensures all systems are connected.

B. Using the MDT (laptop) as a communications device. In order to decrease response times, reduce radio traffic and workload of the telecommunicators, and increase efficiency, the MDT shall be used where possible to accomplish this. The use of the F keys allows the unit to change their status in CAD without verbal interaction of the telecommunicator. The F keys allow real time changes in the status of the unit in CAD when responding to a call. The following is a basic procedure on the use of the F keys. For further information on the use of other keys and MOBILE functions, see the GFD communications coordinator.

1. RUN TICKET. The Run Ticket is defined as the screen that appears when a call is sent to the MDT by CAD. To use the F keys, the Run Ticket on needs to be present on the screen.

2. F1 Key En Route. The F1 key changes the unit from dispatched status to enroute status in the CAD. City Fire units will check themselves enroute (F1 key on the MDT). Units will not be checking enroute on the radio for any call unless the MDT is down or adding themselves or picking up a call for another unit. An audible prompt will let you know that your MDT message was sent. The Run Ticket needs to be on the screen prior to pressing F1. Upon pressing the F1 key, the MDT will give a verbal reply that the unit is enroute. Target time for enroute 90 seconds or less.

3. F2 Key At Scene. The F2 key changes the unit from enroute status to arrived status. Fire Units will utilize their MDT to check themselves arrived (F2 key on the MDT). An audible prompt will let you know that your MDT message was sent. When using the F2 key for a Box Alarm, the responding companies will have switched to the assigned OPS CHANNEL prior to responding (when apparatus is started) for the duration of the incident. All arriving companies will use their F2 key for arrival. The first arriving company will announce their arrival on the radio on the assigned OPS CHANNEL as well as size up and unit assignments to the balance of the response. Later arriving companies will give a simple “on scene” after pressing their F2 key. Once the call is complete switch back to GFD DISPATCH.

4. F4 Key Clear Unit. The F4 key will allow the unit to change their status from arrived status to assignment complete and available status. Upon pressing the F4 key the screen will change to the CLEAR UNIT FORM. GFD Fire units will utilize their MDT to clear themselves from a call (F4 key) on the MDT. GFD Fire units may elect to use the narrative feature of this key to provide any final fire details for the narrative. Example of this would be but not limited to, after a power line type call, “City electric on scene”. The unit hits the send button and is cleared from the call and the dispatch narrative gets updated. The disposition AC for assignment complete has already been chosen by the computer. Press the send button to complete.

5. F3 Key Chg Unit Status The F3 key will allow the unit to change their availability status in CAD without verbal interaction with telecommunicator. Upon pressing the F3 key the screen will change to the CHANGE STATUS AND OTHER LOCATION SCREEN. Choose the appropriate disposition and click send. Your status in now changed in CAD. Units going in and out of service may elect to notify their battalion chief of same via phone.

VI. Fire Center. The Consolidated 911 Emergency Communications Center located is at the EOC at 615 North Highland Street. All personnel are to use the designation Fire Center when communicating with the Consolidated 911 Emergency Communications Center.

A. General. Fire Center will be the primary communications center for the Gastonia Fire Department. A back- up center has been established and located and the Gastonia Police Dept. located at 200 East Long Ave in Gastonia. The backup center is to be used in times of an outage or such other times that the primary location at 615 North Highland Street can no longer function or meet demand.

B. Transmitting Alarms. Fire Center will use the “A1” (Single tone) or “A2” or (Multiple tone) for Box Alarms, MVA’s with Pin-In, High Risk Fire Alarm, etc before transmitting the call. Fire Center will then announce the Fire District the call is in, announce the Incident Type, Medical, House Fire, Vehicle Fire, etc., announce the incident location, meaning street location and cross street with any relevant information, units to respond, then assign a channel. After transmitting the alarm, Fire Center will activate the firehouse alarm and lights.

1. Examples:

Single unit (street alarm) dispatch: A1 alert “Fire Alarm, District 1, 925 S Myrtle School Rd. (name of business if applicable) cross street Rodgers Ave., Ladder 1 respond ”, Activate; Station 1 Tone

A1 alert “ Breathing Problems, District 1, 925 S Myrtle School Rd. (name of business if applicable) cross street Rodgers Ave., Ladder 1 respond”, Activate; Station 1 Tone

Multiple unit (box alarm) dispatch: A2 alert “High Risk Fire, District 3, 916 S Marietta St, Heritage Oaks, cross street W Eighth Ave., Ladder 3, Engine 5, Ladder4, Engine 6 respond”, Activate; Station 3, 5, 4, 6 Tones

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 22.10.05 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Radio Service & Repair

I. PURPOSE

A. To provide the fastest response to emergency radio repair requests from the City and County after normal working hours, please call the City/County Dispatch Center at 866-3300. Please give the dispatcher your name, department, and a call-back number. The dispatchers will notify radio shop personnel. B. Our normal office hours will still continue to be from 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM, Monday through Friday, and emergency calls can be handled by calling our office at 866-6718.

II. WALKIE-TALKIES

A. When portable radios become wet, the batteries should be removed. B. Do Not put wet radios back into chargers. C. Send radios that have gotten wet to the radio shop to be dried and checked.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 22.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Laptop/ Internet Access

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a procedure for the use of City and Fire Department Computers for accessing the internet/web system.

II. PROCEDURE

A. City of Gastonia and/or Fire Department computers possessing Internet capabilities are not to be deployed for the personal use of individual members. B. Some apparatus may be equipped with on-board or portable computers. The settings and/or programs on these computers will not be changed without the express approval of a Chief Officer, emergency Incident Commander, and/or the department’s Administrative Officer. Should a portable or on-board computer be removed from the apparatus for any reason, it becomes the responsibility of the Officer authorizing said removal or change to make sure the computer is returned to the apparatus in proper working order. C. When computers are used for training purposes, they will only be used as part of a group training session, not individually. There will be an ‘officer in charge’ present at all times when computers are deployed for Internet access use. D. Use of internet-compatible computers maintained by the City and/or the Fire Department to access pornography or other inappropriate information is expressly prohibited. Should a member go to a site and accidentally view or download pornography or other inappropriate material, the operating member(s) will stop working and will immediately notify the Battalion Chief, Incident Commander or officer in charge. The inappropriate material will not be deleted and purged from the system until expressly approved by a Chief Officer or the department’s Administrative Officer. E. If a member needs to log on to the Internet for educational purposes, he or she should only use a “stand alone” PC designated for this purpose. Members desiring to use a designated PC should request assistance from their respective Battalion Chief, who can log onto the Internet for them. Individual members so using Internet access remain personally responsible for anything that they bring up or download on the computer.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 23.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: March 11, 2016

Rescinds:

Subject: EMS Response

I. POLICY

The Gastonia Fire Department Emergency Medical Service program is operated under the Medical Director of Gaston County and follows the protocols of Gaston County Emergency Medical Service (GEMS).

The Protocols are located on the “Share” Drive in the FD Guidelines Folder and are linked here.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 23.10.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: November 16, 2004

Rescinds:

Subject: Patient Confidentiality

I. PURPOSE

The purpose of this Guideline is to provide information and requirements to all members, regarding the confidentiality of patients. Gastonia Fire Department personnel will utilize utmost caution in protecting patient’s confidentiality in processing incident and patient reports. North Carolina statues and Federal Law prevent the release of information without the expressed authorization of the patient, or the patient’s legal guardian. North Carolina law imposes tighter restrictions on the release of medical records than the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and therefore will serve as the guide for the release of ACRs and/or Protected Health Information (PHI). NC G.S. § 143-518 states:

A. NC G.S. § 143-518 Confidentiality of patient information. (1) Medical records compiled and maintained by the Department or EMS providers in connection with dispatch, response, treatment, or transport of individual patients or in connection with the statewide trauma system pursuant to Article 7 of Chapter 131E of the General Statutes may contain patient identifiable data which will allow linkage to other health care-based data systems for the purposes of quality management, peer review, and public health initiatives.

B. These medical records and data shall be strictly confidential and shall not be considered public records within the meaning of G.S. 132-1 and shall not be released or made public except under any of the following conditions: (1) Release is made of specific medical or epidemiological information for statistical purposes in a way that no person can be identified.

(2) Release is made of all or part of the medical record with the written consent of the person or persons identified or their guardians.

(3) Release is made to health care personnel providing medical care to the patient.

(4) Release is made pursuant to a court order. Upon request of the person identified in the record, the record shall be reviewed in camera. In the trial, the trial judge may, during the taking of testimony concerning such information, exclude from the courtroom all persons except the officers of the court, the parties, and those engaged in the trial of the case.

(5) Release is made to a Medical Review Committee as defined in G.S. 131E-95, 90- 21.22A, or 130A-45.7 or to a peer review committee as defined in G.S. 131E-108, 122C-30, or 131D-21.1.

(6) Release is made for use in a health research project under rules adopted by the North Carolina Medical Care Commission. The Commission shall adopt rules that allow release of information when an institutional review board, as defined by the Commission, has determined that the health research project:

(a) Is of sufficient scientific importance to outweigh the intrusion into the privacy of the patient that would result from the disclosure;

(b) Is impracticable without the use or disclosure of identifying health information;

(c) Contains safeguards to protect the information from redisclosure;

(d) Contains safeguards against identifying, directly or indirectly, any patient in any report of the research project; and

(e) Contains procedures to remove or destroy at the earliest opportunity, consistent with the purposes of the project, information that would enable the patient to be identified, unless an institutional review board authorizes retention of identifying information for purposes of another research project.

(7) Release is made to a statewide data processor, as defined in Article 11A of Chapter 131E of the General Statutes, in which case the data is deemed to have been submitted as if it were required to have been submitted under that Article.

(8) Release is made pursuant to any other law. C. Other Protected Health Information (PHI) that may be encountered in the delivery of emergency medical services by department personnel that are not covered by this North Carolina statute is subject to the regulations found in the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) (45 C.F.R. §§ 164.501, 164.502(a)) and therefore protected by federal law.1

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 23.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Emergency Medical & Hazmat Certifications

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning required Emergency Medical Technician and Hazardous Materials Operations Level certifications.

II. POLICY

A. Emergency Medical Technician North Carolina State Certification for Emergency Medical Technician (EMT) is required for all shift personnel.

1. Employees must obtain and maintain this certification by attending required classes and passing required tests.

2. When possible, EMT Certification/Recertification classes will be scheduled at the fire department during work hours. If this scheduling is impractical and employees are on-duty during the time that Certification/Recertification classes are taught at another location, the employee may be given paid educational leave to attend these classes.

3. EMT - Certification/Recertification (approved) class time while off-duty will be reimbursed on a time for time basis. The shift Battalion Chief will allow the employee off-duty time during the twenty-eight (28) day pay cycle. This time will be taken at the discretion of the Battalion Chief and in conjunction with the Kelly Day when possible. This time will be recorded in the Daily Log Book as Swap Time and will not be recorded in the payroll sheet sent to the Finance Department.

4. Probationary employees who have not completed North Carolina State Certification for Emergency Medical Technician (EMT) by the end of their first 18 months of employment may be recommended for dismissal. Extensions may be granted by the Fire Chief.

B. Hazardous Materials Operations Certification for Hazardous Materials Operations is required for all shift personnel.

1. Employees must obtain and maintain this certification by attending required classes and passing required tests.

2. When possible, Hazardous Materials Operations classes will be scheduled at the fire department during work hours. If this scheduling is impractical and employees are on-duty during the time that Certification classes are taught at another location, the employee may be given paid educational leave to attend these classes.

3. Hazardous Materials Operations – Certification (approved) class time while off-duty will be reimbursed on a time for time basis. The shift Battalion Chief will allow the employee off-duty time during the twenty-eight (28) day pay cycle. This time will be taken at the discretion of the Battalion Chief and in conjunction with the Kelly Day when possible. This time will be recorded in the Daily Log Book as Swap Time and will not be recorded in the payroll sheet sent to the Finance Dept.

4. Probationary employees who have not completed Certification for Hazardous Materials Operations Level by the end of their first year of employment may be recommended for dismissal. Extensions may be granted by the Fire Chief.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Ground Safety Guideline

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of the Fire Ground Safety Procedures is to provide minimum safety guidelines, which are in compliance with NFPA 1500, for the members of the Gastonia Fire Department that are involved in rescue, fire suppression, and related activities.

II. DISCUSSION

A. These procedures provide a framework of performance objectives that are intended to help prevent accidents, injuries, and exposures and to reduce the severity of those accidents, injuries, and exposures that do occur.

III. PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES & PROCEDURES

A. Incident Management

1. At all emergency incidents, the Incident Commander shall assume initial responsibility as the on scene safety officer and shall be responsible for the overall safety of all members and all activities occurring at the scene.

2. Emergency operations and other situations that pose similar hazards, including but not limited to training exercises, shall be conducted in a manner that recognizes hazards and prevents accidents and injuries.

3. At an emergency incident, the Incident Commander shall establish an organization with sufficient supervisory personnel to control the position and function of all members operating at the scene and to ensure that safety requirements are satisfied.

4. The Incident Commander shall appoint a Safety Officer at significant incidents and special operations where the incident involves hazardous materials, increases drastically in size, or for any other changes that may require the need for a safety officer.

B. Risk Management During Emergency Operations

1. The Incident Commander shall integrate risk management into the regular functions of incident command. 2. The concept of risk management shall be utilized on the basis of the following principles:

a. Activities that present a significant risk to the safety of members shall be limited to situations where there is a potential to save endangered lives. b. Activities that are routinely employed to protect property shall be recognized as inherent risks to the safety of members, and actions shall be taken to reduce or avoid these risks. c. No risk to the safety of members shall be acceptable when there is no possibility to save lives or property.

3. The Incident Commander shall evaluate the risk to members with respect to the purpose and potential results of their actions in each situation. In situations where the risk to fire department members is excessive, activities shall be limited to defensive operations.

4. Risk management principles shall be routinely employed by supervisory personnel at all levels of the incident management system to define the limits of acceptable and unacceptable positions and functions for all members at the incident scene.

C. Accountability

1. The Incident Commander shall be responsible for overall personnel accountability for the incident. The Incident Commander shall initiate an accountability and inventory worksheet at the very beginning of operations and shall maintain that system throughout operations.

2. The Incident Commander shall maintain an awareness of the location and function of all companies and sections.

3. Supervising officers shall directly supervise and account for the companies operating in that Division or Group.

4. Company officers shall maintain an ongoing awareness of the location and condition of all company members.

5. Where assigned as a company, members shall be responsible to remain under the supervision of their assigned company officer.

6. Members shall be responsible to follow personnel accountability system procedures.

D. Members operating at Emergency Incidents

1. Operations shall be limited to those that can be safely performed by the personnel available at the scene. No member or members shall commence or perform any fire fighting function or evolution that is not within the established safety criteria of the Gastonia Fire Department.

2. To utilize maximum protection, the following items provided by the Gastonia Fire Department shall be worn at all times while engaged in actual firefighting operations and/or while working in hazardous areas: Boots, Gloves, Helmet, Protective Coat, Protective trousers/coveralls, Eye protection devices and Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA). This protective equipment shall be use by all members while working in areas where: a. The atmosphere is hazardous b. The atmosphere is suspected of being hazardous c. The atmosphere may rapidly become hazardous

d. All vehicle fires e. Dumpster fires

3. Members using SCBA shall operate in teams of two (2) or more and shall not remove the SCBA in a hazardous area until the Incident Commander or Safety Officer determines that atmospheric conditions are safe.

4. At any time any members are working inside any confined space, such members shall be provided with SCBA and shall use the SCBA.

5. Members using SCBA shall not compromise the protective integrity of the SCBA for any reason when operating in a hazardous atmosphere, or in an atmosphere where the quality of air is unknown, by removing the face-piece or disconnecting any portion of the SCBA that would allow the ambient atmosphere to be breathed.

6. When inexperienced members are working at an incident, direct supervision shall be provided by more experienced officers or members.

7. Members operating in hazardous areas at emergencies shall operate in teams of two or more. Team members operating in hazardous areas shall be in communication with each other through visual, audible, physical, safety guide rope, or electronic means, or by other means in order to coordinate their activities. Team members shall be in close proximity to each other to provide assistance in case of emergency.

8. Team members operating in hazardous areas shall be warned by radio communication if the area becomes too dangerous to operate in with the term “EVACUATE” along with ONE LONG BLAST FOR A MINIMUM OF 10 SECONDS.

9. In the "initial stages" of an incident where only one team is operating in the hazardous area, at least one additional team shall be assigned to stand by outside of the hazardous area where the team is operating. This standby team represents a safety team responsible for maintaining a constant awareness of the number and identity of members operating in the hazardous area, their location and function, and time of entry. The standby team shall remain in radio, visual, voice, or signal line communications with the first in team.

10. The "initial stages" of an incident shall encompass the tasks undertaken by the first arriving company with only one team assigned or operating in the hazardous area.

11. The "standby" members shall be permitted to perform other duties outside of the hazardous area, such as apparatus operator, incident commander, or technician or aide, provided constant communication is maintained between the standby member and the members of the team. As standard operating procedure for the Gastonia Fire Department, the apparatus operator shall be the "standby" member responsible for rapid intervention (rescue) during the "initial stages" of an incident where only one team is operating in the hazard area. The Incident Commander may assume or designate another person as the "standby" member, If the need arises at any incident.

12. The "standby" member shall have all the appropriate full protective clothing, protective equipment, and SCBA as required in the previous paragraphs. The Standby member shall be permitted to rescue or provide rescue of the members of the one team that is operating if the need arises. If such a rescue need arises, the standby member shall communicate the situation to the communications center and additional response shall be dispatched if not already underway.

13. Once a second team is assigned or operating in the hazardous area, the incident shall no longer be considered in the “initial stage," and at least one "rapid intervention crew" (rescue team) shall be required.

14. At all emergency operations, the Incident Commander shall evaluate the risk to the members operating at the scene and, if necessary, request that at least basic life-support personnel and patient transportation be available.

E. Rapid Intervention for Rescue of Members

1. See G.O.G. 25.50.01 RIT Guideline

F. Rehabilitation during Emergency Operations

1. All supervisors shall maintain an awareness of the condition of members operating within their span of control and ensure that adequate steps are taken to provide for their safety and health. The command structure shall be utilized by the supervisors to request relief and reassignment of fatigued crews.

2. The Incident Commander shall consider the circumstances of each incident and make suitable provisions for rest and rehabilitation for members operating at the scene. These provisions shall include medical evaluation and treatment, food and fluid replenishment, and relief from extreme climatic conditions, according to the circumstances of the incident.

G. Civil Disturbance

1. The Fire Department shall use the following guidelines to establish a standardized approach to the safety of fire department members at incidents that involve violence, unrest, or civil disturbance.

a. Such violent situations shall be considered essentially a law enforcement event, and the fire department shall coordinate with the law enforcement Incident Commander throughout the incident.

b. The fire department Incident Commander shall identify and react to situations that do involve or are likely to involve violence.

c. In such violent situations, the fire department Incident Commander shall communicate directly with the law enforcement Incident Commander to ensure the safety of fire department members.

d. In such violent situations, the fire department Incident Commander shall stage all fire department resources in a safe area until the law enforcement agency has secured the scene.

e. When violence occurs after emergency operations have been initiated, the fire department Incident Commander shall either secure immediate law enforcement agency protection or shall withdraw all fire department members to a safe staging area.

H. Incident Critique

1. The Incident Commander shall conduct a post incident critique of significant incidents or those that involve firefighter serious injury or death.

2. A record of the minutes of this critique shall be given to the Deputy Chief of Operations.

3. Critiques that involve fire firefighter serious injury or death shall be attended by the Fire Department Safety Committee members.

4. The critique shall conduct a basic review of the conditions present, the actions taken, and the effect of the conditions and actions on the safety and health of members.

5. The critique shall identify any action necessary to change or update any safety and health program elements to improve the welfare of members.

6. The Critique process shall include a standardized action plan for such necessary changes. The action plan shall include the change needed, responsibilities, dates, and details of such actions.

7. The Incident Commander shall submit any recommended action plan to the Deputy Chief of Operations within a reasonable time after the incident. The action plan will be reviewed and necessary changes will be implemented as soon as possible.

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.10.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: October 1, 2007

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Passport Accountability System

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a system to identify and account for the assignment of personnel while operating at emergency incidents.

II. DISCUSSION

A. One of the primary responsibilities of the incident commander is to provide for the safety of every member of the fire department who is operating at the scene of the incident. The incident commander must recognize the risks of each situation and develop a strategic plan to avoid exposing members to unnecessary danger.

The first stage of accountability for each and every member who is operating at the scene is to know vital information about every individual - who they are, where they are, and what they are doing at every moment. On the surface this may appear to be an impossible task, but it is one of the fundamentals of an effective incident management system.

Being accountable for the safety and health of firefighters includes looking for signs of fatigue and rotating tired crews before their fatigue results in unnecessary injuries. It also means that supervisors are always looking for hazards and directing their personnel to react appropriately to them. One of the fundamental principles of managing safety and health is that management, working through supervisors, is responsible for ensuring that safety and health measures are implemented. Accountability ensures that these measures are implemented for everyone.

The responsibility for accountability works in two directions. Not only is an officer responsible for keeping track of every member he/she is assigned to supervise, but members have an equal responsibility to keep their supervisors informed. If there is a reason for members to be in areas other than where their supervisors expect them to be or if they need to engage in some other activity, it is their responsibility to inform their supervisors to gain approval.

The accountability system should be used at every incident, not reserved for use at large-scale or high risk incidents. To be effective when it is needed most, it must be a routine part of the way operations are conducted.

III. DEFINITIONS

A. Passport : A small plastic or metallic card with the “ Engine , Ladder, or Rescue Company “ designation affixed to the upper most portion by Velcro or magnetic tape or any other approved method. The Passport will also bear the number of the specific vehicle. The “specific vehicle “information will be permanently engraved or affixed to the Passport. The names of the individual members assigned to the unit or company will be attached to the center portion of the Passport. Supplemental vehicle information will be permanently affixed or engraved on the lower portion of the Passport. The Passport will also have a column of “A’s and B’s “aligned vertically along the right side to indicate the assignment of each of the individual members to an “Interior or Exterior Team “should the need arise.

B. Roll Call: A poll taken of units and teams to account for all personnel on an incident.

C. PAR: A term used to report that all personnel are accounted for. It is an acronym for “personnel accountability report “.

D. Status Board : A tool used by the Incident Commander, sector officers, section chiefs, or control officers to collect and store the passports of assigned units or teams. It is also used to record information for the monitoring of personnel.

E. Control Officer: A person designated as a Passport Accountability Officer to keep track of personnel entering and exiting a control point at an emergency incident area.

F. Control Point: A location where a Sector Officer or Control Officer monitors, and controls the entry and exiting of personnel to and from an emergency incident area.

G. Emergency Incident: Any situation in which the Fire Dept. responds to and delivers emergency services. This includes fire, rescue, medical treatment and other forms of hazard control and mitigation.

H. Emergency Incident Perimeter: Any area where the public is not allowed access during operations at an emergency incident for safety reasons.

IV. PASSPORT HARDWARE

A. The Passport Accountability System hardware will consist of primary passports, reserve passports, name tags and portable status boards.

1. Passports

a. Each unit or team will have passports to provide accountability of each team member during operations within the emergency incident perimeter.

b. Passports consist of three sections :

Top section: Unit, Team, or Staff designation such as E-1, L-4, C-1 etc. The top section will also bear the engraved number of the particular vehicle to which the passport is assigned. All Gastonia Fire Department vehicles will have a Passport assigned to the particular vehicle. The unit, team, or staff designation may change daily due to mechanical problems or vehicle reassignment. It may also be necessary to place a reserve unit in service to serve as a “front line “engine, (ex, E-1). It is important to remember that E-1 is not the vehicle but the assignment

Sample Passport

R - 3 Middle Section: Unit or team members 51 name tags are attached to this section. A

Captain J. Doe A vertical column of A’s and B’s will be

FF K. Doe A permanently affixed to the far right side of

FF K. Doe A the middle section. Each members name will then be followed by an “ A or B “ to Eng. W. Doe B designate assignment to Interior or FF C Doe B 4 1/2 inches B Exterior Operations on incident scenes.

Bottom Section : Space will be provided in the bottom section for supplemental information which is unique to the particular vehicle such as rated pump capacity, booster tank capacity, aerial ladder length and

special equipment carried ( on board 1989 Chevrolet generator for example).

Hydraulic Rescue Tools

Cascade2 3/4 System

On Boardinche Generator s 2. Unit , Team or Staff Designation Tags ( Company Identification Tags )

R-3

a. These tags will also be referred to as “company identification tags “and will be affixed to the Passports by Velcro. The company ID tags must be removable because they indicate a function, not a vehicle. All Unit, Team or Staff Designation Tags will be made of durable plastic and will bear the designation in white letters and numbers on a black background.

3. Name Tags

a. Each member of the Gastonia Fire Department will be issued two ( 2 ) name tags which will be made of durable plastic with a Velcro strip on the rear.

b. The name tags will be color coded as follows :

Chief Officers: Black letters on a white background Company Officers: Black letters on a white background Drivers/Engineers White letters on a red background Firefighter Level II: White letters on a red background

Firefighter Level I (probie): Black Letters on a yellow background c. All personnel certified by the state of North Carolina as a Hazardous Materials Technician will have a “dot “(.) at the upper right side of their name.

J. DOE * 3/8 inch

2 1/16 “

4. Status Boards

a. The status boards will be available in two ( 2 ) sizes:

(1) Metallic “sectional“ clip boards will be available in the smaller size which shall measure approximately nine ( 9 ) inches by eleven ( 11 ) inches and will consist of an area covered in Velcro for the attachment of the Passports of committed teams and units. The boards will also provide an area for the storage of “tactical command worksheets” and general note taking material. The smaller size status boards will be utilized on most “single alarm incidents “. (2) Large Status board will be available on the Shift Battalion Chief’s vehicle and will be designed to accommodate Passports and all data necessary to handle a multi- alarm, large scale incident.

5. Reserve Hardware

a. Blank passports and other materials will be maintained in order to keep the Passport Accountability System as “current “as possible.

V. PROCEDURE

A. Each member of the Gastonia Fire Department will remove one of their Velcro backed name tags from the underside of the helmet at the beginning of their tour of duty and attach it to the Passport of their assigned company in the proper position. (The company officer will assign firefighters to either A or B {Interior search / rescue or exterior ladder company functions} as needed.) The company officer will always serve as the “ A “ Team Leader and the Engineer will serve as the “ B “ Team Leader. Interior Search and Rescue - “A Team “and Exterior Ventilation and Support Team - “B Team “.

B. Each company officer will be responsible for maintaining the Passport of his / her apparatus at all times during the tour of duty.

C. Passports will be located in an easily accessible area which should not require “climbing “when opening the officer’s door of apparatus and near the driver’s area of the staff vehicles. The Passports for the staff vehicles will be approximately one half the size of the apparatus Passports. Due to the various designs of Fire Department apparatus and Staff vehicles, it is difficult to designate a “ standard location “ for the placement of the Passports however they should generally be located as directed and should be readily accessible to any department member designated to collect them on an incident without having to search for them.

D. Reserve Apparatus: As previously stated, all Gastonia Fire Department vehicles will “carry “a Passport. If vehicle number 79 goes to the garage for repairs and it is temporarily replaced by reserve vehicle number 57, then only the Unit, Team, or Staff designation tag should be removed from the Passport of vehicle 79 and attached to the Passport of vehicle number 57, along with of course, the name tags of the members assigned. It will prove very helpful to the incident commander to learn that

E-1 is not carrying the water as usual, or the rated capacity of the pump is not as great as before, or the deck gun that you wanted to utilize is missing, etc.

E. The Shift Battalion Chief will maintain portable status boards in two (2) sizes on the command vehicle which can be used by the incident commander, sector officers, accountability officers etc. on the fire/ incident scene. The smaller status board will provide space for the collected Passports of the committed units and Staff Vehicles for most emergency incidents. The smaller status board will provide storage for Tactical Command Worksheets and other note taking material. This board will also provide a section which shall display “available units “. This will consist of a list of all “front- line“units under a “status “column. This board will consist of three columns titled “Status 1“ , “Status 2“ and “Status 3“. Status 1: Available for immediate response, Status 2: Busy but available for emergency response, Status 3: Unavailable for any type of response. (mechanical breakdown, committed to another incident etc.) The “front-line units" will be listed on the same Velcro backed labels as the “Company Identification “tags. All Fire Department Units will be listed under one of the three columns.

Sample Passport

Specific Vehicle Number

R-3 (Engraved) 51 Company Identification Tag (Removable) Captain’s Name Tag A Team Designation Company Member’s Name (Interior / Exterior) Tags A F (Permanently Attached) (Removable) i r A F e i f r B Ei e g n f h g B i Firefighter’s Name Tag t i g e n h Specific Vehicle B r e t Information ’ e e s r (Engraved) 1989 Chevrolet r ’ Hydraulic Rescue Tools ’ N s Cascade System s a On Board Generator m N N e a a m m T e e a

g T T a a g g

Sample Status Board

A portion of the Status E-1 E-2 E-3 Board shall have Velcro strips attached to hold the Capt. A Capt. Capt. A Passports (or tickets) of all Firefighter A Firefighter Firefighter A apparatus committed to the Driver B Driver Driver B incident. The two sizes of Firefighter B Firefighter Firefighter B Status Boards shall have similar areas for this special info special info special info purpose.

L-4 L-5 E-5 Capt. A Capt. A Capt. A Firefighter A Firefighter A Firefighter A Driver B Driver B Driver B Firefighter B Firefighter B Firefighter B special info special info special info

E-6 L-7 R-3 Capt. A Capt. A Capt. A Firefighter A Firefighter A Firefighter A Driver B Driver B Driver A Firefighter B Firefighter B Firefighter B Firefighter B

All Gastonia Fire Dept. “Front-line “apparatus will be listed in the most easily viewed location on the small Velcro Strips for status board. The units will be Status 1 Status 2 Status 3 attaching the engine listed under one of three company identification columns: Status 1 = Available Eng 1 labels to the “Status” for immediate response Lad 4 columns Status 2 = Busy but available for emergency response. Status 3 = Unavailable for any type of response (due to mechanical problems etc.)

VI. Summary

A. The Passport Accountability System, like any other system, will be of benefit to us in the Fire Service only to the extent that we allow. It is only as good as the people who use it, therefore, it is extremely important that the Passports along with the name tags and company identifier labels display the “current information “at all times. We must form the habit of attaching a name tag to the Passport of our assigned unit and removing it when the assignment is changed. The incident commanders should rely on the system to help them “keep track“of the personnel and equipment under their command.

These standard operating guidelines satisfy the requirements of NFPA Standard 1561 section 2-6 (1995 edition).

This system is compatible with the system utilized by various departments in Gaston County although there are slight variations. Variations exist between the Gastonia Fire Department’s Passport Accountability System and the systems used by county departments and there are even variations between the systems of the county departments but these are not major differences. The Passport of most of the county departments is physically larger than the ones used by the Gastonia Fire Department. The number of personnel who respond with a particular volunteer engine company will vary and the number of personnel who arrive on the scene by means of personal owned vehicles is not fixed thus, the Passport for the volunteer companies must be large enough to accept the name tags of several members who must be accounted for by associating them with a particular company.

The color code system used by the Gastonia Fire Department is the same as County VFD’s for the purpose of identifying officers, qualified FF’s and non-qualified structural FF’s. The Gastonia Fire Department member’s rank is identified by color while the type of agency (fire, EMS, police, etc.) is the purpose of color coded name tags within the various county systems.

The safety of all personnel is among the top priorities of the Gastonia Fire Department and its supervisors. Putting this system to use will be a priceless aid in maintaining safety among employees by answering the questions, “Who is on the emergency scene, where are they, and what are they doing, at every moment?

246

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: August 5, 2010

Rescinds:

Subject: Structure Fire Guideline

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to provide information to all members concerning the establishment of standardized guidelines for firefighting of structural fires. As with any operational guideline, these are intended to be general in nature, and are specifically designed to allow the officer or incident commander the latitude to make changes if the needs of the situation so dictate. In general however, operational guidelines should always be followed unless compelling reasons force a modification.

1. Emergency operational guidelines established by this department are designed to assist with the placement of apparatus and the assignment of tactical duties and areas of operation. Thus, this guideline is intended to work in concert with the National Incident Management System (NIMS).

II. SEPARATION AND ORGANIZATION OF FIRE GROUND DUTIES

A. The American fire service generally performs structural firefighting operations by employing three types of companies: engine companies, ladder companies, and rescue companies. The duties of each of these three types of companies as operated by this department are noted below.

1. Engine Company: A Gastonia Fire Department Engine Company includes a triple combination pumper (pump, hose and water tank) staffed with a group of trained firefighters capable of performing fire extinguishment. Its primary duty on the fire ground is to provide water through hose lines for fire extinguishment. The Engine Company may also be used to perform other duties as required on the fire ground if needed.

a. Engine Company Functions: (1) Obtain an adequate water supply (2) Advance hose lines (3) Operate nozzles (4) Develop and maintain an adequate fire flow (5) Confine the fire and protect exposures (6) Extinguish the fire (7) Remove victims and treat the injured 247

(8) Initial Rapid Intervention Crew (IRIC)

b. Engine Company Special Operations

(1) On most fire ground operations there will be many more engine companies than ladder companies. Therefore, engine companies should be prepared to support ladder company functions or perform ladder company duties if directed by the Incident Commander.

2. B. Ladder Company: A Gastonia Fire Department Ladder Company shall consist of a hydraulic aerial apparatus equipped with various ground ladders and tools, staffed by a group of trained firefighters capable of performing search and rescue, ventilation, forcible entry, and other various fire ground support functions. Ladder companies may perform engine company functions on the fire ground where no engine company is available or if so directed by the Incident Commander.

a. Ladder Company Functions:

(1) Search and rescue (2) Forcible entry (3) Ventilation (4) Laddering the building (5) Recon for fire extension (6) Utilities control (7) Overhaul and smoke removal (8) Salvage (9) Providing elevated master streams (10) Treatment of injured persons (11) Illuminating the fire ground (12) Initial Rapid Intervention Crew or Designated Rapid Intervention Crew (Rescue Ladder or Rescue Company)

3. Rescue Squad Company: A Gastonia Fire Department Rescue Squad Company (referred to as a Rescue Company) shall consist of an appropriate apparatus equipped with special tools and support equipment and staffed by a group of trained firefighters capable of functioning in any position necessary on the emergency scene as ordered by the Incident Commander. In the event of incidents where firefighters must be relieved or rescued, primary consideration for this mission will be given to a Rescue Company. In general, the Rescue Company functions as a ‘Ladder Company without ladders’. The Rescue Company may also function as a rapid intervention team.

a. Rescue Company Functions: A Gastonia Fire Department Rescue Company shall function on the fire ground as the needs of the incident dictate. This company may be utilized as a unit on a single task assignment, or split into teams to supplement different operations. Since the primary mission of the Rescue Company is most closely related to Ladder Company work, consideration should be given to utilizing them in that capacity when possible.

III. APPARATUS STAFFING

248

A. Fire and rescue apparatus is staffed with a minimum number of personnel in order to insure that company evolutions necessary for the successful mitigation of incidents can be performed safely, quickly, and effectively. Accordingly, assigned apparatus staffing will follow the recommendations of national standards (NFPA 1500/NFPA 1710) and appropriate regulations to the extent that available funding permits. In this regard, minimum assigned apparatus staffing maintained by this department will be as follows: 1. All Engine Companies will be staffed with a minimum three (3) members. When additional personnel are available over and above that required to properly staff Ladder and Rescue Company apparatus, said personnel will be used to bring Engine Company staffing up to four (4) members where possible. 2. All Ladder Companies will be staffed with a minimum of four (4) members. 3. All Rescue Companies will be staffed with a minimum of four (4) members.

IV. APPARATUS & PERSONNEL STAGING

A. A staging area is defined as a location in close proximity to an emergency incident from where personnel and equipment are available for assignment within three (3) minutes. Accordingly, the objective of the staging procedure is to provide a standard system for the initial placement of responding apparatus, personnel and equipment prior to tactical assignment. Staging of apparatus and personnel prevents excessive apparatus congestion at the scene and allows the incident commander time to evaluate conditions prior to assigning suppression companies. Level I Staging for structural fires constitutes an integral component of this guideline. Level II Staging, a more complex function of ICS designed for incidents of larger magnitude is dealt with under appropriate ICS guidelines and procedures.

Level I Staging, as outlined below, will automatically apply to all single and multiple unit responses including: street alarms, motor vehicle accidents, box alarms, and alarms for high-risk structures.

Level I Staging

A. Street Alarms: responses requiring only one engine company.

1. Street alarms; first arriving Engine Company:

Position: Will normally position apparatus at a strategic location where Company can handle the incident while keeping life safety and protection of apparatus in mind. If necessary, a company should take steps to establish an adequate continuous water supply.

Company Officer: Shall be responsible for supervision and control of the personnel under his/her command, for reporting to and maintaining communications with fire center and for initiating strategy and tactics as necessary to suppress the incident.

B. Box Alarm: A box alarm will be the standard response assignment for structural fires within the City of Gastonia. A standard box assignment will be two (2) Engine/Quint Companies, one (1) Ladder Company, one (1) Rescue Company and two (2) Battalion Chief’s. The Rescue Company or Rescue Ladder Company will be immediately dispatched upon indication that the incident involves a ‘working’ fire.

249

1. Box Alarms; first arriving Engine Company:

Position: Will normally position apparatus at the front (Side A) of the fire building (keeping ladder company operations in mind) to initiate rescues, cover exposures, and/or attack and confine fire.

Company Officer: Shall be responsible to formally initiate initial Incident Command System (ICS). The CO will make a rapid size-up of the situation, report findings to the Battalion Chief via Communications, and initiate appropriate suppression strategy and tactical operations. Should the CO elect to serve in an immediate ‘Combat’ role (verses ‘Command’), he/she will so notify the Battalion Chief who (in turn) will pass ‘Command’ to the next arriving Company. The CO will also be responsible for the supervision and control of the personnel under his/her command, and for reporting to and maintaining communications with the fire ground commander. The CO will ensure that the fire department connections to the standpipe and/or sprinkler systems are covered by one of the responding companies. Normally, Engine Company officers should position themselves with hose/fire attack teams in order to insure the safety of other team members, while evaluating and directing the effectiveness of fire streams.

2. Second arriving Engine Company: The primary responsibility of the second arriving Engine Company is to ensure an adequate water supply for the first Engine Company. Once this task is completed or simultaneous with same, the Company should be prepared to do one of the following:

 Advance a second attack line over the fire or to the rear of the structure as the situation dictates.

 Advance a back-up to the front/main entrance of the structure. A ‘back-up line’ is defined as a hose line capable of equal or greater GPM flow than the hose line currently being deployed for fire attack.

 Prepare to deploy master stream device(s) or special appliances or equipment if so ordered.

Position: The second arriving Engine Company will take position as necessary to insure a water supply for the first arriving Engine Company.

Company Officer: Shall take appropriate actions as dictated in item # 2 above, or as directed by the Incident Commander. The CO shall also be responsible for the supervision and control of the personnel under his/her command and for reporting to and maintaining communications with the fire ground commander.

3. First arriving Ladder Company:

Position: Will normally take position on side A (front) to ladder the building, effect any obvious rescues, and report to the fire area equipped to carry out normal ladder company duties, including utility control as needed. With assigned 4-member staffing, Ladder Companies normally function in two teams as noted below:

Inside Team (A): Officer and 1 Firefighter; responsible for forcible entry, interior search & rescue, check for fire extension, & interior ventilation. Tools carried may include: hand lights,

250

haligan bar, flathead axe, short pike pole, and hydraulic forcible entry tools (Rabbit Tool, etc.), as dictated by the incident/situation.

Outside Team (B): Driver/Engineer and 1 Firefighter; responsible for exterior search & rescue, placing ground ladders, placement of aerial ladder/elevated master stream, exterior ventilation, utility control, and initiation of salvage operations.

Special Note: Ladder Companies should utilize other ground ladders that are available from Engine Companies on the scene to effect laddering, in addition to their own ladders.

Company Officer: Organize and deploy personnel into teams as noted above. Coordinate efforts with those of Engine Companies operating at the scene. Inform Incident Commander of conditions found and progress being made. He/she shall also be responsible for the supervision and control of the personnel under his/her command, and for reporting to and maintaining communications with the Incident Commander.

4. The Rescue Company or Rescue Ladder Company: As previously noted, the Rescue Company will be immediately dispatched (or requested) upon any indication that a given incident involves a ‘working fire". The Rescue Company or Rescue Ladder Company will also be automatically dispatched for all structures falling into the ‘high risk’ category. With assigned 4-member staffing, the Rescue Company will also normally function in two teams as noted below:

 ‘A’ Team: Officer and 1 Firefighter; responsible for forcible entry, interior search & rescue, check for fire extension, & interior ventilation. Tools carried may include: hand lights, haligan bar, flathead axe, short pike pole, Thermal Imagining Camera and hydraulic forcible entry tools (Rabbit Tool, etc.), as dictated by the incident/situation.

 ‘B’ Team: Driver/Engineer and 1 Firefighter; responsible for forcible entry, interior search & rescue, check for fire extension, & interior ventilation. Tools carried may include: hand lights, haligan bar, flathead axe, short pike pole, and hydraulic forcible entry tools (Rabbit Tool, etc.), as dictated by the incident/situation.

Position: The Rescue Company will normally position in the front (side A) as necessary to perform fire ground tasks assigned by the Incident Commander.

Company Officer: The CO shall be responsible for the supervision and control of the personnel under his/her command and for reporting to and maintaining communications with the fire ground commander.

5. Other Engine and/or Ladder Companies: Report to the designated Staging Area and remain uncommitted. Company Officer(s) should keep crew(s) intact and await instructions from the Incident Commander or his designee.

6. Battalion Chief/Incident Commander: The Battalion Chief or Incident Commander shall be responsible for assuming overall command of the incident and implementing the Command Sequence as noted below. It is understood that the officer of the first arriving Fire Department unit will assume or pass initial Command and implement the Command Sequence. The Battalion Chief may allow this officer to maintain Command of the incident at his/her discretion, depending upon the circumstances and the need for said officer to return to his/her assigned company.

251

7. Battalion Chief/Safety Officer: The Second arriving Battalion Chief which responds in support of the other battalion will assume the Safety Officer role. During Commercial Operations the second arriving Battalion Chief will assume the interior operations assignment, and a designated Safety Officer will be assigned, initially by a Captain and will be transferred to the next arriving Chief Officer.

Position: The Command Officer will position the command vehicle in such a manner so as to maintain control of the incident and provide for maximum visibility of the scene. Normally, this will be on side A (front) of the structure, near an appropriate corner so that as many sides of the structure can be viewed simultaneously as possible.

8. The Command Sequence: The Command Sequence is a logical thought process with which every potential incident Commander must become familiar and learn to use on a regular basis. Daily use of this process, even for the smallest incident, will help it to become a pattern of thought that will automatically go into effect at larger incidents. The specific sequence incorporated into this document has been proven to work on numerous successful incidents, and is regularly incorporated into National Fire Academy programs on strategy and tactics. The four parts of the Command Sequence are as follows:

 Incident Priorities: In order of consideration, not necessarily action:

1. Life Safety 2. Incident Stabilization 3. Property Conservation

 Size-up: Size-up is a rapid, mental evaluation of the various factors related to an emergency incident. Size-up includes identifying the pertinent factors related to fire ground operations by using either the acronym: Water, Area, Location, Life, Apparatus/FF’s, Construction, Exposures, Weather, Auxiliary Appliances, Special Concerns, Height, Occupancy, Time (WALLACE WAS HOT) or Construction, Occupancy, Area, Life, Weather, Apparatus/FF’s, Special Conditions, Water Supply, Exposures, Age/Access, Location, Time, Height (COAL WAS WEALTH)

 Strategic Goals: Goals are developed by the Incident Commander and are the purpose towards which incident activities are directed. Strategic goals encompass the following: Rescue, Exposures, Confinement/Containment, Extinguishment, Overhaul, Ventilation and Salvage. Each of these strategic goals should be addressed during the Command Sequence and throughout the incident.

 Tactical Objectives: Tactical objectives are specific actions carried out to accomplish goals. Tactical objectives identify who, what and how a tactic is to be carried out.

7. Other Responding Chief Officers: Locate vehicles out of the way of other responding apparatus. Work with the Incident Commander so as to reduce his/her span of control by assuming ICS division or group responsibilities including Safety, Interior or Side Command (Side C, etc.), Water Supply, EMS, Extrication, or other assignments as dictated by the situation.

V. COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL OSHA RESPIRATORY PROTECTION STANDARDS

A. In 1998, revised Federal OSHA regulations went into effect regarding respiratory protection. Among other changes, the new regulation required that interior structural firefighting procedures

252

provide for at least two firefighters inside the structure, who are required to maintain contact with two other firefighters outside the structure. This section has been referred to as the firefighters’ “two in - two out” regulation. Given the close proximity and rapid order of arrival of engine, ladder, and rescue companies at most emergencies within the City of Gastonia, delays in initial fire attack should be extremely rare; interior fire attack operations can commence as soon as the second company arrives on the scene. In order to comply with this important safety regulation, the following procedure will be followed when attacking and extinguishing interior structural fires.

1. All firefighters engaged in interior structural firefighting operations beyond the incipient stage or any other atmosphere deemed ‘immediately dangerous to life or health’ are required to wear SCBA’s and work in teams of two (2) or more. Firefighters working in the interior must operate in a ‘buddy’ system and maintain voice or visual contact with each other at all times. Radios are not an acceptable means for maintaining voice and/or visual contact between members of a ‘buddy system’ team, but may be used to maintain contact between inside and outside teams.

2. OSHA requires that at least one team of two or more properly equipped firefighters be present outside of the structure before any team(s) of firefighters enter the structure. The intent of the outside team is to provide for the rapid and effective rescue of the interior team if necessary. One of these two positions may take on additional responsibilities such as Incident Commander or apparatus operator; however the other position cannot be assigned to any other task deemed “critical to the safety and health of any other employee working at the incident”. In addition, one of these two positions shall assume responsibility for the on- scene accountability of personnel working in and around the structure, per our Passport Accountability SOP.

3. If the first arriving company encounters a situation where a known life hazard exists and where immediate action could prevent said loss of life, deviation from the “two in - two out” standard is permitted. This deviation, which eliminates the requirement for the two outside members, is permitted only for situations where direct threat to life is known and imminent. The team entering the structure for rescue purposes in this situation must still maintain the buddy system and contact with each other per the Passport Accountability Guideline. When this deviation is necessary, the first arriving officer will notify responding units of the situation and his/her intentions via radio and transfer command to another responding unit. Additional resources as may be needed to support this operation will be immediately called for by the Incident Commander.

VI. SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE OPERATIONS

A. As previously noted, the first arriving Engine Company is responsible to insure that one of the responding Engines cover sprinkler and/or standpipe systems in structures so equipped. Systems will be hooked up to and charged per the below guidelines: 1. Standpipes: Shall be charged immediately to 150 # + elevation factor for the reported location of the fire whenever smoke or fire is showing or upon order of the Incident Commander. 2. Sprinkler systems: Shall be charged immediately if they are part of the standpipe system. At other times, they shall be charged to 150 # anytime:

a. Smoke or flame is visible, or b. The Incident Commander deems it advisable c. The Engine driver shall advise the Incident Commander when the system(s) are charged.

253

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.20.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: October 18, 2005

Rescinds:

Subject: Notification on Attended and Unattended Structures

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a standard procedure for entering unattended and attended structures and notifying a responsible party for the structure.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Upon arrival at an unattended structure and it is observed that an obvious need to enter exists:

1. Incident Command should initiate entry. 2. Care should be taken to minimize damage to the structure. 3. Suppression of the problem should be initiated. 4. Incident Command should notify Fire Center and request that contact be made with the owner and/or responsible party of the structure.

a. Relay nature of problem, correct address, and any other information pertinent to the situation. b. If names of representatives or GPD number are available on the scene, relay this information to Fire Center.

5. Fire Center will make every effort to contact a representative from all available resources. 6. Fire Center will notify Incident Command of the outcome of their efforts to contact a representative. 7. Efforts to reach a responsible party should be done on a taped line.

B. Upon arrival at an unattended structure and it is observed that an obvious need to enter does not exist:

1. Incident Command should notify Fire Center and request that contact be made with the owner and/or responsible party of the structure.

a. Relay nature of problem, correct address, and any other information pertinent to the situation.

254

b. If names of representative or GPD number are available on the scene, relay this information to Fire Center. 2. Fire Center will make every effort to contact a representative from all available resources. 3. Fire Center will notify Incident Command of the outcome of their efforts to contact a representative. 4. If at any time, it becomes apparent that a need to enter the structure arises, Incident Command should relay this information to Fire Center and proceed as outlined in Section II-A.

C Under no circumstances shall Companies return to quarters prior to the arrival of the owner/responsible party. If a representative cannot be contacted, Fire Center should notify GPD to dispatch a Police Officer to the scene and report to Incident Command. Security of the structure should be turned over to GPD through Incident Command.

D In cases where there is question as to whether the fire was accidental or not, the tenant and the actual owner shall be notified of the occurrence.

255

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: March 03, 2015

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Response to High Rise Buildings

I. PURPOSE

A. To standardize the fire ground operation at a high rise fire by giving direction to the sequence of events that must transpire for the control and extinguishment of this type fire.

II. DISCUSSION

A. For the purpose of this procedure, a high rise building shall be defined as any multi-story structure meeting one of the following criteria:

1. The structure height exceeds seventy feet from any grade level. 2. Aerial apparatus cannot be used effectively for rescue or fire fighting from one or more sides of the building. 3. A health care facility having three (3) or more floors.

The high rise fire problem is of great concern throughout the entire country. The following procedure was put together by a committee comprised of representatives from Operations, Training and Fire Prevention areas of the department, representing all rank levels. Due to the complexity of a high rise fire incident it is virtually impossible to give step-by-step instructions for this operation. Therefore, you will find guidelines for accomplishing the various tasks that must be done for the successful control and extinguishment of a high rise fire. The key to successful fire operations in a high rise structure is PRE- FIRE PLANNING. This was brought out over and over again in the resources found on this subject. Information gained during a pre-planning exercise will be invaluable during a fire incident. From locating elevator controls to deciding the proper means of ventilating the structure, the information will be important not only to you, the first-in unit but to the department as a whole, since the entire department will be your available resource. Once the preliminary steps to the operation have been completed and the actual attack on the fire is ready to commence, regular fire fighting procedures governing fire attack will be used.

III. High Rise Tactical Guidelines

A. Command

256

Command will be initiated by the first arriving Gastonia Fire Department unit or officer as defined in the Incident Command Guideline. In high rise working fire incidents, Command will be transferred to the First Due Battalion Chief or the Deputy Fire Chief. Command at these incidents will have the following responsibilities: 1. Rescue and evacuation. Ensure that all occupants are removed from immediate and potential danger areas. 2. Confirm fire floor(s). Use whatever methods are available to confirm the actual fire area. 3. Water supply for fire attack. Assign one or more pumpers to supply the building standpipe/sprinkler system. 4. Check for upward fire extension. Send a crew to check for extension of the fire as soon as possible. 5. Control of lobby area. As this area is vital due to incoming fire personnel and resources, it should be kept secure during the entire operation, even if Command is located in a different area. 6. Divisions. Command needs to place someone in charge of the different divisions as the size of the operation increases. 7. Additional resources. On conformation of a working fire a second alarm shall be requested. 8. Staff assignments. Command will make such staff assignments as are necessary to handle the numerous tasks in and around the Command area. Examples: Public Information, Liaison, Communications Officer, etc. 9. Strategy. Command will receive reports from division supervisors, analyze information, and formulate strategy for the operation.

B. Nothing Visible

The first-in company at the incident scene shall be in full protective clothing including SCBA. They should carry forcible entry tools.

1. Establish Command as consistent with Incident Command Guideline. 2. Check with security and/or maintenance-building personnel, depending on the time of day or night. 3. Check enunciator panel for any information. 4. In the event there is no floor designation as to the location of the fire, and no further information is available, Command will designate one company to stand by with the High Rise Kit and one company to be ready to provide an adequate water supply. Command will then use any of the remaining resources deemed necessary to perform a quick, systematic search of the building. 5. If a floor is designated by any of the previously stated means, Command will cause all elevators to be returned to the lobby and secured. A communication will be transmitted to incoming units and Alarm to confirm the floor where the fire is indicated. He will then place one elevator on manual control and proceed up to a point no closer than two floors below the designated fire floor to confirm actual conditions or assign this duty to another. The initial arriving company officer should strongly consider the option of maintaining Command in the lobby, if manpower permits. If fire is indicated by heat, flame, or smoke, the high rise fire fighting procedures will be initiated.

C. Smoke, Heat and Flame Detected

Once the fire has been confirmed, Command must initiate the following functions: 1. Command will call for a second alarm immediately plus any other additional alarms deemed necessary which conditions dictate, as well as initiate an adequate water supply. 2. Cause the elevators to be returned to the lobby and secured, if this has not already occurred. 257

3. Direct the High Rise Kit to be taken to a position within the building core one floors below the confirmed fire floor. 4. Command will ensure that Life Safety Procedures for the structure are initiated. a. If the structure has an evacuation plan, that procedure shall be used. NOTE: Command may alter the existing evacuation operation if conditions dictate. b. In the event there is no evacuation plan, Command will use whatever resources are available to evacuate the following areas: (1) Fire floor. (2) Two (2) floors above the fire floor. (3) Two (2) floors below the fire floor.

NOTE: Evacuated occupants should be relocated a minimum of five (5) floors from the fire floor in a downward direction.

c. The floors indicated above must be considered as the first priority. However, Command must be assured that occupants on the remaining floors are not in immediate danger. d. While this is being accomplished, fire extension to other areas can be evaluated. e. When performing search and rescue/evacuation operations, standard techniques are to be used. Normal means of egress shall be used whenever possible.

D. Initial Fire Attack

1. Once the High Rise Kit arrives one (1) floor below the confirmed fire floor, normal standpipe operations should be performed utilizing 1 ¾”, 2", or 2 ½” attack lines found in the High Rise Kit depending on the fire conditions and needed fire flow. 2. Care must be taken to ensure that the hose line is charged before opening the door from the stairwell into the fire area. The firefighters on the attack line will have on full protective clothing, SCBA, and at least one (1) forcible entry tool and one (1) thermal imaging camera.

E. Extended Fire Operations

1. Command must now consider establishing needed Divisions or Groups consistent with Incident Command Procedures. In extended fire operations, this will reduce Command's span of control to a workable size. 2. Care should be taken to inform relocated and non-evacuated occupants on the progress of the operation and to reassure them of the safety of their location. The atmosphere in these locations should receive constant monitoring utilizing the hand-held CO monitor to ensure the safety of the occupants. A reading of 35 PPM is to be considered the danger level. 3. The Suppression Group Supervisor should remain flexible in fire fighting attack plans to adjust as conditions change. Conditions may even cause the use of certain master stream devices, i.e. deluge sets, to be employed on a temporary basis. 4. Depending on the size of the operation, Command should consider going to Staging-Level II as a means of controlling congestion around the fire scene.

F. Ventilation

1. Ventilation is of major importance at any fire, but in the high rise buildings of today, many factors govern how ventilation should be accomplished in a given structure. 2. To obtain the knowledge of the proper ventilation technique to use on any given structure, it is imperative that a pre-fire plan be prepared on the structure. a. Information about ventilation gained from pre-planning should evaluate:

258

1. If an HVAC system can aid in smoke removal or cause it to spread smoke throughout the building. 2. Areas of the building; with regard to being pressurized to prevent smoke from entering. 3. Characteristics of air movement in the particular building. 4. The presence of smoke dampers and how they are activated. 5. What effect horizontal ventilation will; have on; the rest of the structure. 6. Any other information that; may help to guide you in ventilating a high rise building in the most effective manner. 7. Strong consideration should be used in applying positive pressure to ventilate the stairwells for both fire attack and evacuation. b. Much of this information can be obtained from the Building Engineer during pre-fire planning. 3. Ventilation techniques that are effective in one particular structure may produce strong, adverse conditions in another.

G. Lobby Control

1. In high rise fires, Command must secure and control the lobby and entrances as soon as possible. This task can be assigned as a division. 2. Early in the operation Command may be able to assign only one (1) person to lobby control, but as manpower becomes available the Lobby Supervisor will probably need help in performing the various tasks of the area. 3. Lobby control should be established in a highly visible location, so that upon entering the building this will be the first person seen. 4. To be effective, lobby control must include a variety of tasks. a. Secure all entrances to the building (except one or two) so these can be controlled. NOTE: The Division Commander may use a police officer to aid in this task. b. Direct incoming personnel to the proper elevator to be used. c. Direct resource people to the appropriate area. d. Allow no unauthorized entry into the building. e. Maintain control of elevators. f. Establish a log of numbers of fire fighting personnel by company (Ex.: E1 - 4, E2 - 3) reporting to the resource. g. Maintain close contact with the elevator service representative.

H. Communications

1. Communications is a critical factor at any fire situation for the obvious reasons. At a high rise fire incident, variables affect the quality of radio communications and even the ability to communicate via radio, i.e. construction materials, shielding, numbers of firefighters trying to communicate at a time. 2. When divisions are used, different channels may need to be employed to handle the large volume of radio traffic. a. Command will need to assign the radio channel that will be used within the division. b. It may be necessary to operate more than one (1) Division on a channel. Consideration should be given to the probable volume of traffic a Division/Group will generate before combining it with another. I. Resources 1. The term "resources pool", used in this procedure, defines an area where firefighters and equipment are held in a stand-by/ready position. a. This will usually be a position approximately two (2) floors below the fire floor and in a room large enough to prevent undue congestion. 259

b. Personnel being rotated out of the fire area will return here. c. Personnel waiting to enter the fire area will be located in this area. d. This will be the collecting point for equipment such as: (1) Extra air bottles (2) Additional High Rise Kit (3) Extra hose (4) Forcible entry tools (5) Salvage equipment

2. Command shall make this a division and place someone in charge of the resource pool to perform tasks which include: a. Maintaining a log of personnel entering and leaving the fire scene. This log shall show name and time entering or leaving the fire area. b. Coordinate with the Suppression Commander the relieving of personnel in the fire area. c. Maintaining an adequate stock of supplies, especially air tanks. d. Requesting from Command any additional manpower or resources.

3. Response assignments to high rise/risk incidents will be as follows: a. Standard Gastonia Fire Department First Alarm Assignment

b. Standard Gastonia Fire Department Second Alarm Assignment.

c. Any additional alarms requested by the incident commander.

4. Additional resources outside the Gastonia Fire Department are available by request to Fire Center. These resources will include: a. Gastonia Police Department - Crowd control, traffic, security, etc. b. American Red Cross - To provide aid to victims, family members, and rehabilitation of fire fighting personnel. c. Utility Companies - To City of Gastonia Electrical Dept., Water Department, Public Service Natural Gas. d. Elevator Company service representative. 5. Additional resources within the Gastonia Fire Department will include: a. Training Division. b. Fire Prevention Division

6. High Rise Kit Equipment List (minimum) a. 100ft of 1 ¾” or 2” hose and 150ft of 2 ½” hose. b. Two smooth bore nozzles one 15/16” tip and one 1 ¼” tip. c. One high flow fog nozzle head . d. Two sections of nylon webbing and/or rope tool. e. 18” pipe wrench. f. 2 ½” in-line pressure gauge. g. Spanner wrenches for couplings - 1 1/2", 2 1/2". h. Gated Y i. 2 ½” Elbow j. 2 ½” plastic cap. k. Sprinkler wedges. l. Utility carabiner.

260

J. Salvage

1. Salvage operations shall be considered early in the operation. Standard salvage techniques will be used; however, the overall salvage operation is likely to take additional manpower. Command shall have to option to cause additional alarm(s) to be sounded for the purpose of obtaining additional manpower and equipment for this task.

K. Overhaul

1. Due to the height of involved structures, debris removal may present quite a problem. Consideration shall be given to only removing that debris necessary to be certain all fire is extinguished and to establish the fire cause. Water buildup may present problems for salvage crews, safety consideration, and overhaul operations.

261

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Apparatus Placement for Emergencies

I. PURPOSE

A. To define and establish guidelines for apparatus placement during emergency incidents.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Apparatus function should regulate placement. Many times we reverse this rule by virtue of poor placement, limiting the options or eliminating functions we can assign to that unit.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Firefighters operate with a natural inclination to drive apparatus as close to the fire as possible. Many times this results in positioning of units that is both dysfunctional and dangerous. The placement of all apparatus on the fire ground should be a reflection of one of the following:

1. A standard operational procedure for first arriving companies. 2. A pre-arranged staging procedure. 3. A direct order from Command. 4. A conscious decision on the part of the officer assigned to that apparatus based on existing or predictable conditions.

B. Effective apparatus placement must begin with the arrival of first units. The placement of the initial arriving engine and ladder should be based upon initial size-up and general conditions upon arrival. First arriving companies should place themselves to maximum advantage and go to work; later arriving units should place themselves in a manner that builds on the initial plan and allows for expansion of the operation.

C. Avoid bumper to tailboard placement on the fire ground. Do not drive all fire apparatus directly to the fire. Later arriving companies should hold positions, stage a minimum of one block short of the immediate fire area, and remain uncommitted until ordered into action by Command. Company officers should select standby positions with a maximum of tactical options.

D. In some large, complex, and lengthy fire ground operations additional alarm companies should be staged together in one location under the command of a Staging Officer consistent with Level II Staging procedures. Under these procedures, Command communicates directly with the Staging Officer for the additional resource required on the fire ground. 262

E. Command must maintain an awareness that access equals tactical options and that the immediate fire area can quickly become congested with apparatus. The officer must regard apparatus on the fire ground in two categories: 1. Apparatus that is working. 2. Apparatus that is parked = "taxis". Note: PARK "TAXIS" OUT OF THE WAY.

F. Command and all operating units should attempt to maintain an access lane down the center of streets wherever possible.

G. Think of fire apparatus as an expensive exposure; position working apparatus in a manner that considers the extent and location of the fire and a pessimistic evaluation of fire spread and building failure. Anticipate the heat which may be released with structural collapse. Apparatus should generally be positioned at least fifty (50) feet away from involved buildings. Greater distances are indicated in many situations.

H. Beware of putting fire apparatus in places where it cannot be repositioned easily and quickly - particularly operating positions with only one way in and out; i.e. yards, alleys, driveways, etc.

I. Beware of overhead power lines when positioning apparatus. Do not park where lines may fall.

J. If apparatus does become endangered, operate lines between it and the fire while you reposition it. When you do move it, move it to a position that is safe. It is dysfunctional to move a unit several times throughout the progress of a fire.

K. Take maximum advantage of good operating positions and "build" the capability of units assigned to these effective positions. Initial arriving pumpers should offer maximum fire attack access to the fire area and be supplied with large diameter supply lines as quickly as possible. Subsequent arriving companies can operate hose lines from this apparatus. Place these "key" companies first; before they are "buried" by later arriving units.

L. Key tactical positions should be identified and engines placed in those locations with a strong water supply.

M. Hydrants located closest to the fire area should be regarded as "key" hydrants. Large diameter steamer hook-ups of big pumpers take maximum advantage of such hydrants and facilities pumping multiple lines.

N. Position pumpers on "key" hydrants before tying up secondary hydrants that require longer hose lays.

O. Take advantage of the equipment on apparatus already in the fire area instead of bringing in more units. Connect extra lines to pumpers which already have a good supply line instead of making "daisy chain" supply line connections.

P. Do not hook up hydrants so close to the fire building that structural failure or fire extension will jeopardize the apparatus.

Q. Command and Company Officers must get apparatus well-placed in key positions. Lines should be laid with attention to the access problems they present. Try to lay lines on the same side of the street as the hydrant and cross over near the fire.

263

R. When the aerial ladder is not needed for upper level access or rescue, spot apparatus in a position that would provide an effective position for ladder pipe operation if the fire goes to a defensive mode. Ladder officers must consider extent and location of fire, most dangerous direction of spread, confinement, exposure conditions, overhead obstructions and structural conditions in spotting apparatus. The unit should be spotted where the ladder can be raised and used effectively without repositioning.

264

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.30.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: December 1, 2007

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Turn Out and Response to Emergency Incidents

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish certain procedures and activities which are to be followed; when receiving notification of an alarm, responding to the alarm, and incident management.

II. PROCEDURE

A. When an alarm is received at the quarters of any company, every member shall immediately report for duty on the apparatus floor. Each member will don his/her protective equipment and be prepared to leave the station upon command of the officer in charge as soon as he/she is assured of the correctness of the alarm. B. The company officer shall make certain that the engineer understands correctly the street location of the emergency and know the most desired route to that location before leaving the station. C. Each company shall try to reach the scene of the emergency as soon as possible after an alarm is received. Nevertheless, the apparatus shall be driven safely and with every precaution taken to avoid collisions or accidents. All apparatus are required to completely stop at all Red Traffic Lights before continuing the response. Each engineer shall practice defensive driving and shall not exceed 10 miles per hour over the speed limit. D. To guard against collisions and accidents, when responding to an alarm, all emergency warning devices (lights, horn, siren, etc.) on the apparatus shall be used and/or sounded as frequently as public safety may require. However, personnel shall refrain from sounding emergency warning devices unnecessarily. E. When responding to alarms, the company officer shall ride beside the engineer and direct him when necessary. He/She shall not allow the apparatus to be driven at a rate of speed not consistent with safety. He/She shall also order that the apparatus be brought to a complete stop if he/she feels that it is necessary for the safety of the public or of the apparatus and personnel. F. When returning to quarters and on non-emergency assignments, apparatus shall not be driven in excess of posted speed limit. All traffic regulations are to be fully observed. G. The officer in command on the first company to arrive at the scene of an emergency shall assume command and becomes the Incident Commander until officially relieved by a superior officer. The Incident Commander shall follow procedures outlined in the written Incident Command Guidelines. H. The Incident Commander shall assume responsibility as the one scene safety officer. The Incident Commander shall appoint a Safety Officer at significant incidents and special operations where the

265

incident involves hazardous materials, increases drastically in size, or for any other changes that may require the need for a safety officer. I. The Safety Officer shall have full authority to immediately stop all operations that he/she considers unsafe. The Safety Officer shall then contact the Incident Commander and inform him/her of his/her actions. The Incident Commander shall confer with the Safety Officer as to his/her findings and determine if any changes or corrections need not be made. The Incident Commander shall then determine whether to continue or suspend the operation in question. J. A call for a second alarm or for a special company may be given by the first officer in command at a fire prior to the arrival of a chief officer if the condition of the fire warrants the necessity to do so. When a chief officer arrives he/she shall confer with the officer in charge and at his/her discretion officially assume command. K. When a fire or other emergency is reported verbally to personnel at a fire station the officer in charge will immediately report the incident to the Communications Center. If the incident has occurred within the fire district receiving the report, an immediate response should be made. L. The Communication Center will dispatch any additional companies per standard operating procedures or if requested by the responding Officer or Battalion Chief. M. When there is more than one alarm for the same fire, the officer in charge of the responding company shall request instructions when approaching the fire area from the commanding officer, unless otherwise notified. N. An engineer shall not drive over hose when it can be avoided. O. A member shall not allow a person not connected with the Department to drive over hose when it can be avoided. P. If it becomes necessary for a company to lay hose across railroad tracks, it shall be the responsibility of the commanding officer to station a man to guard the hose from being run over. If this action must be taken at night, a light shall be placed at the tracks. Hose lines laid across streets and railroad tracks shall be disconnected as soon as possible after the fire is extinguished to avoid further obstruction. Hose should be laid under tracks if at all possible. Q. An engineer shall remain with his/her vehicle except when otherwise directed by his/her company officer or chief in charge. R. A member shall not allow any person other than a member of the Department to ride on any fire apparatus enroute to or from a fire except by permission of the chief. S. A member shall in every way possible prevent any excessive or needless damage to building or its contents during a fire. T. No unauthorized person shall be allowed to enter buildings on fire or a building endangered by fire while the department is in charge of the premises. Authorization to enter such a building must be obtained from the chief officer in charge. U. A company shall not return to quarters until relieved by the officer in charge at the fire. V. If a company finds it has lost any equipment at the scene of a fire or upon the return from a fire, or that it has equipment from another company in its possession, this fact shall be reported to the commanding officer. Property from another company shall be returned promptly. All lost items shall be reported on the station log book. W. If a hydrant is found to be malfunctioning, this information shall be reported promptly to the Communications Center. They shall in turn notify the Water Department and inform all stations that the hydrant is out of service. X. Upon returning to quarters from a fire or other emergency call, the company shall alert the Communication Center of its status.

266

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.40.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Response to Motor Vehicle Accidents

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to establish Fire Department policy and procedure for responses to motor vehicle accidents (MVA's) where injuries are or may be involved. Accordingly, this department will begin responding to said types of incidents effective Monday, November 11, 1996. In this regard, responses to and operations at MVA incidents will be guided by the following procedures.

II. RESPONSE TO MVA/INJURY INCIDENTS

A. When calls are received by the Fire Center for motor vehicle accidents involving personal injury (both real and unknown), the closest Engine Company to the reported location of the incident will be dispatched, in addition to appropriate police and EMS units.

1. If the incident is known or believed to involve the need for extrication, Rescue 1 or Ladder 4 will also be dispatched. When two or more Fire Department units are dispatched to an MVA incident (example: Engine Company and Rescue Company), the on-duty Battalion Chief will also be dispatched.

III. ON-SCENE OPERATIONS

A. Apparatus responding to MVA's should proceed to the scene in a safe manner and position for maximum safety in operations, effectiveness in the use of equipment, and protection of the scene. To the extent possible, apparatus should avoid blocking roadways any more than absolutely necessary to insure safe and effective operations. Units should also be positioned so as to allow ease of access to victims by responding EMS units.

1. Additional resources including ALS/BLS units, engine companies, extrication units, etc. should be called by the Incident Commander if needed. Incident Commanders will be expected to use department SOG's and good judgment when calling for assistance.

2. Operations at the scene should commence from 'the outside in' to possible victims per the example below:

267

a. Secure the scene: insure on-scene workers are properly protected from traffic flow; chock wheels on involved vehicle(s); beware of overhead electrical wires in accident area before beginning operations, etc. b. Incident Commander establishes liaison with police and EMS personnel (per paragraph III below). c. Get protective hose line(s) in proper position and charge: Serious accident scenes requiring extrication and/or those involving flammable liquid spills should always be protected with charged hose line(s). d. Begin triage and treatment of injured victim(s): In incidents involving more than one victim, triage is performed so that the most serious injuries can receive the quickest treatment. Patient care and treatment will be performed per the protocols established by Gaston County Emergency Medical Services. If applicable, the Incident Commander or designee can relay a message to EMS personnel via radio (using our primary dispatch Channel 1) and/or in person regarding patient status. e. Patient turnover to EMS: As patient(s) are turned over to EMS personnel for further treatment and transport, Fire Department personnel should assume a 'support' role and provide additional assistance as required. All necessary patient information, vitals, etc. should also be turned over at this time. Should EMS request Fire Department assistance with further patient treatment and/or transport, said assistance will immediately be provided. f. Rescue & extrication operations: When City Fire Department units have initiated on- scene rescue operations prior to the arrival of a volunteer rescue squad, the volunteer rescue squad will function in a support role to City units, who may integrate them into the operation as needed. -----

IV. INCIDENT COMMAND, CONTROL, AND STAGING

A. On-scene Incident Commanders are expected to immediately establish command and control of MVA incidents. Apparatus and equipment not immediately needed at the scene should be staged at a nearby location, positioned so as to not interfere with on-scene operations or traffic flow, yet remain accessible in case of need.

1. The Incident Command System employed at MVA emergencies will generally be of the "unified command" type, employing fire, EMS, and police units. Incident Commanders are expected to liaison with on-scene supervisors of the above agencies to insure that operations proceed in a safe and efficient manner. General areas of responsibility for the above agencies at MVA incidents are as follows: a. Fire Department: Overall coordination and control of the emergency scene; establish unified command system with police and EMS; perform extrication as needed; stabilize scene and insure safe operations; provide protective hose lines as required; begin initial patient triage and treatment. b. Emergency Medical Services: Responsible for overall triage, treatment and transport of victims; establish unified command system with fire and police. c. Police Department: Responsible for traffic control and flow; establish unified command system with fire and EMS; work closely with fire and EMS personnel to insure on-scene safety from traffic problems. d. Independent Rescue Squads: Responsible to perform extrication in either a primary or support role as needed; establish unified command with fire, police and EMS units.

V. TERMINATING OPERATIONS

268

A. Once all victims have been treated and transported from the scene of MVA incidents, the Incident Commander can begin to 'step down' the operation and return units to service. The Incident Commander should again liaison with police officials to let them know that Fire Department operations are being terminated, and offer further assistance if needed.

1. Apparatus with medical equipment applied to the patient(s) and transported to the hospital with same must make arrangements to pick up said equipment. This may be accomplished by having the unit go to the hospital for the equipment, or possibly by having GEMS drop said equipment off at the station on the way back from the hospital. In either case, Company Officers should insure that all department medical equipment is retrieved, made ready for service, and placed back on the apparatus.

2. Appropriate documentation for each incident will be made via the Fire Department Incident Report. Incident commanders will insure that reports are completed properly and entered into the department’s data base per proper procedure for same.

269

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.40.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Mail Box Collection Fires

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a standard procedure for extinguishing fires in U.S. Mail Collection Boxes.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Fires that occur in U.S. Postal Collection Boxes can possibly be extinguished by water from a booster line; however, a considerable amount of damage is experienced in the cost of restoring the box to service as a result of water rusting the parts and the addresses on salvaged lettered become illegible.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Co2 or Dry Chemical extinguishers shall be discharged through opened letter drop to control and extinguish the fire. The use of such extinguishers makes it necessary to pry open the box which could be opened by a postal employee later. By using dry chemical extinguishers, the salvaged mail will be in better condition and the box will not be needlessly damaged.

B. In case of fire in a U.S. Postal Collection Box, the officer in charge shall ensure the fire is extinguished as set forth in the above procedure and immediately have the communications center operator notify the Post Office that there has been a fire in a collection box. The officer shall give the location and remain at the scene until a Post Office employee arrives to open the box and process the mail.

270

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.40.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Weather Related Responses

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish guidelines in order to utilize Gastonia Fire Department resources effectively during peak periods created by adverse weather conditions and other instances that may require the commitment of many fire companies.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Various weather conditions may require the commitment of many fire companies, often at the same time. Normal, seasonal storms experienced in the Gastonia area can be handled adequately by the Department; however, severe conditions may require certain priorities for emergency responses.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Fire Alarm

1. Upon commitment of one-half of the fire companies, the Deputy Chief of Operations shall be notified.

B. Company Officers

1. Upon arrival on the scene of a response involving power lines down, the company officer must make a decision on what actions to take. It is important to maintain ample resources available for life and fire problems. The facts and circumstances of a decision should include the following: a. Is it necessary to commit a company? b. Can less manpower (one person) maintain the security necessary?

2. Factors to be considered in committing a company include: a. Is the wire energized, constituting a life hazard by personal contact? b. Is there a potential threat of fire? c. Is the downed wire laying on a metal building or fence, energizing it and creating a hazardous condition?

271

d. Is the problem on public or private property where the owner could assume responsibility?

3. When one person can handle a power line situation, the fire companies are free to respond to other emergencies. Factors to be considered in assigning one person include: a. Is there a potential threat of fire? Is the downed wire located where one person can protect individuals from personal injury? If so, the company officer shall notify City Fire who shall in turn notify the appropriate Battalion Chief.

C. Battalion Chief

1. Is responsible for managing fires and other emergencies on their shifts during adverse weather conditions.

2. When a company officer requests for a person to stand-by fallen power lines which are considered dangerous to the public, the Battalion Chief shall assign the following (if available) when necessary: a. A brush unit may be placed in service and dispatched by using manpower efficiently. b. The utility truck may be dispatched and placed in service with available manpower.

3. Battalion Chiefs should minimize situations requiring companies to remain out of service for extended periods of time by determining other possible alternative.

4. When radios are not available, stand-by vehicles should use portable radios.

5. Any reduction to the number of companies that normally respond to a particular demand zone or type of emergency shall be approved by the Battalion Chief.

272

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.40.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Emergency Operations at Wild land Fires

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to provide information to all members concerning the establishment of standardized guidelines for the fighting of Wild land fires. As with any guideline, these are intended to be general in nature, and are specifically designed to allow the officer or incident commander the latitude to make changes if the needs of the situation so dictates. In general however, operational guidelines should always be followed unless compelling reasons force a modification.

B. Wild land Fires: include, fires involving weeds, grass, field crops, brush, forests, and other similar vegetation.

II. FIRE BEHAVIOR

A. There are many factors that affect wild land fire behavior. Three of the most important are fuel, weather, and topography (slope).

1. Fuels: (3 classes) a. Ground fuels: (duff) small twigs, leaves, and needles. b. Surface fuels: (living) grass, brush, and low vegetation. (non-living) downed logs, heavy limbs, etc. c. Crown fuels: suspended and upright fuels physically separated from the ground

2. Factors that affect the burning characteristics of fuels: a. Fuel size: small or light fuels burn faster. Heavy or thick fuels burn slower, but hotter and longer. b. Compactness: The more tightly compacted, the slower the burn rate. c. Continuity: When fuels are close together, the fire spreads faster due to the effects of radiant heat. d. Volume: Volume will determine the fires intensity and the amount of water needed for extinguishment. e. Kinds of fuel: Some fuels burn hotter than others because they contain large amounts of inflammable oils. Greasewood (chemise), pines, mountain laurel, gallberry, and cedars are examples of oily hot burning fuels. The hotter the fuel burns the wider the control line must be. 273

3. Weather conditions: a. (include) Temperature, humidity, fuel moistures, air currents or wind, drafts created by fire (convection currents) and local winds.

(1) In general, the higher the temperature the lower the humidity; the lower the fuel Moisture or the stronger the wind, the more intensely a fire will burn and the wider the fire line needed. (2) The wind or air currents increase the burning intensity by supplying more oxygen, by moving currents of hot, drying air into the fuels ahead, or by actually carrying burning embers ahead of the fire itself.

4. Topography or Slope: (refers to the lay of the land)

a. The slope where a fire is burning may vary from level to moderate or steep. The steepness of a slope will affect both the rate and direction of the fire spread. Fires usually burn faster uphill, and the steeper the slope, the faster the fire will move. The direction the slope faces also has an effect on the burn rate: Slopes that face fully south are receiving more of the suns direct rays. Therefore fires will burn faster on Southern Exposures.

5. Physical parts of a wild land fire: a. Head: the portion of the fire that is out in front. The fastest moving part. (Bravo division). b. Right Flank: the right side of the fire when you are facing it from the rear. (Charlie division). c. Left Flank: the left side of the fire when you are facing it from the rear. (alpha division). d. Fingers: fires that move away from the head and create unburned portions between themselves and the head. It is dangerous to be standing or working in the unburned portion or between the fingers. e. Rear: where the point of origin exists. f. Spot fires: fires that start ahead of the existing fire.

III. INITIAL ATTACK

A. Enroute to the fire:

1. Size-Up: The preliminary and continuing appraisal of the overall fire situation for purposes of determining appropriate control actions. The first thing to do at the scene of the fire is to size up the entire situation to determine how best to attack the blaze. This may require walking or scouting entirely around the edge of a fire. Or, if you are fortunate enough, you will be able to see the entire fire from your vehicle as you arrive.

B. Consider the following in your size-up:

1. Fuels and Terrain, Access points, and Natural or man made barriers. 2. Ownership 3. History and cause of fires in the area 4. Water supply 5. Resource needs 6. Assist Departments 7. Determine the size, height, color, shape, and direction of the smoke column. 8. Determine the size of fire and location of head. 9. Look at the present location and ahead of the fire for exposures, including:

274

10. Structures, electrical equipment, phone lines, propane tanks, etc. 11. Locate escape routes for personnel

C. Fire Control Strategies

1. Generally, begin the attack at the head of the fire to quickly stop the spread. Establish anchored control line. Exceptions to head attack are: (a) Fire intensity is such that work at the head of the fire is unsafe. (b) Fire is burning toward a natural barrier that will check the spread. (c) A high value resource must be protected along another portion of the fire perimeter. (d) The fire is likely to burn into volatile fuels along another area of the fire perimeter that will result in an increased rate of spread, or a new head to develop.

2. Direct Attack: (a) Control efforts, including line construction, are conducted at the fire perimeter, which becomes the control line. (b) Used when fire perimeter is burning at low intensity and fuels are light permitting safe operations at the fire edge. (c) Often used where high value resources and/or improvements are threatened. (d) The burned area is kept to a minimum. (e) In light fuels, such as grass, attack may be from inside or outside the black.

3. Indirect Attack: (a) Control line is located along natural firebreaks, favorable breaks in topography, or at considerable distance from the fire. The intervening fuel is burned out. (b) Applications include fast moving ground fires too intense for crew, crown fires, steep terrain, or areas with preplanned or natural barriers.

4. Flanking Attack: (a) May be either direct or indirect and the distance the control line is from the fire edge usually is dependent on fire intensity. (b) The strip of unburned fuel between the line and fire edge is burned out as soon as possible during fire line construction. (c) This method is used for moderately hot forest fires moving at a moderate rate of speed.

5. Fire line Location and Construction: (a) Locate line adequate distance from the fire so it can be completed, burned out and held with predicted rate of spread and fire behavior. (b) Allow adequate time to permit forces to not only build lines, but also do other needed work, such as snag falling and burning out, in advance of severe burning conditions. (Forestry Service will perform burn outs). (c) Eliminate possible hazards from the fire area and provide adequate safe distance between hazards that must be left in the fire area. (d) Utilize existing natural and man made barriers. (e) Use machinery, where possible, for line construction. (f) Provide safety of personnel. (g) Encircle area where spot fires are so numerous that they are impractical to handle as individual fires. (h) Make line no wider than necessary. (i) Clean all lines to mineral soil. (j) Discard unburned line construction material outside of the fire line. (k) Scatter charred or burning material inside burned area.

275

(l) Construct trench lines to catch rolling debris if needed. (m) Increase effectiveness of line width by cooling down adjacent fire with dirt, water, or class A foam. (n) Cover rotten logs and stumps just outside the fire line with dirt or wet down. (o) Fall snags near fire line. (p) Build the line as close and safely as possible to the fires edge.

6. If the fire is burning beyond the control of available hand tools and resources request that the forestry service units respond. They can provide the following: (a) Dozers and Tractor Plows (b) Helicopters and Planes for water drops (c) Extra Manpower and Resources (d) Equipment for Back firing (e) Technical Advice

7. Firefighting Safety (a) Assign to fire duty only those people who are properly qualified and physically fit for the job. (b) Wear hard hat while on the fire line. (c) Wear laced leather boots with slip resistant soles. (d) Use gloves to protect the hands. (e) Use eye protection whenever there is danger from material being thrown back in your face. (f) Use hearing protection around loud machinery. (g) When operating chainsaws use proper safety equipment such as chaps (if) available, gloves, hard-hat, and eye protection. (h) Use an approved air filter mask or S.C.B.A. when in heavy smoke and dusty environments. (i) Carry firefighting tools safely. Down at your side. Never on your shoulder except power saws properly guarded. (j) Going to and from the fire line keep at least 6 feet apart and walk single file. (k) Walk, don't run.

8. Escape Routes and Lookouts: (a) Prepare escape routes in advance in high hazard areas by cutting or marking routes to positively identify their location during a critical period. (b) Post lookouts with adequate communication with crews and in a position to see danger coming. (c) Instruct all personnel to watch for hazards, such as blowups, rolling logs or rocks and falling trees, snags, or branches. (d) A Safety Officer should be assigned during moderate to large incidents. 9. Rest and Recuperation for Fire Personnel: (a) Sites for resting, lunching, and bedding should be located in a safe shady area away from smoke, noise, and any hazards. (1) First Aid: Prompt first aid should be given for any injuries received on the line. First Aid facilities should be available on the line and at the rehab center during moderate to large incidents. (2) Injuries to be alert to are: Heat Cramps, Heat Exhaustion, Heat Stroke, Carbon Monoxide Poisoning, Sprains, Strains, Cuts, Scrapes, Insect Bites, Snake Bites, etc. 10. Mop Up: (a) Start mop-up as soon as line construction and burnout is complete. Mop-up most threatening situations first.

276

(b) Allow fuel to burn up if it will do so promptly and safely. (c) Mop-up on large fires far enough in to be certain that no fire can blow, spot, or roll over the fire line under the worst possible conditions anticipated. (d) Fell all snags which could result in spotting or fire spread across the line. (e) Search for smoldering spot fires. (f) Cut unburned or partially burned brush near line. (g) Consider potential for problems from snags, punky logs, and fuel concentrations outside of the control line. (h) Search for and dig out burning roots and stumps near the line. (i) Scatter concentrations of burning fuels to reduce heat and danger of spotting. (j) Trench below, block, or turn heavy logs, stumps, or material so they cannot roll. (k) Use water in conjunction with hand tools where possible or practical. In dry mop-up, stir and mix hot embers with dirt. (l) Adding wetting agents or foam to water will greatly increase effectiveness of water, especially in deep burning fuels.

IV. GENERAL INFORMATION

A. N.C. Forestry Service Readiness Plans:

1. Action plans that provide to a degree of readiness. Set according to today's Hazard, risk of having a fire and capability to control fire.

RP-1: No appreciable fire activity. RP-2: Occasional fire activity. RP-3: Moderate fire activity. RP-4: Normal fire activity. RP-5: Severe fire activity. RP-6: Critical fire activity. RP-7: Extreme fire activity. (Blow-up alert)

2. Determining Acreage Involved:

1/4. Acre is equal to the length and width of one football field. 1/2 Acre is equal to the length and width of two football fields sitting side by side. 3/4 Acre is equal to the length and width of three football fields. 1 Acre is equal to the length and width of four football fields that are two wide and two deep.

3. Identification Numbers:

F-1 - Forestry 1 F-2 - Forestry 2

277

Back to Table Of Contents

General Administrative Guideline

NO. 24.40.05 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: November 23, 2005

Rescinds:

Subject: Policy on Fire Alarms

I. Purpose To have a policy in place to determine what to do when a fire alarm is received

II. Procedure

A. Make entry if there is reasonable suspicion of a fire. If forcible entry is required, inform dispatch to notify the Police Department. Use the entry method that requires the least amount of damage to property. B. If uncertain where the fire is located, go to the alarm panel to determine the zone. Deploy resources to the zone effected. C. Once fire area is determined, the alarm can be silenced, if personnel are out of the affected area. D. A minimum of 4 personnel will respond to a reported fire alarm (i.e. Engine Company with 3 personnel and the appropriate Battalion Chief).

When the situation permits A. Contact the maintenance person in charge of the business and have him/her to reset the alarm. B. The commander of the scene may leave one company to wait for the alarm to be reset.

278

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.50.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Incident Size Up

I. PURPOSE

A. To define and establish incident evaluation factors associated with size-up.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Incident factors offer a standard list of basic items Command must consider in the evaluation of tactical situations. This list should provide Command with a "checklist" of the basic items that are involved in size-up, decision making, initiating action, review and revision during the incident.

B. The effective Command officer soon learns that an individual can only deal with a limited number of factors. Within the framework of that limitation, the identification of the critical factors is extremely important. All the factors are not critical in any one tactical situation. Command must identify the critical incident factors that are present in each tactical situation - the list of factors offers a framework for that process.

C. Many times we begin operations before adequately considering the critical factors. "Size-up” is a conscious process involving the very rapid but deliberate consideration of the critical factors and the development of a rational plan of attack based on those conditions. Attack is many times an instinctive action-oriented process that involves taking the shortest and quickest route directly to the fire. Action feels good in fire ground situations while thinking delays action. Beware of non- thinking attack situations and non-thinking attackers.

III. Procedure

A. Incident factors represent an array of items that are dynamic during the entire process and the relative importance of each factor necessarily changes throughout that time frame. Command must continually deal with these changes and basic decisions on factor information that is timely and current. Beware of developing an initial plan of attack and sticking to that same initial plan throughout the incident, even though conditions continue to change. Effective operations require attack plan revisions that continually reconsider factors based upon information feedback.

B. In critical fire situations, Command may develop an initial plan and initiate an attack based on an incomplete evaluation of fire ground factors. In such cases, the information used in the decision making process must continually be improved and upgraded.

279

C. The effective Management of each factor requires Command to apply a somewhat different form of information management (visual, recon, preplan) to that factor. This is particularly true between the major categories of factors. Command must link the best way to effectively associate the variables involved.

D. Most tactical situations represent a complex problem with regard to how Command deals with Incident factor information. There are factors that can be determined from the operating position on the outside of the structure and other factors that can only be determined from other operating positions - both outside and inside the structure. Information available to Command is developed utilizing an overlapping variety of these information factors and forms. These forms of information revolve around the three following basic criteria:

1. Visual Factors - These factors include those obvious to visual observation and those absorbed subconsciously. This visual information is categorized as the type that can normally be gained by actually looking at a tactical situation from the outside. This form of intelligence involves the perceptive capability of Command.

2. Reconnaissance Factors - These factors include information that is not visually available to Command from that position on the outside of a tactical situation and must be gained by actually sending someone to check-out, go-see, look-up, research, advise, call, go-find,, etc. This generally involved Command making a specific assignment and then receiving an information-oriented report.

3. Preplanning and Familiarity Factors - These factors include the intelligence that is gained from formal pre-fire planning and in general informal familiarization activities. Such intelligence increases the information initially available to Command from the OUTSIDE of a tactical situation. This information arms Command with intelligence that would normally have to be assigned as a Reconnaissance Factor or do without.

E. In addition to the above criteria all of the following factors should be considered in the size-up of the fire situation:

1. Building Size Interior arrangement/access (stairs, halls, elevators) Construction type Age Condition - faults/weaknesses Value Compartmentation/separation Vertical-horizontal openings, shafts, channels Outside characteristics (hazards/controls) Concealed spaces/attic characteristics Exterior access Effect the fire has had on the structure (at this point) Time projection on continuing fire effect on building 2. Fire Size Extent (% of structure involved) Location Stage (inception ---flashover) Direction of travel (most dangerous)

280

Time of involvement Type and amount of material involved - structure/interior/finish/contents/everything Type and amount of material left to burn Product of combustion liberation (smoke and toxic gases)

3. Occupancy Specific occupancy Type-group (business, mercantile, public assembly, institutional, residential, hazardous, industrial, storage, school) Value characteristics associated with occupancy Fire load (size, nature) Status (open, closed, occupied, vacant, abandoned, under construction) Occupancy associated characteristics/hazards Type of contents (based on occupancy) Time - as it affects occupancy use Property conservation profile/susceptibility of contents to damage/need for salvage 4. Life Hazard Number of occupants Location of occupants (in relation to the fire) Condition of occupants (by virtue of fire exposure) Incapacity's of occupants Commitment required for search and rescue (men, equipment, and Command) Fire control required for search and rescue Needs for EMS Time estimate of fire effect on victims Exposure of spectators/control of spectators Hazards to fire personnel Access rescue forces have to victims Characteristics of escape routes/avenues of escape (type, safety, fire conditions, etc.) 5. Arrangement Access, arrangement, and distance of external exposure Combustibility of exposures Access, arrangement, and nature of internal exposures Severity and urgency of exposures (fire effect) Value of exposures Most dangerous direction - avenue of spread Time of estimate of fire effect on exposures (internal and external) Obstructions to operations Capability/limitations on apparatus movement and use 6. Resources Manpower and equipment on scene Manpower and equipment responding Manpower and equipment available in reserve Estimate of response time for men and equipment Condition of men and equipment Capability and willingness of personnel Capability of commanders Nature of command systems available to Command Number and location of hydrants Supplemental water sources Adequacy of water supply

281

Built-in private fire protection (sprinkler, standpipe, alarms) Outside agency resource and response time 7. Other Factors/Conditions Time of day/night Day of week Season Special hazards by virtue of holidays and special events Weather (wind, rain, heat, cold, humidity, visibility) Traffic conditions Social conditions (strike, riot, mob, rock festival)

282

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.50.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire ground Search & Rescue

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish procedures and guidelines for rescue operations in Fire Ground activities.

II. PROCEDURE

A. It is standard operating procedure to extend a primary search in all involved and exposed occupancies which can be entered. Command must structure initial operations around the completion of the primary search. Primary search means companies have quickly gone through all affected areas and verified the removal and/or safety of all occupants.

B. Time is the critical factor in the primary search process. Successful primary search operations must necessarily be extended quickly and during initial fire stages.

C. The rescue functions that follow lengthy fire control activities will be regarded tactically as presenting a "secondary search". Secondary search means that companies thoroughly search the interior of the fire area after initial fire control and ventilation activities have been completed. Secondary search should preferably be completed by different companies than those involved in primary search activities. Thoroughness, rather than time, is the critical factor in secondary search.

D. The completion of the primary search is reported utilizing a standard "PRIMARY COMPLETE, SECONDARY COMPLETE". It is the responsibility of Command to coordinate primary search assignments, secure completion reports from interior personnel and to transmit the "PRIMARY COMPLETE, SECONDARY COMPLETE" report to the Communications Center. The Communication Center will record the time of this report from Command.

E. The stage of the fire becomes a critical factor that effects the rescue approach developed by Command. The following items outline the basic Command approach to fire stages:

1. In nothing showing situations or in very minor fire cases that clearly pose no life hazard, Command must structure a rapid interior search and report "PRIMARY COMPLETE, SECONDARY COMPLETE". (The interior search for victims will also verify no fire.)

283

2. In smoke showing and working fire situations, fire control efforts must be extended simultaneously with rescue operations in order to gain entry and control interior access to complete primary search. In such cases, Command and operating companies must be aware the operation is in a rescue mode until primary search is complete, regardless of the fire control required. In working fire situations, primary search must be followed by a secondary search.

3. In cases of fully involved buildings or sections of buildings, immediate entry and primary search activities become impossible and survival of occupants is improbable. Command must initially report "fully involved conditions and I cannot report a "PRIMARY COMPLETE, SECONDARY COMPLETE." As quickly as fire control is achieved, Command must structure what is in effect a secondary search for victims.

F. Command and operating companies cannot depend upon reports from spectators to determine status of victims. Control forces should utilize reports as to the location, number, and condition of victims as supporting primary search efforts and must extend and complete a primary search wherever entry is possible.

G. Command must consider the following factors in developing a basic rescue size-up: 1. Number, location and condition of victims 2. Effect the fire has on the victims 3. Capability of the control forces to enter the building, remove/protect victims and control fire

H. Command must make the basic rescue decision:

1. Do we remove victims from fire? or 2. Do we remove fire from the victims?

In some cases, occupants are safer in their rooms than moving through contaminated hallways and interior areas. Such movement may also impede interior fire fighting.

I. Command must realistically evaluate the manpower required to actually remove victims and then treat their fire-affected bodies. In cases involving such multiple victims, Command must call for the timely response of adequate resources and quickly develop an organization that will both stabilize the fire and provide for the removal and treatment of the occupants.

J. Rescue efforts should be extended in the following order: 1. Most severely threatened 2. The largest number (groups) 3. The remainder of the fire area 4. The exposed areas

K. Command must make specific primary search assignments to companies to cover specific areas of large-complex occupancies and maintain ongoing control of such companies until the entire area is searched. When primary search personnel encounter and remove victims, Command must assign other personnel to continue to cover the interior positions vacated by those companies.

L. All initial attack efforts must be directed toward supporting rescue efforts and hose lines must be placed in a manner to control interior access, confine the fire, and protect avenues of escape. Hose line placement becomes a critical factor in these cases and Command as well as all operating

284

companies must realize that the operation is in a rescue mode. It may be necessary to operate in a manner that writes-off the structure in order to buy rescue time.

M. Normal means of interior access (stairs, halls, interior public areas, etc.) should be utilized to remove victims whenever possible. Secondary means of rescue (platforms, ladders, fire escapes, helicopters, life nets, etc.) must be utilized in their order of effectiveness.

N. Command must structure the treatment of victims after removal. Multiple victims should be removed to one location for more effective treatment.

O. Once the primary search has been completed and a PRIMARY COMPLETE, SECONDARY COMPLETE transmitted, Command must maintain control of access to the fire area. Beware of occupants (and others) re-entering the building.

P. The most urgent reason for calling additional alarms is for the purpose of covering life safety; Command must develop a realistic (and pessimistic) rescue size-up as early as possible.

Q. The term "Search & Rescue" should be used when structuring a primary search over the radio; "PRIMARY COMPLETE, SECONDARY COMPLETE" should be used only as a completion report.

285

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.50.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Fighting Strategy & Tactics

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish guidelines that attempt to stabilize fire conditions by extending WHEREVER POSSIBLE an aggressive well-placed and adequate offensive interior fire attack effort and to support that aggressive attack with whatever resource and action is required to reduce fire extension and to bring the fire under control.

II. PROCEDURE

A. A critical Command decision (both initial and on-going) relates to the offensive/defensive mode of the situation:

1. Offensive Strategy - Interior attack and related support directed toward quickly bringing the fire under control. 2. Defensive Strategy - Exterior attack directed to first reduce fire extension and then bring the fire under control.

B. Command must define offensive/defensive mode based upon:

1. Fire extent 2. Structural conditions 3. Entry capability 4. Ventilation needs 5. Rescue ability of occupants 6. Resources

C. Basic Offensive Plan:

1. Take Command 2. First line - fast, aggressive interior attack 3. Do primary search 4. Provide support activities 5. Second line - back up first/cover rear 6. Pump water 7. Quickly evaluate success and react

286

D. Basic defensive plan:

1. Take Command 2. Evaluate fire spread/write off lost property 3. Identify key tactical positions 4. Prioritize fire streams 5. Provide big, well placed streams 6. Pump water 7. Quick determination on additional resource 8. Surround and drown

E. Many times offensive/defensive conditions are clear cut and Command can quickly develop a decision that relates to that mode. In other cases, the situation is marginal and Command must initiate an offensive interior attack, while setting up defensive positions on the exterior. The effect of the interior attack must be evaluated and the attack abandoned if necessary. Mode changes can develop almost instantly or can take virtually all night. Command must be aware and responsive to such mode changes.

F. Command must consider the most dangerous direction and avenues of fire extension particularly as it affects rescue activities, confinement efforts, and exposure protection. Resources must then be allocated based upon this fire spread evaluation.

G. In some cases, the most effective tactical analysis involves an evaluation of what is not burning rather than what is actually on fire. The unburned portion represents where the fire is going and should establish the framework for fire control requirements.

H. Offensive fires should be fought from the INTERIOR-UNBURNED SIDE (interior capability is the principal offensive strategy factor).

I. Initial attack efforts must be directed toward supporting primary search; first attack must go between the victims and the fire and protect avenues of escape.

J. Determine fire location and extent before starting fire operations (as far as possible). Do not operate fire streams into smoke.

K. Command cannot lose sight of the very simple and basic fire ground reality that at some point the fire forces must engage the fire and fight. Command must structure whatever operations are required to PUT WATER ON THE FIRE. The rescue/ fire control/ extension/ exposure problem is solved in the majority of cases by a fast, strong, well-placed attack.

L. Effective fire control requires that water is applied directly on the fire or directly into the fire area. (Fire streams can be bounced off roofs and operated into smoke all night and the fire will progress until it runs out of fuel.) Command must establish an attack plan that overpowers the fire with actual water application.

M. Early identification and response to concealed-space fires can save the structure. Officers who hesitate to open up because they do not want to beat up the building many times must attempt an hour later to hold the fire to the neighborhood of origin.

N. Command must consider 7 sides of the fire: front, back, two sides, top, bottom, and interior.

287

O. Where the fire is sizable, establish a safe and remote position to begin operations from, then move in on the fire.

P. The basic variables relating to attack operations involve:

1. Location/ position of attack 2. Size of attack 3. Support functions

Command develops an effective attack through the management of these factors.

Q. Time becomes an extremely important factor with regard to attack operations. The bigger the attack, the longer it takes to get it going; the more interior the attack is positioned, the longer it takes. Command must balance and integrate attack size and position with fire conditions and his resources.

R. Lacking direction, when fire is showing, companies will many times lay hose and put water on the fire utilizing the fastest, shortest, most direct route. This process is called the "candle moth" syndrome - everyone wants to go to the flame.

S. Attack from the burned side generally will drive the fire, smoke and heat back into the building and the interior fire control forces out of the building.

T. The fastest place to put water on the fire is generally from the outside at the point where the fire is burning out of the building - THE VERY WORST APPLICATION POINT MOST OF THE TIME.

U. When fire is burning out of a building and not affecting exposures, let it burn out, and extend an interior attack from the UNBURNED SIDE. It is usually venting in the proper direction. It requires discipline on the part of control forces to do so and not submit to "candle moth" temptations.

V. Command must develop a fire control plan of attack that first stops the forward progress of the fire and then brings the fire under control. In large complex fires, Command will not immediately have adequate resources to accomplish all of the attack needs. At this point, Command must prioritize attack efforts, act as a resource allocator and determine the response he will eventually require. Accurate forecasting of conditions by Command becomes critical during this initial evaluation process.

W. Command must develop critical decisions that relate to cut-off points and must approach fire spread determinations with pessimism. It takes a certain amount of time to "get water" and the fire continues to burn while the attack gets set up. Command must consider where the fire will be when attack efforts are ready to actually go into operation; if it is misjudged, the fire may burn past the attack/shut-off position. Do not play "catch-up" with a fire that is burning through a building; project your set-up time, write-off lost property and get ahead of the fire. Set up adequately and overpower it.

X. Do not put water into burned property, particularly where there is unburned property left to burn. Many fire streams are directed into property that is already lost, many times at the expense of exposed unburned property. Write-off property that is already lost and go on to protect exposed property based on the most dangerous direction of spread. Do not continue to operate in positions that are essentially lost.

288

Y. The decision to operate in a defensive mode indicates that the offensive attack strategy has been abandoned for reasons of personnel safety, and the involved structure has been conceded as lost (written off).

Z. The announcement of a change to a defensive mode will be made and all personnel will withdraw from the structure and maintain a safe perimeter. Captains will account for the safety of all personnel.

AA. Interior lines will be withdrawn (or abandoned if necessary) and repositioned when changing to a defensive mode. Hand lines that have been withdrawn can be used to protect exposures.

BB. All exposures, both immediate and anticipated, must be identified and covered.

CC. The first priority in defensive operations is to protect exposures.

DD. The second priority may be to knock down the main body of fire. This may assist in the protection of exposures but does not replace it as a first priority.

EE. Master streams are generally the most effective tactic to be employed in defensive operations. For tactical purposes, a standard master stream flow of 750 GPM should be the guideline. Adjustments may be made upward or downward from this figure but it is very significant in the initial deployment of master streams.

FF. When the exposure is severe and water is; limited, the most effective tactic is to put the water on the exposure.

GG. Once exposure coverage is established, attention may be directed to knocking down the main body of fire and thermal-column cooling. The same principles of large volume procedures should be employed.

HH. The completion of bringing the fire under control is reported utilizing the standard radio reporting term: "CONTROL TIME". It is the responsibility of Command to transmit this report to the Communications Center. This time will be recorded by the Communications Center.

II. CONTROL TIME means the forward progress of the fire has been stopped and the remaining fire can be extinguished with the on-scene resources; it does not mean the fire is completely out.

289

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.50.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Stream Management

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish guidelines for fire stream management in fire ground operations.

II. PROCEDURE

A. Beware of hose lines that have been operated in the same place for long periods of time. Fire conditions change during the course of fire operations (most things will only burn for a limited time) and the effect of hose line operations must be continually evaluated. If the operation of such lines becomes ineffective, move, adjust, or re deploy them.

B. Beware of the limitations of operating nozzles through holes. The mobility of such streams is necessarily limited and it is generally difficult to evaluate the effectiveness of such streams. Sometimes you must breach walls, floors, etc. to operate - realize the limitations of such situations.

C. Consider that hose lines pump as much air as they pump water (particularly fog streams). Think of them as fans when making line placement judgments and use the fan characteristics in a manner that provides for confinement and reduces loss. When entering basement fire(s) do not open nozzles until you can see and are near the fire - do not use hand-held fog streams in basement fires that provide no exit for exhaust of smoke and heated gases.

D. If you commit attack crews to inside operations, DO NOT OPERATE EXTERIOR STREAMS INTO THE SAME BUILDING - PARTICULARLY LADDER PIPES. Do not combine interior and exterior attacks in the same building. It may be necessary to coordinate pulling crews out of the building while an exterior heavy streams knockdown is made. Know when to shut down nozzles - many times continuing operations of large streams prevents entry and complete extinguishment.

E. Do not operate fire streams into smoke; fire location must be determined before water can be effectively applied.

F. If you use an exterior stream, use a big one. Straight bore tips provide better penetration for heavy streams. Fog streams will absorb a larger amount of heat providing that the area is reasonably confined.

290

G. Maintain control of key hydrants; be certain that pumpers are assigned to such key hydrants to provide most effective fire stream operation.

H. Have attack lines ready during forcible entry operations. Attack crews should be fully protected and supervised before forcible entry is effected.

I. Company officers must assume responsibility for the effectiveness of their fire streams. Such officers must maintain an awareness of where fire streams are going and their effect and report the general operational characteristics back to Command.

J. Ladder pipe and snorkel type operations can be valuable in cooling the thermal column, protecting exposures, and cutting off fires that are progressing through a structure. Care must be taken to insure that thermal column cooling is done correctly and does not interfere with the ventilation process. Command must recognize that, in effect, a portion of the structure may have to be written-off, due to the set-up time. This may be the case in the transition from an offensive mode (interior operation) to a defensive mode (exterior operation) and when the interior attack team(s) are withdrawn prematurely.

K. Ground crews should be advised before ladder pipes to into operation.

L. Do not apply water to the outside of a roof and think you are extinguishing the fire. Such water application may offer effective exposure protection; but, if part of the roof is intact, it will shed water just like it was built to do and will prevent water from reaching the seat of the fire. This is particularly true of ladder pipe operations.

M. DO NOT OPERATE FIRE STREAMS DOWN VENTILATION HOLES DURING OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS.

291

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.60.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Ground Support Activities

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish guidelines for Fire Ground Command support activities.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Fire Ground Command support activities are those functions that assist active fire control and rescue operations. They generally include forcible entry, ventilation and the provision of access. Most confusion on the fire ground is the result of lack of such support functions and does not generally relate to a breakdown of basic water application activities. Command must cause these support functions to be completed in a timely and effective manner - the fire fighter must support the end of the nozzle. We lose most often because of a lack of support, not a lack of water.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Forcible Entry

1. Forcible entry involves a trade-off in time versus damage; the faster you force - the more damage you do. The more critical the fire, the less important forcible entry damage becomes and vice versa. If the fire is progressing and you must go in and attack from the unburned side, don't waste time trying to pick the lock – break down the door. The bottom line here is that the amount of damage that the Fire Department does when entering, ventilating, etc. a structure should be proportional to the damage the fire is causing.

2. Rapid entry by the Fire Department can determine whether or not the fire can be cut off and extinguished before it has time to extend past the room of origin. Entry and access-oriented activities generally involve pulling ceilings, opening up concealed spaces and voids, and the activities required to get fire attack efforts in to operate on hidden fire. Such operations beat up the fire building and must be done in a timely, well-placed manner. In such cases, do not hesitate to open up: if you detect that fire inside of a concealed space, get ahead of the fire, open up the void space, cut the fire’s path of travel off, and extinguish it.

3. Beware of the premature opening of doors, holes, access efforts, etc. before lines are placed and crews are ready to go inside. Good timing requires effective coordination and communication between Engine and Ladder companies.

B. Ventilation

1. You ventilate a building principally for two reasons: 292

a. To prevent mushrooming b. To gain (and maintain) entry

2. Vertical ventilation as close to directly over the fire as possible is the most effective form of ventilation in working interior fire situations.

3. The timing of ventilation becomes extremely important and must be coordinated with fire attack activities; ventilation should be provided in advance of attack lines. Portable radio communications between ventilation crews and attack crews facilitate this interaction.

4. Fire will naturally burn out of holes in roofs, regardless if you cut the hole or if the fire does. If the fire burns through the roof (defensive ventilation) it will generally do so in the best location - directly over the fire. If ladder companies cut the roof they must locate ventilation holes in a manner that will support rescue activities and fire confinement. If vent holes are cut in the wrong places, the fire will naturally be channeled to them and expand loss.

5. When you cut a hole in a roof, cut one large enough to be effective. one large hole is more effective than several small holes.

6. We ventilate to alter interior conditions. The best operating position to determine if a building requires ventilation and the location and timing of that ventilation is the inside sector. Interior and roof forces must communicate in order to coordinate the ventilation effort effectively.

7. Do not operate hose line, particularly ladder pipes, down ventilation holes. Be cautious of hose lines to roofs - "candle moth" syndrome tends to overpower personnel operating on roofs when fire and smoke come out vent holes. Operate roof lines only for the purpose of protecting personnel and external exposures.

8. Effective topside ventilation will tend to keep roofs intact longer and roof condition necessarily becomes extremely important to ventilation activities. If crews cannot get on the roof to ventilate because of advanced fire, Command had best begin to react in marginal offensive/defensive terms. Axiom: It is better to abandon the building a bit too soon rather than a bit too late.

293

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.60.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Additional Resource Management

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a standard procedure for additional resource management in Incident Command activities.

II. PROCEDURE

A. The decisions required to provide for adequate resources are an important factor in effective fire forecasting. Command must balance the tactical problems with the resources required to control those problems and stay ahead of the situation. Beware of "Crisis Management": situation grows at a rate faster than the response rate to that situation; Command ends up with an out of control situation and inadequate resource to control it.

B. Many times Command will reach a point where one begins to debate with oneself to call another alarm or not, in such cases call for it. Always opt for the extra in the "Should I or shouldn't I" stage. If the extra resource is not needed, it can easily be put back in service.

C. In most cases, Command should utilize the greater alarm mechanism. It is the quickest, provides for move-ups, and indicates in a standard manner that the fire problem is in an expanded mode. Command should resist the temptation to dribble in help in a piecemeal fashion. Additional alarms should be struck sequentially.

D. It is the continuing responsibility and function of Command to determine the resource required to control the situation and to provide for the timely call for any additional resource required. The early call for additional resource will tend to consistently save the day.

E. Command must be aware of both the capability and response time of additional resource and effectively integrate these facts into calls for additional resource.

F. Some tactical situations move slowly, while some move very quickly. Command must call for additional resources at a rate that stays ahead of the fire. Some situations require the categorical call for additional alarms upon knowledge of particular characteristics or conditions; in other situations, Command will initiate some fire control activities, ask for reports and, based upon receipt of bad news, will call for more alarms.

G. As Command calls for additional resources, one must build a corresponding command organization-structure to manage that additional resource. Command cannot encounter a big fire

294

situation, call additional alarms and then expect to effectively manage that additional resource in a single alarm command mode.

H. Guidelines for Calling for Additional Alarms.

1. An actual or potential fire situation exists and the life hazard exceeds the rescue capabilities of initial alarm companies. 2. The number, location, and condition of actual victims exceeds the rescue/removal/treatment capabilities of companies. 3. An actual or potential fire situation exists and the property protection demand (both internal and external) exceeds the fire control capabilities of initial alarm companies. 4. Fire conditions become more severe or the situation deteriorates significantly. 5. All companies have been committed and the fire is not controlled. 6. Forces are depleted due to exhaustion or injury or are trapped or missing: Command must forecast the effect the fire will have on personnel and provide for the support of such personnel in advance. 7. Command runs out of some resource (firefighters, apparatus, water, equipment, command, etc.). 8. There is evidence of significant fire but companies are unable to determine location and extent. 9. The commitment of companies is not effective. 10. Companies cannot effectively perform early salvage operations. 11. Situation becomes so widespread/complex that Command can no longer effectively "cope"; the situation requires larger command organization. 12. Command instinctively feels the need to summon additional resources (don't disregard fire ground hunches).

295

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 24.60.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Property Conservation / Salvage

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish standard guidelines for Fire Ground Command property conservation-salvage.

II. PROCEDURE

A. It is standard procedure to commit whatever fire ground resources is required to reduce property loss to an absolute minimum. The activities that relate to effective property conservation require the same early and on-going command functions and aggressive action as both Rescue and Fire Control. All members are expected to perform in a manner that continually reduces loss during fire operations.

B. When the fire is out, shut down the fire streams. Early recognition that the forward progress of the fire has been stopped is an important element in reducing loss. The earlier the salvage operations begin, the smaller the loss.

C. When basic fire control has been achieved, Command must commit and direct companies into "stop loss" activities; such activities generally include: 1. Evaluating damage to overall fire area. 2. Evaluating the salvage value of various areas. 3. Evaluate the firefighters and equipment that will be required. 4. Committing the required companies to salvage functions. 5. Reducing hose lines from fire control functions to salvage functions.

D. In cases where there is an overlapping need for both fire control and salvage to be performed simultaneously and where initial alarm companies are involved in firefighting while salvage remains undone, call for additional alarms and commit greater alarm companies to salvage functions.

E. Commit the same overall and sector command resource to property conservation activities as were devoted to rescue and fire control.

F. Be aware that personnel involved in rescue and fire control operations are generally fatigued and have reached their adrenaline-max by the time property conservation functions must be completed; this can result in sloppy work and many injuries. Evaluate the condition of personnel and replace with fresh troops if needed.

296

G. Prompt fire ground lighting, both interior and exterior, reduces fire loss and increases safety.

H. The provision of salvage functions must be integrated into the cause determination phase. When fire control becomes stable, back fire control companies out and let fire investigators develop a plan when applicable. Beware of personnel who want to quickly shovel out the interior and go home; they will generally shovel out the evidence with the debris.

I. Much of the property conservation profile of a building can be identified during pre-fire planning activities. Command must consider this profile in developing and extending a plan of attack.

J. Most fire personnel are more attracted to active fire attack functions than to the less active operations that relate to property conservation. Simply, most firefighters would rather operate nozzles than throw salvage covers. Command must integrate this awareness into specific company assignments and structure effective follow-up to insure minimum property loss. (Such fire attack inclinations are healthy, beware of firefighters who would rather throw covers than operate hose lines.)

297

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: April 29, 2009

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Special Operations Division

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to formally establish both written and operational policies concerning preparation and response to incidents involving hazardous materials and/or technical rescue. The concept of forming a specific division to support and focus on these specialized issues is becoming commonplace in the fire service, and has become necessary in this department. Within the City of Gastonia, the Fire Department is assigned responsibility for both hazardous materials mitigation and technical rescue.

II. POLICY

A. The Special Operations Division will consist of 3 companies, with a total of 39 Operations personnel (13 per shift) assigned. Administratively, the Division will be under the direction of the Deputy Chief, who will provide direction and oversight. A three-member Oversight Committee will coordinate routine activities within the Division. This Committee will consist of the Deputy Chief, designated Hazardous Materials Section Battalion Chief and a designated Technical Rescue Section Battalion Chief. The Fire Chief and the Deputy Chief will select Staff Officers assigned to these responsibilities. The Deputy Chief and the Oversight Committee will review all candidates for assignment to the Special Operations Division before being assigned to the Division.

B. At the present time, there may not be enough members with the required certifications to staff all planned positions in both the hazardous materials and technical rescue areas. For this reason, all members assigned to the Special Operations Division will have one-year to complete all required basic and advanced level certifications providing their availability. Any member failing to complete the required certifications by this date will be reassigned out of the Division.

C. Once assigned to the Special Operations Division, each member will pursue a specific ‘technician’ track in either the Hazardous Materials or Technical Rescue area. This approach will insure that properly trained and certified personnel are available to staff the specialty units that comprise the Division. For example, a member obtains the basic requirements as noted below and is assigned to the Special Operations Division. The Oversight Committee reviews the needs of the Division, considers the current abilities of the member, and assigns the member to a specific track within the Division (i.e. Hazardous Materials or Technical Rescue).

298

D. The Special Operations Division Oversight Committee has the ability to remove any member who does not meet the needs of the Division. Each Battalion Chief (Shift) will have the ability to suggest prospective members to the Oversight Committee for review.

III. TRAINING GUIDELINES

A. The Hazardous Material Response Guidelines and the Technical Rescue Guidelines will be updated and reviewed every three (3) years in order to maintain the highest levels of training, skills, and expertise.

1. The basic requirements for eligibility and placement into the Special Operations Division are as follows: a. North Carolina Certification (OSFM)- Hazardous Material Technician (2-week course). b. North Carolina Certification (OSFM)- Emergency Rescue Technician c. National Fire Academy- Chemistry of Hazardous Materials (2-week course) or Chemistry of Hazardous Materials (Gaston College- this course will be approved by the Oversight Committee).

2. Requirements beyond the initial basic requirements will involve areas such as: a. Specialized haz-mat schools (1) Examples: (a) Pueblo- Rail and highway response (b) Texas A & M "Technician School" (c) Georgia Tech (d) National Fire Academy Courses b. Specialized Rescue Schools (1) Examples: (a) Rigging For Rescue (b) CMC Technical Rescue (c) State level Rescue Schools

IV. RESPONSE GUIDELINES

A. Hazardous Material Response will be in accordance with the Haz-Mat Operating Guidelines- Volume 7. Technical Rescue Response will be in accordance with the Technical Rescue Guidelines.

B. During all Special Operations incidents the Special Operations Chiefs will be notified and if necessary, dispatched if the incident requires unusually or technical assistance at the command level to assist the Incident Commander.

299

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Search / Missing Persons

I. PURPOSE

A. To provide a standard operating guideline for the search for and location of missing persons within the City of Gastonia in conjunction with the City of Gastonia Police Department.

II. AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION

A. The Gastonia City Council as a governing body has designated the City of Gastonia Fire Department as the authority having jurisdiction for all rescue functions within the City of Gastonia.

III. CONCEPT OF OPERATION

A. The early notification by concerned citizens of known or suspected lost persons. B. The prompt execution of the local SAR plans and standard operating procedures by first arriving fire department members or police officers. C. The rapid identification of the need for essential operation personnel and equipment not available within the fire department, the prompt request for such resources, and the prompt provision for those resources by the private sector, LOCAL, STATE, and FEDERAL agencies. D. The continuous dissemination of information to the media and the public (PIO officer, Fire or Police) of all factual information concerning the SAR operation.

IV. GLOSSARY, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS

A. AFRCC- US Air Force Rescue Coordination Center, Scott Air Force Base, Ill. B. NCSRDA- North Carolina Search and Rescue Dog Association, Inc> C. SAR- Search and Rescue, addresses the search function. D. SAR Coordinating Agency- Authority having jurisdiction. At the city level, this will be the City of Gastonia Fire Department in conjunction with the City of Gastonia Police Department. E. SAR Incident Commander- The person representing the City of Gastonia Police Department and the person representing the City of Gastonia Fire Department. This should be a unified command structure. F. IRT- Initial Response Team- Initial Response Team to a lost person(s) report shall consist of a City of Gastonia Police Officer and the first due fire company from the City of Gastonia Fire Department.

V. RESPONSIBILITIES

300

A. City of Gastonia Fire Department 1. Responsible for overall coordination of SAR missions within the City of Gastonia. 2. To identify SAR trained resources. 3. To assure resources necessary to maintain effective on going SAR operations.

B. City of Gastonia Police Department 1. City of Gastonia Police Department is the police agency having jurisdiction, and shall be responsible for all investigation aspects and entering the missing person’s reports with the N.C. Missing Persons Center for any SAR mission within the city.

C. Gaston County U-SAR Team 1. Responsible for developing and maintaining trained, properly equipped, personnel for SAR operations and other departments.

D. Rescue Squads within the City of Gastonia 1. To provide trained resources to maintain effective on going SAR operations.

VI. DIRECTION AND CONTROL

A. General 1. Direction and Control will be provided through the (NIMS) Incident Command System and SOGs as adopted by the G.F.D. 2. SAR operations, which traverse from one political subdivision to another, will require the use of a Unified Command Structure.

B. The SAR Incident Commander and Deputy Incident Commanders are responsible for SAR operations involving all ground, air and water areas within the City of Gastonia.

C. County Government. Functions as a SAR supporting agency. County Government assists local government in planning, training and obtaining resources.

D. State Government. Same as county government.

VII. CONTINUITY OF GOVERNMENT

A. The line of succession will be: 1. The City of Gastonia Fire Chief or designee. 2. Approved SAR Incident Commanders.

VIII. ADMINISTRATION AND LOGISTICS

A. A SAR Resource Manual will be maintained by the City of Gastonia Fire Department.

B. Records and forms for SAR purposes will be acquired and maintained by the City of Gastonia Fire Department. When possible, forms developed for use with the Incident Command System will be used for SAR documentation.

IX. PLAN DEVELOPMENT AND MAINTENANCE

A. Annually the SAR plan should be reviewed, along with the city’s SAR missions, SAR hazard analysis, resource lists, and make any recommendations or revisions as deemed necessary.

301

B. Emergency response personnel which participate in the city SAR effort are responsible for the development and maintenance of their departmental Sop’s, mutual aids agreements, equipment inventories and personnel rosters. They should assist in the review of the SAR plans.

X. AUTHORITIES AND REFERENCES

A. The City of Gastonia city councils’ directive (April 2000) establishing the City of Gastonia Fire Department as the “Authority Having Jurisdiction for all Rescue Operations inside the city limits.”

B. The Gaston County Emergency Management Search and Rescue (SAR) Plan.

XI. APPROVAL

This Search and Rescue Plan is approved by the undersigned.

Signature______Chief, City of Gastonia Fire Dept. Date

Signature______Chief, City of Gastonia Police Dept. Date

Signature______Director, Gaston County E.M.S. Date

Signature______Mayor, City of Gastonia Date

Signature______Mayor Pro-Tem, City of Gastonia Date

Signature______Councilman, City of Gastonia Date

Signature______Councilman, City of Gastonia Date

Signature______Councilman, City of Gastonia Date

Signature______Councilman, City of Gastonia Date

Signature______Councilman, City of Gastonia Date

302

XII. DISTRIBUTION

A. Gaston County Communication Center B. City of Gastonia Police Dept. C. Gaston County E.M.S. Director D. Gaston County Emergency Management Director E. Gaston County USAR Team F. Gaston County Rescue Squads G. County Fire Depts.

XIII. ATTACHMENTS

A. SAR ORGANIZATIONAL CHART B. SEARCH AND RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES C. EOC COMMUNICATIONS LOST SUBJECT REPORT FORM D. SAR INCIDENT COMMAND POSITIONS CHECK LISTS E. SEARCH TEAM CHECKLIST

SEARCH AND RESCUE STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

I. FIRST NOTICE

A. Although some “lost persons reports” require a little different response, in general, the following guidelines and procedures are to be used. 1. The first report of a lost person, to any agency, will be by notification from the County Communications Center. 2. The Communications Center will dispatch the INITIAL RESPONSE TEAM for SAR incidents inside the City of Gastonia. 3. The INITIAL RESPONSE TEAM (IRT) will respond to the scene and conduct an initial investigation and interview. a. The (IRT) for the City of Gastonia will consist of a City of Gastonia police officer, and the first due fire company for the affected area. The City of Gastonia police officer may elect to also have additional police officers or K-9 units respond.

4. The (IRT) will have the authority to initiate a SEARCH MISSION and callout procedures. a. The (IRT), based on the information given, weather conditions, time of day, etc, may request additional resources before they arrive.

II. RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE (IRT) PERSONNEL

A. First Arriving Fire Officer/Battalion Chief/Police Officer 1. Serve as Incident Commander(s) 2. Start filling out ICS 201 form.. 3. Interview reporting party or persons. Police and Fire together. 4. Complete Lost Persons Questionnaire. 5. Determine the need for additional SAR resources 6. Assign a Mission Name. 7. Locate and mark point(s) last scene on map. 8. Document all decisions and major actions on ICS form 201.

303

9. Document all requested resources and arrival times. 10. Assign personnel to the Incident Management Team.. 11. Determine types of searches to be done (HASTY, ROAD PATROLS, TRACKERS) and where to use them.(PLS, trails, etc). B. City of Gastonia Police Department 1. Conduct interviews and investigations. 2. Provide manpower, K-9s, etc. 3. Assist in gathering searching and planning data, the urgency of the mission, and determining the need for additional resources.

III. SEARCH MISSION ORGANIZATION

A. All SAR missions will operate under Incident Command Systems.

B. The I/C and Deputy I/Cs will appoint persons responsible for assuring the success of the mission and the proper functioning of their sections or units. These persons will be appointed according to the capabilities within areas of their expertise.

C. The Command and General Staff will only be expanded as needed.

D. The major functions that will be assured on all search missions area as follows:

1. Incident Commanders-The I/C and Deputy I/Cs have overall responsibilities for the mission from start to finish and has the authority to facilitate all functions of the mission to assure effectiveness and efficiency. They are responsible for media relations, public relations, and family relations. Other responsibilities include assuring agency cooperation and coordination and the safety of all persons connected with the mission..

2. Command Staff-appointed as needed by the I/C. consists of the Information Officer, Safety Officer, and the Liaison Officer. They will be delegated the authority from the I/C to perform their functions in their areas.

3. Operations Section-The I/C and Deputy I/Cs may appoint an Operations Chief to assure proper search operations, to include land, water, and air operations. They will be delegated the authority from the I/C to perform their functions in their areas.

4. Planning Section-The I/C and Deputy I/Cs may appoint a Plans Chief to assure proper planning for the mission. This section is responsible for supplying up-to-date situation reports, coordination and allocation of the resources, maintaining all proper documentation, and obtaining any needed specialists.

5. Logistics Section- The I/C and Deputy I/Cs may appoint a Logistics Chief to assure proper communication and logistical support for the mission. This section is responsible for all supplies and equipment needed, transportation functions, ground support, food, and communications for the mission.

6. Finance / Administration- Section-The I/C may appoint a Finance Chief to assure the proper financial support for the mission. This section is directly responsible for obtaining all finances, signing lease agreements, wage and hour requirements, insurance claims, investigating all accidents and loss of equipment. A total financial report is required for all missions.

304

E. The I/C and Deputy I/Cs must pay special attention to the following mission aspects because research has found these to be constant problems on search missions.

1. Ambiguity of authority (command and control). 2. Poor use of specialized resources. 3. Assurance of adequate and proper communications. 4. Poor planning and resource coordination. 5. Inadequate logistical support 6. Unplanned medical relations. 7. Poor management practices.

IV. RESOURCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Persons responding from any organization, or as an individual, will not be accepted as part of the search mission team unless they are:

1. Physically capable 2. Mentally capable 3. Properly prepared with the proper clothing, supplies, and equipment indicated by the terrain and environment.

V. CONDITIONS OF LOST PERSONS

A. The following procedures will be used when the lost subject is found.

1. CODE A-100 will be transmitted to the Command Post if the subject is mobile and little or no medical care is needed.

2. CODE A-200 will be transmitted to the Command Post if the lost subject is NOT mobile, and a rescue operation is needed. Subject/s medical condition will be transmitted on order from the Command Post.

3. CODE A-300 will be transmitted to the Command Post if the Subject is DOA. The immediate area will be secured to await arrival of proper authorities.

VI. PRE-SEARCH CONSIDERATIONS

A. Set up Staging Area and assign Staging Officer

B. Assign Planning Officer 1. Obtain maps of area – Topographic / Road 2. Set up Planning status board 3. Establish UTM coordinates of LPS and Command Post 4. Obtain present weather conditions 5. Project 12 hour weather conditions

NOTE: It is our duty and responsibility to accept any resources which will offer additional manpower, equipment, or search expertise for the search mission; however, any organization, team, unit or individual which becomes involved in the search mission will receive duty stations and duty assignments from unit, section, and command staff through the authority of the I/Cs. No one will be allowed to conduct any part of the search mission that is not planned in the Incident Action Plan or approved by the I/Cs.

305

C. Assign Resource Officer

1. Set-up Resource Board and with supplies 2. Complete Staging and Resources Forms

D. Assure Command has established Public Information Officer

1. Prepare News Media Release with photographs 2. Establish News Media Staging Area

E. Dispatch assistance from Mutual Aid List

1. Type of searches needed 2. Type of equipment or special equipment needed 3. Location of Staging Area 4. Type of terrain

F. Establish Communications Officer

1. Establish communications frequencies 2. Establish Major Events Logs

G. Secure Command Area-utilize local police

H. Request commensary assistance –Red Cross/ Local Churches

VII. INITIAL SEARCH CONSIDERATIONS: PLANNING

A. Determine search urgency-refer to Search Urgency Form B. Determine missing person profile-refer to missing Person Profile Form C. Determine Probable Search Area (POA) D. Divide probable search area into segments E. Prioritize search segments F. Determine Circumstances of Loss G. Identify Incident Objectives (Complete Incident Objectives Form) H. Evaluate need for specialized teams or equipment

1. Confined Space Rescue 2. High Angle Rescue 3. Night Vision Equipment 4. Infra-Red Equipment 5. Helicopters/ Helicopters with Forward Looking Infrared (FLIR) 6. Special Dog Teams

I. Estimate Probability of Detection & Success (POD & POS)

J. Determine type of search team need for each segments

1. Type I- Hasty Search (Speed) 2. Type II- Efficiency Search 3. Type III-Thoroughness Search

306

4. Search Dog Team

VIII. UTILIZE PASSIVE SEARCH TACTICS

A. Confinement considerations:

1. Trail Blocks 2. Road Blocks 3. Lookouts 4. Patrols(Bike, Foot, Four Wheeler, Horse) 5. Track Traps 6. String Lines

B. Attraction considerations

1. Sirens 2. PA Systems 3. Strobes 4. Horns 5. Yelling 6. Whistles 7. Flares 8. Lights

IX. UTILIZE ACTIVE SEARCH TACTICS

A. Type I/ Hasty- Fast initial response of well trained, self sufficient, and very mobile searches that check areas most likely to produce clues or the subject the soonest. B. Type II/ Efficient- Relatively fast, systematic search of high probability segments of the search area that produce high probabilities of detection (POD) per search hour of effort (shown to achieve a POD of approximately 50%) C. Type III/ Thorough- Slow, highly systematic search using the most thorough techniques to provide the highest probability of detection (POD) possible (shown to achieve a POD of approximately 75%) D. Dog Teams E. Aircraft F. All-terrain Vehicles (ATV) G. Horse Mounted Teams H. Four-wheel Drive Vehicles I. Bike Teams

X. TEAM BRIEFING CHECKLIST

A. Provide written Description and Track Information Form B. Team properly equipped: 1. Navigation Equipment 2. Map of Area 3. Water 4. 24 Hour Pack (if necessary) 5. Communications C. Team Leader identified D. Instruct team to maintain pace count and bearings

307

E. Team members placed on Incident Status Board F. Review Incident Action Plan G. Review Situation Status and Prediction H. Specify team objectives and strategies I. Tactical assignments with explicit instructions J. Hazards- type and locations K. Weather- present and forecasted L. Specific equipment needs M. Communications details: 1. Frequencies to be used 2. Designators and codes 3. Contact persons and times 4. What to do if communications problems arise 5. Emergency communications N. Transportation O. Reporting locations and times P. How to deal with news media and family Q. Where to be at what time R. Debriefing instructions: 6. Where 7. With whom 8. What information will be expected, needed, and required 9. What form should the debrief be in: Oral, Written, Sketches, Maps

XI. TEAM DEBRIEFING CHECKLIST

A. Complete Debriefing Form B. Explicit description of area covered and activities conducted C. Probability of detection (POD) percentage D. Location of any clues, regardless of how insignificant (use of maps and sketches to document) E. Specific difficulties encountered F. Personnel injuries G. Loss of equipment H. Hazards located (be specific to location, use UTM coordinates if possible) I. Suggestions, recommendations and ideas

XII. SUSPENDING THE SEARCH MISSION

A. Missions may be suspended due to weather, safety of searchers, lost person located, or unresolved clues. If the lost person has not been found, the search may be suspended to a Limited Continuous Search.

308

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.20.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Rope Rescue

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to establish Fire Department policy and procedure for responses to incidents involving rope rescue. As with any operational guideline, these are intended to be general in nature, and are specifically designed to allow the incident commander the latitude to make changes if the needs of the situation dictate. In general however, operational guidelines should always be followed unless compelling reasons force a modification.

B. Emergency operational guidelines established by this department are designed to assist with the placement of apparatus and assignment of tactical duties and areas of operation. Thus, this guideline is intended to work in concert with the Department’s Incident Command System (ICS).

II. INTRODUCTION

A. The following Standard Operating Procedures are established to provide initial responding fire companies and the rescue co. guidelines to follow in the event of an incident requiring rope rescue. This will aid in minimizing risk to both fire personnel and victims.

1. DEFINITION a. Rope Rescue is the providing of aid to those in danger of injury or death in an environment where the use of ropes and other related equipment is necessary to perform the rescue safely and successfully. Rope rescue is sometimes called technical rescue, and certain aspects of it are also sometimes called high angle rescue or vertical rescue.

b. Awareness Level- Represents the minimum capability of a responder who, in the course of their duties, could be called upon to respond to, or could be the first on the scene of a rope rescue incident.

c. Operation Level- represents the capability of hazard recognition, equipment use, and techniques necessary to safely and effectively support and participate in a rope rescue.

d. Technician Level- represents the capability of hazard recognition, equipment use, and techniques necessary to safely and effectively coordinate, perform, and supervise a technical rescue incident.

309

III. Tactical Plan

A. Size Up- Should include, but not limited to, the initial and continuous evaluation of the following:

1. Scope, magnitude, and nature of the incident. 2. Location and number of victims. 3. Risk versus benefit analysis (body recovery versus rescue). 4. Access to the scene. 5. Environmental factors. 6. Available and necessary resources. 7. Patient contact when it can be performed without endangering either responders or victims.

B. If the information you gather suggests that rescue by rope is the only method usable to rescue the victim, complete the following:

1. Establish a visible command post.

2. The “general area” around a rope rescue scene is the entire area within 300 ft Making the general area safe includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Controlling/ limiting traffic and sources of vibration in the area, including shutting down all vehicles and equipment. b. Controlling/ limiting access to the area by unnecessary personnel. c. Identifying hazards and removing and/or reducing their impact.

3. Once the decision has been made to either effect a rescue by rope or downgrade the operation to a body recovery, the following guidelines shall be followed.

IV. RESCUE OPERATIONS

A. NFPA Standards # 1983 and 1670 shall be followed as conditions warrant whenever possible. B. All victims’ loads will be on at least two separate ropes of at least ½ inch in diameter. Both lines will be attached to separate bombproof anchors, if possible. C. All victims transport systems i.e.: Stokes basket, LSP Halfback and Miller Board or a Class II or III harness etc. must be securely attached. Non-secured evacuation shall not be permissible. D. Any point were the rope passes a stationary object must be padded or the direction of the rope altered to prevent rope abrasion. E. All single line rappels will be bottom belayed. If bottom belay is not possible a top belay will be used. F. Helmets and gloves shall be worn at all times when on the emergency scene, when possible. G. All non-essential personnel shall be removed from the operations area. A clearly established “RIG MASTER” and “SAFETY OFFICER” shall be established When possible, the highest trained rope rescue team member shall be designated the rig master. H. If the victim to be accessed and packaged must be attended by a non-team member (EMS Personnel), at least one trained team member will coordinate packaging and will be responsible for safely transporting the patient. In all cases advanced life support personnel shall be considered first in place of other EMS personnel. I. All stages of the rescue operation shall be communicated to the Command Post for proper logging of times and coordination.

310

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Trench Rescue

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to establish Fire Department policy and procedure for responses to incidents involving trench and excavation collapse. As with any operational guideline, these are intended to be general in nature, and are specifically designed to allow the incident commander the latitude to make any changes if the needs of the incident dictate. In general however, operational guidelines should always be followed unless compelling reasons force a modification.

1. Emergency operational guidelines established by this department are designed to assist with the placement of apparatus and assignment of tactical duties and areas of operation. Thus, this guideline is intended to work in concert with the Department’s Incident Command System (NIMS).

II. INTRODUCTION

A. The following Standard Operating Procedures are established to provide initial responding fire and rescue companies guidelines to follow in the event of a trench or excavation collapse involving personnel injuries.

1. DEFINITIONS a. As defined by the OSHA regulation 29 CFR Part 1926 1. TRENCH- a narrow excavation in relation to its length made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width is not greater than 15 feet. 2. EXCAVATION- a man made cut, cavity, trench or depression in an earth surface, formed by earth removal.

III. GENERAL GUIDELINES

A. The Gastonia Fire Department shall assist in the command and control of any incident involving trench or excavation collapse. 1. Any incident, which involves a trench or excavation rescue, shall be the responsibility of the incident commander. 2. Any incident, in which a victim is trapped, buried or experiencing a medical emergency in a trench or excavation will require the response of the Gastonia Fire Department.

311

3. No person shall enter an unprotected trench to render patient care or perform disentanglement operations. All trenches shall be “ safe and protected “: using approved methods prior to entry by any emergency personnel. 4. All emergency vehicles shall park at least 100-ft. from the collapse site. The only exception to this shall be a technical rescue team vehicle, which may park no closer than 75 feet. 5. All traffic shall be stopped or detoured within 300 feet of the collapse zone. 6. A hazard zone shall be established to control at least 75 feet around the perimeter of the collapse zone. This should be done with scene tape.

IV. OPERATIONAL PHASES: FIRST RESPONSE

A. ASSESSMENT

1. First arriving companies should attempt to gather the following information. a. What is the nature of the problem? b. How many victims are involved? c. What is their location? d. Width, length and depth of the trench. e. Are there any scene hazards? (1) Disrupted utilities (2) Flowing water (3) Potential for secondary collapse (4) Mechanical hazards/heavy equipment (5) Hazardous Materials (6) Exposed non-disruptive utilities (7) Weather conditions

2. Once these items are evaluated you should consider: a. Is this a rescue or recovery operation? b. Assure EMS response if needed. c. Establish visible command and control of collapse area.

V. MAKING THE SITE SAFE

A. General area safety

1. Protect the general area around the collapse zone for at least 300 feet in all directions. It includes: a. Traffic cones b. Access control c. General hazard identification d. Have all heavy equipment shut down

B. Rescue Area Safety

1. This entails the initial steps needed to make the actual collapse zone around and in the trench as safe as possible using basic techniques. Sheeting and shoring operations, entry and disentanglement operations should be carried out under the direction of a qualified Trench Rescue Team member.

a. Cover the trench or collapse site lip with material to prevent loose soil from falling into the trench.

312

b. Ventilate the trench with electric positive pressure ventilation fan. c. Provide a helmet, goggles and gloves for the entry team. d. Do not allow any personnel to enter an unprotected trench. e. Do not touch any heavy equipment until you have assured it is not in contact with electrical utilities. f. Support unbroken utilities. g. Provide constant atmospheric monitoring during the rescue or recovery operations.

VI. TECHNICAL RESCUE OPERATIONS PHASE

A. OPERATIONAL RESPONSIBILITY 1. All personnel shall report to the command post or staging area. 2. Establish sector officers associated with the trench or excavation collapse. 3. The following sector officers shall be established. a. Operations- Responsible for coordination of the actual collapse and the sectors associated with all the activity in the “rescue area”. b. Extrication- Responsible for directing the actual sheeting and shoring, disentanglement and removal operation associated with the trench or excavation. This position will report directly to the Operations officer.

B. COLLAPSE ZONE OPERATIONS

1. Different collapse scenarios will obviously require different sheeting and shoring techniques as the situation demands. Each scenario should be approached with the same evaluation mechanism and adaptation made to the operation as is required by the configuration of the trench or excavation. 2. The following are potential forms of collapse, which may be encountered. They should be handled in accordance with accepted techniques. a. Single Wall Sheer b. Double Wall Sheer c. Spoil Pile Side d. Intersecting Trench Collapse e. Slough Collapse f. Collapse in “ Protected Trenches” (1) Rabbit Box side or above level collapse (2) Industrial shoring collapse (3) Inadequate protection (4) The following are potential forms of victim entrapment scenarios, which may be encountered. They should be approached using accepted techniques below: (a) Victim(s) buried to waist (b) Victim(s) buried to chest (c) Victim(s) completely buried (d) Victim(s) not buried but injured or experiencing a medical problem in the trench environment. (e) Victim(s) trapped or pinned by heavy equipment or pipe (f) Victim(s) trapped in running sand or loose material (g) Victim(s) buried in the end of large diameter pipe

VII. OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES

A. RESCUE AREA CONSIDERATIONS

313

1. Assure ventilation continues, atmospheric monitoring as necessary. 2. Assure de-watering systems are available and operational. 3. Assure utilities are identified and controlled. 4. Limit personnel at trench lip and collapse zone. 5. Assure adequate communication is available. 6. Assure control of personnel and equipment access. 7. Assure media staging area away from the collapse zone, if need.

B. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

1. Command shall brief all personnel on plan of action. 2. Sectors shall provide constant updates to the IC. 3. Plan at least two steps ahead of the operation, have a secondary plan ready in the event that the initial plan proves un-workable. 4. Assure personnel involved in disentanglement and digging operations are rotated at least every 30 minutes.

C. PATIENT CONSIDERATIONS

1. TREAT PATIENT WITH CRUSH SYNDROME IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROTOCOLS. 2. Consider and treat for hypothermia. 3. Never dig a patient out with heavy equipment. 4. Once within several feet of the patient dig by hand. 5. Assure Paramedics coordinate and direct packaging operations through the IC. 6. Plan patient movement well ahead of time for the removal of the patient once disentangled.

D. RESOURCES

1. In the event other public services are needed, advise what support should be provided. a. Manpower b. Heavy Equipment (type) c. Pumps(type) d. Vac Truck

2. Assure that all other utilities, which are identified, have a representative present. 3. Assure a staging area for all incoming resources requested.

VIII. SPECIAL SITUATIONS

A. RUNNING SAND OR MATERIAL

1. In these cases it may be necessary to incase the victim(s) in the interlocking drums used as an isolation tunnel. Remember that in all cases these drums should be used IN THE VERTICAL POSITION ONLY. USING THEM HORIZONTALLY MAY CAUSE THEM TO FAIL UNDER THE WEIGHT OF THE MATERIAL. 2. Other items that may be used as isolation tunnels in either the vertical or horizontal position are: a. concrete or steel pipe b. corrugated pipe

314

B. PARALLEL TRENCH AND TUNNEL OPERATION

1. In certain cases it may be necessary to dig a parallel trench or excavation in order to create a parallel shaft. If this becomes necessary consider the following: a. Either conventional or industrial protection devices should properly protect any trench cut for a rescue operation. b. Assure all utilities are identified prior to cutting the trench. c. Assure adequate shaft material for construction of your parallel shaft. d. If possible, request and retain a certified engineer to assist in the planning and implementation. e. A parallel trench or shaft should only be used as a last option.

IX. TERMINATION

A. Rehab all personnel after removal operations. B. Post-brief all personnel on the operation and its outcome. C. Perform material removal operations in the REVERSE ORDER. D. Beware of secondary collapse zones---no equipment is worth personnel injury. E. Stage, clean and inventory all equipment and report any lost or damaged equipment. F. Any parallel shaft construction, tunnels or isolation tunnels should be left in place. Removing them may cause a collapse. G. Local, state or federal inspectors may investigate the incident site. Until investigators arrive, the site must be protected to prevent any other collapse and to prevent additional injuries.

315

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.20.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Structural Collapse

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to provide information to all members concerning the establishment of standardized guidelines for Structural Collapse Incidents. As with any operational guideline, these are intended to be general in nature, and are specifically designed to allow the officer or incident commander the latitude to make changes if the needs of the situation so dictate. In general however, operational guidelines should always be followed unless compelling reasons force a modification.

1. Emergency operational guidelines established by this department are designed to assist with the placement of apparatus and the assignment of tactical duties and areas of operation. Thus, this guideline is intended to work in concert with the Department’s Incident Command System (ICS).

II. INTRODUCTION

A. The following Standard Operating Procedures are established to provide initial responding fire companies and rescue co. guidelines to follow in the event of a confirmed structural collapse and rescue. This will aid in minimizing risk to both fire personnel and victims.

B. DEFINITIONS

1. Structural Collapse characteristics: a. Any structure that is damaged, such as to bring into question the stability of that structure. b. A failure of columns, trusses, walls or joists that may pose the risk of entrapment and/or entanglement.

2. Structural Collapse Rescue Team (SCRT)

a. Fire Department Units assigned the responsibility of performing specialized rescue functions are designated as the Structural Collapse Rescue Team within the Gastonia Fire Department.

III. TACTICAL ASSIGNMENTS

A. The following positions must be properly trained TRT personnel

316

1. Entrant/Rescuer: Responsibilities: a. Enters collapse area for rescue purposes only if rescue cannot be completed from the outside b. Evaluates collapse scene for rescue operations and/or additional equipment/manpower c. Remains in collapse zone only long enough to complete task at hand d. Remains in communication with Attendant e. Constantly observes environment for hazard development f. Leaves collapse zone if ordered to do so by Attendant if additional hazards develop g. Renders appropriate patient care to victims if necessary and packages for removal h. Other tasks necessary for safe rescue/fire operations

2. Attendant/Point of Entry Officer: Responsibilities

a. Stationed at the opening of the collapse zone at all times during entry, exit, and rescue operations b. Account for all entrants (rescuers) upon entry/exit c. Monitor entrants (rescuers) for signs and/or symptoms of abnormal behavior d. Maintains communications at all times e. Observes for internal/exterior hazards f. Has the authority to order evacuation of entry (rescue) personnel should hazards develop (worsen) or abnormal conditions exist g. Work with Rescue Supervisor to insure safety of personnel and area near collapse zone h. Never enters for rescue i. Assist with rescue operations on the surface, if observations and communications with entrants (rescuers) is not compromised j. Will not leave opening except for self preservation

3. Entry Supervisor/Rescue Sector Officer: Responsibilities

a. Determine acceptable conditions b. Determine prohibitive conditions c. Maintain communications with Attendant at all times d. Oversees entry (rescue) procedures e. Has the authority to order evacuation of entry (rescue) personnel f. Maintain Rescue Accountability Board g. Work with Incident Commander to insure safety of personnel and collapse zone h. Never enters for rescue i. Assist with rescue operations on the surface, if observations and communications with entrants (rescuers) is not compromised j. Identifies safety area to prevent accidental entry by unauthorized personnel k. Ensures the proper personal protective equipment is used

IV. SCENE PREPARATION

A. Assessment:

1. First Due Company:

a. Determine if victim is in a Confined Space/Collapse Zone. b. Ensure SCRT/HazMat/EMS are dispatched. c. Locate and secure job site foreman or reliable witness. d. Determine number, location, and condition if victim(s), of possible.

317

e. Determine location of all power sources leading into Collapsed Structure. f. Attempt non-entry rescue and identifies safety area to prevent accidental entry by unauthorized personnel g. Assist TRT with rope systems, lockout/tag out, equipment, etc. h. DO NOT ENTER CONFINED SPACE!

2. Structural Collapse Rescue Team (SCRT):

a. Once determining whether the space does/does not contain or have the potential to contain any hazard capable of causing death or serious physical harm, the space may be treated for specific hazards. b. Obtain blue prints, maps or have on site personnel draw a sketch of the site (if needed). c. Determine the mechanisms of entrapment or nature of illness. d. Evaluate the need for “rescue or recovery”. e. Determine number of entry points and locations. f. Determine electrical/mechanical/chemical hazards. g. Initiate Lockout/Tag out procedures to secure area of any electrical or mechanical hazards, before entry. h. Determine type of respiratory protection being used from Entry Supervisor. i. Assume responsibility of maintaining adequate air supply for duration of incident. j. Assemble SABA and make proper connections to HM 1.

3. Hazardous Materials Team (HMT):

a. Assure M.S.D.S. Availability b. Assume responsibility of documentation (HazMat Personnel Officer) c. Prepare to monitor environment from the exterior d. Assist SCRT with lockout/tag out procedures e. Assist SCRT with rope systems, equipment, etc.

4. Manpower Equipment: a. Assure E.M.S. response. b. Assure sufficient rehab area is established. c. Assure visible incident command is established outside Rescue Sector.

B. Make the General Area Safe: 1. Establish a perimeter with tape and assign personnel/police to secure rescue area (20-30’). Keep unnecessary people out of area. 2. Assure that the Incident Commander assigns a Rescue Group Officer. 3. Assure fire control measures if needed. 4. Do not allow sources of ignition on site. 5. Ventilate the general area if needed. 6. Ventilate the space with positive pressure. Do not use gas-powered fans. 7. If possible open all additional openings into the space to assist with the ventilation process, (i.e. manholes, hatches, and natural openings).

V. ENTRY PREPARATION

A. SCRT will assure lock out, tag out, blanks out procedures are complete. 1. Fixed mechanical devices and equipment capable of causing injury shall be placed in a zero mechanical state. (ZMS). Relay this information to Rescue Sector Officer.

318

2. All electrical equipment (excluding lighting) shall be locked out in the open (off) position with an approved lock out device and secured with a key type padlock. 3. The key shall remain with the Rescue Group Officer until all rescuers have exited PRCS. 4. In cases where lockout is not possible, equipment shall be properly tagged, blank or blinded and fire department personnel assigned to area. 5. All locked out utilities shall also be tagged with Gastonia Fire Department approved Lock Out, Tag Out System. B. Ensure Point of Entry Officer (Attendant). C. Ensure that all personnel who will enter the site are equipped with SCBA or SABA. D. SCBA must be secured to entrant’s Class III harness if air pack is removed in order for the rescuer to fit into the opening or to allow for movement within move in the space. E. Assure one back-up team for every entry team. F. Every effort should be made not to work alone in a collapse zone. Teams of two should be utilized, if possible. G. Only “intrinsically safe devices” approved by the Gastonia Fire Department will be allowed in Confined Spaces containing an LEL. H. Each entry team shall be equipped with the following items: 1. One member shall have intrinsically safe communications, worn with SCBA/SABA. 2. Explosion proof lighting, cilium or explosion proof light. 3. Atmospheric monitor. 4. Proper personal protective gear as deemed necessary by the Rescue Supervisor. Helmets should be worn whenever possible. 5. An entry/life line shall be attached to the first entry team, unless rescue efforts will be hampered. 6. Some form of extrication/retrieval harness for a victim. 7. If the entry team must enter a vertical or horizontal shaft, each member shall wear Class III harness. 8. A victim supply line and rescue mask, if applicable.

VI. ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING

A. Atmospheric monitoring shall occur prior to and during all entries into a confined space. It should be stressed that the lack of positive or alarm level readings does not eliminate the requirement for proper respiratory protection! B. Atmospheric monitoring should be accomplished at high, medium, and low areas of space. SCBA may also be needed in this area.

C. All atmospheres shall be tested for: 1. Oxygen levels (deficient/excess) 2. Flammability 3. Toxicity

D. The following levels shall be considered as immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH) environments: 1. Oxygen deficient  19.5% 2. Oxygen enriched  23.5% 3. Flammability at 10% of Lower Flammable Limit (LEL) 4. Toxicity shall be limited to the numeric value that does not exceed the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)

319

E. Atmospheric monitoring shall occur continuously during occupancy due to the possibility of changing conditions, but in no case less than fifteen (15) minutes.

F. The Documentation Designee shall record all atmospheric readings.

G. In the event that, in the opinion of the incident Safety Officer, the atmospheric reading become what he considers unsafe to continue operations then all entry teams shall be removed from the space immediately until such time as the atmospheric conditions are corrected.

VII. ENTRY

A. Once the best method and location for entry is determined, rescue teams shall begin entry and reconnaissance/rescue/recovery operations in the space.

B. Entry decisions shall be made base on known locations of victims, safety of the opening, atmospheric readings, and ease of recovery points.

C. Prior to entry, each team member shall be logged with his or her time of entry. This function shall be assigned to one (HMT) who shall keep the Rescue Group Officer appraised of the status of each team. D. Teams should be limited to thirty (30) minutes working time in any space.

E. Once inside the space: 1. Assure adequate interior team communications. 2. Assure adequate communications with the operations exterior. 3. If necessary mark with chalk, cylumes, or other method entry and movement patterns to assure egress. 4. Move towards the suspected victim location as a team.

F. Once the victim is located, decide: 1. Recovery/Rescue? 2. Rope rescue equipment needed? 3. Additional Rescue Teams needed? 4. Communicate decisions to the outside command.

G. Assure that if the victim is to be moved through an opening which serves as the team members only exit, the following guidelines are followed:

1. Whenever possible, assure that all team members are stationed to the egress side of the opening in the event the victim becomes lodged. 2. Always try to avoid being “blocked in” by a victim.

3. If this is not possible, assure the following: a. When the move is made, assure it is made quickly and smoothly, leaving the time the space is blocked for egress as minimal as possible. b. Assure that the exterior personnel as well as interior teams are aware of the move and plan is agreed upon prior to blocking the space.

c. Assure that all airlines and connections are clear of the victim and his movement path to ensure that no airline problems develops as a result of the victim becoming entangled or pinching off the lines. d. Check SCBA/SABA for adequate air supply before making the move.

320

VIII. VICTIM REMOVAL

A. Once the victim is set for removal ensure the following: 1. As much spinal immobilization as possible based on the space and victim condition 2. Do not use electric winches to remove victims 3. Decide method of victim removal 4. Avoid the use of wristlets on patients with burns to the extremities. B. Once the victim is clear from the space remove all entry team personnel and equipment. C. Each team member shall be assigned to rehab upon removal from the space until re-hydrated and until vital signs are within normal limits.

IX. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

A. In the event of an airline failure on a SCBA the entire team shall IMMEDIATELY leave the space. 1. Notify the exterior immediately of the problem and identify the line and the specific problem.

X. TERMINATION

A. Conduct a PAR. B. Inventory and replace all equipment. C. Place any equipment damaged or potentially unfit for further confined space use out service until repaired. D. Turn property back over to contractor or responsible party.

321

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.20.05 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Confined Space Rescue

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to provide information to all members concerning the establishment of standardized guidelines for confined space rescue. As with any operational guideline, these are intended to be general in nature, and are specifically designed to allow the officer or incident commander the latitude to make changes if the needs of the situation so dictate. In general however, operational guidelines should always be followed unless compelling reasons force a modification.

1. Emergency operational guidelines established by this department are designed to assist with the placement of apparatus and the assignment of tactical duties and areas of operation. Thus, this guideline is intended to work in concert with the Department’s Incident Command System (ICS).

II. INTRODUCTION

A. The following Standard Operating Procedures are established to provide initial responding fire and rescue company guidelines to follow in the event of a confined space entry and rescue. This will aid in minimizing risk to both fire personnel and victims.

III. DEFINITIONS

A. Confined Space characteristics: 1. Size and shape allow a person to enter it; 2. Has limited openings for workers to enter and exit; 3. Is not designed for continuous occupancy.

B. Permit Required Confined Space (PRCS): 1. A confined space that has one or more of the following characteristics 2. Contains or has potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere; 3. Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant; 4. Has an internal configuration such that the entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross section; 5. Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard. 322

C. Confined Space Rescue Team (CSRT) 1. Fire Department Units assigned the responsibility of performing specialized rescue functions are designated as the Confined Space Rescue Team within the Gastonia Fire Department. Haz-Mat units will work in conjunction with the CSRT on Confined Space Incidents.

IV. TACTICAL PLANS

The following positions must be properly trained TRT personnel

A. Entrant/Rescuer: Responsibilities 1. Enters PRCS for rescue purposes only if rescue cannot be completed from the outside 2. Evaluates PRCS for rescue operations and/or additional equipment/manpower 3. Remains in PRCS only long enough to complete task at hand 4. Remains in communication with attendant 5. Constantly observes environment for hazard development 6. Leaves PRCS if ordered to do so by attendant if additional hazards develop 7. Renders appropriate patient care to victims if necessary and packages for removal 8. Other tasks necessary for safe rescue/fire operations

B. Attendant/Point of Entry Officer: Responsibilities: 1. Stationed at the opening of the PRCS at all times during entry, exit, and rescue operations 2. Account for all entrants (rescuers) upon entry/exit 3. Monitor entrants (rescuers) for signs and/or symptoms of abnormal behavior 4. Maintains communications at all times 5. Observes for internal/exterior hazards 6. Has the authority to order evacuation of entry (rescue) personnel should hazards develop (worsen) or abnormal conditions exist 7. Work with Entry Supervisor to insure safety of personnel and area near entrance or PRCS 8. Never enters for rescue 9. Assist with rescue operations at top if observations and communications with entrants (rescuers) is not compromised 10. Will not leave opening except for self preservation

C. Entry Supervisor/Rescue Sector Officer: Responsibilities 1. Determine acceptable conditions 2. Determine prohibitive conditions 3. Maintain communications with Attendant at all times 4. Oversees entry (rescue) procedures 5. Has the authority to order evacuation of entry (rescue) personnel 6. Maintain Rescue Accountability Board 7. Work with Incident Commander to insure safety of personnel and area 8. Never enters for rescue 9. Assist with rescue operations at top if observations and communications with entrants (rescuers) is not compromised 10. Identifies safety area to prevent accidental entry by unauthorized personnel 11. Ensures the proper personal protective equipment is used

V. SCENE PREPARATION

A. Assessment

323

B. First Due Company: 1. Determine if victim is in a Confined Space. 2. Ensure CSRT/HazMat/EMS are dispatched. 3. Locate and secure job site foreman or reliable witness. 4. Determine number, location, and condition of victim(s), of possible. 5. Determine location of all power sources leading into PRCS. 6. Request General Industry Confined Space Entry Permit. 7. Attempt non-entry rescue. 8. Assist TRT with rope systems, lockout/tag out, equipment, etc. 9. DO NOT ENTER CONFINED SPACE!

C. Confined Space Rescue Team (CRST): 1. Treat all confined space incidents, as Permit Requires. Once determining whether the space does/does not contain or have the potential to contain any hazard capable of causing death or serious physical harm, the space may be treated for specific hazards. 2. Obtain blue prints, maps or have on site personnel draw a sketch of the site (if needed). 3. Determine the mechanisms of entrapment or nature of illness. 4. Evaluate the need for “rescue or recovery”. 5. Determine number of entry points and locations. 6. Determine electrical/mechanical/chemical hazards. 7. Obtain General Industry Entry Permit from first Due Company, if available. 8. Initiate Gastonia Fire Department Permit System. 9. Initiate lockout/tag out procedures to secure area of any electrical or mechanical hazards, before entry. 10. Determine type of respiratory protection being used from Entry Supervisor. 11. Assume responsibility of maintaining adequate air supply for duration of incident. 12. Assemble SABA and make proper connections to Hazmat truck.

D. Hazardous Materials Team (HMT): 1. Assure M.S.D.S. Availability 2. Assume responsibility of documentation (HazMat Personnel Officer) 3. Prepare to monitor environment from the exterior 4. Assist CSRT with lockout/tag out procedures 5. Assist CSRT with rope systems, equipment, etc.

E. Manpower Equipment: 1. Assure E.M.S. response. 2. Assure sufficient rehab area is established. 3. Assure visible incident command is established outside Rescue Sector.

F. Make the General Area Safe: 1. Establish a perimeter with tape and assign personnel/police to secure rescue area (20-30’). Keep unnecessary people out of area. 2. Assure that the Incident Commander assigns a Rescue Sector Officer. 3. Assure fire control measures if needed. 4. Do not allow sources of ignition on site. 5. Ventilate the general area if needed. 6. Ventilate the space with positive pressure. Do not use gas-powered fans. 7. If possible open all additional openings into the space to assist with the ventilation process, (i.e. manholes, hatches, and natural openings).

324

VI. ENTRY PREPARATION

A. CSRT will assure lock out, tag out, blanks out procedures are complete. 1. All fixed mechanical devices and equipment capable of causing injury shall be placed in a zero mechanical state. (ZMS). Relay this information to Rescue Group Officer. 2. All electrical equipment (excluding lighting) shall be locked out in the open (off) position with an approved lock out device and secured with a key type padlock. 3. The key shall remain with the Rescue Group Officer until all rescuers have exited PRCS. 4. In cases where lockout is not possible, equipment shall be properly tagged, blank or blinded and fire department personnel assigned to area. 5. All locked out utilities shall also be tagged with Gastonia Fire Department approved Confined Space Tag System. B. Ensure Point of Entry Officer (Attendant).

C. Ensure that all personnel who will enter the site are equipped with SCBA or SABA.

D. SCBA must be secured to entrant’s Class III harness. Air pack may be removed in order for the rescuer to fit into the opening or to allow for movement within the space.

E. Assure one back-up team for every entry team.

F. Every effort should be made not to work alone in a PRCS. Teams of two should be utilized, if possible.

G. Only “intrinsically safe devices” approved by the Gastonia Fire Department will be allowed in confined spaces containing an LEL. H. Each entry team shall be equipped with the following items: 1. One member shall have intrinsically safe communications, worn with SCBA/SABA. 2. Explosion proof lighting, cilium or explosion proof light. 3. Atmospheric monitor. 4. Proper personal protective gear as deemed necessary by the rescue supervisor. Helmets should be worn whenever possible. 5. An entry/life line shall be attached to the first entry team, unless rescue efforts will be hampered. 6. Some form of extrication/retrieval harness for a victim. 7. If the entry team must enter a vertical or horizontal shaft, each member shall wear Class III harness. 8. A victim supply line and rescue mask, if applicable.

VII. ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING

A. Atmospheric monitoring shall occur prior to and during all entries into a confined space. It should be stressed that the lack of positive or alarm level readings does not eliminate the requirement for proper respiratory protection!

B. Atmospheric monitoring should be accomplished at high, medium, and low areas of space. SCBA may also be needed in this area.

C. All atmospheres shall be tested for: 1. Oxygen levels (deficient/excess) 2. Flammability

325

3. Toxicity

D. The following levels shall be considered as immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH) environments: 1. Oxygen deficient  19.5% 2. Oxygen enriched  23.5% 3. Flammability at 10% of Lower Flammable Limit (LEL) 4. Toxicity shall be limited to the numeric value that exceeds the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)

E. Atmospheric monitoring shall occur continuously during occupancy due to the possibility of changing conditions, but in no case less than fifteen (15) minutes.

F. The Documentation Designee shall record all atmospheric readings on Entry Permit.

G. In the event that, in the opinion of the incident Safety Officer, the atmospheric reading become what he considers unsafe to continue operations then all entry teams shall be removed from the space immediately until such time as the atmospheric conditions are corrected.

VIII. ENTRY

A. Once the best method and location for entry is determined, rescue teams shall begin entry and reconnaissance/rescue/recovery operations in the space. B. Entry decisions shall be made based on known locations of victims, safety of the opening, atmospheric readings, and ease of recovery points. C. Prior to entry, each team member shall be logged on Entry Permit with his or her time of entry. This function shall be assigned to one (HMT) who shall keep the Rescue Sector Officer appraised of the status of each team. D. Teams should be limited to thirty (30) minutes working time in any space. E. Once inside the space: 1. Assure adequate interior team communications. 2. Assure adequate communications with the operations exterior. 3. If necessary mark with chalk, cylumes, or other method entry and movement patterns to assure egress. 4. Move towards the suspected victim location as a team. F. Once the victim is located, decide: 1. Recovery/Rescue? 2. Rope rescue equipment needed? 3. Additional Rescue Teams needed? 4. Communicate decisions to the outside command.

G. Assure that if the victim is to be moved through an opening which serves as the team members only exit, the following guidelines are followed:

1. Whenever possible, assure that all team members are stationed to the egress side of the opening in the event the victim becomes lodged. 2. Always try to avoid being “blocked in” by a victim. 3. If this is not possible, assure the following: a. When the move is made, assure it is made quickly and smoothly, leaving the time the space is blocked for egress as minimal as possible.

326

b. Assure that the exterior personnel as well as interior teams are aware of the move and plan is agreed upon prior to blocking the space. c. Assure that all airlines and connections are clear of the victim and his movement path to ensure that no airline problems develops as a result of the victim becoming entangled or pinching off the lines. d. Check SCBA/SABA for adequate air supply before making the move.

IX. VICTIM REMOVAL

A. Once the victim is set for removal ensure the following:

1. As much spinal immobilization as possible based on the space and victim condition 2. Do not use electric winches to remove victims 3. Decide method of victim removal 4. Avoid the use of wristlets on patients with burns to the extremities. B. Once the victim is clear from the space remove all entry team personnel and equipment.

C. Each team member shall be assigned to rehab upon removal from the space until re-hydrated and until vital signs are within normal limits.

X. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

A. In the event of an airline failure on a SCBA the entire team shall IMMEDIATELY leave the space. 1. Notify the exterior immediately of the problem and identify the line and the specific problem.

XI. TERMINATION

A. Conduct a PAR. (personnel accountability report) B. Inventory and replace all equipment. C. Place any equipment damaged or potentially unfit for further confined space use out of service until repaired. D. Turn property back over to contractor or responsible party. E. Send Confined Space Entry Permit to Training Division.

327

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.20.06 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Water Rescue

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to provide information to all members concerning the establishment of standardized guidelines for water rescue. As with any operational guideline, these are intended to be general in nature, and are specifically designed to allow the officer or incident commander the latitude to make changes if the needs of the situation so dictate. In general however, operational guidelines should always be followed unless compelling reasons force a modification.

1. Emergency operational guidelines established by this department are designed to assist with the placement of apparatus and the assignment of tactical duties and areas of operation. Thus, this guideline is intended to work in concert with the Department’s Incident Command System (NIMS).

II. INTRODUCTION

A. The following Standard Operating Procedures are established to provide initial responding fire and rescue company guidelines to follow in the event of a possible water rescue. This will aid in minimizing risk to both fire personnel and victims.

1. DEFINITIONS

a. Water Rescue: 1. When water is of the depth to which a rescuer cannot stand with his torso out of the water. 2. When the velocity of the water may pose a risk to rescuer. 3. When the temperature of the water is below 60.

b. Swift Water Rescue Team (SWRT) 1. Fire Department Units assigned the responsibility of performing specialized rescue functions are designated as the Swift Water Rescue Team within the Gastonia Fire Department.

c. Rescue Group Officer: Responsibilities 328

1. Determine acceptable conditions 2. Determine prohibitive conditions 3. Maintain communications with rescuers at all times 4. Oversees rescue procedures 5. Has the authority to order evacuation of rescue personnel 6. Maintain Rescue Accountability Board 7. Work with Incident Commander to insure safety of personnel and area 8. Never enters for rescue 9. Identifies safety area to prevent accidental entry by unauthorized personnel 10. Ensures the proper personal protective equipment is used

III. SCENE PREPARATION

A. Assessment:

1. First Due Company: a. Determine if victim is in danger of drowning. b. Ensure SWRT/EMS are dispatched. c. Locate and secure a reliable witness or member of the victims’ family. d. Determine number, location, and condition of victim(s), if possible. e. Determine location of all water sources leading into rescue area. f. Attempt land based rescue. g. Assist Technical Rescue Team (TRT) with rope systems, scene control, etc. h. Determine if this will be a rescue or body recovery. i. DO NOT ENTER WATER UNLESS SAFETY OF PERSONNEL CAN BE INSURED! j. TRG- Throw, Row, Go

2. Minimum PPE needed for persons working in the hazard zone: a. Personal flotation device (PFD) b. Thermal protection c. Helmet appropriate for water rescue d. Cutting device e. Whistle f. Contamination protection(as needed)

B. Manpower Equipment: 1. Assure E.M.S. response. 2. Assure sufficient rehab area is established. 3. Assure sufficient personnel and equipment to perform the task. 4. Assure visible incident command is established outside Rescue Sector.

C. Make the General Area Safe: 1. Establish a perimeter with tape and assign personnel/police to secure rescue area (100’-200’). Keep unnecessary people out of area. 2. Assure that the Incident Commander assigns a Rescue Group Officer. 3. Assure fire control measures if needed. 4. Determine direction of current and estimated speed. 5. Identify potential trap hazards such as downed trees, eddies, strainers/sweepers, etc… 6. Make land based rescues when possible by using throw bags, pike poles, ladders, etc… 7. Assure PPE is worn at all times. No Turn-out Gear.

329

IV. ENTRY

A. Once the best method and location for entry is determined, rescue teams shall begin entry and reconnaissance/rescue/recovery operations. B. Entry decisions shall be made based on known locations of victims, and ease of recovery points. C. Prior to entry, each team member should be logged on an entry chart with his or her time of entry. This function shall be assigned to a support person who shall keep the Rescue Group Officer apprised of the status of each team. D. Teams should be limited to thirty (30) minutes working time in any rescue. E. Once water is entered: 1. 1.Assure adequate interior team communications. 2. 2.Assure adequate communications with the operations exterior. 3. 3.Move towards the suspected victim location as a team.

F. Once the victim is located, decide: 1. Recovery/Rescue? 2. Rope rescue equipment needed? 3. Additional Rescue Teams needed? 4. Will the GFD rescue boat be needed? 5. Communicate decisions to the outside command.

G. Once a recovery/rescue plan is established: 1. The victim should be removed to a safe location and transferred to emergency medical personnel. 2. Rescuers should exit the water and safety off the area to reduce the potential of accidental entry.

V. VICTIM REMOVAL

A. Once the victim is set for removal ensure the following:

1. As much spinal immobilization as possible based on the environment and victim condition. 2. Do not use electric winches to remove victims. 3. Decide method of victim removal. 4. Avoid the use of wristlets on patients with burns to the extremities.

B. Once the victim is clear from the water remove all entry team personnel and equipment. C. Each team member shall be assigned to rehab upon removal from the rescue area until re-hydrated until vital signs are within normal limits.

VI. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

A. In the event that a rescuer becomes in danger, ALL OPERATIONS shall be isolated on the rescuer. B. An approved flotation device shall be worn at all times. C. Entry into the water should be limited to the minimum personnel needed to perform the task.

330

VII. TERMINATION

A. Conduct a PAR. B. Inventory and replace all equipment. C. Conduct a PIA and send a copy to the Training Chief.

331

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.20.07 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: Feb 1, 2008

Rescinds:

Subject: Carbon Monoxide Response

I. PURPOSE A. To establish a policy for initial Carbon Monoxide responses by district fire companies.

II. DISCUSSION

A. Each company within the fire department is equipped to monitor for Carbon Monoxide and will be responsible for the initial determination on whether the Haz-Mat team is needed for further monitoring.

Monitors should be reading zero at time of entry. If not, then monitors shall be reset to zero before entry is made.

If any Carbon Monoxide is detected, then the Battalion Chief on duty should be contacted to request a Haz-Mat response to that location. District companies should not ventilate any structure until Haz-Mat determines what is causing the problem. The monitors alarm at 35 ppm. If a reading of 35 ppm or less is achieved, it may be safe for occupants to remain in place. If a reading greater than 35 ppm or higher is achieved, then occupants should be moved to a safer location. If a reading of 350 ppm or higher is achieved, remove occupants to a safer location immediately.

The problem with obtaining these readings are that even though a permissible level is read, at some period of time, a higher level may have occurred. If occupants have any signs or symptoms of CO poisoning, go strictly by medical protocol.

332

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Bomb Threats and Explosive Devices

I. PURPOSE

B. This procedure establishes responsibilities of Fire Department personnel regarding alarms concerning explosive devices, whether threatened or real.

II. DISCUSSION

B. The Fire Department's responsibility in handling such situations is that of standing by at a safe location to be prepared to act if detonation were to occur. The Police Department or a Military Ordinance Disposal Team is responsible for the handling of such situations in respect to evacuation, investigation, removal and detonation of explosive devices.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Fire Department personnel are informed of a possible explosive device or bomb threat, Communication Center should be instructed to immediately notify the appropriate personnel at the Police Department and relay all the necessary information. The Battalion Chief and Fire Marshal should be notified as well.

B. Only one fire unit should be dispatched to the area of the suspected site. Care should be taken when positioning the unit. The unit should stand-by at the nearest safest hydrant location.

C. Radios should not be used in the area of the suspected device. Radios should then be turned off as a precaution before nearing the area. This does not mean that you are secure from accidental detonation due to transmission frequencies as there are many other communication devices whose transmission frequencies may cause a detonation.

D. The officer-in-charge of the unit should make it known to the Incident Commander that the fire unit is in position in case of fire or explosion.

E. If a detonation were to occur, radio contact with Communication Center should be immediately re- established and the appropriate level of response requested.

F. The officer-in-charge should take care to reestablish radio contact with Communication Center when released from the incident by informing Communication Center of the unit's status.

333

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.30.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: September 22, 2004

Rescinds:

Subject: Multi-Agency Response to Hazardous Device Incidents

I. PURPOSE

A. This procedure establishes responsibility for the Gastonia Fire Department’s Special Operations Division personnel for operating at incidents involving hazardous devices, whether threatened or actual.

II. DISCUSSION

A. The Special Operation Division's responsibility at incidents involving hazardous devices will be to function as a support unit to Police Department Bomb Disposal units, and provide the functions of operational support and rescue. Should a hazardous material(s) be used in conjunction with an explosive device, or should a hazardous material be placed or located within close proximity of the device, a full Hazmat Team response is required. Fire suppression shall be the responsibility of the local Fire Department, and their activities at the scene will be coordinated through the on-scene Incident Command structure.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Upon notification of a suspected explosive device, Communications will notify the appropriate contact person(s) with the City/County Bomb Disposal team, along with the on-duty Chief Officer of the Gastonia Fire Department. In addition, the Deputy Fire Chief of Operations, and the Hazmat Team Chief will be notified.

B. Contact between Fire and Police agencies will be established in order to determine the exact nature of the device. To achieve this, contact will be established between the Bomb Disposal Team commander and the appropriate on-duty Battalion Chief. The on duty Battalion Chief will notify the Deputy Fire Chief of Operations and the Hazmat Team Chief.

C. Special Operations Division personnel who respond to incidents involving hazardous devices will report to the Command Post and assist the Bomb Disposal personnel with dress and preparation for operation, and will serve as the primary rescue team for Bomb Disposal personnel. Portable or mobile radios should not be used within close proximity of potential explosive devices unless Bomb Disposal personnel have approved their use.

D. Should information received from Communications indicate that the device might also involve or be located in close proximity to hazardous materials; a full Hazmat Team response will be requested.

334

E. Should a detonation of an explosive device occur, radio contact with the Communications Center should be immediately reestablished and an appropriate level of response requested as required to handle the emergency.

F. Upon termination of the incident, the officer-in-charge should try to reestablish radio contact with Communications and confirm that the unit(s) will be returning to service.

335

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 25.30.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: September 22, 2004

Rescinds:

Subject: Response to Actual or Suspected Incidents Involving Weapons of Mass Destruction

I. PURPOSE

A. This procedure establishes responsibility for Gastonia Fire Department personnel for operating at incidents involving or suspected of involving weapons of mass destruction.

II. DISCUSSION

A. The threat of incidents involving weapons of mass destruction is on the increase. Agents included in this area include Biological, Nuclear, Incendiary, Chemical, and Explosives. ( B-Nice) These incidents are very similar to hazardous materials emergencies. However, a number of additional factors must be considered. The most obvious of these is the possibility of secondary devices being placed to harm responders, crime scene considerations, and the large number of outside agencies that may be required to respond. Additionally, it may be a period of time until the incident is recognized as involving weapons of mass destruction.

III. PROCEDURE

A. When it becomes suspected that an incident involves a weapon of mass destruction the incident commander will use appropriate channels to notify the Chief of Special Operations, the Chief of Operations, and the Fire Chief. Additionally he/she will request whatever additional city resources deemed necessary. ( Special Operations Team, Police Departments Bomb Squad, etc)

B. As these events have the potential to be major, the incident commander will obviously need to request the response of a number of additional in county agencies. Among these will likely be Gaston County Emergency Management, EMS agencies, Law Enforcement agencies. These units will work under the established unified command system. A command post shall be designated, and the ranking representative of each responding agency will report to that location. Additionally, according to the scope of the incident, the city emergency operations center may need to be activated. C. It may be necessary to request the response of numerous state and federal agencies. In this case, the request will be made through Gaston County Emergency Management. D. Actual procedures used to mitigate the incident will depend upon the type B-NICE incident it is. Each will be handled according to the appropriate departmental operating guideline. Ex. A chemical agent would be handled according to our hazardous material guidelines etc.

336

IV. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS .

A. Responders to incidents involving weapons of mass destruction should always be Alert for the possibility of secondary devices being placed to harm them after the incident is underway. Look for things such as suspicious bags or packages that look out of place, suspicious people in the area, or unexplained vapor cloud or odors.

B. Crime scene considerations should be considered. The incident commander will Have to be prepared to work with various state, local and federal law enforcement agencies.

337

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO 25.40.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: August, 2004

Rescinds:

Subject: Hazardous Materials Operating Guidelines

I. PURPOSE

B. The purpose of this Hazardous Materials Operating Guide is to develop some standard operating procedures and responsibilities for emergency response personnel when responding to hazardous materials incidents.

Introduction 1.1: Incidents involving the release of hazardous materials have increased considerably in recent years. These incidents differ from other emergency situations because of the wide diversity of causative factors and the pervasiveness of the potential threat

1.2: As the role of public safety agencies is one of life and property protection, we will be involved on incidents involving hazardous materials. When these incidents occur, it is important to become part of the solution, not part of the problem.

I.3: Certain elements are necessary to achieve the objective of becoming part of the solution. Some of these elements are pre-emergency planning, training, equipment, supplies, and the development of GOGs. The purpose of this Hazardous Materials Operating Guide is to develop some standard operating procedures and responsibilities for emergency response personnel when responding to hazardous materials incidents. The advantages of standard operating procedures include:

1. Improves coordination 2. Facilitates training 3. Insures adequate protection of personnel 4. Provides consistency 5. Serves as reference guide 6. Reduces time in problem solving

1.4: Proper utilization of GOG's and COMMON SENSE can help prevent a haz- ardous material incident from becoming a hazardous materials emergency.

1.5: This HAZARDOUS MATERIALS OPERATING GUIDE has been developed and implemented as the emergency response plan for The City Of Gastonia, Fire Departments, as envisioned by the requirements of paragraph (q) (1), Title 29 Code of Federal Regulations Part 1910, 338

Section 1910.120, published in the Federal Register, Volume 54, Number 42, 6 March 1989, and in support of 13 North Carolina Administrative Code 7C.0101 (a)(26) Adopted June 9, 1989, as Amended which is identical to 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1910.120 Appearing at 54 FR 9317 on March 6, 1989.

1.6: For the purpose of this guide, hazardous material means:

"A substance or material which has been determined by the Secretary of Transportation to be capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety, and property when transported in commerce, and which has been so designated."

1.7: In this guide, a spill or incident is an occurrence where a hazardous material is dispersed into the environment or its container is damaged to such an extent that the contents can be expected to be released with the potential to cause injury to people or harm the environment

1.8: Like fire fighting, hazardous material incident control may require latitude in the decision-making process. This guide is not intended to inhibit that process, but to compliment it For safety, for compliance with the law, and for organizational purposes, personnel should attempt to meet as many tenets of this protocol as possible while working any hazardous material incident

1.9: Life safety of all parties is the # 1 priority. Lives will not be risked to save property.

1.10: This guide is available for inspection and copying by employees and their representatives.

1.11: The guide (NFPA 471) used to formulate this document was promulgated in draft form 5 July 1988, issued as an interim document pending formal departmental publication I Fe6ruary 1989, and will be reviewed and updated annually. (Recommended Practice for Responding to Hazardous Material Incidents NFPA 471 {Technical Committee Report}, National Fire Protection Association Committee on Hazardous Materials, 1988.)

1.12: Changes to The City of Gastonia Fire Hazardous Materials Operating Guide will be changed on the computer and amendments will show these changes.

1.13: CONCEPT OF OPERATIONS:

A. PRE-RESPONSE PLANNING: The Gastonia Fire Department shall be responsible for pre-response planning and updating this guide annually, or as recommended improvements or regulatory provisions dictate.

B. RESPONSE: (a) First Responders: First responders are classified as Fire personnel responding to an emergency and meeting the requirements specified in 1910.120 (q)(6) (i) & (ii). Examples are Police Officers (awareness level) and Fire Personnel (operations level). SEE APPENDIX B (First Responder-SOP) (b) Haz-Mat Response Team: Members of Fire that meet all Federal and State requirements for 1910.120 (c) INCIDENT COMMANDER: See 3.7 page 6 chapter 3. The Senior officer on the first-due piece of Fire Department responding emergency apparatus to arrive on the incident scene will assume command. Command will be passed up the line of authority as designated in 1910.120 (q)(3)(i).

339

C. Post-Response: Cleanup and Restoration.(SEE CHAPTER 12)

The shipper, spiller and/or owner are responsible for recovery and clean up Hazardous

CHAPTER 1 1. RESPONSIBILITY 1.1: The Gastonia Fire Department is responsible, as directed by the Mayor and City Council, for providing whatever specific services are necessary to protect life or property. 1.2: A Hazardous Materials Response Team - is established within The Gastonia Fire Department to function as the initial response element to hazardous materials incidents and will: a. Perform technical response procedures in accordance with unit standard operating procedures and personal protection guidelines. b. Respond to reported events for evaluation and determination of additional county, state, federal and private sector resources required to manage the problem. c. Provide support to other city, county, and state agencies as required. 1.3: The Hazardous Materials Team shall provide technical expertise, assistance, and equipment at the incident and shall perform duties as directed by the Incident Commander (IC). The shipper, spiller, and/or owner are responsible for the recovery and cleanup stage of the incident

CRITICAL STAGE: 1.4: The first few minutes after arrival of first responders to an incident is the critical stage. A first responder is defined as the first to arrive at the site with governmental authority to assess and initiate scene control. Identification and stabilization of an incident are primary goals of first responders. Their actions more than any others can affect the severity of the incident ( see appendix B, FIRST RESPONDER - SOP)

1.5: There is severe danger to first responders who are unprotected when they approach the scene to identify the materials involved. Necessary steps to insure adequate protection for personnel include the establishment of a "safe" perimeter, procedures for entering the incident site, and proper protective clothing.

1.6: Stabilization of the incident can be facilitated by containing or confining the material to as small an area as possible.

CONTAINMENT STAGE 1.7: Once an incident involving hazardous materials has been stabilized, efforts may be directed toward terminating the discharge or release of hazardous materials. On many occasions, stabilization of the incident is most readily achieved by terminating the discharge. Termination may include: 1. Righting an overturned /spilling container. 2. Plugging a leak 3. Closing a valve. 4. Pumping the contents of a leaking container into another container (off-loading). 5. Placing a leaking container into an over pack container.

RECOVERY /CLEANUP STAGE:

1.8: Recovery and cleanup is the final stage of the incident As the shipper, spiller and/or owner are responsible for recovery and cleanup. The Gastonia Fire Department will not actively participate in this stage without permission of the Incident Commander, and extenuating circumstances exist

340

1.9: It is important for Incident Commanders to identify responsible parties in hazardous materials releases. The responsible party can then perform the necessary cleanup operations or request private cleanup contractors.

1.10: When the responsible party cannot be identified or has been identified but is unable to have cleanup performed in a reasonable period, assistance from The Gaston County Department of Emergency Management shall be requested.

1.11: Department personnel shall not directly contact cleanup/disposal agencies. The responsible party should make this contact The responsible party is to be informed that he/she is financially responsible for the cleanup /disposal of hazardous materials.

1.12: When the responsible party is not available, and the use of private contractors for cleanup is determined necessary by the Incident Commander/Gaston County Department of Emergency Management , the request shall be made through the Communications Center.

CHAPTER 2 2. ACTIVATION 2.1: The emergency response to a hazardous material incident is activated when the Gastonia County Fire Center is notified of any fuel, chemical, nuclear or other known suspected hazardous material spill or release that occurs within the City of Gastonia.

2.2 Emergency personnel will then be dispatched by the Communications Center according to HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENT CLASSIFICATIONS listed in chapter 4, and levels of RESPONSE as listed in chapter 5.

CHAPTER 3

3. DIRECTION AND CONTROL - SCENE MANAGEMENT

3.1: The management of a hazardous materials incident is legally a partnership involving Federal, State, County/City and private industry. Our department's main responsibility centers on assessing the hazard, notifying proper agencies, and providing the necessary interim measures to minimize the effect on people and the environment through containment and control.

3.2: Scene management includes coordinating multi-agency responses and actions, and ensuring that needed resources are applied in a timely manner. Scene management does not imply internal direction or manipulation of specialized functions of emergency services providers, except as necessary to resolve conflicts between two or more responders.

3.3: The Gastonia Fire Department Hazardous Material Response Team will support local, county, and state government emergency services agencies during a hazardous chemical spill

3.4: Scene management at hazardous material incidents is the key element and the most critically important function performed by personnel of responding agencies. The effective use of personnel and coordinated activities of other responders is paramount to the safe successful mitigation of these incidents.

3.5: Communications from the scene must be maintained at a minimum so that the hazardous materials unit operating inside of the Hot Zone will have immediate access to outside resources and support. 341

3.6: "The senior emergency response official responding to an emergency shall become the individual in charge of a site-specific Incident Command System (ICS). All emergency responders and their communications shall be coordinated and controlled through the individual in charge of the ICS assisted by the senior official present for each employer.

3.7: Note to (q)(3)(i).--The "senior official" at an emergency response is the most senior official on the site who has the responsibility for controlling the operations at the site. Initially it is the senior officer on the first-due piece of responding emergency apparatus to arrive on the incident scene. As more senior officers arrive (Le.; battalion chief, fire chief, state law enforcement official, site coordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the line of authority which has been previously established.

3.8: The individual in charge of the ICS shall identify, to the extent possible, all hazardous substances or conditions present and shall address as appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls, maximum exposure limits, hazardous substance handling procedures, and use of any new technologies.

3.9: Based on the hazardous substances and/or conditions present, the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate emergency operations, and assure that the personal protective equipment worn is appropriate for the hazards to be encountered. However, personal protective equipment shall meet, at a minimum, the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1910.156(e) when worn while performing fire fighting operations beyond the incipient stage for any incident or site.

3.10: "Employees engaged in emergency response and exposed to hazardous substances presenting an inhalation hazard or potential inhalation hazard shall wear positive pressure self- contained breathing apparatus while engaged in emergency response until such time that the individual in charge of the ICS determines through the use of air monitoring that a decreased level of respiratory protection will not result in hazardous exposures to employees.

3.11: The individual in charge of the ICS shall limit the number of emergency response personnel at the emergency site, in those areas of potential or actual exposure to incident or site hazards, to those who are actively performing emergency operations. However, operations in hazardous areas shall be performed using the buddy system in groups of two or more.

3.12: Back-up personnel shall stand by with equipment ready to provide assistance or rescue. Advance first aid support personnel, as a minimum, shall also stand by with medical equipment and transportation capability.

3.13: The individual in charge of the ICS shall designate a safety official (recommended by the Haz- Mat Operations Officer), who- is knowledgeable in the operations being implemented at the emergency response site, with specific responsibility to identify and evaluate hazards and to provide direction with respect to the safety of operations for the emergency at hand.

3.14: When activities are judged by the safety official to be an Immediately Dangerous to Life & Health (IDLH) condition and/or to involve an imminent danger condition, the safety official shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate those activities. The safety official shall immediately inform the individual in charge of the ICS of any actions needed to be taken to correct these hazards at an emergency scene.

3.15: After emergency operations have terminated, the individual in charge of the ICS shall implement appropriate decontamination procedures. (see appendix D)

342

CHAPTER 4 4. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENT CLASSIFICATIONS 4.1: Incidents are divided into Levels I, II, and III. In ascending order of severity, these levels are briefly defined as: LEVEL I: 4.2: 1. A Level I incident is a minor situation within the capabilities of the first responders. A Level I incident is defined as a release of less than 110 gallons liquid or less than 200 pounds solid of a known hazardous material which will not produce an IDLH or LEL environment other than possibly inside a transport vehicle or container. At the minimum, a hot zone and a command post should be established for Level I incidents. A hot zone is the area of maximum hazard and is restricted to personnel wearing the proper level of protection.

2. “Level I incidents include: a. Minor leaks or spills from one or two 55-gallon drums. b. Minor leaks or spills which can be handled with several shovels full of dirt or sand. c. Minor leaks or spills within the capability of the driver to correct d. Leaking valves or plumbing on upright cargo tanks which do not require the immediate off-loading of the tank e. Leaks or spills of paint or batteries. f. Minor Natural gas Leaks. g. Fuel tank leaking on any vehicle. h. Empty overturned cargo tanks which the Incident Commander or command team member determines presents no additional hazard. i Minor leaks or spills which the Incident Commander or hazardous materials team member determines are equivalent to the above categories. In case of doubt, a supervisor should be consulted. LEVEL 11. 4.3: 1. A Level II incident is a major incident that poses many additional problems for the first responders and may require assistance from other agencies. A Level II incident is defined as the release of a known hazardous material of more than 110 gallons liquid or more than 200 pounds solid, the release of any quantity of a known solid or liquid toxic material in a critical public area, or the release of any quantity of an unknown solid, liquid, or gaseous toxic material. All gases other than natural gas will be considered toxic.

A formal command post and a staging area should be established. Incident zones and their control must be established and maintained. Localized evacuation may be required. Outside agencies may need to be notified. 2. "Level II incidents include: a. Overturned cargo tanks filled with hazardous materials. b. Train derailments not involving railroad tank cars filled with hazardous materials. c. A vehicle or train fire involving hazardous materials cargo or waste involving hazardous materials. d. Leaking cargo tanks filled with hazardous materials whose structural integrity is in question. e. Incidents which the Incident Commander or hazardous materials team member determines are equivalent to the above categories. In case of doubt, a supervisor should be consulted. f. Incident involving a fatality or serious personal injury which may be attributable to the hazardous material. LEVEL III:

343

4.4: 1. A Level III incident is a local disaster. The incident has escalated beyond the capabilities of our local resources and jurisdiction. The incident may last for days and large scale evacuation may be necessary. Many outside sources may be needed to provide assistance and support. These sources might include: chemical manufactures; Red Cross; Salvation Army; Coast Guard; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; Federal Emergency Management Agency; North Carolina Division of Emergency Services; North Carolina National Guard; County Office of Emergency Services; and other city, county or state agencies.

2. "Level III incidents include:

a. Train derailments involving railroad tank cars filled with hazardous material. b. Flammable gas cargo tank or railroad tank car fires. c. Major leaks involving compressed gas railroad tank cars caused by puncture or major structural damage.

CHAPTER 5

5. RESPONSES REQUIRED FOR EACH INCIDENT CLASSIFICATION

LEVEL I INCIDENTS:

5.1: For suspected or known Level I incidents, the Communications Center will dispatch a Fire Department Engine Company District Engine Battalion Chief and a Police Officer. EXCEPTIONS ARE:

5.1.1: Fuel tank leaking on vehicle or to assist at wreck.

A. Dispatch will send: only " One Engine Company

5.2: The I.C. shall call for the Hazardous Materials Team and emergency medical assistance whenever hazardous materials are involved and additional expertise or equipment is required to protect persons or the environment

5.3: Once the Incident Commander arrives on scene and completes a size-up, it will be his/her responsibility to assess the need for contacting the Gaston County Department of Emergency Management

5.3.1: All requests for Mutual Aid will be relayed to the Fire Department Shift Commander. The Shift Commander will determine the units and manpower available for response.

A. Communications will transfer call to Officer in charge at Fire Station # 1. B. Calls directly to Fire Dept: Officer receiving call will gather as much information as possible and inform the Battalion Chief or person in charge of that shift

LEVEL 11 AND III INCIDENTS:

5.4: For Level II and III incidents, the Communications Center will dispatch the normal response, a Police supervisor, the Hazardous Materials Units, and an ambulance.

5.5 Haz-Mat 1 shall be dispatched to Level 11 and III incidents to establish a command

344

post and will be positioned at the dividing line of the Warm Zone and the Cold Zone. Haz-Mat 4 will be positioned by the discretion of Haz-Mat members.

5.6: Gastonia Fire Department's Hazardous Material Team Coordinator shall be notified anytime the Hazardous Materials Team is dispatched, but will not automatically respond. Any Hazardous Material incident that constitutes a full haz-mat response, the Special Operations Chief and Training Chief will be notified.

5.7: If the Hazardous Material Teams Coordinator responds, he will notify the Operations Chief, who will not automatically respond

CHAPTER 6

6. HAZARDOUS MATERIAL TEAM PERSONNEL

6.1 The Hazardous Materials Response Team of the Gastonia Fire Department is organized to function as the initial response element of the hazardous materials emergency management program.

6.2: The Hazardous Materials Team is headquartered at Fire -Station 1 of the Gastonia Fire Department. It is composed of specially trained, equipped and designated personnel who are available for special assignments with the unit

6.3: "All members of the Team are trained to provide them with:

1. An understanding of what hazardous materials are, and the risks associated with them in an incident 2. An understanding of the potential outcomes associated with an emergency created when hazardous materials are present. 3. The ability to recognize the presence of hazardous materials in an emergency. 4. The ability to identify the hazardous materials, if possible. 5. An understanding of the role of the first responder awareness individual in the employer's emergency response plan including site security and control and the U.S. Department of Transportation's Emergency Response Guidebook. 6. The ability to realize the need for additional resources and to make appropriate notifications to the communication center. 7. Knowledge of the basic hazard and risk assessment techniques. 8. How to select and use proper specialized chemical personal protective equipment provided. 9. An understanding of basic hazardous materials terms. 10. How to perform basic and advance control, containment and/ or confinement operations within the capabilities of the resources and personal protective equipment available within their unit 11. Understand and implement decontamination procedures. 12. An understanding of the relevant general operating guidelines and termination procedures. 13. How to implement the employer's emergency response plan. 14. The classification, identification and verification of known and unknown materials by using field survey instruments and equipment 15. Being able to function within an assigned role in the Incident Command System. 16. Understanding basic chemical and toxicological terminology and behavior. 6.4 Nine Fire Captains are assigned to the Special Operations Team and three (3) are appointed to serve on the Rescue Company and serve on haz-mat companies.

345

a. Haz-Mat Team Coordinator b. Haz-Mat Logistics Officer c. Haz-Mat Training Officer

In addition, these nine officers shall establish a Training Committee, and an Equipment Committee under the direction of the Special Operations Team Coordinator.

6.5 The Equipment Committee, under the direction of the Special Operations Coordinator, shall establish Standard Operating Procedures for the Inspection, Care, Replacement, Repairing, and Storage of-

a. Hazardous Material Protective Clothing b. All equipment assigned to Haz-Mat Operations

6.6: Hazardous Materials Team training shall also address the care, use and/or testing of chemical protective clothing including totally encapsulating suits, the medical surveillance program, the standard operating procedures for the hazardous materials team including the use of plugging and patching equipment and other appropriate subject areas.

6.7: This Team constitutes the department's Hazardous Materials (HAZ-MAT) team defined in Title 29 CFR Section 1910.120 Paragraph (a)(3), and responds to releases or potential releases of hazardous substances for the purpose of control or stabilization of the incident

CHAPTER 7 ON-SCENE ACTIONS

7.1: The First On-Scene Actions should be the completion of all FIRST RE- SPONDER requirements covered in Appendix B. (FIRST RESPONDER SOP)

7-2 The Incident Commander (I.C.) must take immediate steps to identify, assess and monitor any incident involving hazardous materials. The initial decision can have a substantial effect on the outcome, but the assessment may often be made without full information. As new information becomes available, it must be evaluated.

7.3: The I.C. will relay information to the communications center about the hazardous material incident. This information will assist and expedite the alerting process for on-site mitigation activities. Notification of other appropriate city, county state and federal agencies shall be made by the communications center as directed by the Incident Commander.

7.4: The materials involved must be identified so the associated hazards can be determined and proper control measures implemented. Without proper and prompt identification,. accurate corrective actions cannot be undertaken. All unidentified materials should be considered harmful unless they are proven safe. Personnel should never enter the potential dispersion area until the risks are known.

7.5: Upon arrival at the scene, the Hazardous Materials Team personnel should verify any identification or problem assessment conducted by others. It is often appropriate to scan the incident scene with binoculars from an upwind vantage point outside of any immediate potential dispersion zone to conduct a problem assessment or hazard analysis.

346

7.6: When the Hazardous Materials Team is unable to identify the spilled material and its properties, or where the severity of the hazard cannot immediately be ascertained, or the proper course to abate the risk is not clear, the I.C. shall, without delay, seek technical assistance.

7.7: Technical assistance is available from:

1. Reference books and computer resources in the Hazardous Materials Unit 2. The department's technical advisors. 3. The nearest available Poison Control Center. 4. Industry technical representatives. 5. CHEMTREC (1-800-424-9300). 6. Local chemists.

7.8: The I.C., shall determine the need for technical advisors and/or equipment Requests for technical advisors or equipment should be made through the Communications Center. Direct contact with technical advisors is recommended to avoid confusion and save time. This contact can be made through Communication Center telephone "patch" capabilities or a mobile telephone. If on-scene advice is required, the I.C. can request a technical advisor to respond.

7.9: As part of the on-scene size up, the Hazardous Materials Operations officer and the I.C. shall confer regularly, and always before initiating any control actions. The reference materials in the Hazardous Material Unit should be used to assist in determining risk of the materials involved. 7.10: Control of events within the safety perimeter shall be the responsibility of the Hazardous Materials Operations Officer who has been trained and equipped to deal with "hands on" mitigation efforts. (See Haz-Mat SOP Appendix C)

7.11: Immediately after the preliminary size-up, monitoring should be instituted to determine the area of involvement One Hazardous Materials Team member and another individual should be assigned to conduct a survey around the perimeter of the incident. Depending on the size of the incident, more than one team may be needed.

7.12: Monitor readings will be taken around the complete perimeter, especially downhill and downwind.

7.13: The team shall be equipped with positive-pressure self contained breathing apparatus, appropriate protective clothing, suitable monitoring equipment, binoculars and a portable radio. A Polaroid-type camera and cassette tape recorder may also be appropriate.

7.14: 'Monitoring shall be performed in accordance with this paragraph where there may be a question of employee exposure to hazardous concentrations of hazardous substances in order to insure proper selection of engineering controls, work practices and personal protective equipment so that employees are not exposed to levels which exceed permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels for hazardous substances.

7.15: Air monitoring shall be used to identify and quantify airborne levels of hazardous substances and safety and health hazards in order to determine the appropriate level of employee protection needed on site. (See Protective Clothing page 24-26.)

7.16: Upon initial entry representative air monitoring shall be conducted to identify any IDLH condition, exposure permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels, exposure over a radioactive

347

material's dose limits or other dangerous condition such as the presence of flammable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient environments.

7.17: Periodic monitoring shall be conducted when the possibility of an IDLH condition or flammable atmosphere has developed or when there is an indication that exposures may have risen over permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels since prior monitoring. Situations where it shall be considered whether the possibility that exposures have risen are as follows:

1. When work begins on a different portion of the site. 2. When contaminants other than those previously identified are being handled. 3. When a different type of operation is initiated (e.g. drum opening as opposed to exploratory well drilling).4. When employees are handling leaking drums or containers or working in areas with obvious liquid contamination (e.g. a spill or lagoon).

7.18: Protection of emergency response personnel at a hazardous materials incident is paramount The three primary methods to protect personnel are time, distance and shielding. Exposure time of all personnel shall be kept to a minimum, even when personnel are wearing the proper level of protective clothing.

7.19: Proper distance from the hazardous material can be determined by identifying the material involved and assessing the associated hazards using technical references. The incident site should be isolated by establishing hot and warm zones and restricting entry. Shielding includes protective clothing as well as objects.

7.20: All on-scene department personnel shall don appropriate protective equipment and take all necessary steps to avoid contamination of themselves, others, property, and the environment Appropriate protective equipment may include full turnout gear (coat, pants, boots, gloves and helmet) and positive pressure breathing apparatus, when appropriate. The arms, legs, waist and neck areas should be sealed with duct tape. As duty uniform pants do not have a vapor barrier, they do not offer adequate protection at hazardous materials incidents. All personnel should remain upwind from the incident site, unless properly protected and performing a necessary function.

7.21: The I.C. shall take necessary precautions in not exposing response personnel or the public to a potentially hazardous situation. Decisions concerning the incident should be made with the following criteria in mind:

1. Safety of emergency response personnel and the public: a. Fatalities. b. Injuries. 2. Property damage. 3. Critical system disruption (public utilities, transportation.) 4. Environmental damage. 5. Legal implications. 6. Traffic control.

7.22: The primary aspects of spill response include:

1. Rescue. 2. Isolation. 3. Control 4. Exposure protection.

348

7.23: Operations at hazardous materials incidents should be conducted from an upwind location if the incident involves fire or material subject to wind movement. Personnel should keep out of smoke, fumes or dust.

7.24: Remove injured persons from the area with as little direct personal contact as possible. They should be held at a transfer point for first aid. If serious injury has occurred demanding more than first aid measures, the patient should be sent at once to the hospital for medical attention. Medical and ambulance personnel and the receiving hospital must be advised of any possible contamination and/or decontamination solutions and procedures. Persons who may have had contact with the materials should be isolated for examination.

7.25: Incident control zones shall be established to prevent unauthorized persons from entering the area. A prompt evacuation of the threatened area using police and/or other assistance may be required. Protect the public utilizing the recommended distances in the U.S. DOT Emergency Response Guidebook to isolate and/or evacuate people from spill areas. Keep the public as far back from the incident as possible. Prevent souvenir hunting and the handling of debris.

7.26: Consideration for evacuation should include: (See Evacuation Procedures SOP - Appendix 0) 1. Geographic area to be evacuated. 2. Time available for evacuation. 3. Where evacuees should be relocated. 4. Personnel available for evacuation operations: a. Law enforcement b. Firefighters. c. Service organizations. d. National Guard, if at incident site and/or available. e. Local emergency services personnel

7.27: The containment of the spilled material to the smallest possible area will assist in keeping a hazardous materials incident from becoming a hazardous materials emergency. Hazardous and toxic materials should not be flushed into sewer drains, drainage ditches, or any other channel.

7.28: Every effort should be made to prevent the material from entering sewer drains, etc., by diking, plugging or absorbing. Spread sand, dirt, or build a dike ahead of the spill to assist in containment. Containing released materials helps to minimize exposure problems. For incidents requiring the application of water for extinguishing or cooling, any contaminated runoff must be contained for proper disposal

7.29: Ignition sources should be eliminated whenever possible at incidents involving releases, or probable releases of flammable materials. Whenever possible, electronic devices used within the hot zone should be certified as intrinsically safe by recognized organizations. Communication devices used within totally encapsulated protective suits do not need to comply with the above as long as the suit remains pressurized.

7.30: Do not drink, eat or smoke inside the warm line. Do not eat food, drink water, or smoke cigarettes that may have been in contact with material from the incident area. Segregate clothing and tools used at the incident until they can be checked for contamination.

7.31: The Hazardous Materials Unit is not designed to transport hazardous materials, and the department is not equipped to do so. Also, hazardous materials are not to be brought back to

349

departmental facilities or stored on department property without approval from the Operations Chief or Fire Chief.

7.32: Avoid committing personnel and equipment prematurely or "experimenting' with techniques and tactics. Many times it is necessary to evacuate and wait for special equipment or expert help.

7.33: In addition to specific actions, common sense rules should be observed at the scene of hazardous materials incidents.

7.34: An employee alarm system shall be installed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.165 to notify employees of an emergency situation; to stop work activities if necessary; to lower background noise in order to speed communication; and to begin emergency procedures.

Note. The alarm system used by our Department shall be a combination of outside radio speakers on our emergency vehicles and a bullhorn provided for the Safety Officer!!!!!

7.35: See Chapter 12 page 27, for Termination of Incident

7.36: Complete All Reports!! See Chapter 13 page 28.

CHAPTER 8 COMMAND POST (C-P.)

8.1: The Incident Commander (I.C.) should promptly establish a command post Failure to do so will lead to disorganization, which may cause important factors to be overlooked.

8.2: The initial C.P. should be with first-arriving units. As the situation progresses, a more complete C.P. may be required utilizing a designated command post vehicle.

NOTE: HAZ-MAT 1 IS OUR DESIGNATED COMMAND POST VEHICLE, AND WILL BE POSITIONED AT THE DIVIDING LINE OF THE WARM AND COLD ZONE!

8.3: All persons and agencies requested to assist will be directed to the C.P. or staging area, for instructions, directions, assignments and incident information.

8.4: The location of the C.P. should be upwind a safe distance back from the hazardous material incident site, and in the cold zone. The cold zone is the unrestricted area beyond the boundaries of the incident If a C.P. is established, the Communications Center shall be notified immediately of the location and proper entry routes.

8.5: Staffing the C.P. is vitally important In many cases, persons without uniform rank or persons from other departments may be assigned responsibilities. Many of the functions of the C.P. at hazardous materials emergencies are similar to those encountered at a major disaster or fire.

8.6: A Public Information Officer (PIO) should be appointed, when possible, to coordinate all information given to the media and to keep them informed, thus assuring that they do not disrupt the decision makers in the C.P. When the PIO is someone other than the I.C., all information released should be cleared through the I.C.

8.7: The PIO should ask the help of the news media in evacuation operations, in keeping spectators away, an

350

in reporting closed highways or streets and the rerouted traffic patterns. Reports to the media must be correct and complete so that overly sensational material is not disseminated.

8.8: The Incident Commander (I.C.) assumes the primary function of on-scene management and coordination where threat to life and property are concerned. In assumption of this role, the I.C. is responsible for controlling and coordinating all operations related to the incident All necessary personnel and equipment available locally, and through mutual aid, will support the assigned I.C.

CHAPTER 9 STAGING AREA/RESOURCE POOL

9.1: For Level II and III incidents involving hazardous materials, a staging area for apparatus and equipment should be established at a safe location where personnel and equipment can assembled. This area should not be too close to the scene in case the situation unexpectedly increases in intensity. All units dispatched to the incident should be directed to report to the staging area. Responding units should be advised of the staging area location and the appropriate entry route.

9.2: Equipment and personnel already on scene should be moved to the staging area, if not already committed, needed or contaminated.

9.3: The staging area also serves as a rally point for aid coming into an incident site for post disaster support and recovery activities. During this phase of the incident, the staging area may be used as the base for coordinating localized emergency operations.

'9.4: As wind direction and velocity are extremely important, they should be reported as "Wind from the north at 12 mph," or as "Wind from the east at 6 mph." This reporting format indicates the direction that winds are coming from, thus indicating on which side of an incident the staging area should be established. For example, with winds from the north, it stands to reason that the staging area should be established on the north side of the hazardous materials incident so operations are "between" the wind and the material involved.

CHAPTER 10 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENT CONTROL ZONES

10:1 The purpose of implementing hazardous material incident control zones is to: Secure a scene; establish perimeters; maintain safe and efficient control over operating personnel; and to prevent people, vehicles, and resource equipment from entering a threatening situation.

10:2 A hazardous material incident scene may be divided into three separate zones: HOT, WARM and COLD (Safe). The hot zone denotes the area of maximum hazard, the warm zone surrounds and includes the hot zone, and the cold zone is the unrestricted area beyond the boundaries of the warm zone.

10.3: The size and shape of the control zones are influenced by a wide range of variables: physical and chemical properties; quantities of the hazardous material; the size, shape and condition of the container; the dispersion patterns of the material; existing and anticipated weather and wind conditions; and the geographic features surrounding the incident. Incident control zones should be established by the I.C. as soon as possible, using all available technical information (guides and reference manuals) as well as advice from the Hazardous Materials Team.

351

10.4: Minor incidents may only require a small hot zone with traffic cones and officers or firefighters maintaining security. However, if conditions change the I.C. must be prepared to establish hot and warm zones with increased staffing. The influence of natural factors such as weather and geography will often result in irregular shaped zones.

HOT ZONE: 10.5: The hot zone is the area of maximum hazard and should be restricted to essential personnel wearing the proper protective clothing and having a specific activity. Access to the hot zone must be controlled by the department, with entry-exit restricted to one location. Personnel or teams entering the hot zone should have a portable radio.

10.6: Only personnel that are requested by the Hazardous Materials Operations Officer shall be permitted inside the hot zone.

10.7: A minimum number of personnel, as needed, but not less than two shall make up the hot zone mitigation team.

10.8: A decontamination line separates the hot zone from the warm zone. The line is the inner perimeter of the warm zone. Ideally, the decontamination line should be identified using "Hazardous Materials-Do Not Enter' Tape. Other available devices such as traffic cones or natural or man-made barricades (ditches, roads, fences, etc.) may also be used. The decontamination line should be easily recognized and strictly enforced.

10.9: A decontamination area may need to be established between the hot and warm zone. The extent of decontamination will be determined by the products involved and the amount of exposure. All personnel exiting the hot zone must be properly decontaminated, and when necessary, leave their protective clothing in that area. All equipment being removed from the hot zone should be decontaminated, or packaged and properly disposed of. Disposal of equipment requires approval of the Operations Chief, Fire Chief or proper authority owning contaminated equipment

10.10: Due to inclement weather or other pertinent factors, decontamination at the scene may not be possible. In this situation, the nearest suitable designated structure may be used as the decontamination station for personnel and equipment

10.11: Non-department personnel: certain hazardous materials incidents may require use of technical personnel, manufacturer's representatives, shipper or carrier experts, etc., to evaluate hazards and/or perform specific functions inside the Hot Zone. Such operations will only be conducted with the approval of the Incident Commander, and will be under the direct supervision of the Hazardous Materials Operations Officer.

10.12: In most situations there are never enough Hazardous Materials Team members to accomplish all the tasks needed to be completed. A successful operation is contingent on the timely rotation of team members from one activity to another, in addition to using outside manpower to fill in at certain positions.

WARM ZONE:

10.13: The warm zone surrounds the hot zone and is also a restricted area. The level of personal protection required in the warm zone will usually be less than that in the hot zone.

10.14: Within this warm zone, relief, support and security personnel for those working in the hot zone are assembled, and all unauthorized personnel are withdrawn. Only essential personnel should be in this area and as in the hot zone, entry into the warm zone should be restricted to just one location.

352

10.15: The outer perimeter of the warm zone should be appropriately marked. Ropes and/or traffic cones may be used, but are not as effective as the warning tape.

10.16: A staging area should be established and located out of any potential harmful area. COLD ZONE:

10.17: The cold zone is the unrestricted area beyond the outer perimeter of the warm zone. Although the cold zone is considered safe, and the movement of persons is considered unrestricted, with many incidents, it is prudent to keep the area restricted to emergency service personnel, and to keep the public several hundred feet beyond the outer perimeter of the warm zone.

10.18: An access route shall be clearly defined and kept open for the removal of injured civilians or personnel This route will be used for emergency evacuation in the event the incident becomes uncontrollable.

10.19: Due to the complexity of situations involving hazardous materials, specialized job functions must be assigned to insure the safety of all personnel operating at the scene.

SAFETY OFFICER 10.20: The IC shall designate a safety official (recommended by the Haz-Mat Operations Officer), who is knowledgeable in the operations being implemented at the emergency response site, with specific responsibility to identify and evaluate hazards and to provide direction with respect to the safety of operations for the emergency at hand.

10.21: When activities are judged by the safety official to -be an IDLH condition and/or to involve an imminent danger condition, the safety official shall have the authority to alter, suspend, or terminate those activities. The safety official shall immediately inform the individual in charge of the ICS of any actions needed to be taken to correct these hazards at an emergency scene.

10.22: A Safety Officer should assist in establishing incident zones and control personnel entering the hot zone to ensure that everyone is properly protected. The Safety Officer should also assist in establishing the decontamination area and be familiar with the various levels of protective clothing available and medical implications, Of the incident A member of the Hazardous Materials Team would be a desirable Safety Officer.

10.23: The Safety Officer should establish and maintain a log including but not limited to: times of significant occurrences within the hot zone; products involved; names of personnel entering the hot zone; clocking time in and out; protective equipment worn by personnel entering the hot zone; and functions of personnel entering the hot zone. (After the incident all information will be given to the Haz-Mat Training Officer)

10.24: The log will contain essential information should any exposed persons develop health problems in the future. The Safety Officer must be alert to any signs or symptoms of exposure. Medical examinations must be ordered if acute exposure is known or suspected. (See Individual Record of Exposure Form Appendix E)

10.25: Remember that hot and warm zones should have only one entry point The Safety Officer must insure that all personnel and equipment exiting the hot zone are decontaminated. To facilitate decontamination, for each two persons entering the hot zone, at least one person should be assigned to the decontamination team.

353

10.26: Some type of emergency recall signal device such as a hand held air horn or voice amplifier, should be provided to the Safety Officer to immediately notify personnel in the hot zone to withdraw.

10.27: Persons entering the hot zone should be given a number that is easily spotted on their protective clothing to avoid confusion with directions from the perimeter. All withdrawal should take place through the decontamination area.

10.28: The Safety Officer will transmit unsafe acts or conditions through the chain of command or immediately when immediate action is required.

10.29: The Safety Officer should ensure that all other elements of safety are in place and that emergency medical services with transport capabilities are available.

SAFETY TEAM 10.30: A Safety Team must be provided as a rescue or backup team for personnel working in the hot zone. The Safety Team shall be protected at the same level of protection as the team(s) working in the hot zone. Line of sight contact among personnel operating in the hot zone should be maintained. The Safety Team must also visually monitor operating personnel within the hot zone.

10.31: Personnel should be assigned security responsibilities to maintain the integrity of the hot zone. The primary function is to keep all unauthorized persons from entering the hot Zone. Security personnel should be firefighters, but occasions may arise when it is prudent to have law enforcement officers perform security functions for the hot zone, but only if they can be properly protected.

10.32: Security personnel and the Safety Officer for the hot zone must remain out of the hot zone, and be provided with the proper level of protective clothing for the warm zone.

10.33: Security personnel for the warm zone, preferably police, should be strategically positioned outside the outer perimeter of that zone. Their primary functions are to prevent unauthorized persons from entering, and to direct traffic.

EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT (EMT) PERSONNEL

10.34: Emergency medical treatment personnel, preferably advance life support personnel, are responsible for the care of rescued or injured persons. They should be familiar with medical procedures that are specific to the incident.

10.35: EMT personnel may need to establish a triage section, obtain transportation for large numbers of people, and maintain communications with hospitals and the Poison Control Center. The Safety Officer should provide the emergency medical treatment personnel with uncontaminated container labels that can be sent to the hospital with exposed persons.

10.37: All EMT personnel on the scene should be aware of any necessary decontamination procedures. If any contaminated persons require immediate transportation to a hospital, the ambulance personnel and receiving hospital must be advised of the decontamination solutions and procedures. This information is available from container labels, reference books, or the Poison Control Center. For this reason, a well prepared and practiced communication system must be maintained with area hospitals.

354

10.38: Due to the nature of their assignment, Hazardous Materials Team personnel will have a mandated medical surveillance program. 'Medical examinations and consultations shall be made available by the Fire Department to each employee:

1. As soon as possible upon notification by an employee that the employee has developed signs or symptoms indicating possible overexposure to hazardous substances or health hazards, or that the employee has been injured or exposed above the permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels in an emergency situation.

2. For employees who may have been injured, received a health impairment, developed signs or symptoms which may have resulted from exposure to hazardous substances resulting from an emergency incident, or exposed during an emergency incident to hazardous substance at concentrations above the permissible exposure limits or the published exposure levels without the necessary personal protective equipment being used:

a. As soon as possible following the emergency incident or development of signs or symptoms;

b. At additional times, if the examining physician determines that follow-up examinations or consultations are medically necessary.

SEE APPENDIX D - FOR DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES

10.40 Control zones can provide an organized system that will assist the I.C. in properly terminating hazardous materials incidents while maximizing protection of emergency response personnel and civilians.

CHAPTER 11 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

11.1: The need for proper protective clothing and equipment is obvious, but there is no one protective suit that will satisfy this need for protection under all conditions. Hazardous materials can enter the body by inhalation, absorption or ingestion.

11.2: Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus can protect the lungs, gastrointestinal tract and eyes against airborne toxicants.

11.3: Chemical resistant clothing can protect the skin and body systems (blood, nervous system, etc.) from contact with toxic chemicals. Good personal hygiene limits or prevents ingestion of released substances. This includes proper decontamination and strict enforcement of the "no smoking", no eating' rule around hazardous materials.

11.4: The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency has defined four levels of protective clothing for protection against contact with known or anticipated chemical hazards.

1. LEVEL A ENCAPSULATING CLOTHING INCLUDES: a. Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus. b. Encapsulating chemical resistant suit.

355

c. Chemical resistant outer gloves. d. Chemical resistant inner gloves (optional). e. Chemical resistant boots.

2. LEVEL B NON-ENCAPSULATING CLOTHING INCLUDES: a. Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus. b. Chemical resistant clothing, a hooded one or two piece chemical resistant splash suit which may be of the disposable type. c. Chemical resistant outer gloves. d. Chemical resistant inner gloves (optional). e. Chemical resistant boots.

3. LEVEL C CLOTHING INCLUDES: a. Full-face cartridge respirator. b. Chemical resistant clothing, a hooded one or two piece chemical resistant splash suit which may be of the disposable type. c. Chemical resistant outer gloves. d. Chemical resistant inner gloves (optional). e. Chemical resistant boots.

NOTE: Level C offer the same level of skin protection as Level B, but the respiratory protection is less.

4. LEVEL D-WORK CLOTHES (STRUCTURAL FIRE FIGHTING CLOTH- ING) INCLUDES: a. Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus. b. Turn-out coat and pants. c. Helmet d. Boots. e. Gloves.

NOTE: Structural fire fighting clothing does not afford the wearer any protection against chemical contact

11.5: To select the required level of personal protection at a hazardous material incident, the material involved must be identified and the hazards of that material must be determined. In assessing potential hazards, such factors as the physical state of the material (solid, liquid or gas), the degree of exposure (concentrations or amounts), known routes of entry into the body, levels of toxicity, and field conditions must be considered. Proper identification is the foundation upon which all subsequent decision making is based.

11.6: Based upon the results of the preliminary site evaluation, an ensemble of PPE shall be selected and used during initial site entry which will provide protection to a level of exposure below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for known or suspected hazardous substances and health hazards, and which win provide protection against other known and suspected hazards identified during the preliminary site evaluation, If there is no permissible exposure limit or published exposure level, use other published studies and information as a guide to appropriate personal protective equipment

11.7: If the preliminary site evaluation does not produce sufficient information to identify the hazards or suspected hazards of the site, an ensemble providing protection equivalent to Level B PPE shall be

356

provide as minimum protection, and direct reading instruments shall be used as appropriate for identifying IDLH conditions.

11.8: A concentration of a corrosive substance in the air indicates the use of a fully encapsulated suit (Level A), but for non-airborne concentration of chemicals, a hooded, high quality chemical resistant suit (Level B) may provide adequate protection. The selection of encapsulating suits over non encapsulating suits is a judgment that should be made by qualified personnel

11.9: Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suits shall be used in conditions where skin absorption of a hazardous substance may result in a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape.

11.10: The level of protection provided by PPE selection shall be increased when additional information on site conditions indicates that increased protection is necessary to reduce employee exposures below permissible exposure limits and published exposure levels for hazardous substances and health hazards. NOTE: The level of employee protection provided may be decreased when additional information or site conditions show that decreased protection will not result in hazardous exposures to employees.

11.11: Personal protective equipment (PPE) selection shall be based on an evaluation of the performance characteristics of the PPE relative to the requirements and limitations of the site, the task specific conditions and duration, and the hazards and potential hazards identified at the site.

11.12: Whenever engineering controls and work practices are not feasible, personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be used to reduce and maintain employee exposures to or below the permissible exposure limits or dose limits for substances regulated by 29 CFR Part 1910 Subpart Z.

11.13: Personnel not protected with at least Level B (non-encapsulating clothing) shall remain upwind and out of the potential dispersion area until the material has been identified and the proper level of protection has been determined.

11.14: All personnel on the scene must remain alert for individuals in distress while in protective clothing, indicated by both arms raised directly above the head.

11.15: Full protective structural firefighting clothing does not afford the wearer any protection against chemical contact, but can be worn at chemical incidents if the following conditions are met:

1. Unlikely contact due to splashes. 2. Atmospheric concentrations do not contain levels of chemicals toxic through the skin. 3. No adverse effects would occur if the small areas of unprotected skin were contacted by the chemicals. 4. The air is monitored periodically to evaluate levels of contaminant

11.16: Fabric and leather gloves should not be used at hazardous materials incidents as they will absorb liquids resulting in exposure to the chemicals. Depending on the materials involved, and other factors such as length of contact time, it may be necessary to discard all protective clothing worn by emergency response personnel

357

11.17: There will be incidents involving hazardous materials where structural fire fighting clothing will not provide adequate protection. The hazards of many materials and their potential harm will require donning special protective clothing. Simply defined, "special protective clothing refers to clothing specially designed to protect against a specific hazard."

11.18: A variety of materials are used to make the fabric from which clothing is manufactured. Each material will provide protection against certain specified chemical or mixtures of chemicals. It may afford little or no protection against certain other chemicals. It is most important to note that there is no material that provides satisfactory protection from all chemicals.

11.19: The level of protective clothing for the Hot and Warm Zones shall be specified by the Hazardous Materials Operations Officer.

11.20: The Haz-Mat Operations Officer shall not implement a schedule of employee rotation as a means of compliance with permissible exposure levels or dose limits except where there is no other feasible way of complying with the airborne or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation.

11.21: When deemed necessary for meeting the tasks at hand, approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus may be used with approved cylinders from other approved self-contained compressed air breathing apparatus provided that such cylinders are of the same capacity and pressure rating. All compressed air cylinders used with self contained breathing apparatus shall meet U.S. Department of Transportation and National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health criteria.

11.22: Positive pressure self-contained breathing apparatus, or positive pressure air-line respirators equipped with an escape air supply, shall be used when chemical exposure levels present will create a substantial possibility of immediate death, immediate serious illness or injury, or impair the ability to escape.

CHAPTER 12 TERMINATION OF INCIDENT

12.1: The I.C. shall ensure the hazardous material is properly contained for subsequent and proper disposal, shall make every possible effort to locate the responsible party for a spill or incident, and request that they take prompt and appropriate remedial actions. The responsible party shall make the contact for clean-up or removal of the material. The cost of containment, clean up, disposal and restoration shall be borne by the spiller.

12.2: The I.C. will take action as necessary to ensure restoration of the scene to a normal condition after the emergency.

12.3: The role of the Gastonia Fire Departments Hazardous Material Team is NOT to cleanup, but to stabilize the incident Only the Incident Commander can approve department active involvement in clean- up of hazardous materials. Under no condition will any hazardous materials be removed from the scene by the Haz-Mat Team, without proper approval from the Operations Chief or Fire Chief.

12.4: As previously noted under RESPONSIBILITY:

"When the responsible party cannot be identified or has been identified but is

358

unable to have cleanup performed in a reasonable period, assistance from Gaston County Department of Emergency Management shall be requested."

CHAPTER 13 INCIDENT ANALYSIS AND REPORTS

POST ACTION REVIEW 13.1: Prior to leaving the scene of a Level I occurrence, a post-action review of individual actions and significant factors concerning the incident should be conducted by the I.C. with the Hazardous Materials Team (if the Team responds) and/or other involved personnel For Level II and Level III incidents, it may be more appropriate to conduct this review away from the scene.

POST INCIDENT ASSESSMENT

13.2: A post incident assessment of Level II and III occurrences (pia) should be scheduled as soon as practicable after each hazardous materials incident The objective of the assessment is to identify both strong and weak points of the command and control functions. Officers who participated at the incident along with other interested department personnel should attend. Pictures, color slides, video tapes, and news clips could be used in the assessment

REPORTS 13.3: An incident report, to include an itemized list and cost of contaminated equipment, is to be made when applicable.

13.4: An after-action incident report shall be compiled and prepared as directed by the Incident Commander. This report will include data submitted by the involved departments; summarize salient topics of discussion during the post action review; be objective (no fault) in nature; and emphasize lessons learned.

13.5: "Incident Site Log; Upon arriving at the scene, The Incident Commander shall designate a Recorder/Incident Commanders Aid to record all activities relating to the incident This log shall be maintained for future reference, and as a minimum shall contain the following: (This designated person shall remain with the Incident Commander throughout the incident A log book shall be maintained in Bat 1. A second log book shall be maintained in HM-4 for incident recording in the absence of Bat 1)

a. Location. b. Date. c. Name, description, source, quantity and cause of release. d. Weather information. e. Names and job assignments for all personnel involved. f. Injuries to personnel and public. g. Corrective action taken. h. Chronological recording of events. i. Times of all activities to be recorded. 1.entry and exit of hot zone 2.arriving agencies 3.all Command Decisions by Incident Commander j. Method of recording exposure of personnel to hazardous materials. lc Resource personnel data." 1. Incident checklist to be used with log book!

359

APPENDIX A USING THIS OPERATING GUIDE

A. 1: This hazardous materials operating guide is written to meet the requirements of 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1910.120 and the North Carolina Occupational Safety and Health Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response Standard. (13 North Carolina Administration Code 7C.0101 (a) (26) which is identical to 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1910.120.)

A.2: All agencies that may respond to a hazardous material emergency are mandated to formulate emergency response procedures. The procedures must be based on the above standards (A.I:) so all response plans will be similar in nature. Departments throughout the nation have been working on these standards and many have adopted Hazardous Materials Response Plans at this time. As other departments have done, we have compiled information from within our department and from other emergency response organizations. The majority of this Hazardous Materials Response Plan was based on the Arizona Department of Public Safety Hazardous Materials Operating Guide (2 /90).

A.3: As hazardous materials operating procedures for law enforcement agencies are relatively scarce, the Arizona document was prepared based upon a compilation of the best major fire department written procedures available in the nation. Because of the degree to which it matched those major topic areas applicable to the hazardous materials operations of the Arizona Department of Public Safety, their document was patterned directly after the San Francisco Fire Department Hazardous Materials operating guide, 1984. In almost every instance, the San Francisco Fire Departments guide required only superficial modification.

A.4: As with the San Francisco Fire Department Guide, the Arizona Department of Public Safety Guide required little modification. Specific terminology, laws, and/or departmental policy where added or changed in the Arizona guide to meet our local and state requirements. Even though little modification was required in the Arizona plan, considerable ADDITIONS were added. These additions cover more specific and detailed information needed by FIRE DEPARTMENT OPERATIONS and the HAZMAT TEAM at a hazardous materials incident

A.5: This guide should be used any time that a suspected hazardous material spill or release occurs and our department responds to the incident!!

A.6: Once the plan is activated as explained in Chapter #2 (page 5), all responding personnel should:

A. Complete all requirements listed in Appendix B for First Responders!! If First Responders can handle the response, then complete First Responder procedures (SOP) and terminate the incident

B. If The Haz-Mat Team is needed to handle the response, Team members should turn to Chapter 7 page 13 and continue with On-Scene Actions

C. Follow the guidelines and information provided in each chapter and appendices as listed in the table of contents

A.7: DISTRIBUTION: 360

A. All Fire Department Personnel B. City of Gastonia Safety Director C. Technical Advisors to Haz-Mat Team B. One Copy to Police Department for distribution to Police Officers by Police Operations.

A.8: Acknowledgement is extended to the following departments for their assistance in producing this document, and the information derived from their procedures:

Arizona Department of Public Safety –(Highway Patrol Bureau-Special Services Division)

Charlotte Fire Department

Prince George's County Fire Department

Fairfax County Fire and Rescue Department

Houston Fire Department

Philadelphia Fire Department

City of New York Fire Department

Boston Fire Department

Chicago Fire Department

City and County of Denver Department of Fire

Los Angeles City Fire Department

Los Angeles County Fire Department

Phoenix Fire Department

APPENDIX B

FIRST RESPONDER (LEVEL I)- STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES

AWARENESS LEVEL......

H.1: Action should be avoided until the product is identified and @ hazards known. No-action, if product cannot be identified and/or personnel cannot perform control action safely:

1. Isolate immediate release area. 2. Maintain perimeter control/perform necessary functions listed below in H.4. 3. Await arrival of Fire Dept Units or Hazardous Material Team.

H.2: First arriving units will begin to size-up and consciously avoid committing to any potentially dangerous situation. When approaching, slow down- or stop to assess any visible activity taking place. 361

H.3: REMEMBER, QUICK AGGRESSIVE ACTION HAS NO PLACE AT A HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENT, and may only lead to unnecessary exposure of personnel. Often times the proper action decided upon may be to take NO ACTION beyond keeping department and civilian personnel at a safe distance. There may be situations where NO ACTION will be the only safe action for first arriving units to take because of lack of proper protective clothing.

H.4: There are certain functions which the first responder must accomplish at the scene of the release of known or suspected hazardous materials. The first arriving unit shall:

1. Approach the incident location from upwind and uphill.

2. Position vehicle back from the incident location.

3. Avoid entering or close approach to any vapors or smoke.

4. Consider all unidentified containers or released products (including smoke) as a hazardous material until identified as non-hazardous.

5. Assess the incident from a distance.

6. Identity the type of incident:

a. Hazardous material release with fire. b. Hazardous material release with no fire. c. Hazardous material involved, no release apparent, with fire. d. Hazardous material involved, no release apparent, no fire.

7. Advise the Communications Center and other responding units of type of incident and appropriate response entry route or location of staging area.

8. Identify or categorize released product if safe to do so:

a. Visual observations/markings & colors/container shape. b. Verbal information. c. Placards, labels and /or shipping papers.

9. Get as much information regarding the incident as possible

10. Notify the Communications Center of the situation and product involved.

11. Utilize the U.S. DOT Emergency Response Guidebook for recommended actions. (Chemtrec 1800-434-9300).

12. Request indicated assistance.

a. Fire department units. b. Hazardous Materials Team (automatically dispatched on Level II and Level III incidents) c. Additional law enforcement: (1) Traffic control (2) Perimeter control

362

(3) Evacuation d. Technical support: (1) Department technical advisors (2) Poison Control Center (3) Ambulance (4) Monitoring equipment

13. Protection measures:

a. Personnel upwind /uphill b. Vehicle upwind /uphill c. Distance d. Avoid contact with released product e. Avoid action until product identified and hazards known Use personal protective equipment

14. Site Management: Rescue, Isolate, Control, Exposures (RICE): 1. (See Chapter 3 page 6 - Scene Management) 2. (See Appendix N - Incident Command Procedures) a. Rescue (1) If immediate rescue is indicated, perform only with awareness of hazard and minimum number of personnel required. Avoid as much personal contact as possible.

(2) Rescue should only be attempted when risk to personnel is known. Use caution, do not become a casualty yourself.

(3) When the hazard is unknown, rescue should not be initiated until the Hazardous Materials Team has assessed the situation.

b. Isolate immediate release area. Establish incident control zones, (See Chapter 10 page 19 - Incident Control Zones) and establish the Initial Command Post - (See Chapter 8 page 17 for instructions

(1) Evacuate as necessary. Based on past experiences, evacuation distances of up to 2,000 feet in every direction should be considered. (U.S. DOT 1999 EMERGENCY RESPONSE GUIDEBOOK evacuation distances shall be used, if available).

(2) Isolation and evacuation should be accomplished in increments. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems in exposed buildings may need to be shut down. Consider movement of people in exposed buildings to the far side of the building and then evacuate.

(3) Deny entry to people / vehicles.

OPERATIONS LEVEL......

Additional Actions for Fire Department Personnel (operations level) c. Control: (1) Confine /contain product to as small an area as possible. 363

(2) Prevent container failure.

d. Exposures:

(1) Protect exposures. (2) Attempt to extinguish fires if appropriate and safe. (3) Contain contaminated runoff if practical. (4) Prevent hazardous and toxic materials from entering sewers, etc., if practical.

15. First Responders (Operations Level) should determine, if the hazardous material has been identified, associated hazards determined and proper control measures implemented. After this evaluation, the IC must determine if recovery and cleanup by the spiller and/or termination of the incident, should began. If First Responders are terminating the incident turn to Chapter 12page 27 (Termination of incident)

16. If additional actions are needed, the Haz-Mat Team should be requested to respond (if not at the incident) and follow their standard operating procedures, while (See appendix C- Hazardous Materials Team SOP)

CONTINUING WITH ADDITIONAL ON-SCENE ACTIONS ON PAGE 13; CHAPTER 7 See training requirements on next page (B-4)!

TRAINING

First Responder Levels:

A. Police: Response by Police Officers will be at the awareness level and shall meet all requirements of 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1910.120 (q) (6) (i).

All required training for Police personnel will be arranged by the Police Department.

B. Firefighters: Response by Firefighters will be at the operations level and shall meet all requirements of 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1910.120 (q) (6) (ii).

All required training for Fire personnel will be arranged by the Fire Department.

APPENDIX C Hazardous Materials Team (Level 11) - Standard Operating Procedures

A: Introduction:

This procedure establishes guidelines for response and operations of the Hazardous Materials (Haz-Mat) Response Team.

The purpose of the Haz-Mat Response Team is to provide the Gastonia Fire Department with a technically trained and specially equipped group of personnel to assist in the successful mitigation of emergencies involving hazardous materials.

364

Functions and responsibilities of the Haz-Mat Response Team will include:

(a) Development and analysis of technical information to assist in decision making.

(b) Development and analysis of tactical options and solutions to incident problems.

(c) Use of specialized personal protective clothing and equipment, including Level A chemical protective clothing.

(d) Supervise and coordinate all Haz-Mat Sector operations under the overall command of the Incident Commander.

RESPONSE TEAM OPERATIONS:

The Haz-Mat Response Team will be alerted to respond to haz-mat incidents under the following conditions: See Chapter 5 Page 10 of this Guide.

B: Response Team Organizational Structure

Gastonia Fire Departments Hazardous Materials Response Team will be under the direction of the Haz-Mat Team Coordinator, who will report to the Operations Chief The Level 11 Haz-Mat Response Team shall be divided into three (3) shifts. Each shift shall be comprised of a shift leader (Haz- Mat Operations Officer), an alternate shift officer, and additional members as determined by the Fire Chief.

The Haz-Mat Coordinator shall be responsible for establishing a rotating call-back list for each shift

Haz-Mat Team Members shall be available for response at any emergency and at no time shall be a member of any other Hazardous Materials Response Team.

INCIDENT COMMAND: The Haz-Mat Branch will report directly to the IC.

C: Response Team Personnel Assignments

The Haz-Mat Operations Officer will function as the liaison between all HazMat Branch Operations and the Incident Commander.

The Haz-Mat Operations Officer will be responsible for assigning the following positions and/or responsibilities on all working incidents. Orange vests indicating the respective assigned positions will be obtained from HAZ-MAT # 1 along with the appropriate checklist, and will be utilized throughout the incident:

1. Information/Reference Officer - Responsible for the assembly and analysis of all technical reference materials, incident data and other resources (Including interviews of technical information sources and representatives). Shall make recommendations concerning protective clothing and equipment, mitigation procedures, and evacuation distances.

2. Haz-Mat Safety Officer - Responsible for the health and safety of all personnel operating within the hot and warm control zones. Shall observe operations for unsafe conditions and

365

retains authority to order those personnel back to the perimeter of the hot zone. Shall remain in constant contact with the Haz-Mat Operations Officer and the Incident Safety Officer, as well as maintain a log of exposure times for each individual operating within the hot zone.

3. Reconnaissance(Recon Officer) And Entry Officer - Responsible for the physical reconnaissance of the problem area, including all entry operations, where safely possible. Shall document and report to the Haz-Mat Operations Officer the presence of potential life and environmental hazards, including run-off, escape routes, terrain conditions, etc.

4. Resource Officer - Responsible for the control of all tools and equipment used during hot zone operations. Shall document the use of all expendable items, as necessary. This position may be delegated to Level I personnel, if necessary.

5. Decontamination (Decon Officer) - Responsible for implementation of the decontamination standard operating procedure, as necessary. Shall coordinate all decon activities with the Haz-Mat Operations Officer and the Emergency Medical Officer from the time at which entry operations commence until the incident is terminated.

All remaining Level II personnel shall perform specific assignments as designated by the Haz- Mat Operation Officer, utilizing the appropriate level of personal protective clothing.

D: Incident Management

On all haz-mat incidents, the Incident Commander shall remain in charge of the incident in accordance with this Guide.

The Haz-Mat Operations Officer shall:

1. Begin supervision and coordination of all hazardous materials operations through the Incident Commander.

2. Develop tactical options and solutions for the problem at hand for evaluation by the Incident Commander.

All Hazardous Materials incidents shall be managed according to the following eight- step procedures:

1. Site Management and Control-Isolate the area and deny entry

2. Identify the materials) involved.

3. Evaluate hazards and risks.

4. Evaluate protective clothing and equipment

5. Coordinate information and resources.

6. Hazardous materials control, containment and confinement

7. Decontamination procedures.

8. Incident termination (debrief /document /pia).

366

The skills and training of the Hazardous Materials Team should be utilized to the fullest extent, and duties not requiring these skills shall be assigned to others.

Control of events within the safety perimeter shall be the responsibility of the Hazardous Materials Operations Officer who has been trained and equipped to deal with "hands on" mitigation efforts.

All members of the Hazardous Materials Team dispatched to an incident must be kept intact as one unit to fulfill team responsibility and maintain the required level of personnel safety. It is the responsibility of the Incident Commander to insure that this requirement is being met during all phases of a "working" hazardous materials incident

Provide technical expertise, equipment and assistance at the incident and perform duties as directed by the Incident Commander.

Establishing zones:

The first arriving engine company shall establish a security zone for the safety and protection of personnel The Haz-Mat Operations Officer shall evaluate the zones established by the first arriving engine company and recommend any necessary changes to the IC.

Zones may be decreased or increased depending on the type of product(s) and shall be established by using monitors.

Zones shall be monitored throughout the operation and shall be up-graded as necessary.

The following considerations apply to all operations conducted in the hot zone:

1. Entry into the hot zone shall be restricted to hazardous materials-trained personnel or individuals possessing particular knowledge of the problem or situation, under monitored conditions. All personnel shall be in the appropriate type and level of protective clothing and will function under the direct control of the Haz-Mat Operations Officer.

2. Prior to donning protective clothing, personnel shall remove personal belongings, (i.e., wallets, watches, jewelry, etc.) as necessary. These items shall then be locked in a secure compartment on HAZ-MAT # 3.

3. The type and level of protective clothing for the hot and warm zones shall be specified by the Haz-Mat Operations Officer with respect to recommendations received from the team member serving as "Information".

4. The team member serving as the Haz-Mat Safety Officer ('Haz-Mat Safety") shall be positioned in the warm zone at the entry point into the hot zone.

5. All entry and reconnaissance operations shall be conducted utilizing a minimum of two personnel each; a primary entry team (designated as "Entry One') and a back-up entry team (designated as "Entry Two"). Entry Team Two shall remain at the perimeter of the hot zone until needed.

367

All entry operations will operate on the foreground radio frequency which is separate from that used by other responding units (i.e., North side incident with mobile units on assigned Channel , and all entry operations will work on Channel 10).

6. Prior to entry into the hot zone all entry teams shall receive a briefing session. Subject matter shall include expected conditions, objectives of the entry operation, control techniques and procedures, decontamination operations and any pertinent emergency procedures as the situation warrants.

7. Maximum working times for operations shall be determined by environmental conditions and the type of respiratory protection selected, as follows:

a. 30 minute SCBA - 20 minute working time b. 60 minute SCBA - 45 minute working time c. 4 hour SCBA - as determined by the Haz-Mat Operations Officer

8. For operations inside of structures or confined areas, a complete search shall be made of the designated hazard areas to collect as much data as possible.

9. All personnel on the scene must remain alert for possible members in distress while in protective clothing. The emergency distress signal is indicated by waving both arms directly above the head.

All zones shall be clearly marked; HOT ZONE. WARM ZONE, COLD ZONE, STAGING ZONE.

a. Hot Zone: (1) Hazardous materials tape (To divide Hot & Warm Zones) (2) Traffic cones (3) Barricades (4) Ropes (5) Personnel b. Warm Zone: (1) Fire line tape (To divide Warm & Cold Zones) (2) Police personnel c. Hot Zone Control: Direct supervision of all Hot Zone operations.

E: identification /confirmation.

1. Identify the product a. Engine company already on scene b. Knowledgeable Personnel 1. Owner 2. Plant Manager 3. Hauler 4. Others that may be of help c. Haz-mat Recon d. Reference Material 1. Chris Manuals

368

2. D.O.T. Handbook 3. M.S.D.S. Material 4. Chemtrec

All effort shall be made to identify the product before any type of control, confinement, or containment on the product is attempted.

F: Hazard Assessment:

A. Visualize likely behavior without intervention. B. Understand, track and predict given sequence of events. C. Factors governing the severity of an incident include:

(1) Intrinsic properties of the material (a) Flammability (b) Toxicity (c) Instability (2) Dispersive energy of the material (a) Pressure (b) Temperature (c) State of matter (3) Quantity present (4) Size and condition of container (5) Environmental factors (a) Topography (b) Weather (6) Population density

D. Determine potential harm: (1) Fatalities - (2) Injuries (chronic/acute) (3) Property damage (4) Critical system disruption (5) Environmental damage (6) Legal implications E. Monitor area.

Determine response objectives:

a. Team meeting b. Consult technical references c. Consult with technical experts d. Advise I.C. of recommendations/situation e. Interface with other agencies

G: Protective Clothing and Dressing Procedures:

(i) Determine proper level of protective clothing and implement:

A. All criteria in Chapter I 1 (Protective Clothing) must be met B. See Appendix B for complete description

369

(1) Level A: To be used when the greatest level of skin, respiratory, and eye protection is required. (a) Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) 4500 psi (b) Totally encapsulating chemical-protective suit (c) Gloves, inner and outer, chemical-resistant (d) Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank (e) Hard hat (under suit)

Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots, depending on suit construction, may be worn over totally- encapsulating suit

(2) Level B: The highest level of respiratory protection is necessary, but a lesser level of skin protection is needed.

(a) Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) 4500 psi (b) Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; one or two piece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical- resistant overalls) (c) Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant (d) Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant

(3) Level C: The concentrations) and type(s) of airborne substances) is known and the criteria for using air purifying respirators are met (G. F. D. HAZ-MAT PERSONNEL WILL USE SCBA)

(a) Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) 4500 psi (b) Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (coveralls; two piece chemical-splash; disposable chemical-resistant overalls) (c) Coveralls (d) Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant (e) Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant (f) Boots, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank

Entry team checklist shall be completed before entry! (see appendix E for Haz-Mat Entry Sector checklist)

( i ) PREPARATION FOR ENTRY: [Haz-Mat Entry Officer]

All entry personnel, will make connections and go on their SCBA air supply, at the same time, by using a sequence of commands.

Operations personnel may be assigned to assist in the dressing of entry personnel. Boots, gloves, and seams shall be tapped before entry is made.

Entry and work will be by the buddy system.

In the event, the work team is out of sight, a third person shall enter with the work team for safety. It will be the responsibility of the third person to maintain visual contact with the work team and the standby team.

Blood Pressure and Pulse shall be taken and recorded before any entry is made and after work assignment is completed.

370

The EMS Officer/Entry Officer shall record all information of Blood Pressure and Pulse of All DRESSED PERSONNEL.

Once entry is made, no exit of the hot zone shall be made without first entering the decontamination stations.

Support team shall escort work team from decon to Hazmat Command for undressing work team. NOTE: (Blood Pressure and Pulse shall be taken at this time and recorded.)

No re-entry shall be made without a rest period. (Exception: It may be necessary to re-enter the work area, if this is warranted the entry team must enter and proceed through the first two stations of decon. At such time a resupply of air may be made at the decon area. Decon personnel shall make this change in air supply off tire side of the decon station. Suits may not allow this procedure to take place.)

( iii) AIR TIME-KEEPER

The air time-keeper (appointed by the Haz-Mat Operations Officer) shall compute work time and shall convey this information to the entry team.

Example: Convert air pressure into minutes..4500 P.S.I. /100 = 45 min.

45 minutes minus 6 minutes for entry, exit, and decon...... 45 - 6 = 39 MINUTES OF ACTUAL WORK TIME AT ENTRY.

The air time-keeper shall vocalize loudly the time remaining starting at the lowest time/air pressure. Stating: 39, 38, 37, 36, 35, etc, until time remaining is 5 minutes. At this time, the air time-keeper shall vocalize safety 5, safety 4, safety 3, safety 2, safety 1.

The entry work team has exhausted their work time and must exit at this time.

At the time of safety 5, this time gives the work team a total of 1 minutes to exit the hot zone and enter the decon for decontamination and undressing before their air supply runs out. The air time-keeper shall record all information and shall turn this information over to the HazMat Operations Officer. The air time-keeper shall use the AIR-TIME FORM attached to the Haz-Mat Safety Sectors Checklist.

H: Establish resource requirements: a. Fire department b. Additional Law Enforcement c. Technical experts d. Special equipment/apparatus e. Clean-up contractor

Control release: a. Safety of personnel and public paramount b. Keep released product to as small an area as possible: (1) Avoid contact with released product or vapors (2) Eliminate ignition sources (3) Catch leaking product in a container 371

(4) Confine released product (5) Secure drains (6) Shut off valves (7) Cover to suppress vapors /hold down solids (8) Absorb vapors with water fog (9) Secure breached container

J: Decontaminate:

On all Level II & III incidents, a Decontamination Officer (designated "Decon") shall be appointed by the Haz-Mat Operations Officer. Prior to committing personnel and equipment into the hot zone, the Haz-Mat Operations Officer, Information, and Decon shall determine whether or not decontamination resources available will be adequate for the materials involved. If inadequate, a non-intervention course of action may be indicated.

If resources are judged to be suitable, preparation of the decontamination area should commence prior to any entry operations. The intent is to have the necessary equipment in readiness should an entry team member need to exit the hot zone prior to his/her normal egress time. The Decon Officer shall serve as the Level 11 Team Liaison to EMS personnel involved in supporting all haz-mat entry and decontamination operations.

a. Establish decontamination area, normally within the Warm Zone b. Personnel c. Equipment d. Apparatus e. Conduct medical evaluation /follow up f See appendix D for decontamination procedures K: Terminate:

Once operations have been completed, all Level 11 team members shall assemble at HM 21. A short debriefing/discussion session will be conducted, comments recorded and information distributed regarding the hazardous materials involved. personnel exposure times and any follow-up medical information.

a. Interface with clean-up personnel b. Critique

T RA I N l N G

Hazardous Materials Team: All members of the Hazardous Materials Team will be at the HAZARDOUS MATERIALS TECHNICIAN level and shall meet all requirements of 29 Code of Federal Regulations 1910.120 (q)(6)(iii).

All required training for Haz-Mat Team Members will be the responsibility of the Fire Departments, Hazardous Materials Training Committee, under the direction of the Haz-Mat Team Coordinator.

The INCIDENT COMMAND STRUCTURE for the Hazardous Materials Team shall be as follows:

372

Incident Commander

Haz – Mat Team Branch Operations Officer Haz – Mat Safety

Fire Operations Branch Haz – Mat Team

Staging Decon

Monitoring Entry/Recon

Resource Fire Diking Foam Lines Etc. Dressing Suppression

Information/Reference

APPENDIX D

DECONTAMINATION

D.1 All employees leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately decontaminated; all contaminated clothing and equipment leaving a contaminated area shall be appropriately disposed of or decontaminated.

D.2 Decontamination procedures shall be monitored by the site safety and health supervisor to determine their effectiveness. When such procedures are found to be ineffective, appropriate steps shall be taken to correct any deficiencies.

D.3: Location. Decontamination shall be performed in geographical areas that will minimize the exposure of uncontaminated employees or equipment to contaminated employees or equipment

D.4: Equipment and solvents. All equipment and solvents used for decontamination shall be decontaminated or disposed of property.

D.5: Personal protective clothing and equipment:

373

A. Protective clothing and equipment shall be decontaminated, cleaned, laundered, maintained or replaced as needed to maintain their effectiveness.

B. Employees whose non-impermeable clothing becomes wetted with hazardous substances shall immediately remove that clothing and proceed to shower. The clothing shall be disposed of or decontaminated before it is removed from the work zone.

D.6: Unauthorized employees. Unauthorized employees shall not remove protective clothing or equipment from changing rooms.

D.7: Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments. Commercial laundries or cleaning establishments that decontaminate protective clothing or equipment shall be informed of the potentially harmful effects of exposures to hazardous substances.

D.8: "Showers and change rooms. Where the decontamination procedure indicates a need for regular showers and change rooms outside of a contaminated area, they shall be provided and meet the requirements of Title 29 CFR 1910.141. If temperature conditions prevent the effective use of water, then other effective means for cleaning shall be provided and used.

D.9: Decontamination procedures should begin upon arrival at the scene, should provide for an adequate number of decontamination personnel, and continue until the Incident Commander determines that decontamination procedures are no longer required. Decontamination of victims may be required.

D. 10: Using solutions containing chemicals to alter or change contaminants to less hazardous materials should be done only after consultation with persons experienced and familiar with the hazards involved. The use of detergent-water washing solutions is more prevalent Its effectiveness against certain contaminants may be low, but it is less risky than using chemical solutions.

DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES OBJECTIVE

To establish a procedure in manning, establishing the station, and the decontamination of hazmat entry personnel, as well as incident victims and tools.

DISCUSSION

The decontamination team shall consist of trained engine company personnel. The decon station shall be established before entry is made.

The Hazmat Operations Officer shall have the option to appoint a hazmat member in charge of decon.

Decontamination personnel shall dress the same or one (1) level below the hazmat entry team.

Decontamination personnel shall at all times wear SCBA's during decon operation of personnel, tools, equipment; and victims.

Decontamination operations shall be a four (4) stage operation. This shall be deemed as the basic decon station. 374

STAGE ONE

This shall be the deluge shower located inside the Hot Zone approximately three feet inside the established zone line.

Decon personnel will not be inside the hot zone unless the situation should dictate. 1. Pumping waste water. 2. Entry personnel in trouble at deluge. 3. Setting deluge up before operations begin.

STAGE TWO

Stage two shall serve as a decon station, and as a resupply for air for re-entry.

STAGE THREE

For wash and rinse or the appropriate solution for decon procedures.

STAGE FOUR

For wash and rinse or the appropriate solution for decon procedures.

EQUIPMENT

The equipment listed shall be for the basic deconning at a hazardous materials incident

-Deluge Shower

-Four inflatable pools

-2Ox4O ft polyurethane pad -4x4 ft polyurethane pad tool drop (inside hot zone) -8x10 ft polyurethane pad (air exchange) -18x30 ft containment dike -Plastic liners -Disposable protective equipment container -Tool drop container -Waste labels -Decon solutions -50 ft garden hose, nozzle, wye, reducer, pressure relief valve -Decon workers personal protective clothing and equipment -Absorbent material, banner tape, traffic cones

The officer in charge of the decon operation shall draw a imaginary line down the center of the decon station, dividing it into a clean side and a dirty side.

Clean Side - Being the side for the air exchange and unused equipment

Dirty Side - Being the side for the location of all containers and disposables.

Health and Safety Hazards - Decon Solutions and Techniques

375

Decontamination is performed to protect health and safety, it can pose hazards under certain circumstances. Decon method may:

1. Be incompatible with the hazardous substances being removed. The decon method may react with contaminants to produce an explosion, heat or toxic products.

2. Be incompatible with the protective clothing being decontaminated. Some organic solvents can permeate and/or degrade protective clothing.

3. Pose a direct health hazard to workers. Vapors from chemical decon solutions may be hazardous if inhaled, or they may be flammable.

Testing for the Effectiveness of Decon

The effectiveness of any decon method should be assessed at the beginning of an operation and periodically throughout the operation. If contaminated materials are not being removed or are penetrating protective clothing, the decon operation must be revised. The following methods may be useful in assessing the effectiveness of decon.

1. Visual observation for discoloration, stains, corrosive effects, visible waste, alterations in fabric. 2. Ultraviolet light 3. Chemical wipe sampling. 4. Monitoring devices. 5. Testing for permeation.

Personal Protection of Decon Workers and Disposal Methods Appropriate equipment and clothing for protecting decon personnel will be selected by the Hazmat Operations Officer. All equipment used for decon must be decontaminated and/or disposed of properly. Buckets, brushes, clothing, tools and other contaminated equipment should be collected, placed into containers and labeled. Also, all spent solutions should be collected and disposed of properly. Clothing that is not completely decontaminated should be placed into plastic bags, pending further decon and/or disposal.

All decon workers must themselves be decontaminated before entering into the clean zone. The extent of their decon should be determined by the types of contaminants they may have contacted and type of work they may perform.

Emergency Decontamination

In addition to routine decon procedures, emergency decon procedures must be established. In an emergency, the primary concern is to prevent the loss of life or severe injury to site personnel. If immediate medical treatment is required to save a life, decon can be, in some cases, delayed until the victim is stabilized. If decon can be performed without interfering with essential life-saving techniques or first aid, or if a worker has been contaminated with an extremely dangerous material that could cause severe injury or loss of life, decon must be performed immediately. If an emergency due to a heat-related illness develops, protective clothing can be removed in some cases from the victims as soon as possible to reduce the heat stress. During an emergency, provisions must also be made for protecting medical personnel and disposing of contaminated clothing and equipment

376

APPENDIX D

DECON AREA

RUPTURED (SPILL)VESSEL

HOT ZONE  wind direction

TOOL DROP

DELUG 4 X 4 FT. E 3 FT.

TOOL DROP 3 FT. WARM ZONE (Clean Side)

AIR EXCHAN GE WASH &

RINSE 8 X 10 FT

DISPOSABLE EQUIPMENT WASH &

RINSE 40 FT.

WASH & PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT RINSE

20 FT.

377

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operational Guideline NO. 25.50.01 Approved By: Phil Welch Effective Date: August 5, 2010 Rescinds: Subject: Rapid Intervention Team

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of the Rapid Intervention Team (RIT) is to immediately be available to assist a fire fighter who becomes trapped or distressed. This guideline will apply to all personnel who are required to enter hazardous environments that present an immediate danger to life and health (IDLH). There is a narrow window of survivability for a firefighter who has consumed his/her air supply or trapped. This procedure will allow the department to meet the standard presented by NFPA 1407 and uphold the expectations of every firefighter that might find him or herself in a MAYDAY situation.

II. DISCUSSION

A. This document outlines the department’s procedure for the establishment of a Rapid Intervention Team (RIT). This procedure is written to comply with NFPA 1407 the Standard for Training Fire Service Rapid Intervention Crews, 2010 Edition. This procedure shall lay out the requirements for training, the qualifications of personnel as well as list of equipment required for such a situation. Fire and rescue companies designated as a Rapid Intervention Team (RIT) will meet the requirements laid out by the procedure and function within the perimeters of its performance indicators.

III. PROCEDURE

A. This Procedure will apply to all emergency operations where a Rapid Intervention Team (RIT) has been dispatched or needed. Compliance of this procedure shall result in following the NFPA 1407 standard.

IV. NOTIFICATION / ACTIVATION OF RIT

A Rapid Intervention Team (RIT) will be dispatched by the Battalion Chief or self dispatched as defined below: A. If the dispatcher has received more than one report of a significant incident (i.e. structure fire, building collapse, confines space, etc.) or whenever an IC/RIT Officer determines its need they shall be dispatched immediately. The activation and dispatch of a RIT unit is not considered part of the initial box alarm assignment, Therefore, The dedicated RIT unit will be the fifth unit on a working box alarm.

378

V. Establishment of RIT

A RIT will be established by the Incident Commander (IC) and/or RIT Officer.

A. The Incident Commander (IC) / RIT Officer shall establish a RIT at any incident where personnel are required to operate in an IDLH and other incidents that present a high risk.

B. The RIT shall replace the personnel from the Initial Rapid Intervention Team (IRIT) (previously established).

C. The number, size and location of RIT teams at the scene should be flexible based on the incident’s size and complexity.

D. After evaluating the scene the IC shall provide one or more RIT teams based on the risk presented. For an example, one team is on the outside of the structure mitigating egress issues while the other team is on the inside of the structure assessing and extricating the downed firefighter(s).

E. While Enroute to the scene potential RIT teams shall monitor the assigned fire ground channel(s) or Operations channel(s) to begin gathering information on the incident.

F. Upon arrival companies designated or assigned to the RIT function will bypass staging and report directly to the Incident Commander.

G. The RIT shall report to the Incident Commander in full PPE (masked up) and with basic tools and equipment based on an initial size up of the building.

H. Equipment shall be staged on a tarp in an area most readily accessible to potential rescues or in a specific location designated by the RIT Officer.

I. The RIT officer will meet face-to-face with the IC to receive a briefing on the incident.

J. The briefing should include the following information:

1. What is the Incident Action Plan (offensive, marginal or defensive) 2. Significant events that have occurred 3. How long crews have been operating in SCBA 4. Location(s) of crews 5. Other resources responding

VI. Primary Tasks

The RIT shall be responsible for the following primary tasks:

A. Scene-size up. (Refer to UNIT POSITION)

B. Assemble minimum equipment at primary entry point.

C. Monitor radio and maintain contact with IC for quick response.

D. Determine where firefighters are working in structure and any special tasks assigned.

E. If situation dictates, open or cause to be opened any exit that is locked, blocked or nonexistent. 379

F. The RIT may complete additional activities providing it supports their primary task(s).

G. These tasks shall not include situations requiring direct entry into the IDLH environment or impacting the RIT officer’s ability to focus on the status of interior operations.

H. Task assignment while on the scene shall take into account that the RIT should not be fatigued at any time.

VII. Personnel Requirements

The RIT crew shall meet the following minimum requirements:

A. The team shall consist of four personnel and shall separate into teams of two (A and B teams) but only as needed or deemed necessary by the IC/RIT Officer.

B. As a minimum, team members shall be trained and certified Fire Fighter II, NCBES, Technical Rescuer, and Haz-Mat Technician.

C. Fitness Standard will meet and should exceed levels discussed in NFPA standard 1500 chapter 10 as well as the General Administrative Guideline 06.10.02 and 06.10.04.

VIII. Training Requirements

A. Expectations:

a. Members of the RIT crew shall complete the requirements and tasks given by the North Carolina Breathing Equipment School (NCBES) after the year of 2003.

B. Evaluation as a Unit:

a. Scenario Based Evolutions will be directed by the creativity of the Training Chief while remaining within the safety parameters of the NFPA 1407 standard. Personnel will be evaluated as a unit. Physical limitations may be expressed and touched on--only for the confidence and team building skills needed for RIT situations. Knowing your limitations physically and mentally could save your life or the lives of firefighters needing to be rescued.

b. Case Studies will outline and present a benchmark to control the creativity aspects of training. These real life situations will be discussed, presented, and reproduced to a point of learning in different ways to handle the same situations that are mentioned in the study.

IX. RIT UNIT POSITION

The RIT shall assume the following positions:

A. The officer of the RIT shall, upon arrival, report to the Incident Commander and after an initial RIT size-up (360 degree), remain at the Command Post unless otherwise directed by the IC.

B. The RIT is expected to perform an initial and on-going size up. RIT size up should be based on firefighter survival; on what may cause firefighters to be trapped, lost or become missing inside the structure, and how RIT can facilitate their escape or rescue. 380

C. Structure size up should include:

a. Complete a 360 degree walk around when possible. b. Identifying hazards that will block or slow firefighter evacuation. c. Building construction, size, and occupancy. d. Placement of windows and doors. e. Placement of high security devices such as burglar bars. f. Fire ground tactics being used.

D. The entire RIT shall remain at a position from which they can be readily deployed.

E. At a high-rise or other large-scale operation, the Operations Post shall be the preferred location for the RIT.

F. At large-scale or unusual operations, additional RIT(s) shall be permitted to be positioned at additional locations as determined by the IC.

X. Function/ RIT Duties

The following duties shall be done after arrival by the RIT:

A. The RIT Officer shall, on arrival, make the Incident Commander aware of the Companies presence and designation as the RIT.

B. The RIT officer and one team member shall make an immediate and rapid RIT size-up of the fire building and surrounding properties to determine possible rescue positions and needs. (Refer to UNIT POSITION-Structure Size-up)

C. The RIT shall stand by, intact as a unit, ready to act immediately as directed by the IC.

D. While standing by, the RIT shall determine the availability and location of aerials and/or portable ladders to determine possible positions for egress.

E. The RIT shall insure at least one ground ladder to the second floor on the front of the structure and other areas deemed necessary by the RIT officer or IC.

F. RIT officer and/or IC shall determine the location of EMS personnel at the scene in a strategic position in order to quickly render care to injured firefighter(s) after removal from the hazard zone.

G. The RIT shall maintain a constant state of readiness at all times including all team members to be masked up.

H. Radio traffic on designated fire ground channels as well as operations channels shall be monitored for any indication of members in distress.

XI. Tools and Equipment

A. The RIT shall be equipped with at least one portable for every member of the team.

B. The RIT should determine the location of portable lights, tools (hydraulic, pneumatic, rabbit tool, etc.) and other equipment that might be needed to perform their duties. 381

C. The tools selected shall reflect the type of construction and rescue operation requirements likely to be encountered by the Rapid Intervention Team.

D. The standby equipment shall include a RIT pack.

E. In addition to normal forcible entry/ overhaul tools, the RIT shall report to the IC with a RIT Search Rope, Personal Rope Bags, and Rope Rescue Kit.

a. RIT Search Rope Bag: Holds 300’ of ½” rescue rope and 1 extra large carabineer with ID tag

b. Personal Rope Bags: Hold 25’ of 8 mm rescue rope with 1 large carabineer attached to the rope and 1 large carabineer securing the bag to all Air Packs.

c. Rope Rescue Kit: 150’ of 10mm rescue rope, 2 pulleys, 2 carabineers, and 2 large hooks

F. RIT Crews should receive training and evaluation on the following RIT equipment.

a. Ropes: including search, rescue, life safety ropes, and webbing (2” and 1” widths) b. Forcible entry tools (striking and prying) c. Rescue air supply (buddy breathing and UAC) d. Thermal Imagining Camera e. Personal Protective Equipment f. Ground Ladders (10’ attic ladder and 24’ extension ladder) g. Hand lights h. Radios

G. RIT Crews should receive training and evaluation on the following subjects. a. Building Construction b. RIT Strategies and Tactics c. Forcible Entry d. Breaching and Breaking e. Large area Search f. Mechanical Advantages g. Firefighter Survival

H. RIT Equipment Cache

a. Personal escape (bail out) rope j. Halogen bar and bag k. 6-ft Fire Hook b. Search rope (300’ ½” rope and l. TNT tool bag) m. 24’ extension ladder c. RIT Pack (mask, regulator, 60 min. cylinder, and multiple connections) d. Rabbit tool e. Thermal Imagining Camera f. Power saws (Chain and Circular) g. Stokes Basket h. 10-ft attic ladder i. Sledge hammer 382

XII. Restrictions

A. The RIT shall not be used to provide relief for operating units until the fire/incident has been declared “under control” by the IC.

B. The RIT shall not be used for firefighting. When the IC directs the RIT to work, whether to a distress call or other duties, an additional RIT shall be formed or called.

C. If assigned by a superior officer to an assignment other than RIT duties, the RIT officer shall remind such superior officer of RIT designation.

XIII. RIT Support Operations

a. Primary Attack Crew shall coordinate their efforts and abilities to confine the fire away from the downed firefighter.

b. Secondary Attack Crew shall keep fire conditions away from the working Rapid Intervention Team.

c. Secondary Attack Crew shall redirect back-up efforts to the Primary Attack Crew as necessary under the direction of the officer.

d. All Attack crews should maintain openings and egress points to safe zones.

XIV. IRIT Operations

a. Initial Rapid Intervention Team(IRIT) is a temporary team of at least two firefighters

b. This team shall be fully equipped and trained in order to support the functions of RIT.

c. The members of the team shall standby outside the structure to provide assistance or rapid deployment of rescue to the initial companies, if needed.

d. IRIT is only intended to be a temporary assignment.

e. IRIT is a stand-by team and is not intended for long term assignment where a Rapid Intervention Team should be assigned.

f. IRIT crews will be subject to standard training drills which address the NFPA standard 1407 and responsibilities.

383

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 26.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 4, 2009

Rescinds:

Subject: Operational Pre-Planning Program

I. PURPOSE The purpose of this guideline is to outline the procedure to be followed by Operations Division personnel for Preplanning within the City of Gastonia. Preplanning enables members of the Operations Division to identify beforehand potential life-safety hazards and economic loss potential, and further enhance the knowledge base of firefighters on buildings and related facilities with the City. II. DISCUSSION

A. The Gastonia Fire Department will identify all structures in the City of Gastonia that conform to the risk category criteria below. Those structures that meet the Very High and High risk criteria, will be pre-planned. Below is the criteria for each category: 1. Very high  Multi-family dwellings greater than 25,000 sq. ft.  Government or infrastructure risks  Hospitals  Nursing homes  Industrial complexes with fire flow 3500 gpm or greater  Refineries  Warehouses  Large vacant or abandoned structures  Building where available water is less than projected. 2. High  Concentrations of older multifamily dwellings  Multi-family dwellings that are more than two stories tall requiring major hose stretch.  Building with high concentrations of fuel or hazardous materials, but a low residence load.  Mercantile  Built up areas with high concentrations of property with substantial risk of life loss, severe financial impact upon the community or the potential for unusual damage to property or the environment.  Large windowless structures

384

The above is by no means all-inclusive, but a guide to make a determination of what needs to be pre-planned. Other criteria can be used such as past problems at specific occupancies, previous fires, etc. The company officers experience and judgment will ultimately come into play when determining potential pre-plan sites.

B. A fire hazard is defined as a condition that exists or encourages a fire to start or increase the severity of a fire.

C. Common fire hazards also exists with a pre-planned structure that will contribute to the spread of fire or severity, the following are examples:

 Poor housekeeping.  Improper storage.  Defective or improper heating, lighting or power equipment.  Hazardous material storage.  Type of construction/associated hazards.

D. One goal of this program is to provide a fully automated system using on-board laptops in each unit. This system enables every unit to access pertinent building information before the actual incident occurs increasing firefighter safety.

III. PROCEDURE

A. Companies will pre-plan occupancies within their first alarm district. Companies will refrain from pre-planning out of their areas. Companies should have an intimate knowledge of buildings and hazards within their respective areas. This can only be achieved by pre-planning by the district company.

B. Company officers are responsible for the occupancies requiring pre-planning within their first alarm areas. Officers should stay abreast of any new construction in the district. Officers will divide the work load at their respective station among the other officers and companies assigned there if applicable. Shifts should routinely exchange pre-plans and information to ensure continuity among the shifts.

C. New businesses should have a pre-plan on file complete with information and drawing within 6 months of said business obtaining a certificate of occupancy (CO).

D. Existing pre-plans should be reviewed at least twice a year per ISO requirements. Any changes to drawings can be made to the respective drawing in the file named Drawings 2 (Old). Any change in premise information should be updated in the pre-plan program currently in use.

E. Plans updated and any new plans should be discussed with the other 2 shifts at that station to insure continuity of information.

IV. MEDIA

A. Premise information shall be entered using the station pc using the current pre-plan program “Fire PrePlan” in use by the dept. The icon should be on each desktop on the stations pc. Data entered

385

should read exactly as spelled out in the user guide for this program. The guide should be on file at the station as well as each captain having a copy.

B. Drawings shall be completed using the stations pc for each pre-plan on file. The drawing program “Fire Zone 8.2” on the station pc shall be used. The icon should be on each desktop on the stations pc.

C. Drawings shall be saved in the disc drive titled “Fireshare” under the file named “Drawings 2 (Old)” as a czd file. This requires no special skills other than just saving it in this file. Officers may want to also save a copy in their “H” drive as well.

D. Officers completing any new drawings or updating existing drawings should save them in Fireshare in the Drawings 2 (Old) file as a czd and notify the pre-plan coordinator with the drawing number by e-mail. The pre-plan coordinator will convert the czd drawing to a pdf drawing and save it in the Fireshare file named “Drawings 1”.

F. Pre-plans and drawings can be accessed in the field by use of the apparatus laptop computer. Click the icon labeled “Fire PrePlan” on the laptop desktop. Pre-plans can be searched by using the search engine contained in the program. To access drawings attached to a pre-plan, click on the “Image” icon located at the top of the page on the tool bar.

G. “Fire PrePlan” on the apparatus laptop computer should be updated daily to ensure each pre-plan and drawing is up-to-date. This is accomplished by merely opening “Fire PrePlan” in the presence of a hotspot in the fire station and allowing the program to download the latest version of the data and drawing. Once the download is complete, close the program.

386

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 26.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Post Incident Analysis

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to establish a procedure for conducting Post Incident Analysis following completion of significant emergency incidents. A post incident analysis (PIA) is defined as a process that defines the effectiveness of on-scene emergency operations. The PIA is designed to reinforce positive performance and focus on lessons learned.

II. DISCUSSION

A. For the purpose of this guideline, a ‘significant incident’ is defined as any emergency incident which meets any of the criteria as described below:

1. Two (2) or more attack lines are placed in service on a structure fire. 2. Multiple casualty medical incidents (MCI’s). 3. Rescue incidents involving the extrication of two (2) or more victims, or involving unusual circumstances. 4. Confined space rescue incidents. 5. Hazardous materials incidents involving response and utilization of the Haz Mat Response Team. 6. For any other unusual circumstances, or at any time that the on-duty Battalion Chief, Deputy Chief of Operations, or the Fire Chief deems necessary. 7. Fire incident involving civilian death, or any incident involving serious injury to Fire Department personnel.

III. POLICY

A. When a significant incident of the type(s) described above occurs, it shall be the responsibility of the on-scene Incident Commander to conduct a PIA as soon as possible after completion of incident. At the latest, said PIA should be conducted no later than the next day when the effected shift is scheduled to work.

B. In general, PIA’s should follow a format of allowing input from all members and other on-scene agencies and/or resources. One suggested method is to have companies provide input into the PIA process based upon their order of arrival.

C. The Incident Commander or his/her designee should take comprehensive notes during the PIA, insuring that both positive items and lessons learned from the incident are noted.

387

D. The above noted information, along with a diagram of the scene and apparatus placement, should be incorporated into the department’s Post Incident Analysis Form as noted in Operational Guideline ; additional sheets and a copy of the incident report may be added to this form as necessary.

E. Upon completion of the PIA and preparation of the PIA Form, copies of the form should be routed to: all affected stations and companies; the Fire Chief; Deputy Chief and the Chief of Training.

388

Back to Table Of Contents

POST INCIDENT ANALYSIS FORM

Documented By______

Incident address______Type Structure______

First In ______Date______

What went very well? What did we learn from this incident?

______

______

______

Comments______

______

389

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 26.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Leave Use During Inclement Weather

I. PURPOSE

A. In order to minimize confusion, the following is the City's policy concerning inclement weather.

1. When an employee is not able to report to work due to inclement weather (except those employees who are required to work due to employment condition) they may elect to use accrued vacation or leave without pay (LWOP). Sick leave may only be used in accordance with the City's Personnel Ordinance, i.e. sickness, family death or medical appointments.

2. This policy has been adjusted to ensure equal treatment for all employees. Please see that your respective departments adhere to these provisions.

a. Example: If City Hall closes at 12:00 noon, anyone leaving at that time will be charged with one-half (1/2) day of vacation or LWOP.

390

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Department Driving Regulations

I. PURPOSE

A. The purpose of this guideline is to reduce the possibility of injuries and financial loss to the City of Gastonia and the Gastonia Fire Department by establishing procedures to reduce vehicle accidents. This guideline establishes minimum qualifications for driver/relief driver, general driving rules, response modes, and accident procedures.

II. QUALIFICATIONS FOR DRIVERS / RELIEF DRIVERS

A. Driving qualifications are defined in the policy and procedures handbook under “Drivers’ License Requirements”, and Driver/Relief Driver Class.

III. GENERAL DRIVING REGULATIONS

A. Vehicle operators will operate apparatus in such a manner so as to not bring discredit upon themselves or the Gastonia Fire Department.

B. Drivers will not attempt to drive any vehicle while under the influence of any alcoholic beverage, or after taking any medication that would impair their senses or interfere with their ability to operate vehicles.

C. City vehicles are intended to be used for City business. No civilians or other unauthorized persons are permitted to ride in City vehicles without the approval of the Fire Chief or his designee.

D. The driver shall avoid moving any vehicle without first checking around the entire vehicle and/or using the services of a crewmember to do same.

E. When backing any vehicle, the driver shall use extreme caution and shall utilize the assistance of a crewmember in the rear of the vehicle to give directions.

F. All drivers will place wheel chocks in the proper positions immediately after stopping and dismounting from the cabs of all vehicles, except when parked in quarters.

G. Drivers and officers will not drive, or knowingly permit to be driven, any vehicle which is in a mechanically unsafe condition (brakes, warning devices, & etc)

391

H. Drivers and all crewmembers will wear seat belts at all times when vehicles are in motion.

I. During an emergency response, all members (except the driver) shall don protective clothing required for the type of incident they are responding to prior to mounting the vehicle. Once all members are seated and buckled in, the driver will make a verbal acknowledgement that everyone is ready. After this process has been completed, the company may then proceed to the alarm. Standing or trying to dress while the vehicle is in motion is unsafe and will not be tolerated. Seat belts will not be released until the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

J. Engine and brake retarders will be turned off and speed reduced during wet and/or slippery road conditions.

K. Headlights will be used at all times, day and night, when vehicle is in use.

L. When driving vehicles with automatic transmissions, gear up-shift and downshift automatically according to engine speed. Drivers will not manually downshift such vehicles except in an emergency, such as brake failure.

M. When driving vehicles with manual transmissions, drivers should refrain from resting or “riding the clutch” with their feet. Whenever a vehicle must be started from a stopped position or ascend any grade, first gear will be used. The driver shall hold the vehicle with the brakes when stopped on any grade. Do not allow vehicles to ‘coast’ (free-wheel) without the transmission engaged.

IV. RESPONSE MODES

A. Non-emergency

1. Non-emergency response: The vehicle driver shall observe all state and local traffic laws. Amber (4-way) flashers will be used when the vehicle is temporarily stopped. Drivers are considered to be standard vehicle drivers when in this response mode.

B. Emergency

1. Emergency response: A ‘true emergency’ must exist for the company to respond in the emergency mode. All visual and audible warning devices (lights, sirens, and horns) will be used during emergency response. Drivers are considered to be emergency vehicle drivers when in this response mode.

C. Response

1. A chief officer or company officer has the authority to upgrade or down grade the mode of response, based on his/her judgment of information received from dispatch or from a public caller.

2. A’ true emergency’ is defined as: a situation in which there is a high probability of death or serious injury to an individual, or significant property loss, and actions taken by a responding emergency vehicle may reduce the severity of the situation.

3. The following provision under this procedure shall not relieve any driver of an emergency vehicle from exercising extreme due regard for the safety of all persons; public or Fire Department members. ‘Due regard’ is defined as: a reasonably careful person, performing similar duties and under similar circumstances, would act in the same manner. These provisions

392

will not protect the driver from the consequences of driving with reckless disregard for the safety of others.

4. Emergency vehicle drivers may exceed the posted speed limit under the following conditions.

a. When exercising extreme due caution and the safety of all persons and property are not endangered.

b. When weather and time of day permit the driver sufficient visibility to clearly identify and avoid potential traffic problems within his/her anticipated path of travel.

c. In all circumstances, extreme caution must be observed when exceeding the posted speed limit.

5. During inclement weather, the emergency vehicle driver should reduce the speed of the vehicle as necessary.

6. Emergency vehicle drivers will stop for any school bus displaying flashing lights, and may proceed at a low rate of speed only after the driver of the school bus signals that it is safe to do so.

7. Emergency vehicle drivers will reduce the speed of the vehicle sufficiently at all intersections to negotiate a full stop when the intersection cannot be safely entered. The vehicle shall be under complete control and driven at such a speed that it can be safely stopped should another vehicle enter the intersection. Emergency vehicle drivers will yield the right of way to any vehicle already in any part of the intersection. Emergency vehicle drivers must realize that the other driver must grant the “right of way”.

8. Emergency vehicle drivers will be aware of the routes of other responding companies and watch for responding apparatus.

9. When following another responding vehicle, emergency vehicle drivers will allow sufficient distance to stop should the leading vehicle stop abruptly. Drivers of following vehicles must be aware that motorists may pull into their path after yielding to the leading vehicle.

10. Emergency vehicle drivers will not overtake or pass other responding emergency vehicles.

11. Emergency vehicle drivers will reduce their speed when approaching a curve, hill, narrow or winding roadway or when a special hazard exists especially when visibility is reduced or limited for any reason.

12. Emergency vehicle drivers may travel on the left side of the median strip or centerline due to traffic congestion. If this is necessary, travel must be made with extreme caution and at a low rate of speed.

13. Emergency vehicle drivers may proceed against traffic on one way streets and lanes only when the emergency is in that section of street or lane, not as a means of shortcut. This travel must be made at a low rate of speed, exercising extreme caution.

14. When overtaking or passing motorists, emergency vehicle drivers will pass on the left side only, except when motorists have stopped at an intersection to make a left turn, or when motorists have pulled to the extreme left and are aware of the emergency vehicle’s presence. Emergency vehicle drivers may then pass on the right at a low rate of speed. 393

15. Emergency vehicle drivers will not proceed across any railroad grade or crossing if the warning devices are operating or the gates are lowered unless the company officer dismounts the vehicle, makes sure that a train is not approaching, crosses the tracks, and signals that it is safe for the vehicle to cross. The officer will not re-enter the vehicle until same has cleared the tracks.

16. When approaching the scene of any emergency, the emergency vehicle driver will slow down well in advance so as not to endanger other personnel and equipment already on the scene.

17. Companies responding from other than their normal station locations or areas will notify dispatch and the Battalion Chief that they are responding out-of-position, and will give their current location(s).

18. If an emergency vehicle is stopped at an intersection at the time an alarm is received, the driver should wait until the intersection is clear before activating warning devices. Suddenly activating warning devices may surprise stopped motorists, causing them to react by moving into the intersection and possibly causing an accident.

V. ACCIDENTS

A. For both Emergency and Non-emergency Accidents: When a Fire Department vehicle is involved in an accident, check with all persons involved for injuries and notify dispatch and the Battalion Chief of any assistance needed. Do not move any vehicle involved in an accident until after the investigation is completed unless directed to do so by the Battalion Chief or a Police Officer.

B. Refer to Operational Guideline for proper forms to prepare for accident reporting and procedures to be followed.

394

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: January 28, 2013

Rescinds: September 28, 2010

Subject: Ride Along Program

RULES CONCERNING PARTICIPANTS IN THE RIDE-ALONG PROGRAM

1. Only those individuals approved by the Fire Chief or his designee may participate in this Program. a. The on duty Battalion Chief’s may approve or deny any request to participate in the Ride Along Program on weekends, Holidays, or after 1700 hrs.

2. Participants must be 18 years of age and sign a RELEASE & WAIVER OF LIABILITY FORM.

3. A participate cannot act as a Firefighter or Agent of the Fire Department.

4. All Departmental Rules & Regulations pertaining to firefighters in fire vehicles will apply to participant.

5. A participant is not allowed to possess ANY weapon while participating.

6. A Fire Officer may terminate the right of an individual to participate at any time for any reason deemed appropriate by the supervisor.

7. A participant is limited to ride-along only one time in a six-month period. This may be waived by the Fire Chief for any reason deemed appropriate.

8. A participant must dress appropriately. No shorts, sandals, other fire department shirts, etc. are allowed.

9. The on-duty Battalion Chief will assign the participant to the appropriate or necessary fire vehicle.

10. Participants may be rejected from the Program for any reason deemed appropriate to include but not limited to criminal history, reputation, motives, etc.

11. On the back of this form, please give a brief description on why you are interested in doing a ride- along.

I certify that I have read, understand, and received a copy of these rules.

______Participant Date

395

Date / Time Participate wants to ride: ______

Note: The Administrative Secretary will notify the appropriate Battalion Chief.

NORTH CAROLINA RELEASE

GASTON COUNTY

In consideration of the City of Gastonia allowing the undersigned to accompany a City Fire Officer on call in a City Fire vehicle, the undersigned hereby assumes all risk of personal injury, death or property damage or loss from whatever causes arising from or in any way connected with accompanying an on-duty Fire Officer of the City.

The undersigned further releases the City, its officers, employees, agents or servants from any liability therefore and will indemnify and save harmless the City and its officers, employees, agents or servants from any such liability.

Except as herein before provided, the undersigned hereby reserves and does not in any manner waive any rights or causes of action against anyone else except the City of Gastonia, its officers, employees and servants.

In witness whereof the undersigned has hereto set his hand and seal this the day of ,20 .

______SIGNATURE OF PARTICIPANT

The above-named person is permitted to ride with an Officer, as assigned on , 20 , and ending at 20

______Chief Officer Date

396

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.10.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Drivers License Requirements

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a procedure to insure that all employees have appropriate drivers license as required.

1. Drivers licenses shall be checked once a month by the immediate supervisor at each fire station and he/she shall report in writing to the Battalion Chief and/or Division Head that the check has been made. The Battalion Chief and/or Division Head shall check drivers licenses once every three months and shall report in writing to the Deputy Chief of Operations/Fire Chief. Employees shall report any revoked or suspension of drivers licenses immediately to supervisors. Immediately means before the next scheduled working hours and if possible, at least 24 hours prior. All traffic violations charged against an employee shall be reported to his/her shift or division supervisor (reference GAG-04.40.02).

2. Failure to have a driver’s license shall result in disciplinary action as follows. a. Licenses left at home, lost and/or expired (1) Employee shall be relieved of duty (without pay for the time needed to obtain his driver’s license) and shall be given an oral reprimand for the first offense in a one (1) year period. (2) Second offense in a one (1) year period shall be a written reprimand. (3) Third offense in a one (1) year period shall be two (2) 10.75 hour duty days suspension. Two (2) 8 hour duty day suspension for 8-5 personnel.

b. Licenses suspended/revoked (1) A person with a suspended/revoked driver’s license shall report to the Battalion Chief and/or Division Head that their drivers license has been suspended. The employee shall be suspended without pay for one pay period. This will be a total of 102 hours for shift personnel and 80 hours for 8-5 personnel (10 days). At the end of the suspension the employee may return to work providing they produce a valid driver’s license allowing the employee to perform their job duties. If the employee does not have a valid driver’s license at this time, they will be put on personal leave, without pay, for a period of up to one hundred ten (110) days, during which time they may seek a hearing with the North Carolina Department of Motor Vehicles to attempt to obtain reinstatement of their driving privileges or a restricted license allowing the employee to perform their duties. If the one hundred ten (110) day personal leave without pay period expires and the employee has not obtained license privileges allowing the employee to perform their duties, a recommendation will be made for dismissal from employment with the City of Gastonia. [Time of suspension (10 days) / end of suspension to recommendation of dismissal (110 days) = equals 120 days or 4 months total time] A person with a restricted license will not be allowed to drive on emergency calls. They will be assigned to non-emergency driving duties. 397

Note: In addition to the above requirements for driver’s licenses, all employees must remain qualified to drive a City vehicle by meeting all qualifying factors, as outlined, in the City’s Safety Policy. New employees - A new employee may not drive fire apparatus (engine) while on probation. After probation, the member may drive a fire engine if the employee has a minimum of a class B permit, and another approved licensed employee is in the cab with the driver. An exception is that a new employee may not drive emergency traffic. This is up to the discretion of the Battalion Chief.

398

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.10.05 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: February 4, 2013

Rescinds:

Subject: Relief Driver Training Class

I. Purpose

The purpose of the relief driver class is to assure that each and every candidate who earns this designation has the ability to perform as a relief driver/engineer. The training division has decided that potential relief drivers should conform to a “pass/fail” standard set forth by the fire department.

II. Class Prerequisites

One year in grade as a firefighter North Carolina Class B Driver’s License

III. Class Content

The class topics will include Emergency Vehicle Driver, Fire Service Hydraulics, Water Supplies, and Basic Pump Operations. The completion of the relief driver’s class will include written and practical exams as well as participation and successful completion of the Emergency Vehicle Driver portion of this class, with a passing score of 70% for each. A candidate must pass both parts of the written exam to proceed to the practical exam. If a candidate fails either part of the written exam or the final exam, they are not required to attend the classroom portion of next year’s class. They are only required to retake the exam they failed next year. This class will be offered in April of each year, with April 1st being the cutoff date for one year of service as a firefighter. When a candidate completes the relief driver’s class and passes all written and practical exams, a note of completion of the class will be put in their personnel file at Station One. Students may receive credit for certain North Carolina Driver Operator Classes if applicable.

399

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.20.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Pump Operations

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a standard procedure for the operation of fire pumps.

II. DISCUSSION

A. The proper procedure in operation of the fire pump will increase the effective life of the pump and power plant. (Note: Wheel chocks will be used everywhere except on apparatus floor.)

III. PROCEDURE

A. After any pump operation, remove excess pressure inside pump by opening supply line intake or a discharge outlet. This procedure will save packing’s in pump and eliminate leakage in the stations on the apparatus floor.

B. While the pump is being used on fire scene, the engineer shall not leave the pump for any appreciable length of time unless in case of an emergency.

C. When the pump is being used on the fire scene, the engineer shall set the pressure relief valve or governor, whenever two or more fire streams are in operation simultaneously.

D. When using pump to build discharge pressure, the engine speed (RPM) should be built only enough to establish and maintain the desired pressure to successfully perform the immediate task.

E. When the pump is being used on the fire scene and the fire has been brought under control and no water is being used, the engineer should take pump out of gear to prevent the impellers from heating the water by friction and thereby injuring the pump and packing’s.

F. When the apparatus, at the fire scene, is not actively involved in pumping operation the engineer should periodically inspect his vehicle to maintain a safe condition.

G. After each pumping operation, the engineer should operate all manual controls to insure proper operation, such as: Transfer and relief valve, both the electric drive and manual override should be checked.

400

H. When pumping for long periods of time, the engineer should utilize the auxiliary cooling system to aid in maintaining engine temperature.

I. Back flush pumps after they have been used to draft from a natural water source.

1. Once the pump operation is complete, close down the pump at the pump panel. 2. Put road transmission into reverse and let engine idle. 3. Clamp off the supply line and remove it from the suction. 4. Use a double female and connect to one of the discharge outlets. 5. Remove the suction cap on the opposite side of the pump. 6. Remove the hose clamp. 7. "Slowly" open the discharge gate and let water run through the pump for several minutes.

401

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.20.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Equipment Accountability at Shift Change

I. PURPOSE

A. Equipment Accountability

1. When apparatus operating personnel (engineer-relief driver) are exchanging shift duty time it will be the responsibility of the person who is driving the vehicle at the time of shift rotation (when the on-coming shift begins) to be accountable for any vehicle damage and/or lost equipment.

a. Example: Engineer from "B" Shift is working for someone on "C" Shift from 0800 hours to 2000 hours. During that time a minor vehicle accident occurs or a piece of equipment is lost with neither being reported to the person in charge. The regular driver on "C" Shift comes in for the remainder of their regular shift (2000 - 0800) without checking the vehicle or equipment. They just assumes everything is in proper order. At shift change, when "A" Shift relieves "C" Shift, vehicle damage is found or lost equipment is revealed when the vehicle is checked. Then the driver who was just relieved will be held accountable because they failed to properly check the vehicle when came on duty after having someone to work for them.

402

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.20.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Fire Department Standard Steamer Connections

I. PURPOSE

A. STANDARD STEAMER CONNECTION FOR A GASTONIA FIRE HYDRANT

1. Gastonia threads are 4.875 x 6 TPI, pitch is 4.777, root is 4.653, gauge is 2C, National Form.

2. Four inch (4") I.D.

403

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.30.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Inspection & Maintenance of SCBA

I. PURPOSE

A. Weekly inspections will be on Monday. Air packs should be checked after each donning, however, cleaning and sanitizing will not be necessary, IF THE FACE MASK HAS NOT BEEN WORN.

B. Air packs that have been worn into a smoke-filled or other hazardous environment, should always be checked, cleaned, and sanitized.

C. Air should only be taken from a source that meets the requirements of the Compressed Gas Association G7.1.

D. Any repairs shall be performed by qualified and certified personnel. Qualified personnel shall be trained and certified by the manufacturer.

404

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 27.30.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Care & Maintenance of FD Engines & Equipment

I. PURPOSE

A. CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT

1. FIRE DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL SHOULD MAKE NO ALTERATIONS TO FIRE DEPARTMENT EQUIPMENT. 2. The equipment should be maintained as close as possible to its manufactured and issued condition.

B. STOPPING DAILY ENGINE WARM-UP

1. Starting of engines simply to warm-up the engine each day is not recommended by engine manufacturers. As a cold engine becomes warm, condensation is formed in the crankcase. It is not beneficial to allow the engine to run for any period of time. Running an engine for ten to fifteen minutes in front of the station under a no-load condition does not evaporate the condensation.

2. In the future start the engines to check the lights, radio, pumps and etc. then cut them off.

3. Due to engine issues involving the turbo, all apparatus should idle for 3 to 4 minutes after returning to the station before being shut down. This will give the turbo time to cool down and help prevent unnecessary damage.

C. CARE AND MAINTENANCE OF AN ENGINE

1. Any damage to an engine or vehicle should be reported in writing as-soon-as possible, this is already a Fire Department Policy. If new damage is found while checking the engine, you should see if a report has been made. If not, one should be made stating the time and date the damage was found and by whom. 2. When an engine sustains smoky residue from a fire, it should be cleaned as-soon-as-possible. In most cases it will take polish and wax to remove the residue.

D. WASHING APPARATUS

1. We have had excessive brake maintenance recently. Throwing cold water on hot brake drums caused part of this problem. 405

2. Starting this date all apparatus shall be PARKED FOR ONE (1) HOUR BEFORE WASHING. This will allow the brake drum to cool off. 3. Also, DO NOT wash inside of any Fire Department vehicles with a hosepipe. Water is causing problems with the two-way radios, walkie-talkies, chargers and electronic controls.

E-ONE QUINTS Weekly Aerial Maintenance 1. Wash Ladder 2. Clean & Lube waterway (auto. transmission fluid).

MONTHLY AERIAL MAINTENANCE 1. Clean & lube slide track extrusions & slide pads (white lithium). 2. Lube electrical trolley tracks on base section (white lithium). 3. Lube extension/retraction cylinder slide tracks (white lithium). 4. Lube jack pivot pins (regular grease). 5. Clean & lube the bottom of outriggers (white lithium). 6. Lube ladder pivot points (regular grease). 7. Lube waterway swivel joints (white lithium). 8. Lube all compartment doors (WD 40). 9. Lube all ladder pulley pins (white lithium).

YEARLY AERIAL MAINTENANCE 1. Drain and flush hydraulic reservoir (City Garage). 2. Replace pressure and return filters (City Garage). 3. Clean magnetic suction strainer (City Garage). 4. Drain & refill gearbox oil with 90WT gear oil (City Garage). 5. Grease rotation gear & turntable gear (City Garage). 6. Check torque on mounting turntable and assembly bolts (City Garage).

WEEKLY AERIAL MAINTENANCE 1. Wash ladder with pressure washer using mild soap to remove all dirt. 2. Clean & lube slide track extrusions and slide pads (white lithium). 3. Clean & lube waterway (white lithium grease). 4. Lube electrical trolley tracks on base section (white lithium grease). 5. Lube extension/retraction cylinder slide tracks (white lithium grease).

MONTHLY AERIAL MAINTENANCE 1. Lube jack pivot pins (regular grease). 2. Clean & lube the bottom of outriggers (white lithium grease). 3. Lube ladder pivot pins (regular grease). 4. Lube waterway swivel joints (white lithium grease). 5. Inspect and lube all ladder pulley pins (white lithium grease). 6. Lube all compartment door hinges (WD-40 or equal). 7. Clean ladder turntable with soap & water.

YEARLY AERIAL MAINTENANCE 1. Drain & flush hydraulic reservoir (City Garage). 2. Replace pressure & return filters (City Garage). 3. Clean magnetic suction strainer (City Garage). 4. Drain & refill gearbox oil with 90WT gear oil (City Garage). 5. Grease rotation gear and turntable gear (City Garage). 6. Check torque on mounting turntable & assembly bolts (City Garage).

406

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 28.10.01 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Standardized Company Practical Evolutions

I. PURPOSE

A. To develop a team-based practical skills program that addresses Engine, Quint, and Rescue Company evolutions. These exercises are designed to improve overall Company during emergency operations.

II. PROCEDURE

A. A rating of "pass or fail" will be determined for each Company for all assigned evolutions. The rating will be based on meeting established standards and time requirements for each evolution performed. Each evolution will have an evaluation form to determine if all evolution objectives have been met. Evolutions will be regularly evaluated and updated as necessary to maintain the individual and Company/team skill levels necessary for effective emergency operations.

B. All City and Fire Department safety precautions will be followed at all times when performing Company evolutions. Specific operational issues will be documented and addressed during each evolution as necessary.

C. Engine and Quint companies are required to perform all evolutions listed for Engine/Quint Evolutions. The Rescue Company will be required to perform all evolutions listed for Rescue and Quint evolutions, which will be identified with an ‘R’ beside the respective evolution.

D. All Companies will participate in Company practical evolutions quarterly, and will perform the evolutions assigned at that time by the Training Chief or a designee of the Training Division. Multiple company evolutions will be incorporated into the quarterly sessions, during which several Companies will be required to work together. Thus, Companies may be required to participate in several evolutions during each quarter.

III. ENGINE/QUINT EVOLUTIONS

A. Evolution 1: (First Company) Place a single attack line in service from the water supply on the unit and advance attack line to extinguish a fire. (Second Company) Place a (back-up) line in service and establish a water supply for the first company per department operating guideline. 1. Staffing: 2 companies Maximum Time: 4:00 6 firefighters Maximum Time: 3:15 7 firefighters 407

Maximum Time: 3:00 8 firefighters

B. Evolution 2: Establish a water supply and place into operation a master stream with 100' or 200' 4"hose. The GPM's will be determined during the evolution. A specified location will be given for the appliance placement. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 5:00 3 firefighters Maximum Time: 4:30 4 firefighters

C. Evolution 3: (First Company) Utilize water supply on the unit and produce foam. Attack hydrocarbon fire. (Second Company) Establish water supply to first company and advance second line (water) to back-up attack team. Extinguish a hydrocarbon fire using foam and a safety line using water. Both companies will start at the same time. 1. Staffing: 2 companies Maximum Time: 7:30 6 firefighters Maximum Time: 7:00 7 firefighters Maximum Time: 6:30 8 firefighters

D. Evolution 4: Utilize water supply on unit, raise 24' extension ladder to a 2nd story window. Place attack line into second story window and advance until fire is located and extinguished. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 4:00 3 firefighters Maximum Time: 3:30 4 firefighters

E. Evolution 5: (Tandem pumping operation) (First Company) Establish water supply and supply second company with maximum flow. (Second Company) Place a master stream into operation. The desired gpm's will be determined prior to beginning the evolution. ( Note: Refer to IFSTA Pumping Apparatus, 7th Edition) 1. Staffing: 2 companies Maximum Time: 6:00 6 firefighters Maximum Time: 5:30 7 firefighters Maximum Time: 5:00 8 firefighters

F. Evolution 6: (Dual pumping operation) (First Company) Hook-up tight to a hydrant and flow _____ gpm's, the delivery method will be determined prior to the evolution. (Second Company) Hook-up to first company and flow _____ gpm's, the delivery method will be determined prior to the evolution. ( Note: Refer to IFSTA Pumping Apparatus, 7th Edition) 1. Staffing: 2 companies Maximum Time: 9:30 6 firefighters Maximum Time: 9:00 7 firefighters Maximum Time: 8:00 8 firefighters

G. Evolution 7: (Relay Operation) (First Company) will place attack lines or master stream into service. (Second Company and Third Company) will establish water supply from one source and place the other company in line to supply first company. The hose lay will be determined prior to the evolution . ( Note: Refer to IFSTA Pumping Apparatus, 7th Edition) 1. Staffing: 3 companies Maximum Time: 8:00 9-12 firefighters

H. Evolution 8: (R) - Demonstrate Firefighter Survival Techniques for below grade rescue, exiting from an upper story window utilizing rope techniques, entanglement, disoriented in structure. This evolution will be performed as a practical class and will involve an Air Consumption course. 1. Staffing: 4-5 companies 408

Time: Not applicable

I. Evolution 9: Establish water supply and supply sprinkler or standpipe system. Type of system will be determined prior to evolution. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 5:00 3 firefighters Maximum Time: 4:30 4 firefighters

J. Evolution 10: Establish water supply and place elevated stream in desired location. (Quint Company) 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 5:00 4 firefighters

K. Evolution 11: (R)- Demonstrate forcible entry techniques for walk-thru doors, overhead doors and windows. This evolution will be a lecture/demonstration type. Practicals may be included, if a structure is available to do so. 1. Staffing: Multiple companies

L. Evolution 12: (R)- Ventilate different types of roofs: Gable, Hip, lantern, Mansard, Gambrel, Saw tooth, Flat, Arched (Bowstring), Lightweight. This evolution will be a lecture/demonstration type. Practical’s may be included, if a structure is available to so. 1. Staffing: Multiple companies

M. Evolution 13: (R)- Illuminate fire ground and secure utilities. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 5:00 3 firefighters Maximum Time: 4:00 4 firefighters

N. Evolution 14: Using ground ladders "Ladder the building". Use 24' extension ladder for the second story; Use 35' extension ladder for 3rd story. Quints place Aerial ladder for anything 4th story and above. Ladder positions will include Division A, B, C, and D. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: Engine 4:00 Maximum Time: Quint 6:30

O. Evolution 15: (R)- Conduct a primary and secondary search for residential and commercial occupancies with or without multiple floors. 1. Staffing: 2 companies

P. Evolution 16: (R)- Remove a victim down a ladder, from an upper stairwell; using a stokes basket for the ladder or webbing for the stairwell. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 15:00 3 firefighters Maximum Time: 12:00 4 firefighters

Q. Evolution 17: Properly stabilize and initiate extrication for a motor vehicle accident. This evolution involves patient stabilization and vehicle stabilization. Proper use of manual tools will be required. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 25:00 3 firefighters Maximum Time: 20:00 4 firefighters

409

R. Evolution 18: Demonstrate techniques used for a Level 1 Haz-mat responder on a given haz-mat situation. The situation will be given prior to the evolution. Decontamination set-up and application will be included. The Haz-Mat Team will participate on certain occasions. 1. Staffing: 2 companies

S. Evolution 19: (R)- Demonstrate proper positive pressure ventilation techniques for a structure. 1. Staffing: 1 company

IV. Rescue Company Evolutions

A. Evolution 1: Extricate and remove victim(s) involved in a motor vehicle accident. Properly demonstrate use of hydraulic, and pneumatic as well as manual equipment. 1. Staffing: 2 companies Maximum Time: 20:00 7 firefighters Maximum Time: 20:00 8 firefighters

B. Evolution 2: Perform a vertical confined space rescue. 1. Staffing: 2 companies (Haz-Mat) Maximum Time: 30:00 7 firefighters Maximum Time: 30:00 8 firefighters

C. Evolution 3: Perform as a Rapid Intervention Team and locate downed firefighter and remove. 1. Staffing: 1 company

D. Evolution 4: Perform a high angle rescue. 1. Staffing: 1 company Maximum Time: 30:00 5 firefighters

E. Evolution 5: Demonstrate proper use of exothermic torch. 1. Staffing: 1 company

F. Evolution 6: Demonstrate proper use of saw’s and sawing procedures. 1. Staffing: 1 company

410

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 28.10.02 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 23, 2017

Rescinds: June 8, 2017

Subject: Training in Acquired Structures

I. PURPOSE

The purpose of this guideline is to outline the procedure to be followed by Department personnel when conducting training in acquired structures. The department will follow all Federal, State and local regulations applicable for this type of training.

II. PROCEDURE

A. The Training Division will be in charge of all acquired structure training and obtaining the proper permits required before the training is conducted.

B. Whether the acquired structure is utilized for live fire training or demolition (i.e. ventilation, breaching walls) an asbestos inspection and abatement will be performed prior to conducting any training.

C. When the Department conducts live fire training the North Carolina Fire and Rescue Commission Live Fire Training Checklist will be utilized to ensure compliance with NFPA 1403.

D. City of Gastonia Risk Management personnel must be notified for approval prior to the commencement of training activities in acquired structures.

411

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 29.10.03 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: June 2, 2017

Rescinds: May 1, 2003

Subject: Fire Hydrant Preventive Maintenance Program

I. PROCEDURE

A. All hydrant caps are to be greased and every hydrant flowed on a semi-annual basis. 1. April - Trim grass and clean around hydrants. 2. May - September – Trim grass around hydrants if required. 3. August - October - Trim grass, clean around hydrants, flow and document a static pressure. Flowing hydrants should only be done Monday-Friday 0800-1500 hours 4. November 15 all hydrant maintenance shall be completed unless time is extended by the Deputy Chief of Operations. 5. Any hydrants that are affected by construction or any type of significant disturbance (i.e. road construction, struck by vehicle etc.) should be inspected and flowed as soon as possible.

B. In past years, hydrant districts have been reassigned to different shifts. Beginning immediately hydrant districts that are presently assigned to each shift will be permanently assigned. The Officer in charge of that station, on their assigned shift, will be held accountable for hydrant cleaning and maintenance in their district.

II. Inspection Procedure

A. Observe the Hydrant 1. Clearance. There must be a clear space of not less than three feet around the hydrant. If clearance is not sufficient, make a note in the COMMENTS block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 2. Facing Wrong. Check that the 4 ½” port is facing the street. If the hydrant is facing wrong, check the Facing Wrong block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 3. Elevation. Check the height of the ports. The bottom of the cap on each port must be at least 18” above the ground. If the hydrant is not high enough, check the Elevation block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 4. General Appearance. Look at the paint. The paint should be in good condition and there should be no rust. If there is a problem with the general appearance of the hydrant, make a note in the Comments block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 5. Leaks. There should be no water leaking from the ports, operating nuts, bolts, joints, or the base of the hydrant. If there is a leaking problem, check the Leaking Hydrant block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 6. Oil & Grease. There should be no evidence of oil or grease leaks on the surface of the hydrant; if there are, check the Needs Lubrication block on the Hydrant Inspection report.

412

7. Ground Condition. Inspect for uneven footing around the hydrant. Also look for sink holes or soil washing away at the base of the hydrant. If you see any ground condition problems, make a note in the Comments block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 8. Damage. Look for problems such as hydrant loose in ground, missing caps, hydrant not standing vertically, or broken off. If you find any damage, make a note of it in the Comments block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 9. Caps. Remove all caps from hydrant. 10. Threads. Check the condition of the threads. If they are damaged or loose, make a note of it in the Comments block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. If the threads need lubricating, apply graphite lubricant to them. 11. Gaskets. Check the condition of the gaskets. Replace any gasket that is not flexible, is rotted, is damaged, or is otherwise not in good condition. 12. Hydrant Barrel. a. Look inside the ports of the hydrant for any trash or debris. Remove any foreign objects found. If there is some object you cannot remove, make a note of it in the Comments block of the Hydrant Inspection Report. b. Look for standing water in barrel. If water ran out when you removed the caps, or you can see water standing inside the hydrant, check the Bad Drain Problem block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. c. If this hydrant will be part of a hydrant test, check the discharge coefficient of the ports and note it on the Hydrant Test Form.

B. Flow the Hydrant 1. Hydrants should only be flowed Monday-Friday 0800-1500 hours. 2. Slowly open the hydrant valve and let water flow from all ports until it is relatively clear. Be careful to not open the hydrant too far, and cause erosion damage to ground around it. If the hydrant is extremely difficult to open check the Needs Lubrication block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 3. Slowly close hydrant. 4. Replace and tighten all caps. 5. Open hydrant fully. If you can see water leaking at ground level (or you can hear water leaking underground) once the hydrant is fully open, or if any water is leaking from the hydrant itself, check the Leaking Hydrant block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. If the hydrant required excessive turns to open, check the Loose Foot Valve block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 6. Close the hydrant. If resistance on wrench becomes slack for two or more turns while closing hydrant, continue very slowly with turns to fully close hydrant and check the Loose Foot Valve block on the Hydrant Inspection Report. 7. Remove the 4 ½” cap from hydrant, Check that the water is draining from the hydrant. If the water level in the barrel is not going down, check the Bad Drain Problem on the hydrant Inspection Report. 8. Replace the 4 ½” cap. 9. Slightly tighten all caps to help prevent vandalism.

C. All hydrants will be flow tested every five years that end in 0 and 5 (ex. 2020, 2025, 2030 etc.) using the two hydrant method. All flow test should be completed in the calendar year they are due and the static pressure documented during the flow test will satisfy the annual static pressure requirement.

413

Back to Table Of Contents

General Operating Guideline

NO. 29.10.04 Approved By: Phil Welch

Effective Date: May 1, 2003

Rescinds:

Subject: Use of Fire Hydrants for Private Purposes

I. PURPOSE

A. To establish a policy concerning the use of city hydrants for private water consumption.

II. DISCUSSION

A. No person, except a City employee, shall use or take water from any public fire hydrant without express authorization by the utilities or fire department.

B. No wrench, tool or other appliance, except a regular hydrant wrench, shall be used on any public fire hydrant in removing or loosening the plug or cap from same. If caps are difficult to remove requiring other equipment then necessary repairs and/or maintenance shall be completed as soon as possible to insure that the problem is corrected.

414